§ #! # JL T Sj THE UNIVERSITY •^F ILLINOIS LIBRARY 435 V z 8 K Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2016 https://archive.org/details/highschoolgerman00vand_0 II -i -> ' • 1 1 £ THE HIGH SCHOOL GERMAN GRAMMAR WITH APPENDICES, EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION , AND VOCABULARIES BY W. H. VAN DER SMISSEN, M. A. LECTURER ON GERMAN, UNIVERSITY COLLEGE, TORONTO AND W. H. FRASER, B. A. LECTURER ON ITALIAN AND SPANISH, UNIVERSITY COLLEGE, TORONTO LATE FRENCH AND GERMAN MASTER, UPPER CANADA COLLEGE NEW YORK :• CINCINNATI :• CHICAGO AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY A vw-v- 4S5" VZ2k PREFACE. In presenting this Grammar to the Public, the authors ven- ture to express the hope that it will be found adapted to the S wants, not only of High School teachers and pupils, but also to those of students of German in general. The Lessons and Exercises have been made, as far as possible, strictly progressive, so that the beginner may not at the outset be overburdened and impeded by too copious vocabularies, or by too difficult exercises. At the same time each separate subject, as for instance the declension of substantives, is fully treated before being dissmissed. Copious examples are given in illus- tration of each rule. In the Exercises, especial care has been taken that no gram- matical point shall occur in any sentence on which the pupil has not been previously instructed, and also that every Exercise shall contain thorough practice in applying the princi- ples, not only of the corresponding lesson, but also of past lessons. An oral exercise, consisting of questions, to which the pupil should be required to supply the answers, accompanies each lesson. These oral exercises may be extended at will by the teacher. The supplementary lessons contain chiefly special cases in grammatical usage, and are mainly for reference. These les- sons should be omitted by the elementary pupil, and should not in any case be taken up on the first reading. The grammar of the substantive, the adjective, the verb (in- cluding the passive voice), the pronouns and the principal pre- positions, is disposed of in the first twenty-two lessons, together with the fundamental principles of word order, so that, with the completion of Lesson XXII, the pupil will be fully equipped ■XuO fv PREFACE. for reading easy German texts. The Modal Auxiliaries, how- ever, could not be introduced in their proper connection until the strong verbs had been disposed of, and where they occur in reading texts must be treated as anomalous forms until Lesson XXXIII is reached. Special care has been taken to call attention to and explain those points in which German differs from English usage, particularly with regard to the prepositions and their puzzling idioms, the use of participles and the construction of participial clauses, the order of words and construction of sentences. The Historical Sketch in Lesson LII does not claim to be more than rudimentary, and such terms only are employed in explaining phonetic laws as are likely to be familiar to junior pupils. In the Vocabulary, only such meanings of words are given as occur in the exercises ; for the principal parts of strong and irregular verbs the pupil is referred to the proper section of the Grammar. Similar references are given under the prepositions and pronouns. The Index has been made as full as possible, and it is hoped that it will be of no little assistance to both teacher and pupil. In writing this Grammar, the authors have freely consulted, among others, the grammars of Heyse, Whitney and Brandt, Vernaleken’s “ Deutsche Syntax,” and the various works of Sanders, especially his great “ Dictionary,” his “ Sprachbriefe,” and his “Satzbau und Wortfolge der deutschen Sprache.” For some of the examples in Lesson XLIX, as well as the sen- tences in Exercise G, the authors are indebted to Buchheim's “German Prose Composition.” University College, Toronto, May, i883w CONTENTS. PAGE Preface •Introduction. — Alphabet « Examples of Pronunciation 6 u General Remarks on Pronunciation . 8 « Quantity of Vowels .... 9 « Accentuation . 10 (1 Orthography . 11 u German Script . . • • • 13 LESSON PART I. PAGE §§ I. Present Indicative of fjahett, to have 17 - 1, 2 II. Use of Cases. — Definite Article . 18. 3-5 UI. liefer Model. — Imperf. Indie, of fjatiett, to have 20. 6,7 IV. SHein Model. — Indef. Article. — Present and Imperf. Indie, of (till, to be 22. 8-15 V. Declension of Substantives : — SJialCt Model, or -\, -m, -It, -t Stems .... 25 . 16-18 VI. Present and Imperfect of ttlCtUeit, to become. — Construction of Principal Sentences 28. 19, 20 VII. Declension of Substantives: — 0o!jtt Model. — Question Order 32 . 21-23 VIII. Conjugation of Jjafirn, to have. — Place of Participle and Infinitive .... 36 * 24-26 IX. Weak Conjugation : ioften. — Dependent Sen- tences. — Prepositions with Accusative only 41 . 27-34 X. Weak Verbs (continued). — Declension of Substantives : — Sotf Model, or Plural in -cr 47 - 35-37 LESSON XI. XII. XIII. A. XIV. XV. B. XVI. C. XVII. XVIII. XIX. XX. XXI. XXII XXIII. XXIV. XXV. XXVI. XXVII. D. CONTENTS. PAGE §§ Personal Pronouns 5 2 * 38-42 Possessive Adjectives. — Use of Articles Construction of Sentences : — Place of Ob- jects, Adverbs, etc. — Prepositions with Da- 58. 43 > 44 tive only Additional Remarks on Personal Pronouns 64. 45 > 46 and Prepositions Conjugation of feitt, to be. — Declension of Substantives : — Weak or-n Stems: 70. 47 - 5 1 Model Mixed Declension. — Double Plurals. — Pre- 72. 5 2 -59 positions governing Dative or Accusative . 80. 60-65 Anomalies of Declension .... Declension of Substantives: Recapitulation. — Proper Names. — Prepositions with Gen- 87. 66-69 itive 89. 70-75 Proper Names. — Foreign Substantives . Gender of Substantives. — Interrogative Pro- nouns and Adjectives. — Indirect State- 95 - 76-78 ments and Questions ..... Gender of Substantives (concluded). — Gen- 97 - 79-88 eral Remarks. — Double Gender 105. 89-91 Relative Pronouns. — Irregular Weak Verbs Declension of Attributive Adjectives : Strong 111. 92-99 Form. — Conjugation of Strong Verbs n8. IOO-III Passive Voice Declension of Adjectives : Weak and Mixed. 112-114 — Strong Verbs: Beiftcn Model . Possessive Pronouns. — Strong Verbs : BlciBctt 134 - 115-118 Model Declension of Adjectives (concluded) : Table, General Remarks. — Strong Verbs: fd)tej)cit 1 19, 120 and fcdjteit Models Comparison of Adjectives. — Strong Verbs: 147. 121-124 friercit Model Demonstrative Pronouns. — Strong Verbs: X S 4 * 125-131 futfleit Model Indefinite Pronouns. — Strong Verbs : fftilt* 162. 132 144 ItCtt and Ijdfen Models .... 171. MS ' 1 59 On Certain Adjectives and Pronouns 178. 160-163 CONTENTS. PAGE Yll LESSON XXVIII. XXIX. XXX. XXXI. XXXII. XXXIII. XXXIV. XXXV. XXXVI. E. XXXVII. XXXVIII. XXXIX. XL. F. Numerals: — Cardinals and Ordinals. — Strong Verbs: fjitcdjCIt Model Indefinite Numerals. — Strong Verbs: cffcit Model Derivative Numerals. — Time, Measure, Date. — Strong Verbs : ftfylagcit Model . Adverbs. — Strong Verbs: fatten Model . Adverbs (continued): Formation and Com- parison. — Table of Strong Verbs and General Remarks on the same Adverbs (continued) : Idioms. — Irregular Strong Verbs Modal Auxiliaries Modal Auxiliaries (continued) : Idioms . Compound Verbs On Certain Prefixes Reflexive and Impersonal Verbs . • • Prepositions governing the Genitive • • Prepositions (continued) : — Idioms • • Conjunctions. — Interjections . . • Conjunctions. — Additional Remarks . 180. 189. 196. 204. 210. 217. 225. 2 33- 239- 246. 249. 257 . 264. 273- 282. PART II. SYNTAX. XLI. Syntax of the Cases. — Nominative and Genitive 286. XLII. Syntax of the Cases. — Dative and Accusa- tive 291. XLIII. Indicative Mood : Syntax of its Tenses . 299. XLIV. Subjunctive and Conditional Moods . . 304. XLV. Imperative and Infinitive Moods. • .311. XLVI. Infinitive Mood (continued) • . . 318. XLVII. The Participles 325. XLVIII. Concord and Apposition . . • . 334. XLIX. Apposition (continued): Appositive Ad- jectives. — Syntax of the Preposition . 341. L. Word-Order 348. G. Complex Sentences. — Clause-Order . . 360. §§ 163-167 1 68-1 8 1 182-186 187, 188 189-194 195, 196 197-199 200-202 203-208 209-213 214-220 221-224 225-234 235-240 241 242-247 248-255 256-262 263-268 269-272 273-278 279-284 285-289 290, 291 292-301 302-306 CONTENTS. Till PART III. WORD-FORMATION AND HISTORICAL SKETCH. LESSON PAGE §§ LI. Word-Formation: — Derivation and Composition 364. 307-321 LII. Historical Sketch of the Language, Grimm’s Law, Umlaut • 374- 322-326 APPENDICES. A . Substantives of SDIater Model with Umlaut . 381. 17 B. Masculine Monosyllables of §Uttb Model • . 381. 22 C . Feminines of @ol)n Model .... . 382. 22 D . Irregular Foreign Substantives . . . • 382. 22 E. Neuter Monosyllables of §unb Model • • • 382. 22 F. Weak Masculines not ending in -t . • • 383- 57 G. Substantives of Mixed Declension . 383- 61 G * Double Plurals with Different Meaning • . 384- 64 H . Plurals of Abstract Substantives . . 384- 66 7. Exceptions to the Rules on Gender . 385. 80,89,90 /. Double Genders K. Monosyllabic Adjectives without Umlaut in Com- 388. 9i parison 125 Z. Strong Verbs not given in the Lists • • 389- 192 PAGE Exercises in Composition Abbreviations ( German-English .... Vocabulary: 1 ^ ^ • • . 405 i English- German .... • # . 423 Index INTRODUCTION, (For Reference only.) THE GERMAN ALPHABET. Characters. Name. Sound. Observe the dif- ference between « a ah like a in father; never as in ball, h at, care. 21 and U. © 6 bay as in Eng., except at end of word or syll., when pron. like p . 23 and 23; £>, I), i) and V. a t t say before d, e, t, and ty, like ts ; otherwise like k; in words from French, before e and i, like ss. 6 and c and e. 2) b day as in Eng., except at end of word or syll., when pron. like t. ® and D, fow like Eng . f in Germ, words; in foreign words, like Eng. v . 23 and 23; »/ 9, 9- SB to vay like Eng. v, except after \<&) and g, when pron. like Eng. w . * 5 iks like ks, even when initial. E and t. d 9 ypsilo?i like the Germ, vowel i ; or like ii. 3 s tset like ts . i MODIFIED VOWELS (UMLAUTS). Characters. Sound. K(«e) ii like the Germ, vowel e. (The forms 2le, etc., are replaced by 2f, etc., in modern ortho- graphy.) 6(©e) 3 about like u in murder ; nearly like French eu, but with lips rounded and nearly closed. U(Ue) ii nearly like French u; there is no corresponding sound in Eng. Pronounced with lips rounded and pointed, as for whistling. 4 THE GERMAN ALPHABET. DOUBLE VOWELS. Characters. Sound. 8la aa like long a (a in form). (Be ee “ “ e ( a “ c#re). Go CO “ “ o (never like Eng. oo). DIPHTHONGS. Characters. Sound. m <£i at | like i in f/re. ei an like ou in hour. $u(2ieu) Uw } (Bu tn r like oy in joy. it like ie in Held (not round at the beginning of words) ; in the unaccented sylls. of foreign words, i and e are pronounced separately. CONSONANTAL DIGRAPHS AND TRIGRAPHS. Characters. Sound. 6 $ d) after a, 0, u, au, like ch in Scotch loch; softer after a, e, i, o, i\, au, eu; it does not occur at the beginning, except in for- eign words, where it is pronounced like k before a, o, u, and like final cf) before e, i. In French words it has the sound of sh 9 as in French ; when in one syll. ~ x* THE GERMAN ALPHABET. 5 Characters. Sound. d like Eng. ck ; when divided between two lines, is written f-f; not found at begin- ning. *pf ft pronounce both p and f distinctly. m as in Eng. ; in foreign words only. S# % like sh in Eng. ; but when the § is in a distinct syll., pron. separately. Sp ft) like soft slip in Eng. at the beginning ; other- wise like sp. St ft like soft sht in Eng. at the beginning ; other- wise like st. If § like ss; £ replaces ff after long vowels in the middle of a word, and always when final/ Hence guff (long u), gen. ; but gluj* (short u),gen. gluffeS; and bet gen, bifj, cje* bi[j$n. Diphthongs are always followed by f$. Not found at the beginning. like ts. It stands for 33. Not found at the beginning. 6 EXAMPLES OF PRONUNCIATION. EXAMPLES OF PRONUNCIATION. Simple Vowels. 81 long : gar. Bat, fam ; short : fait, 2Jlann, $amm. d long : Be r, ben, bem ; short : §err, benn, Sett. In formative sylls. foil, by a consonant shorter still: genftcr, Baben, ©fcl. In final syll. not foil, by a consonant, like a, in Louisa : ©nbe, tQabc, ©abe. Also in prefixes, as in the first syll. of gcB«ngen, gefaHen, ©ebanfen. Befallen, Bebenfen. 3 long : mir, bir, Sfitne ; short : ftiff, mit. Bitten. C long : £on, loben, Bolen ; short : SConne, fommen, foil. U long : §ut, bit. Slut eg ; short : 2)lutter, bumrn, unter. long : ©tjnami't, $oll)'B ; short : SKtjrte, ©tjfte'm. . Double Vowels (all long). 8la : §aar, 8lal, ©taat. | de : $tee, leer, Sect. Do •• Soot, SJtoog, Soog. Modified Vowels (Umlauts). §( long : 33ar, fame, ^riigen ; short : B/j> 202 syJ 202 2 *- L/ & ^ 0T f r f"T ?/ & ^ / r 14 THE GERMAN SCRIPT. UMLAUTS. // // DOUBLE VOWELS. Or. DIPHTHONGS. Oz at er 33rot? $$ fyabe ©olb. bread, 33rot meat, gletfcb gold, ©olb flour, -JJtebl milk, 2JJUcb Vocabulary. silver, ©ilber water, SBaffer wine, SBetn and, unb or, ober also, aucfy what, toa§? but, aber yes, ja no, nein not, nid^t i8 LEtSSON II, I§§3~ EXflRCISB I. A . 1. au3, unb er fyatte au d) jene ©arten. 5. 33uc^ hat Sefer. 6. 2Beld)e3 93ud) fatten biefe SKabcfjen? 7. S)er ©d)toefter itnb bent Srutfer. B. 1. Which newspaper had the father of these girls? 2. The dog had these bones, but he had not this stick. 3. Which stick has this man ? 4. Which man has this stick ? 5. This father had three daughters, but that woman had only 22 LESSON IV. two. 6. The son of that woman had this dog and horse. 7. We had the book of those p-upils. 8. To the brother of those girls. ORAL EXERCISE III. 1. Welches Madchen hatte die Zeitung? 2. Welches Buch hatten die Madchen ? 3. Wer hatte das Buch dieser Schuler ? 4. WelcJ^^Feder hatte dieser Knabe? 5. Welchen Hund hatte "Jener Mann ? 6. Was hat dieser Lehrer? LESSON IV. SMn MODEL-INDEFINITE ARTICLE-PRESENT AND IMPERFECT INDICATIVE OF fetlt, to be. 8. Declension of mein, my. Singular . Plural. MASC. FEM. NEUTER. ALL GENDERS. Nom. mein meinc mein meine, my Gen. tneineS meiner meincS meiner, of my Dat. meinern meincr meinern meinen, (to, for) my Acc. meinen meine mein meine, my 9. The following words are declined like mein: feirt, 4 no 9 ; fein, ‘his, its’; ifyr, ‘her, its, their’; unfer, ‘our.’ The indefinite article ein, eine, ein same way, but has no plural, thus : is also declined MASC. FEM. NEUTER. Nom. ein eine ein Gen. eine£ einer eine§ • Dat. einem einer einem Acc. einen eine ein Remark. — This model differs from the biefer model only in having no distinctive ending in the nom. sing. masc. and neuter, or in the acc. neuter. Thus, while we say biefer 13 ] 23 PRESENT AND IMPERFECT OF •JJtarm, but biefe£ 93x1$, we say etn (fein, mein, etc.) 9JJamt, and also r in (fein, etc.) 33ucfy. 10. Present and Imperfect Present. Sing. tcf) bin, I am bu tuft, thou art er ift, he is fie ift, she is e3 ift, it is Plur. fair finb, we are ifyr fetb, ye are fie finb, they are bin \S), am I ? etc. DicATivEjOF feitt, to be. Pmperfect. \§ toar, I was bu toarft, thou wast er to ax, he was fie toar, she was e§ toar, it was toir toaren, ye were if?r toaret, ye were fie toaren, they were toar id), was I ? etc. 11 . Time before Place. Rule. — In German sen- tences, expressions of time always precede those of place , as : This man was here to-day. ®iefer Tlann toar fyeute Ijier. 12. Place of the Negative Rule. — The nega- tive nid)t precedes that member of the sentence which it negatives. Hence : r @r toar geftern nicfji fyier, he was not here yesterday. 13. Agreement of Pronouns. Rule. — Pronouns agree in gender, number and person with the substantive to which they refer, as : $>er §ut (masc.) ift nicf;t groj$, er ift flein, the hat is not large, it is small ; but bte ^eitung (fem.) ift nid)t gro£, fie ift flein, the newspaper is not large, it is small. The English pronoun it must therefore be rendered by er when it refers to a masc. substantive, by fie when it refers to a fem., and by c£ when it refers to a neuter. 24 LESSON IV. [§§ 14- 14. Observe : In the sentence * the boy is good/ good is a predicative adjective. Rule. — Predicative Adjectives are not declined. 15. A substantive following the verb to be is of course subject , not object, and must therefore be put in the ?iominative, and not in the accusative, as : (£r iff cut (not eincn) 3Jiann, he is a man. Vocabulary. ^ friend, bet ftreunb gentleman, ber §err bird, ber 33ogel carria S e ’ I ber 2Bagett wagon, ) carriages, bie SBagert city, bic ©tabt dress ' Itosflleib garment, ) weather, baS 2Better old, alt pleasant, agreeable, angenefym to-day, fyeute great, large, big, tall, grof$ still, yet, nod) (referring to time) for, benn EXERCISE IV. A. 1. @in 33ater unb fein $inb finb jetjt bier. 2. Sine Gutter unb iljr $inb toaren geftern bier. 3. 9Kein SBruber fein 33ud), aber er l)at ein SD?effer. 4. Unfer $reunb mar ber Sefyrer biefer ©c^lifer. 5. ®iefe $rau ift meine ©$toefter, ; imb fte ift aud) bte •JJtutter biefer 2Rabd)en. 6. 2Bir finb flein, aber fie finb grofe. 7. Unfer Secret ift mube, benn feme ©cfyuler toaren fefyr trage. 8. Unfere ©tabt ift feljr fefyon, aber fie ift ni$t fe^r grofc. 9. 2Jieinem SSater unb tneiner 2Jlutier. pretty, fyubfd? cold, fait small, little, flein tired, rrtiibe beautiful, fine, fefyon strong, fiarf idle, trage warm, inarm windy, ioinbig very, very much, fe^r yesterday, ge'ftern J7] declension: — 3KaIcr model. 25 B. 1. I am the sister of those girls. 2. Where are my books and newspaper ? 3. Our brother and his dog are big and strong, but our sister and her bird are small and pretty. 4. Which gentleman was here yesterday ? 5. The friend of our brothers was here to-day, but he was not here yesterday. 6. My sister had her book, but she had not her pen. 7. Our father and mother have still their carriage, but they have no horse. 8.. The weather was cold and windy, but it is now warm and pleasant. 9. To my brother and sister. ORAL EXERCISE IV. 1. Wo ist unsere Mutter? 2. Wann war sie liier? 3. Wer war gestern hier? 4. Was ist .sein Vater ? 5. Wer ist die Mutter dieser Schuler? 6. Wer sind diese Madchen? LESSON V. DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES : — MODEL, OR -I, -nt, — It, -r STEMS. 16 . Declension of her 9Mer, the painter. Singular . Plural . bte SRaler, the painters Nom. ber Sftaler, the painter Gen. be§ 9JiaIer§, the painter's, of the painter Dat. bem dialer, (to, for) the painter Acc. ben -JJtaler, the painter Observe : The only changes are additional -£ in the gen, sing., and -it in the dat. pi. ber ^Dialer, the painters', of the painters ben Sftalern, (to, for) the painters bie SDcaler, the painters 1 7. In the same way are declined : 26 LESSON V. 1. Masc. and neuter substantives ending in -cl, -Cttt, -Ctt, -er, and diminutives in -djeit and — letlt (these last being always neuter). 2. Neuters beginning with ©e- and ending in -C, as : ba<3 ©emdlbe, the painting. 3. Two feminines : bte Gutter, the mother, and bie ©ocfyter, the daughter. 4. ©er $dfe, the cheese. (a) But many masculines with fl, d, U in the root, the two feminines Gutter and ©od;ter, and one neuter, ba3 Softer, ‘the convent/ take also Umlaut (modified vowel) in the plural, as : — Sing. n. d. a. ©ruber, g. ©ruberS ; Plur . n. g. a. ©ruber, d. ©rubertt. ( b ) Substantives in -n do not add n in the dat. plur., as: Sing. N. d. a. ^idbcben, g. afldb$en£ ; Plur . n. g. d. a. 3fldbd;en. (c) In feminine substantives all cases are alike in the sing. Hence, ^flutter and ©ocfyter are thus declined : Sing. n. g.d.a. Gutter; Plur. n. g. a. Gutter, d. afliittern. Sing. n. g.d.a. ©ocfder; Plur. n.g. a. ©iicfyter, d. ©od;tern. Further examples : ©er ©ogel, the bird : Sing. n. d. a. ©ogel, g. ©ogelS ; Plur . n.g. a. ©ogel, d. ©ogeln. ©er ©Bagert, the carriage : Sing. n. d. a. JBctgert, g. 23agen3; Plur. n. g. d. a. 2®agen. ©a3 $enfter, the window : Sing. n. d. a. genfter, g. genfterS; Plur. n. g. a. genfter, d. genftern. ©aS ©emdlbe, the painting: Sing. n. d. a. ©emdlbe, G. ©emalbeS ; Plur. n. g. a. ©emdlbe, d. ©emdlbetu 18] declension : — Staler model. 2 7 Decline with Umlaut : ber 33ater, the father ; ber ©cfitoager, the brother-in-law ; ber the apple ; ber ©arten, the garden ; ber SUantel, the cloak. Note. — For a complete list of Substantives of this declension that take Umlaut in the plur., see App. A. Decline without Umlaut: ber Setter, the teacher; ber ©dfntfer, the scholar; ber 3(bler, the eagle; ba§ 9Jteffer, the knife; ber ©ommer, the summer; ber ©inter, the winter; ber £)nfel, the uncle. Note. — The preposition in is contracted with the dat. sing. masc. and neut. of the def. art., when not emphasized, thus: in bem = int ; in bem ©arten, contr. im ©arten ; iit bent SSaffer, contr. im SBaffer. 18 . Rule of Construction. — If the verb is in a simple tense, the predicate adjective comes at the end. Vocabulary. tree, ber Sgum fire, ba3 getter spring, ber grilling autumn, ber £>erbft stove, ber Dfen diligent, industrious, fleifng poor, arm hot, bei$ ill, fran! rich, reid^ ripe, retf weak, fdEjhmcfy satisfied, ) - . . \ Mufnebett contented, ) quickly, fdEjnett not at all, gar ni$t not yet, nod) nidjt with, mit (gov. dat.) in, in (gov. dat.) whose, toeffen? EXERCISE V. A. 1. 2)ie Safer biefer 9Jtabcf)en ioaren mitbe. 2. ©§ tnar geftern fait, aber ftnr fatten fein getter im £)fen. 3. 35ie ©e* ntalbe biefe^ 9Jtaler3 finb gar nid^t fd;on. 4. Uttfere ©arten finb fdEjon, benn ba3 ©etter iff inarm. 5. 3)ie SJlutter biefer ©dottier inar arm. 6. 9Jtit ben gliigeln biefer SSbgel. 7. 2)ie ©confer 28 LESSON VI. [§§ 19 biefeS 2efyrer§ toaren Iran!. 8. $ie 2Jl8nteI metner Stod^ter firib alt. 9. SDie ©drten in biefer Stab t finb fe^r fcfydn. j B. 1. The father of this girl was my teacher. 2. Our father and mother are old and weak. 3. The gardens of my brother-in-law are very beautiful, but his carriages are not at all beautiful. 4. My uncle is not at all satisfied with his daughters. 5. These apples are not yet ripe. 6. The teacher of these pupils was not very rich. 7. With the wings of this bird. 8. The weather is hot in the summer, but it is cold in the winter. 9. The eagle is a bird. 1. Wann ist das Wetter kalt? 2. Mit welchen Schtilern sind die Lehrer zufrieden ? 3. In wessen Haus sind die Briider dieses Madchens? 4. Wo waren sie im Herbst ? 5. Sind diese Madchen trage oder fleiszig ? 6. Ist die Blume schon ? LESSON VI. PRESENT AND IMPERFECT OF ttJCrbnt, to become. — CON- STRUCTION OF PRINCIPAL SENTENCES. 19. Present and Imperfect of focrben, to become. ORAL EXERCISE V. Present Indicative . Present Subjunctive . plur. fair toerbcn, we become Sing, i toerbe, I become ifyi toerbct, ye become fie teerbeit, they become bu ftirft, thou becomest er toirb, he becomes idE) toerbe bu toerbeft er toerbe fair toerben tfyr toerbet fie toerben 20 ] CONSTRUCTION OF PRINCIPAL SENTENCES. 2( } Imperfect Indicative . Imperfect Subjunctive • *SV>^. t$ tourbe or tuarb, I became t$ toiirbe bu tt>urbeft or toarbft, thou becamest bu foiirbeft er tourbc or toarb, he became er toiirbe Plur . fair tmirben, we became frur toiirben il)r tourbet, ye became xfyr toiirbet fte tourben, they became fie tr>iirben Observe: i. the persistent e in the subjunctive endings; 2. the Umlaut in the imperfect subjunctive; 3. the second form (toarb, etc.) in the singular only of the imperfect indicative. 20. Construction of Principal Sentences. — Place of Verb and Subject. Rule. — In principal sentences containing a statement, the verb is the second idea in the sentence, as : SUBJECT. VERB. PREDICATE. SUBJECT. VERB. PREDICATE. 3$ fiiit f)ter. iff frctnf. I am here. He is ill. Observe: i. The verb is the second idea, not necessarily the second word , in the sentence. Thus the subject with its attributes and enlargements constitutes but one idea, as : 1 2 3 SUBJECT AND ATTRIBUTE. VERB. ADVERB. £er 3?ater btefe3 Server* tear Ijier. 2. The subject (or subjects) with attributes and enlarge- ments may come either in the first or in the third place, as : SUBJECT. VERB. ADVERB. ADVERB. VERB. SUBJECT. 3$ bin Ijier; or: §ier bin id). 3. The predicate adjective is placed last, when the verb is in a simple tense, as : 30 LESSON VI. [§ 20 I am satisfied with my daughters. $dj bin mit nteinen £5cf)tern jufricbctt. Remarks. — i. Any other member of the sentence may occupy the first place, but in that case the subject is thrown after the verb, which still occupies the second place. Thus : ADV. PHRASE. VERB. SUBJECT. PREDICATE. $ru£;ling finb bte ©iirtcn fcfyon. 2. In English, on the contrary, the subject precedes the verb, which is, in such cases, in the third place, as : ADV. PHRASE. SUBJECT. VERB. PREDICATE. In the spring the gardens are beautiful. 3. This fixed position of the verb as the second idea in every German principal sentence should never be forgotten . 4. The conjunctions unb, aber, ober, benn do not count as members of the sentence. Vocabulary. sleigh, ber ©dE)litten thunder-storm, ba§ ©eft>iiter attentive, aufmerffam green, grim new, neu young, jung inattentive, unaufmerffam unpleasant ) u „ ^ disagreeable, ) dissatisfied, unjufriebert after, ncicfy (with dat.) therefore, on that account, be£l)alb never, me so, fo why, toarurn ? again, toieber well, toofyl EXERCISE VI. A . 1. 9iadE) bent ©emitter tourbe ba§ SSetter fd£)on unb toarm. 2. ©eftern tourben nteine Gutter unb il)re ©cfytoefter franf, aber je^t finb fie toofyl. 3. ©ein 3Sater Ijat ein §au3 unb einen ©arten unb er fyat au$ 2Bagen unb ©d;litten. 4. SBetter C 20 ] CONSTRUCTION OF PRINCIPAL SENTENCES. 3 1 toarb geftern uttangenefym unb Unrtbtg ; aber e3 ift fyeute toteber ganj \d)'6n unb Inarm. 5. 3)er Setter tnirb unjufrieben, benn feme ©cfyiiler toerbert unaufmerffam. 6. S3 arum toirb unfer S5ater je$t fo fdfiuad;? 7. 6r totrb fefyr alt, unb totrb bef$alb aucf) fdfiuad;. 8. Unfere SJtutter ift nid^t jung, aber fie ift nodj fcfyon. 9. S3aren bie 93rliber biefer Seljrer in ^Berlin ober in Hamburg ? 10. ©ie toaren in Hamburg, aber fie toaren nie in Berlin. B. 1. The brother of these pupils became our teacher. 2. Teachers often become dissatisfied with their pupils. 3. In the spring our garden becomes beautiful. 4. Our brothers- in-law were in Paris ; they are now in London. 5. This tree becomes green very quickly. 6. The pupils of this teacher became very attentive. 7. My daughters are not contented with their cloaks. 8. In the autumn (the)* apples become ripe. 9. The father of these girls becomes old and weak. 10. With the feathers of an eagle. 11. We became rich, but he became poor. 12. The eagle is a bird ; it is large and strong. 13. The cloaks of those girls were new, but now they are getting (say : become) old. ORAL EXERCISE VI. 1. Wer ist in dem Schlitten ? 2. Wer hat das Messer ihres Onkels? 3. Wann waren seine Brtider in Hamburg? 4. Wann werden die Apfel reif ? 5. Wird der Baum im Sommer grim ? 6. Wann wird das Wetter kalt ? * Words in ( ) are omitted in English, but not in German; words in £ J are omitted in German, but not in English. 33 LESSON VII. t§§ 21- LESSON VII. DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES MODEL. QUESTION ORDER. 21 . Declension of ( bet ©oljn, the son; 1 ber §uttb, the dog. (a) With Umlaut in the plural : Singular. Nom. ber ©ofyn, the son Gen. be§ ©ofyn(c)8, the son's, of the son Dat. bem ©ol)n(c), (to, for) the son Acc. ben ©oljn, the son Plural. bte ©iifyne, the sons ber ©fifyne, the sons', of the sons ben ©ofmen, (to, for) the sons bte ©otme, the sons Observe : i. The -c§ of the gen., and -e of dat. sing. 2. The Umlaut and -e of the plur. 3. The additional -n of the dat. plur. 4. The -t may be dropped in the dat. sing., and (except after sibilants) in the gen sing., but is usually retained in monosyllables. ( [l f i) Without Umlaut : Singular. Nom. ber §unb, the dog Gen. be§ §unb(c)§ / the dog's, of the dog Dat. bem £unb(c), to the dog Acc. ben §unb, the dog Plural. bte §unbe, the dogs ber §unbc, the dogs', of the dogs ben §unben, (to, for) the dogs bte §unbe, the dogs 22. In this way are declined : 1. Most masculine monosyllables: generally add Umlaut (see App. B.) 23 ] CONSTRUCTION OF DIRECT QUESTIONS. 33 2. Masculines in -at, -id), -tg, -ittg, -ling : never add Umlaut. 3. Many feminine monosyllables with a, It, or att in the root : always add Umlaut (for list, see App. C.) 4. Substantives in -ni£ and -fat : never add Umlaut. 5. Many neuter monosyllables (all those in -r) : never add Umlaut, except Gfyor, Soot (Sote or Soote) App. E. 6. Foreign masculines, with accent on last syll., in -at, -att, -at: generally without Umlaut; in -aft, with Umlaut; in -icr, -ait, -at, and foreign neuters in -at : never with Um- laut (for exceptions, see App. D.) Further examples : SDie £>anb, the hand: Sing. n.g. d. a. §anb ; Plur. n. g. a £mnbe, d. £tinben. (Observe again: Feminines have all cases of the sing, alike.) 23egrabni§, the burial, funeral : Sing. n. a. 23egrabni§, g. SBegrcibniffcS, d. S3egrdbnif(fe) ; Plur. n. g. a. SBegvabmffc, d. 33egrdbnif|cu. (Observe the doubling of the final -8 when a termination is added.) 3)er IRonat, the month : Sing. n. a. Sftonat, g. 2Ronat(c)l, d . Sftonat(c) ; Plur. n. g. a. SRonatc, d. 3Jionaten. 5Da§ gal;r, the year : Sing. n. a. galjr, g. $jafyi(e)S, d. ^af)r(c) ; Plur. n. g. a. lyafue, d. ^at;rcu. ®er Sfpfelbautn, the apple-tree : Sing. n. a. 2fpfeI6aum, g. 2fpfelbaum(e)§, d. 2tpfelbaum(e) ; Plur. n. g. a. 2lpfelbaume, d. 21pfelbaumcit. (Observe that in compounds only the last component is varied, and is declined as when standing alone). 23 . CONSTRUCTION OF DIRECT QUESTIONS. Examples : 12 12 1. Has the dog meat? 2. Which man is old? £>at ber^unb gdetfd)? 2Belcf;er 2)fann if t aft ? 34 LESSON VII. [§ 23 12 12 8 3. Who is in the garden? 5. What has the teacher ? 2Ber ift inbem©arten? 22a§ l)at ber Setter? 12 8 12 8 4. Where is my father ? 6. When was the pupil here ? 2Bo ift mein2$ater? 2 Bann toar ber ©dealer Ijier ? Observe from these examples : 1. That the construction of Direct Interrogative Sentences is exactly the same in German as in English, as far as the position of Verb and Subject is concerned. 2. That in both languages the question-word always begins the sentence. Vocabulary. (An Asterisk (*) after a word signifies that the plural has Umlaut.) Tuesday, SMens'tag enemy, bcr geinb finger, ber finger Friday, ^ret'iag foot, ber gatft * general, ber ©erteral' young man, youth, ber $>ung'ltng emperor, ber $atfer acquirements, bie ^enntniffe king, ber Sonig Wednesday, ber TOitt'tood) Monday, ber SffJon'tag officer (military) ber Dfftjter' town, city, bic ©tabt* Sunday, ber ©onn'tag Saturday, * ©onn'abenb, * '( or ©amS tag marsh, swamp, ber day, ber STag carpet, ber £e!ppidB curtain, ber SSor^ang * week, bie 2 2o$e room, ba§ ftimmx thirty, brei^ig five, flinf long, lang new, neu magnificent, J>ra$ftg red, xot seven, fteben white, tt>et^ where, too? twelve, gtoolf § 23 ] CONSTRUCTION OF DIRECT QUESTIONS. 35 EXERCISE VII. A . 1. 6in Satyr tyat jtoolf 9ftonate unb in jebem 3Jlonat ftnb breijng 2;age. 2. SDie §dnbe biefer 3Kabctyen fxnb Hein. 3. 3)ie ©drten tn biefert ©tabten tourben im grueling fctyon. 4. ©ie Sage ftnb im Sommer laitg, aber im SBinter merben fie !urj unb fait. 5. 5Die 9Jiuiter meine3 greunbe£ foar geftem in ber ©tabt. 6. Sie $enntniffebe§ SetyrerSfinb grcjs. 7. 2)ie SSortyange btefeS 3immer§ ftnb toeift, aber bie Sepptctye ftnb rot. 8. SDie ©ctyioager biefer Dfftjiere ftnb ©enerale. B . 1. The horses and dogs of this young man are hand- some. 2. We have two feet and two hands, and each hand has five fingers. 3. The emperor and the king were enemies, but now they are friends. 4. These trees are old, but they are still beautiful. 5. The curtains and carpets in this room are new and magnificent. 6. Every week has seven days: Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday. 7. The sons are tall, but the father is not quite so tall. 8. The funeral of the king was magnificent. 9. My father has two apple-trees in his garden. 10. Where are the frogs ? In the spring they are in the marshes. ORAL EXERCISE VII. 1. Wo waren die Briider seiner Mutter gestern ? 2. Sind die Vorhange weisz oder rot? 3. Was hat sein Vater im Garten? 4. Wer war gestern in der Stadt? 5. Wessen Schwager sind Offiziere? 6. Welche sind die Tage der Woche? 3r fiabt, ye have fie fyabeit, they have Present. Subjunctive. icf' I'iil'C, I (may) have, etc. bu I)abejt_ er f)abe toir fiabett ifr f)abcF~ fie fiaben td^ Ijatfe, I had bu fiattcji, thou hadst er Ijatte, he had loir flatten, we had tfir fiattct, ye had fie flatten, they had Imperfect. id) biitte, I had (might have), bu fitttteft [etc. er fiatte hrir fatten ibr fiiittet fie flatten Perfect. (Pres, of tjaben + P. Patt.) I have had, etc. id) I)abe bu Ijaft er fiat hoir f>aben if)r fi abt fie fyaben > geljalit I (may) have had, etc. icf) fiabe bu fiabeft er fiabe fair fiaben ifir fiabet fte fjaben >getjaM PARADIGM OF Ijciktl. 37 §*,] Indicative. Pluperfect. (Imperf. of Ijabeit + P. Part.) Subjunctive. I had had, etc. icf> Ijatte bu fyatteft er Eiatte toir fatten tf>r £;attet fie fatten I had (might have) had, etc. id) fyatte ► gcljaBt bu fyatteft er ^atte toir fatten ifir fjattet fie fatten Future. (Pres, of toerben + Infin. of Ijabra.) I shall have, etc. I shall have, etc. geljnBt td) nserbe bu toir ft er toirb toir toerben i^r toerbet fie toerben id) toerbe bu toerbeft er toerbe toirtoerben ibr toerbet fie toerben Future Perfect. (Future of Ijabeit + P. Part.) > JjaBett I shall have had, etc. id) toerbe bu toir ft er toirb toir toerben Ujr toerbet fie toerben > geljoBt IjaBeit Simple. (Impf. Subj. of tnerbeit -f- Infin. of tjabcn.) I should have, etc. id) toiir&e bu toiirbeft ) V Conditional. I shall have had, etc. td; toerbe bu toerbeft er toerbe toir toerben ibr toerbet fie toerben geljalii fjulien Compound. (Simple Cond. of fyaben -+■ Past Part.) I should have had, etc. id) toiirbe ) jaM BnBen bu toiirbeft f * * ¥ 38 LESSON VIII. [§§* 5 - Conditional. er iciitbe er tniirbe fie toiirben . fie toiirbett . Imperative. fyabe (bu), have (thou) ^abf (ibr), have (ye) (ju) fjaben, (to) have gefjafit (ju) fyaben, (to) have Infinitives had Participles. Pres, fyabenb, having Past, gefyabt, had. 25 . Use of Auxiliaries of Tense. — 1. forms the perfect tenses of all transitive and most intransitive verbs precisely as above. In any verb not conjugated with fetrt (see 4, below) : The Present of fyabert -f- P. Part, of any verb form the Perfect of that verb. The Imperfect of f>abett — P. Part, of any verb form the Pluperfect of that verb. 2. SHkrben forms the Future and Simple Conditional thus : The Present of toerben + Infin. of any verb form the Future. The Imperf. Subj. of Herbert -f- Infin. of any verb form the Simple Conditional. 3. The Future of Ijaben -f- P. Part, of any verb (not con- jugated with fern) form the Future Perfect. The Simple Conditional of fyaben -f- P. Part, of any verb (not conjugated with feirt) form the Compound Con- ditional. 4. ©ein replaces fyaben in the Perfect Tenses of many Intransitive Verbs. (See § 53.) Compare the English ‘He is come.* 26] CONSTRUCTION OF COMPOUND TENSES. 39 26. Construction of Compound Tenses. — Place of Participle and Infinitive. Rule of Construction . — In every principal sentence the Participle and Infinitive come at the end ; but if both be present, the Participle precedes the Infinitive, which is always last, as : 1 2 3 4 SUBJECT. VERB. PART. OBJECT. ( Engl '. ) My teacher has had money. 1 2 3 4 SUBJECT. VERB. OBJECT. PART. (Germ.) Sttetn Seljrer fyat ©elb geljabt. 1 2 SUBJECT. VERB. (Engl.) We shall 1 2 SUBJECT. VERB. (Germ.) 28ir toerben l 3 4 INFIN. OBJECT. have a storm. 3 4 OBJECT. INFIN. etnen ©turmljafien. 2 3 4 5 SUBJECT. VERB. INFIN. PART. OBJECT. (Engl.) The beggars would have had no shoes. 1 2 3 4 6 SUBJECT. VERB. OBJECT. PART. INFIN. (Germ.) ©ie Settler toitrbett feine ©dfmfye geljabt fallen. Remember : In compound tenses, the auxiliary is the verb, and occupies the second place in a principal sen* tence (see § 20 , Rule 1 , above). Vocabulary. evening, ber 2T6enb beggar, ber Settler holiday, ber gei'ertag fish, ber $tf$ fruit, bie $rucf)t * money, ba§ ©elb guest, ber ©aft* harbour, ber §afert* glove, ber §anb'fcfmfy basket, ber $orb * nut, bie 9iufs * 40 LESSON VIII. L§S 26- to be right, Slecfyt baben sailing-ship, bag ©e'gclfcbiff chair, ber ©tu(d * storm, ber ©turm * stocking, ber ©trumpf * shoe, ber ©d;ufy table, ber TifdE; animal, bag £ier to be wrong, ttn'redjt fmben pleasure, bag 2?ergnugen wolf, ber Solf * out of, aug (gov. dat.) to become of, aug . . . iuerben poor, arm bad, fc^lecfd to-morrow, morgen the day after to-morrow, it'ber* morgen much, t)iel already, fcfyon when, toann ? EXERCISE VIII. A. 1. !Jd> Ijabe Die! ©elb geb^abt, aber jetst bin idj arm. 2. SDie grii$te toerben im §erbft reif. 3. Sirb ber $nabe einen £ifd) unb ©tittle in feinetn dimmer fyabeit ? 4. §!)re §anbfcfnd?e tourben f$led;t, benn fte, toaren fd^on alt. 5. (§g iff angencfym, greunbe ju fjaben. 6. 2Ba§ tourbe aug bent ©obne beg Sefyrerg? @r tourbe aud) Server. 7. 2>d) toerbe fjeinbe unb aud) g-reunbe fyabett. 8. i£>ie ©afte in unferer ©tabt murben miibe, benn bag Setter mar fefyr fyeijj. 9. SBerben mir !£eppicfye unb 23orI;ange in unferm 3immer Ijaben? 10. @r batte greunbe gefyabt. 11. ©ie merben in biefem Saljre biel 3Sergniigen gel;abt Ijaben. 12. £)ie ©oEjne beg ^onigg Ijaben i|3ferbe unb Sagen, aber bie Softer beg 93ett= lerg fyaben feine ©cf)uf)e unb feine ©triimpfe. 13. Sir fatten Slecfyt geljabt, aber er Ijatte Unrest geljabt. 14. Sliit meinen greunben fmbe id) biel SSergnitgen gefjabt. 15. llnfere $reunbe toerben geftern biel SSergniigen gefyabt Ijaben, benn bag Setter tear fdjmn unb toarm. B. 1 . The sailing-ships are in the harbour. 2. We had thirty fishes in our baskets. 3. He would have friends. 4. The evening was fine, but the weather became cold. 5. We have had two storms. 6. Where are our guests ? They h ecan - • tired and are now in the garden. 7. To-morrc PARADIGM OF loBcn. 41 Vi a holiday, for it is Saturday. 8. We were in the garden yesterday, and the trees are already green. 9. What has he had ? He has had apples and nuts. 10. Dogs, wolves, and foxes are animals. ORAL EXERCISE VIII. 1. Wer hatte Recht und wer hatte Unrecht ? 2. Wann werden wir einen Feiertag haben? 3. Wo sind die Segel- schiffe? 4. Wessen Sohne haben Wagen und Pferde? 5. Warum wurden die Gaste miide? 6. Welche Gemalde sind schon? LESSON IX. WEAK CONJUGATION: fflkit. - DEPENDENT SENTENCES. - PREPOSITIONS WITH ACCUSATIVE ONLY. 27. The stem of a verb is what is left when the termina- tion of the Present Infinitive (-en or — n) is dropped, as : fyab-en, stem Ijab ; lob-ert, stem lob. 28. The Principal Parts of a verb are the Present In- finitive, Imperfect Indicative, and Past Participle. 29. Any verb, when these principal parts are given, may be conjugated throughout, by using the auxiliaries, precisely as in the paradigm of fjaben in Less. VIII. 30. Weak verbs are those which form the Imperfect by adding -fe, and the Past Participle by prefixing ge- and adding -f to the stem, as: Icb-en, to praise (stem lofi). Imperfect lob-te, P. Part, pe— lob— t ; tabel-tt, to blame (stem tabel), Imperf. tabel-te, P. Part, ge-tabel-1 Note. — Weak verbs are also called Regular or Modern . 31. Paradigm of Men, to praise. Principal Parts. Pres. Infin. lobctt Impf. Indic. lobte Past Part, gclobt 4 42 LESSON IXo Indicative, Subjunctive. Present. id; lobe, I (may) praise t<$ lobe, I praise (am praising, cto praise) bu lob(e)ft, ^ou praisest* etc. er Iob(e)i, praises totr lobcn, we praise if)X tob(e)t, ye praise fie lobcn, they praise bu lobcfi, thou (mayest) praise er lobe, he (may) praise loir lobcn, we (may) praise iljr lobct, ye (may) praise fie lobcn, they (may) praise Imperfect. (Same form for both moods.) td) lobte, I praised (was praising, etc.) bu lobteft, thou praise dst er lobte, he praised Vox r lobtcn, we praised iE>r lobtet, ye praised fie lobtcn, they praised Perfect. (Pres, of I)aben + P. Part of loBert.) id) fxxbe geWSt, I have praised (been id) Ijabe geToSt praising) bu Ijaft gelobt, thou hast praised, etc. bu Ijabeft gelobt, 2c. Pluperfect. (Imperf. of fyaben P. Part. loben.) id) fyatte gelcbi, I had praised (been id) ^citte gclflbt, K. praising), etc. Future. (Present of UJetbeit + Infin. of lobett.) id; toerbe Mien, I shall praise (be id; toerbe foSctt praising) bu toirft loben* thou wilt praise, etc. bu toerbeft loben, *c. §3i] PARADIGM OF loben. 43 Indicative. Subjunctive. Future Perfect. (Future of Jja&cit + P. Part, of toben.) id) toerbe gelobt fyaben, I shall have praised bu toirft gelobt ^aben, thou wilt have praised, etc. id) toerbe gelobt Ijaben bu tuerbeft gelobt Ijaben, ac. Conditional. Simple. Compound. (Xmpf. Subj. of luerben + Infill. (Simple Cond. of I)dben + P* Part, of toben.) of toben.) id) hhirbe Men, I should praise(be praising) etc. id) loiirbe gelobt fyaben, I should have praised, etc. Imperative. lobe (bu), praise (thou) lobe er, let him praise loben loir, let us praise Iobt (il;r), praise (ye) loben fie, let them praise Infinitive. (ju) loben, (to) praise, gelobt ($u) fyaben, (to) have praised Participles. Pres . fobcitb, praising Past . gelobt, praised Remarks. — i. e is sometimes found in the terminations of the following parts : Pres. Ind. bu Iob(c)ft, er iob(e)t, ibr Iob(e)t ; Impf. (Ind. and Subj.) id) tob(e)te, etc. ; P. Part. ge!ob(e)t, etc. ; and is always retained in certain verbs. (See § 35, Rem. 2, below.) 2. Note again the persistent c of the Pres. Subj. 3. English periphrastic forms of the verb are to be avoided in German ; thus : I praise \ (praise I ?) \ I am praising >- id) lobe am I praising ? y lobe id) ? I do praise ) do I praise? ) 44 LESSON IX. I have been praising, etc., id) [;abe gelobt, etc. Had I been praising? petite id) gelobt ? 4. The only true Imperative forms are those of the 2. sing, and 2. plur., lobe, lobt. For the other persons, the pres. subj. is used, as: lobe er, let him praise; loben loir, let us praise; loben fie, let them praise; — the verb preceding the pronoun. Construction of Dependent Sentences. 32 . The Verb in a Dependent Sentence comes last \ as: Remember: that the auxiliary is the verb in compound 33. In compound tenses the Participle and Infinitive immediately precede the verb ; if both be present, the Parti- ciple precedes, as in principal sentences, thus : %d) glaube, baft er ©elb grfjabt Ijat, I believe, that he has had money. %d) glaube, baft er ©elb ftaku toirb, I believe that he will have money. glaube, baft er ©elb gdjabf f >aben toirb, I believe that he will have had money. Note. — The place of the Subject, in a Dependent Sentence, is usually the same as in English. 34. Prepositions governing the Accusative only. burdj, fitr, gegeu, ofyne, mu, toiber. big, (1) till, until (time), as: I shall not come until to- %d) glaube, baft er ©elb Ijat, I believe that he has money. tenses. morrow (big morgen). 34-1 PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE. 45 ( 2 ) up to, as far as (fllace), as : He travelled with us as far as (61 8) Montreal. butd), through ; as : He rode through the forest (burdj ben SB alb). fur, for; as: That is for my friend (fiit tnetnen $reunb); the scissors are not a toy for children (fiit $inber). gcgen, towards, against (not necessarily denoting hos- tility), as : The enemy advanced towards (or against) the bridge (gcgen bte Sritcfe). uljne, without ; as : We cannot travel without money (oljne ©elb). UlU, (i) around, about; as: We drove around the town (urn bte Stabi). ( 2 ) at, about (, time ), as : He came at four o’clock (um bier Ufyr); it happened at (or about) Christmas (um 3Beil)nacfitcn). toiber, against ( opposition , hostility ), as: He swam against the stream (UsiOcr ben Strom); the soldiers were fighting against the enemy (miner ben geinb). Remark. — ©urd), fitr, and um are generally contracted with the Neuter of the unemphasized Definite Article, thus: burd; ba^ = burtf)3 (burcf)’S) fur baS = furS (fur’s) um baS = um8 (urn’s) Vocabulary. believe, glauben love, IteBen hope, Ijoffen buy, faufen laugh, Iad)en live, leben learn, lernen send, fcfytcfen play, fyielen sell, berfaufen make, do, rnac^en say, fa gen 46 LESSON IX. r§§ 34- weep, cry, toetnen bishop, ber SBi'fdjjof* German, ®eutfd) servant, ber ©ierter industry, diligence, ber $letf$ young lady, Miss, ba§ graulein cardinal, ber ^arbitral noise, ber Sarm Latin, ba§ Satein palace, ber pope, ber $apft * place, square, ber $Iat* * ring, ber 3itrtg walk, ber ©pa^ier'gcmg * time, bte 3d* good, kind, gut merry, merrily, lufitg sad, iraurtg that (conj.), baft because, toetl if, ftenn why, to arum' ? Idiom: to take a walk, eittett 0pajfergang ntadieti* Note. — A past tense after tuenn (‘if’) is put in the subj. mood. EXERCISE IX. A. 1. 3)ie ^arbinale unb 23ifcf)bfe toaren geftern im ifklafle be§ $ugfte§. 2. ©a§ grauleiti luirb biefe Stinge laufen, benn fie finb fd)6it. 3. ®er Staler itmrbe biefe§ ©emcilbe nicfrt berfaufen. 4. 3;dj) toiirbe biefen Sting lattfen, luenn id; veid^j tuare. 5. $at er e§ geglaubt? @r t>at e§ geglaubt, lueil fern SSater e§ gefagt f>at. 6. ®ie ©dottier l>aben Die! Sarnt gemacfit. 7. 22ir loben ben bungling, toeil er fleifsig ift. 8. ®er 3tbnig tuirb feine ©ene* tale gegen ben $cinb fcfnden. 9. 9Jteine ©cfytoefter iuirb §anb= fcfmlje laufen, benn ifyre §>anbfdj)uf}e finb fcfnecfyt. 10. 2Bir tuiirben fjeute einen ©pajiergang burd) bie ©tabt maiden, toenn ba§ Setter fdjbn tncire. 11. ©ie itmrben aucb einen ©pajiergang gemad;t Ijaben, toenn fie 3eit geljabt fatten. 12. ©ie ft>irb fagen, bajf id^ 9tecl)t Babe. 13. 3cb fyabe imtner gebofft, bag er lernen hutrbe. 14. ©ie liebt ifyren 93aier unb ifyre Gutter, benn fie finb gut. 15. @r itmrbe ba§ ©ernalbe nidjt gelobt Ijaben, benn ed tear nicfd fc^on. B. 1. What were they doing yesterday ? They were playing in the garden. 2. This gentleman will praise his servants, for they are industrious. 3. We have taken a walk about 35 ^ ENDINGS OF WEAK VERBS* 47 the town. 4. The squares in those cities are very fine. 5. Where were the daughters of the officers ? They were living in a convent. 6. Without industry we shall not learn much. 7. The boy was playing with the dog. 8. The gentleman has sold his horses and carriages. 9. What are the young ladies doing now? 10. Why was she crying? She was crying because she was sad. 11. They are laughing because they are merry. 12. We shall have learned much in a week. 13. I am laughing because the child is playing so merrily. 14. To-day we are learning German, to-morrow we shall learn Latin. 15. We have bought shoes and stockings for the beggars. ORAL EXERCISE IX. 1. Weshalb hat sie gelacht ? 2. Wer machte so viel Larm? 3. Wo haben die Fraulein einen Spaziergang gemacht ? 4. Was hat die Frau gekauft? 5. Weshalb hat seine Schwester Handschuhe gekauft? 6. Was werden wir morgen machen? LESSON X. WEAK VERBS (continued). DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES ? — 2>arf MODEL, OR PLURAL in ~er. 35. Endings of Weak Verbs in Simple Tenses. Present. Imperfect. Imperative. Indicative. SUBJUNCT. Ind. and Subj. Sing. 2. — c Sing. 1. — c — e — (c)te Plur . 2. — (e)t 2. — (C)ft -eji -(e)tc U Infinitive, 3. — (e)t — e — (e)te — en Plur. 1. — en — en — (c)feu Participles. ^ -(e)t — cf — (e)tft Pres. — ntb 3. — ctt — ut — (c)tcn Past. 0C— (C)i 48 LESSON X. Remarks. — i. Observe the following endings : (a) Final -t of the 3. sing, occurs only in the Pres. Indie. (b) The 2. sing, has -ft except in the Imperative. ( c ) The 2. plur. has -t throughout. 2. Verb-Stems in -b or -t (flj), or in -nt or -n preceded by another consonant, retain -c throughout after the stem, as : rcben, to speak. Pres. Ind. Imperfect. Imperative. Sing. 2 . bu rebeft Sing. 1. id) rebete Plur. 2 . rebet (tljr) 3. er rebet 2. bu rebeteft Plur. 2 . tljr rebet etc. Thus : arbeiten, to work : tef) arbeitete ; atmert, to breathe : bu atmeft ; regnen, to rain : eg regrtet. 3. Verb-Stems in a sibilant (8, fcj), jj, j, j) retain -c in the 2. sing. Pres. Ind. and Subj. only, as : tartjen, to dance : bu tanjfft ; retfert, to travel : bu reifbft. 4. Verb-Stems in -el and -er drop c of the stem before terminations in -c (i. e. in 1. sing. Pres. Ind., 1. and 3. sing. Pres. Subj., and 2. sing. Imper.), and, except in the Subjunc- tive, never insert c after l or it, as : tubeltt, to blame. Pres. Ind. Pres. Subj. Imperfect. id) table table idj tabelte, etc. bu tabelft tableft Imperative. er tabelt table table toir tabeln ta blen tabelt iljr tabelt tablet P. Part. fie tabeln tablcn getabclt 5. Foreign verbs in -tereit (~irett) do not take the prefix rje- in the P. Part., as ; ftub-ieren, to study : P. Part, ftubierl 37] declension: ©orf model. 49 (not ge-ftubiert) ; bombarbieren, to bombard: P. Part, bom* barbicrt. 6. Verbs with the prefixes be-, Ct-, em| 3 -, ettf-, ge-, bet-, get- also omit the prefix ge- in the P. Part., as : bejaljleit, P. Part, bcjaijft; berfdfhnenben, berfdjtoenbet. 36 . Declension of bag ©erf, the village. Singular . Norn. bag ©orf, the village Gen. beg ©orf(e)g, of the village Dat. bem ©orf(e), (to, for) the village Acc. bag ©orf, the village Plural . bte ©iirfer, the villages ber ©iirfer, of the villages ben ©iirfcrn, (to, for) the villages bte ©iirfer, the villages Remarks. — 1. The Singular is formed precisely as in the ©oljn model. (See § 21.) 2. Observe -cr of the Plural, with the additional -n of the Dative. 3. All Substantives of this Declension with a , 0, u or cm in the stem take Umlaut. 37 . In this way are declined : 1. Most neuter monosyllables (exceptions in App.E.). 2. Substantives ending in -t((j)uut. 3. Five neuters with prefix ©e-, viz. : bag ©emad), the apartment bag ©efyenft, the spectre bag ©emut, the temper, dis- bag ©etoanb, the garment position (also ©efid;t; see § 64) ba§ ©efc^lecfyt, the sex 4. Two foreign neuters, * viz. : bag Regiment, the regiment; bag ^otyital (or ©pital), the hospital. r LESSON X. [§ 37 So 5. The following nine masculines : ber Sbfetoidd, the villain ber ©eift, the spirit ber ©ott, the God ber £eib, the body ber 5Jlarm, the man, husband (Lat. vir) ber 9tanb, the edge, margin ber SSormurtb, the guardian ber Salb, the forest ber Surm, the worm (also ®orn, Drt ; see App. E.) Further examples (Sing, like ©ofyrt) : 2)ag ©cblof}, the castle, palace: Plur . n. g. a. ©dEdiiffcr, d. ©cfylofiertt. ©ag SSud;, the book : Plur . n. g. a. Sitdjer, d. 33u$erit. ®er 9Jiann, the man, husband: Plur . n. g. a. banner, p. SSJicinnern. ©ag $inb, the child : Plur . n. g. a. $inbet, D. ^inbern. ©ag §aug, the house : Plur . n. g. a. ^aufer, d. £>aufertt. Vocabulary. to row, rubern shake, fdhitteln waste, fcerfcfytoenben exercise, task, bie Slufgabe leaf, bag SBlatt egg, bag @i possession, property, bag ©gentum earth, bie ©rbe gardener, ber ©artner fowl, ba3 §ul)n child, bag $inb dress, bag $Ieib clothes, f)k of £Ietb song, bag £ieb courage, spirit, ber 5Rut woman, wife, bag Seib yellow, gelb enough, genug well (adv.), gut a long while, lange too, ju EXERCISE X. A. 1. §erbft Herbert bie flatter gelB, bertn bag Setter iji fait. 2. table biefe 9Jtabd?en, toeil fie ifyre 3tufgabe ni d;t ftubiert Ijaben. 3. Sinter ftubierien bie iguttglinge; im 1 § 37] DECLENSION : MODEL. 5 I (Sommer arbeiteien fie. 4. ruberft nid)t fd)neff genug, metn 33ruber," fagte id). 5. 3)ie[e banner liebert i£;re SBetber unb $inber. 6. 2)er£el)rer fagte, baj$ bie briber ju toiel 2arm marten. 7. ©er $onig rebete mii ben ©erteralert, unb lobte ben 2Jlut tfyrer fftegimenter. 8. S)te SSormunber biefer Slinber finb $5[emid)ter, benn fie fyabert ba§ ©tgentum ber $tnber fc>erfd)ft>enbet. 9. ®ie SBurmer leben in ber ©rbe, aber bie $ifd)e leben im 28affer. 10. 2Bo finb bie ©ter ber $ul)ner? ©ie ftnb in unferen $orben. 11. 25cf) toerbe mtibe, rnetf id) gegen ben ©from rubre. 12. S)er ^aifer fyat bie ©enerale gefabelt, aber il)re 3tegimenter I)at er gelobt. B. 1. The general has bombarded the town. 2. The woman was buying books and clothes for her children. 3. The gardener is shaking the apple-tree. 4. The children were learning songs. 5. The boy is industrious ; he has studied well. 6. The apartments of the palaces are magni- ficent, 7. It rained yesterday, but it will not rain to-day. 8. We have rowed a long while against the stream. 9. These men travelled through towns and villages. 10. The hospitals in London are large and fine. 11. The leaves of these trees are large and beautiful. 12. This gentleman would buy my houses, if he had money enough. ORAL EXERCISE * 1. Weshalb werden die Blatter gelb? 2. Wessen Regi- menter hat der Konig getadelt? 3. Was sagte der Lehrer? 4. Wo leben die Wiirmer? 5. Was lernten die Kinder? 6. Wiirde dieser Herr das Hau^ kanfen ? 52 LESSON XI. [§§ 33 - LESSON XI. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 38 . Declension of Personal Pronouns. First Person. * Sing. N. id), I G. meiner (mein), of me D. mir, (to, for) me A. mid), me Plur . N. fair, we G. unfer (unfrer), of us D. un§, (to, for) us A. un£, us Third Person. Singular . Second Person, bu, thou beiner (bein), of thee bir, (to, for) thee bid;, thee t£)V, ye, you euer (eurer), of you eud), (to, for) you eud;, you MASC. FEM. N. er, he G. feiner{fein), of him' D. if;m,(to,for) him A. iljn, him fie, she tf^rer (ifyr), of her i^r, (to, for) her fie, her NEUTER. e§, it feiner (fein, e 3 ), of it il;m,(to, for) it e3, it REFLEXIVE (ALL genders). fid), (to, for) himself, herself, itself fid), himself, herself, itself Plural . N. fie, they G. ifyrer (iljr), of them D. i tmen, (to, for) them A. fie, them Remarks. — i. The forms mein, bein, fein, if)r, unfrer, eurer are poetical or archaic. 2. The form e§ of the 3. sing. gen. neuter is only used in cer- tain phrases, as : bin C0 miibe, I am tired of it. FOR ALL GENDERS ft$, (to, for) them- selves fid), themselves 39] IDOMATIC USES OF e3. 53 3. The gen. and dat. of the 3. sing, neuter do not occur, except when referring to persons (e. g. SJtabcfyen, grautein). 4. The Pronouns of the 3. sing, must agree in gender with the substantive to which they refer, as : §aft bu ben iQut? Hast thou the hat ? $aft bu bic Slurne? Hast thou the flower ? 2Bo iff ba$ 3Kdb$en? Where is the girl ? 3U is used only in addressing persons with whom we are very intimate, or towards whom we use no ceremony; also in addressing the Supreme Being, as : SBo bift bit, lieber greunb ? Where are you, dear friend? 2Ba3 macfyft bit, mein Stub? What are you doing, my child? SEir loben $>idj, 0 ©ott ! We praise Thee, o God ! 55 ^ REFLEXIVE AND RECIPROCAL PRONOUNS. 2. (plur. of btt) is used in addressing a number of per- sons, each of whom we should address by feu, as : 2Ba3 met#! iljr, $ittber? What are you doing, children? 3. In all other cases we use for ‘you’ in German, whether sing, orplur., the pronoun of the Third Plural : ©ie, %i)XCV, .QljUCit, ©ie, distinguished by a capital letter . (See also § 43-) 41. Paradigm of loScit with Reflexive Pronouns. Present Indicative. Sing. 1. id) lobe tni$, 2. bu lobft bid), 3. er ) fie > lobt ft ti), e3 ) I praise myself thou praisest thyself he \ ( himself she Upraises ■< herself it ) ( itself Plur . 1. loir loben nn§, we praise ourselves 2. t()r lobt Club/ ye praise yourselves 3. fie loben fid), they praise themselves So throughout the verb, as: Perfect: ^ d ) l;abe mid^> gelobt, bu $aft bidE> gel obt, er ^at fi$ gelobt, etc. 42. Reflexive and Reciprocal Pronouns — fcfijfh 1. The Pronouns of the First and Second Persons express reflexive action without a special form, as shown by the above paradigm, but those of the Third Person have the form (1$. 2. These pronouns are also used in the Plural to express reciprocal action, as : We met each other ; they will see each other again. ffiBir begegneten uu£; fie toerben fi$ ftheberiefyen. LESSON XI. 56 But when, to prevent ambiguity, it is necessary to dis- tinguish reciprocal from reflexive action, we use eimtltbcr as the reciprocal pronoun for all persons, thus : We love each other (one another), 3S$ir Ixebert cittattbcr. (2Btr Hebert U11§ might mean e we love ourselves .’) 3. To emphasize and strengthen the reflexive pronouns, and give them an exclusive sense, as well as further to distin- guish them from reciprocal pronouns, the indeclinable word felflft (or felbcr) is used, as: Know yourselves, ©rfennet cud) fclbft. (Srfertnet end) might mean 4 know one another l) He has injured himself, @r Ijat fid; fclfift befd)dbigt. Remark. — This word felbft is in apposition to the subject (or object, as the case may be), as : ©er $onig fel&ff iff uid )t immer gfudlicfy. The king himself is not always happy. It is also used adverbially (== Eng. 4 even ’), as: Even the king is not always happy. ©rib ft ber $bnig iff nid)t immer gludUcfy. Vocabulary. behave one’s self properly (of children), artig fein meet, begegnen (dat.) visit, befud)en pay, be§ab>Iert have finished (with), fertig fein mit belong (to), gefyoren (dat.) be ashamed of, ficfy fcfydmen (gen.) seat one’s self (sit down), fid) fe^en punish, ftrafen work, labour, bie Sfrbeit parents, bie ©Item (no sing.) patience, bie ©ebulb gentleman, master, Mr., ber hat, bonnet, ber §ui* [§en John, ^o^ann Charles, $arl §42] REFLEXIVE AND RECIPROCAL PRONOUNS. 57 uncle, ber D'fyeim dollar, ber Staler artist, ber Sunftler Mary, Sftarie away, gone, fort here, I;ier ever, at any time, je, jemalS never, nie, niemaU EXERCISE XI. A. 1 . Set artig Sari, bu mac^ft ju t)iel Sarm. 2. -Sene banner ftnb fefyr reici;, benn biefe £>aufer geljoren ifynen. 3. ©effort b a§ 5{5ferb $$nen? 9tein, e3 gefyort mir nid;t, e§ gel)ort bem Dffijier. 4. Unfer Dljeim fyat un§ 23ud£)er gefauft. 5. §abt ©ebulb. Sin* ber, id£) toerbe eud£) morgen Sfyfel unb 9Wiffe faufen. 6. toerbe morgen einen (Spa§teraang mit $bnen macben. 7. @r glaubt, baf$ id) mir ba§ ^3ferb gefauft I;abe. 8. 9J?orgen fterben toir einen geier* tag I)a ben, unb loir toerben unfre ©Item befudjen. 9. Sr fagen, bafi if)re Gutter fort ift. 10. 2$aren ©ie jemal3 in biefer Sirdfye? gd; Sarnie barin. 11. Sari unb ^ofyann begegneten fid; geftern im SBalbe. 12. gft $$r 33ater nod; Irani? 9?ein, mein SSater ift jetjt toobl. 13. ik'arie, liebft bit beine ©Item? %a, unbfie lieben mid; aud). 14. ^d) hntrbe einen ©hajiergang ^I)nen macfyen, toenn id; $eit I;dtte. 15. £>at ber £el;rev SJtarie getabelt? 3 a, er §at fie getabelt. 16. ©ie ©driller loben fid) felbft, toeil fie ifyre 2lufgabe fo fdmeU gemad;t babcn. 17. 2Bir toiirben un3 felbft and) loben, toenn loir unfre Sltifgabe gemacbt fatten. 18. ©r Vuurbe fidE) fd;dmen, toenn er nut feiner ?Iufgabe nid;t fertig toare. 19. SBeSfyalb loben biefe Sunftler einanber? ©ie loben einanber, toeil ifyre ©emalbe fdfjon ftnb. 20. ©inb ©ie mit meiner 2lrbeit jufrieben? s JJein, id) bin ni qt bamit jufrieben. B. 1. Is the table large ? \ No, it is small. 2. Her father has bought her a ring. 3. Were the fishes in your basket? Yes, they were in it. 4. Who has told it [to] her? 5. John, have you my shoes ? No, I have them not. 6. We sit down because we are tired. 7. Even the beggars of this city have shoes and stockings. 8. Who has bought this hat? 9. I bought it myself in the city, and paid four dollars for it. 10. 58 LESSON XII. * m 43- Charles and his teacher love each other very much. 11. Mother, have you bought me apples or nuts ? 12. Mr. A., here is a chair for you ; sit down. 13. Has the teacher blamed him? Yes, he had not done his exercise. 14. Do you believe that this milk is good ? Yes, it is very good. 15. The teacher is ashamed of her, because she has not finished (with) her work. ORAL EXERCISE XI. 1. Wiirden sie einen Spaziergang mit mir machen ? 2. Weshalb loben Sie sich so viel ? 3. Was sagten Sie mir ? 4. Sind Sie mit meiner Arbeit zufrieden ? 5. Was werden wir morgen machen ? 6. Werden Sie morgen Ihre Eltern besuchen ? LESSON XII. POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. -USE OF ARTICLES. 43 . Possessive Adjectives. First Person. Second Person. Sing, mein, my beitt, thy Plur. imfcr, our cuer, your Third Person. MASC. FEM. NEUTER. ALL GENDERS. Sing, fein, his (its) ibr, her (its) fetU, its Plur. iljr, their Poss. Adj. of Polite Address : ${jr. Remarks. — i. The Possessive Adjectives are the Genitive Cases of the respective Personal Pronouns, declined after the mein Model. (See § 8, above.) 2 . Unfer and cuer may drop e of the stem when inflected ; or they may drop c of the termination, unless the termination is -e or -er, as : uvtfcre or unfre ; urtfere£, unfrc3 or unfer§. 3. Observe the correlatives of the Pronouns of Address: bit — bein 44l USE OF THE ARTICLES. 59 Thus we say : bu tyaft bettte 9Iufgabe gelernt, tljr I)abt cure „ „ ©te fyaben ;§ljrc „ „ } you have learnt your lesson Note. — The last example shows the use of the Pers. Pron. and Poss. Adj. of Third Plural as Pronoun of Address. 4. Observe also the correlatives of the Third Person : Referring to subst. masc . sing . fettt jwhether animate “ “ “ fem . “ iljr ) or inanimate " “ ki neuter “ feitt “ tosubsts. plur. (all genders) ifjt Thus we say : 2>er £>unb tyat fctitcit $no$en fcerlorert (lost) S)ic 33 lume „ ifjre flatter „ 2>a§ 23 ud; „ feitte „ „ 5. The possessive adjectives agree in gender with both the possessor and the thing possessed. The termination will depend on the gender (number and case) of the substantive they qualify (the thing possessed ) ; the ste?n (as above) on the gender of the substantive to which they refer (the possessor ). Note. — Feminine diminutives, such as: 3ftcib(f)en, girl, grcutlein, young lady, generally take the possessive adjective referring to them in the feminine, agreeing with the sex rather than the gender, as: 2)a3 s JEftabd)ett tiebt ifjre gutter. The girl loves her mother. For Possessive Pronouns, see Less. XXIII. 44. Use of the Articles. The Definite Article is required in German, contrary to English usage, in the following cases : 1. Before all substantives used in the full extent of their signification (i. e. in a general as well as in a par- ticular sense); hence 6o LESSON XII. [§ 44 (a) Before nouns (sing, or plur.) denoting a whole class, as : Set 2Kenf$ ift fterblid), Man is mortal; Sic SSogel fya&en defter. Birds have nests. ( b ) Before names of materials, abstract nouns, etc., used in their unlimited sense, not partitively, as : Sa§ ©lag ift burdjficfhtg. Glass is transparent; Sag ©olb ift foertoofter alg bag ©ilber. Gold is more valuable than silver ; but : @db unb Sillier t;af>e id) nicfyt, Gold and silver I have not (have none of). Sic 9tot ift bie stutter bet ©rfinbung. Necessity is the mother of invention; Sic SJcufi! ift eine 3\unft, Music is an art ; but : ©r ftubiert SJJufif, He studies music (limited sense). Note. — In Proverbs and Enumerations this article is omitted, as: $ot fennt !etn Oebot, Necessity knows no law; SKuftf unb 2Raleret ftitb fcfyone $iin(te, Music and painting are fine arts. 2 . Before names of mountains, lakes, seas, rivers, forests, streets, seasons, months and days of the week, as: 2)cr 33efut>, Mount Vesuvius. SDcr Ontario, Lake Ontario. 5)ic S^emfe, the Thames. SDcr ©peffart, the (forest of) Spessart 2>ic gfriebricfyftrafte, Frederick Street. § 44 ] USE OF THE ARTICLES. 61 3m grilling, in spring. Scr ^anuar ift fait, January is cold. Sim Stontag, on Monday. Also before §ttnmel, Cstbe, §oHe, as : ^nt £>immel, in heaven ; ^ur @rbe, to earth ; and before places of public resort, as : $ur ©cfyule geljeit, to go to school. 3>cf) tear in bcr Sfircfye, I was at church. 3. Before names of countries when not neuter, or when preceded by an adjective, as: Sic ©djihxt 5, Switzerland. 2 >o§ fdjone gtanfreid), fair France. Note. — Further information on the article with Proper Names is given in §§ 73, 74, 76. 4. The English Indefinite Article is replaced by the Definite Article in German when used distributively (= each), as: gtoeimal be§ twice a year. ®rei Staler bie ©He, three dollars a yard. 5. The Indefinite Article is omitted before the unqualified predicate after fern or toerben, as : ©r ift (tourbe) ©olbat, he is (became) a soldier ; but: ©r ift cut ta^ferer ©olbat, he is a brave soldier. 6. (a) The Definite Article replaces the Possessive Adjective when no ambiguity would result as to the pos- sessor, as : ©r ftecfte bie §cmb in bie £afcfje. He put bis hand into his pocket; ©r fcfmttelt ben He shakes his head. 62 LESSON XII. [5 44 ©eben ©ie mir bie §anb, Give me your hand. ( b ) With parts of the person, clothing, etc., the Dative of the Personal Pronoun -f- Definite Article replace the Pos- sessive Adjective, as : ©in ©tem fiel iljm auf ben $opf, A stone fell on his head ; ©in 9iagel I)at mtr ben 9to cf gerrtffen, A nail has torn my coat. Note. — If the subject is the possessor, the rejlexive pronoun is used, as : (Sr Ijat ftcl) in ben ginger gefdjnitten, He has cut his finger. Vocabulary. to cost, foften hurt, wound, berlei$en cry, weep, toeinen draw, jeicfynen doctor, physician, ber Sfrjt* axe, bie # A K £ t mountain, hill, ber 33erg lead-pencil, ber SSIeifttft iron, ba3 ©ifen window, b genfter wing, ber glugel purse, ber ©clbbeutel hope, bie §offnung merchant, ber ^aufmann farewell, (ba3) Sebetoof?! master, ber SJteifter Mont Blanc, ber 9Jlont 33lanc music, bie 3JUtfif coat, ber 9?oc!* Schiller-street, bie ©cfjiller* ftraf$e J <2 i ,r $e tailor, ber ©cfyneiber cloth, ba§ ©ucf) exercise, practice, bie Ubung hot, be if* light, leicf)t dear, teuer as, when, al3 often, oft EXERCISE XII. A. 1. ilbung mafyt ben 3Jteifter. 2. ©ie SJtufif unb bie 9)?alerei finb ^unfte. 3. $inber, fyabt if>r eure 2tufgaben gemac£)t? 3 a / mir fyaben fie gemacbt. 4. ©er 9Jtont 33Ianc ift ein 23erg in ber ©cfymeij. 5. 3ft biefe£ £ucfy teuer? 3 a / ^ foftet brei X^aler § 44 ] USE OF ARTICLES. 63 bie @lle. 6. 3)te 9Jtutter fc^icft tfjre Kinber jur ©$ule. 7. §aben ©ie ©olb in 2$rem ©elbbeutel? fyabe !ein ©olb, aber icfy fyabe ©tlber. 8. 2Ba§ lernt ba£ 30?abd)en? ©ie lernt tljre 2luf* gabe. 9. T>er 33ater fcfjutielte feinem ©ofme bie iganb unb fagie ifym Sebetootyl. 10. S)ie gliigel ber SSogel ftnb fe^r Ieicfyt unb ftarf. 11. §at ber ©djneiber S^ren Stotf na d) £aufe gefcfjicft? 12. Slein, er fyat iljn nod) nicfyt gef deleft, aber er totrb ifyrt morgen fd;iden. 13. Unfere ©Item reiften in ®eut[cf)lanb unb in ber ©cfytoeij. 14. guli ift ba§ SSetter oft fefyr fyetft. 15. ®a§ ©ifen luirb rot, toenn e§ fjeiji toirb. 16. ©lauben ©ie, baft id} 9f ed£)t fyabe? 17. Karl uerle^te fi d) bie §anb, al§ er mit einer 2ljt arbeitete. 18. %d) frmrbe ©olbat toerben, toenn id) alt genug todre. 19. 2Bir tulirben greunbe gcfyabi tyaben, toenn loir reic^ geiuefen todren. j B. 1. Gold is yellow, but silver is white. 2. Mary is studying music and painting. 3. Are your parents still living in Frederick-Street ? 4. No, they are now living in Schiller-Street. 5. Mont Blanc is a mountain in Switzerland. 6. The girl is crying; she has hurt her hand. 7. Is your father a doctor ? No, he is a merchant. 8. Glass is trans- parent, and we make windows of it. 9. What are you doing with your lead-pencil ? I am drawing a flower with it. 10. The emperor is satisfied with his generals. 11. I blame you, because you are not industrious. 12. What are you drawing now ? I am drawing a bird. 13. Why are you crying, my child? 14. The doctor shook his head, for he had no hope. 15. Would you buy a horse, if you were rich ? 16. Miss B. has sent her mother a present. 17. The girl will visit her parents. ORAL EXERCISE XII. 1. 1st das Gold weisz ? 2. Weshalb weint das Madchen? 3. Werden Sie sich ein Haus kaufen ? 4. Sind Sie Soldat? 5. Wo wohnen Sie jetzt ? 6. Was machen Sie mit Ihrem Gelde? 6 4 LESSON XIII. LESSON XIII. CONSTRUCTION OF SENTENCES: PLACE OF OBJECTS, AD- VERBS, etc. - INDIRECT NARRATION. - PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE DATIVE ONLY. 45. Rules for Position of Objects, Adverbs, etc. Rule i. {a) Pronouns first of all, unless governed by a preposition, when they come after all other objects, ad- verbs, etc. {b) Adverbs or Adverbial Expressions of Time precede everything except Pronouns without Prepositions, thus : 1 2 3 4 5 {Germ.) fcfjicfte iljm geffern (biefe Shufje) einen Srtef, 1 2 3 4 5 {Engl?) I sent him a letter yesterday (this week); but: 1 2 3 4 5 {Germ?) fcf)icfte geftcrn einen Srtef an iljn, 1 2 3 4 5 {Engl.) I sent a letter to him yesterday; 1 2 3 4 5 6 {Germ?) %$) fyabe c£ fjeitfe metner ©cfytoefter gefcfyicft, 1 2 3 4 5 G {Engl.) I have sent it to my sister to-day. Rule 2 . Of Nouns, persons (unless governed by pre- positions) before things , as : 1 2 3 4 5 {Germ?) $5$ fcfyicfte geftern meincrn Safer einen Srief, 1 2 3 4 6 {Engl.) I sent my father a letter yesterday; but: 1 2 3 4 5 {Germ?) fcfncfte ge[tern einen Srief an meinen Safer, 1 2 8 4 5 (Engl.) I sent a letter to my father yesterday. 46 ] PLACE OF OBJECTS, ETC. 65 Rule 3. Of Pronouns, Personal before all other Pro- nouns, as : 3 $ Ijabe iljm bug (Demonstr. Pron.) gegeben, I have given him that. Rule 4. Of Personal Pronouns, Direct Object before Indirect Object, as : 1 2 3 4 6 {Germ.) fyabe eg tfpu gegeben, 1 2 8 4 5 ( Engl . ) I have given it to him. Rule 5. Adverbs of place, cause and manner follow ob- jects in the order named, as : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 {Germ.) @r Ijat bag SBucfj ju |>aufc feljr ficipg ftubiert, 1 2 3 4 5 6 (. Engli ) He has studied the book very diligently 7 at home. Remember: i. That in compound tenses all these objects, adverbs, etc., come between the auxiliary and the participle or infinitive. 2. That any of these members of a sentence may occupy the Jirst place instead of the subject, especially an adverb of time, etc., and that the subject (see § 20, Obs. 2) is then thrown after the verb, as : 1 2 3 4 5 ©eftern fcfyid'te id) iljm etnen 23rtef. 1 2 8 4 5 2>icfe fdjirfte id; etnen 23rtef an tfyn. 46 . Prepositions governing the Dative only. 2lu$, nufter, bet, t nit, tt ad), feit, bon, $u govern the Dative Case. dug, (1) out of (motion), as: He came out of the house (aug bent §auje). 65 LESSON XIII. [§48 ( 2 ) of ( made of), as: This house is built of wood (ott8 §oIj). (3) from ( origin ), as: He comes from England (ait£ (Snglanb) ; from the town (au3 bcr ©tabt). (4) from (< cause ), as : I did it from fear (au§ $urd;t). GUjjer, (1) outside of (rest), as : The table is standing out- side of the room (au§er bent ^burner). (2) except, besides, but, as: I had nothing except (besides, but) my stick (au§er rnetncm ©tode). 6ct, (1) (near) by, as : The chair stands (near) by the table (bei bent or 6etm£ifdje). (2) at (the house , etc., of, = Fr. ekes), with, as : He lives at the house of (or: with) his uncle (or: at his uncle’s), er toofmt bet feinetn Ditfel. (3) about (one’s person), with, as : I have no money about (with) me (bci tntr). tnit, with, as : He is coming with (along with) his friend (wit feinent gteunbe) ; he struck the dog with a stick (tnit etnent ©tocfe). Had), (1) after (time, order), as : He arrived after his brother (nad) feinent ©ruber). (2) to (with names of places ), as : He is going to Quebec (uadj Quebec); to England (mujj (gnglanb); home- wards) (natf) §aufe). (3) according to (often follows its case in this sense), as : This is wrong according to my opinion (nad) metner SJleinung, or meiner SOteinung narfj). felt, since, as : He has not been here since the war (felt bent $rtege) ; felt ^unbert for the last hundred years. §46] PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE DATIVE ONLY. 67 (1) from, as : He has just come from dinner (turn bem, 1 10 m S)iittag3ejfen). (2) of, as : We were speaking of our mother (bon unferct STiuiter). (3) ^ ( w ^b personal agent after the passive voice), as : Children are loved by their parents (bon ifyreit @liern). JU, (1) to (persons), as : He went to his friend, or to his friend’s (ju feinein ^reunbe) ; he spoke to me (ju mir). (2) to (places, if not proper names ; see na$, above), as: He was going to the town (jn ber, or jnr Stabt). (3) at (with proper names of towns only), as : He lives at Ottawa (ju Dttatoa); at home (ju §aufe). Remarks. — i. Set, bon and ju (and sometimes auf$er) are contracted with the Dative Sing. Masc. and Neuter of the unemphasized Definite Article, thus : bet bem= betm, bon bem = bom, ju bem = jum ; ju is also contracted with the Dat. Sing. Fern., thus : ju ber =' jitr. 2. The -e of the Dat. Sing, is never used when a preposi- tion (except ju) stands before a substantive without an article, pronoun or adjective preceding, as: cm 3 §olj, of wood; mit g[etf$, on purpose ; but nndj §aufe, home ; ju §aufe, at home. 3. Observe the following : (Germ.) Eer 33rtef metncS DnfelS, (Engl.) The letter of my uncle = My uncle’s letter. (Germ.) Eer 33rtef bon moment Dnfel, (Engl.) The letter from my uncle. The English preposition of with a substantive must gen- erally be rendered in German by a Genitive case without a preposition, whenever it can be turned into the English Posses- sive case, as above ; otherwise by bon, as : 63 LESSON XIII. [§46 He was speaking of his mother (turn I’cincr 3Jt utter). 4 . Observe also the following : (Engl.) Show the book to me = Show me the book, (Germ.) .geigen ©ie inif bag 23 ud; (Dat. without Preposition). The English preposition to with a substantive must be rendered in German by the Dative without a preposition when- ever the subst. can be turned into the English Indirect Objec- tive, as above ; otherwise (generally) by the preposition ju, as: He spoke to me (ju mir). Vocabulary. to answer, antioorten honour, efyren show, jeigen picture, bag 23ilb letter, ber SSrief Germany, ©eutfcfslanb present, bag ©efdjenf glass, bag ©lag war, ber $rieg dinner, bag 9)lit'taggeffen journey, bie Dieife Roman, ber Corner aunt, bie 2kmte thankful, grateful, banfbar (gov. dat.) ready, finished, fertig quiet, still, ftitt there, ba Idiom : It is I, 3d) bin cd* EXERCISE XIII. A. 1. <3eit bem $riege firtb meine ©tftlociger feftr arm. 2. SSir ftaben ung jiuei §aufer in ber ©tabt gefauft. 3. 28 o ift beine Sfufgabe? §ier ift fie. 4. 2Bir marten nad) bem SRittaggeffen einen Spajiergang mit unfcreit ©aften. 5. 2Jiein 23gter Ijat mir ein ©efdjenf gefdjidt uttb id) bin ifmt bafiir fefjr banfbar. 6. 23ift bu mit beiner Strbeit fertig ? ■JJein, idf) bin nod) nidjt bamit ferttg. 7. 2Bir toerben morgen mit gljnen nad; 2Rontreal reifen. 8. ®arf lernt feit bier SRonaten ®eutfd). 9. „©et5t eud; unb feib ftiff," fagte bie 2Rutter ju if>ren 2u5d)tern. 10. 2Biirben Sie biel fiir biefe Sutler bejaljfen ? gcfi tourbe fiinfiEIjaler bafiir bejaljlen. 11. §46] PREPOSITIONS WITH DATIVE. 69 ©inb bte 3Kabd^en ju £aufe? 3 a, tyre 9J?utter ftyidte fie urn fiinf lll)r nacfy §aufe. 12. @[;re beinen SSater unb betne Shutter. 13. S3et meinem Dnfel rebeten fair immer bid bom $rtege. 14. ©inb ©ie e§, §err ©tymibt? $a, id) bin e§. 15. §aben ©ie in ©eutfd;Ianb bid SSergmigen gei)abt? ©ie fagen nicfyt bid bon Sfyrer SReife. 16. 33ei 3^men I)aben immer biel 33er* gniigen. 17. ©iefer SJZann lobt fid) ju biel. 18. 3JJeine Jante if i i efct bei mir; id; toerbe tyr bie ©tabt jeigen. 19. SJiein Sruber itnb meine ©d)ftefter finb gu £aufe. 20. 23aS toiirben ©ie fur biefe ©Infer bejctyten ? 3 d ) tolirbe nid;t biel baflir bejctylen. B . 1. Here is my uncled letter. 2. Is he for me or against me ? 3. Our servant is from Germany. 4. 4 Buy me an apple/ said the child to its mother. 5. Have you sold your horses ? 6. The teacher speaks of the gods of the Romans. 7. Charles, you have answered well, sit down. 8. My son always sends me the newspaper from Chicago. 9. My friend showed me his pictures. 10. Buy me this ring ; it is mag- nificent. 11. Who is in the garden ? It is she. 12. I be- lieve that Charles has bought himself a hat. 13. Here is the letter from my uncle. 14. I am ashamed of you, because you are not industrious. 15. My father would send me to the city, if I were old enough. ORAL EXERCISE XIII. 1. Weshalb schamen Sie sich meiner ? 2. 1st es Karl oder sein Bruder ? 3. Seit wann lernen Sie Deutsch ? 4. Wer hat mir diese Zeitung geschickt? 5. Was machte ich nach dem Mittagsessen i 6. Wo hat mein Vater dieses Buch gekauft? 70 SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON A. [§§ 47 - SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON A. ADDITIONAL REMARKS ON PERSONAL PRONOUNS AND PREPOSITIONS. 47. Pronouns in Address. 1. The pronouns tJU and tljt are the usual pronouns of address in foetry and the drama , if)V being used for one person or more, as : 2)er SBecfjer ift bcin, Unb biefeit S^ing nod) bcftimm’ id) bir, The goblet is thine, And this ring too I’ll keep for thee. (Schiller, „$er $cm$er.*) 2a6t, $ater, genug fein ba§ gvaufamc @piel. ( 5 r t)at eud) beftanbert, ioa8 feiner beftebt, # Hub fonnt i(jr be 3 ©elufteu nid)t cabmen, u. f. to., Enough, father, of this cruel sport. He has ventured for you what none will venture, And if you cannot subdue the desire of your heart, etc. (Ibid,) 2. @r and Sie (3. sing.) were formerly regularly used as pronouns of address towards inferiors, with the verb agreeing in 3. sing., and they are often found so used in the classics, being spelt with a capital. Their use may imply contempt; so Faust says to his servant Wagner, who is otherwise addressed as „if)r" : 0 ei (Sr fern fd)dlenlauter STfjor, Don’t be a jingling fool. (Goethe, ^auft.") 3. (Sr and @ie, also il)r, are still used in complimentary address, correspon- ding to the polite use of ©ie (3. plur.), by people of the lower orders. 48. The forms meine§gleicf)Cl1, beineSgleicfjeit, etc., = 4 a person, or persons, like me, you,’ etc. (vulg. ‘the like of me ’), are used as indeclinable substantives, either as object or as predicate, as : 2Bir toerbett feincgglcidjen nte toicber feben, We ne’er shall look upon his like again. £>u bift nid)t nmne£gleid)en, You are not (a person) like me (my equal). (For the use of be$gleid)en, bergletdjen, see §§97, 139.) 49. In addressing persons of rank, the proper title, as : ®naben, •Your Honour’; (Sure (abbrev. (£u>.) (§£ceUen$, ‘Your Excellency’; ( 5 ur? PREPOSITIONS WITH DATIVE. 51 ] 7 T 2 )urcf)faucfjt, ‘Your Serene Highness’; (Sure Sftajeftat, ‘ Your Majesty,’ etc., is used, also without the poss. adj., and with the verb in the plur. It was this plur. use of complimentary titles that gave rise to the use of ©ie as the pronoun of polite address. The old forms 3 f)ro, SDero, are now obsolete. 50 . Prepositions with Accusative. 1. The preposition fonfccr takes the accusative^ but is of rare occurrence. 2. ©egen has an obsolete form gett, now used only in certain phrases, as: geit pummel, heavenwards; gcu Corbett, northwards, etc. 3. £)f)lte has a dative in the phrase ofynefcott, ‘ at any rate.* 4. S8i§ may be followed by another preposition, indicating motion or direction to (itctd), gu, an, auf, etc.) ; if this preposition is one governing dat. or acc., it will always take the accusative when combined with bi§, as : The following additional prepositions take the Dative only : 1. SBimten, within (of time), as: SBiltneit gttfei Stagen, within two days. Notes. — 1. Simten sometimes governs the genitive. 2. 93tnncn is used of time only; innerljalb (see § ) of space and time. 4- ©Cgenu&er, opposite (to), follows the case, as : $cm £f)ore-gegemiber, opposite the gate. Note. — The case is sometimes placed between the two parts of the preposition, as: gegen bent SC^ore tiber ; but this is not to be imitated. 5. ©Cmtifb according to, agreeably to, precedes or follows its case, ass ©einem 2Bunfd)e gentdjg (or gemdg feinem SBunfcfje), Agreeably to his desire. 6. ©leicf), like, precedes or follows its case, as : ©ie ladjelte gfeidj einem (Srtgel (einent (§ngel gletdf)) # She smiled like an angel. (Sr ging bis an’S £f)or, he went as far as the gate. 51 . Prepositions with Dative. # I Seiner 9?eiguitg entgegen (guroiber), l contrary to my inclination. 7. 9 ?a(f)flor Stntddjfl j- next to (1) of proximity (= Itcbetl), as : LESSON XIV. [§§5I- (£r jag nacf)ft mtr (or mtr aunadjff). He sat next to me. ( 2 ) of succession, as : 9?ddjft kern Men ttebt er bte G$:ljve, Next to life he loves honour. Note. — 3uniicf)ft usually follows its case ; rttidjft is the commoner of the two as pre- position, especially in the senses under ( 2 ). 9^ Stunt 1 t0 £ ether with > alop s with > as : $er §err fam rtcbfi feincrn greunbe, The gentleman came along with his friend. 2 )er ter famt jeinen $ittbent, The father together with his children. Note i. Distinguish nebft, along with, and rte&ett (alongside of, near). 2 . tr toiirben i^r toiirbet fie toiirben > fcin Subjunctive. er toerbe toir toerben iljr toerbet fie toerben Future Perfect. (Future of fcin + P. Part.) I shall have been, etc. id) toerbe bu toerbeft er toerbe toir toerben iljr toerbet fie toerben Conditional. Compound. (Simple Cond. of fcin + Past Part.) I should have been, etc. idj toiirbe bu toiirbeft er toiirbe toir toiirben iljr toiirbet fie toiirben gctocfen fcin Imperative, fei (bu), be (thou) feib (iljr), be (ye) Indicative. (ju) fein, (to) be gctocfcn (ju) fein, to have been. Participles. Past . gensefett, been Pres, feienb, being Remarks. — i. Observe the absence of the Subjunctive -e in the i, and 3. sing. Pres. 53] use of fein as auxiliary of tense. 75 2. The above paradigm shows the use of fetlt in forming its own perfect tenses, in precisely the same way as fyabert is used with most verbs, ©eiit is used in the same way with the verbs mentioned in the following Section. 53. Use of fein as Auxiliary of Tense. ©eitl replaces Ijaben as auxiliary of the perfect tenses with the following neuter verbs : (a) With those expressing a change of condition, as: fterben, die toacfyfen, grow genefen, recover (from illness) tnerben, become. ( b ) With neuter verbs of motion when a change of place is specified or implied, as : fasten, drive, go (in a conveyance) fommen, come geljen, go, walk jiefyen, move, go, proceed. (c) ©cin, to be; Bleiben, to remain; Begegnen, to meet; folgen, to follow. ( d ) The impersonal verbs : gelingen, gluien, to succeed; gefdjeljen, to happen. Remarks. — i. The proper auxiliary to use with such verbs is always given in the dictionary. 2. Other verbs of this sort only take fein when the change of place is specified. 3. Most of them (except fommen) take fyaben when they denote an action merely, and not a specific change of place, as: 6r fyat biel gereift, he has travelled a great deal. 4. Compounds do not necessarily take the same auxiliary as the simple verb. Thus, Begefyen, being transitive, takes fyaben, the prefix changing the nature of the verb. 76 54. LESSON XIV. 54- Declension of ber ^italic, the boy. Singular. Nom. ber $nabe, the boy Gen. be£ Slnaben, the boy’s, of the boy Dat. bem $naben, (to, for) the boy Acc. ben $naben, the boy Plural. bie $naben, the boys ber ^nabett, the boys’, of the boys ben $naben, (to, for) the boys bie $naben, the boys Observe : i. All cases end in -n, except Nom. Sing. 2. No Umlaut added in Plural. 3. The only change is the addition of -n. Remark. — The Plural ox-en is a remnant of the -n declen- sion in English. 55. Substantives ending in a consonant add -en, as : Singular. Plural. Nom. ber ©raf, the count bte ©rafcn, the counts Gen. be3 ©rafcn, of the count ber ©rafeil, of the counts Dat. bem ©rafcn, (to, for) the ben ©rafcn, (to, for) the count counts Acc. ben ©rafcn, the count bie ©rafcn, the counts 56. Feminines do not vary in the singular, as : Smgular. Plural. Nom. bie Slume, the flower bie Slumett, the flowers Gen. ber SSIumc, of the flower ber SSIumen, of the flowers Dat. ber 33Iumc, (to, for) the ben S3lumen, (to, for) the flower flowers Acc. bie SBhtme, the flower bie Slumen, the flowers. 57. In this way are declined : 1. All masculines ending in-c, except ber $afe, cheese (see § 17), and the doubtful ones in § 61. 57 ] declension : — $nabe model. 77 2. Certain masculines which have dropped the final -c, as: ber 23 ar, bear ber Jpelb, hero ber Sauer, peasant ber ^err, gentleman, master ber Gfyrift, Christian ber §irt(e), herdsman, shep- ber ©efefi(e), fellow, companion, herd journeyman ber SFlenfcf), man (human be- ber @raf, count ing = Lat. homo) A full List of these Substantives is given in App. F. 3. All feminines, except SJtutter, £o$ter (§ 17, 3), the monosyllables under § 22, 3, and those in -ni$ and -lat (22, 4 )- 4. No Neuters (but see §§ 62, 63). 5. Foreign Masculines accented on the last syllable, except those in -al, -ait, -at, etc. (§22, 6). Further Examples : Like $na&e : Singular . Plural. n. ber Sole, messenger g. d. a. 93 oten n. G. d. a. Soten ber hare Safen £afett ber 3tiefe, giant Siiefen 3 ?iefen ber SRuffe, Russian Buffett Sluffen Like ©raf : n. ber 23 ar, bear g. d. a. SBarctt N. g. d. a. Sarcit ber fyiirft, prince giirftctt giirften ber $elb, hero £elben £>elben ber -JRenfcfy, man ■Menfcfyett 9 -k'enfc^ett ber ©tubent', student ©tubentett ©tubenteit ber ©olbat', soldier ©oibaten ©olbatcit Remark i. “Der §err, gentleman, master, lord, adds-n only in the sing., but -ctt in plur. 78 LESSON XIV. Singular. n. g. d. a. ©hmte ^iicfje ©djbnljett £f>at SBiffenfd^aft Like 23Iume : Plural. n. g. d. a. Sttumeit ^irdjett etbe comet, ber hornet' landscape, bte 2anbfd)aft monarch, ber 9Jlonar<$' news, bie $RadE)rtd;t nephew, ber -Jleffe planet, ber ipianet' Prussian, ber $reu{je raven, ber SRabe valley, ba§ happy, gludlid) when, al§, toenn when ? inann ? 58. When = ItiCttlt always with Present, Perfect and Future ; and also with Imperfect and Pluperfect, of a habitual or repeated occurrence (= whenever), as : I always rose, when (i. e. whenever, tocittt) the sun rose. When = ttl§ with Imperfect and Pluperfect only , of a single , definite occurrence, as : I rose yesterday , when (ol§) the sun rose. 5 g] DECLENSION I — Jhtabe MODEL. 79 When? interrogative = tt) unit? as: When was your father here? SBantt tear 3ityr SSater f?ter ? Note.— Remember that menu also = “if.” 59. When a conditional or “if” sentence precedes the principal sentence on which it depends, the principal sentence is usually introduced by the particle fo, which is not to be translated into English, or counted as a member of the sent. Note. — A principal sentence preceded by a subordinate clause has the subject after the verb, the subord. clause being reckoned as a single idea (see § 20 ), as : SDSettn id) @etb tjatte, fo murbe id) greunbe Ijabett. EXERCISE XIV. A. 1. SSir toerben morgen gu unferer ©ante in Dttatoa reifen. 2. ®ie Stolen bel 2)tonarctyen finb mit ber Stactyrictyt natty fjtoril geeilt. 3. ®ie 2lrme einel bRicfen finb fetyr lang unb ftarf. 4. $ie 33aume in biefen SBalbern finb fetyr fctyon getoefen, after jetyt finb bie flatter getb getoorben. 5. ®er 3Sater ift in ber ©tabt getoefen unb tyat feinen $naben S3itctyer gefauft. 6. ^cty betounbre bie ©ctyimtyeit biefer Sanbfctyaften. 7. ®ie ©ctyiiler unb ityr Setyrer rebeten toiel bon ben ©tyaten ber §elben. 8. ©ie ©ctyiiler toerben gliicflicty fein, toenn fie mit ityrer Slrbeit fertig finb. 9. ©inb bie Sluffen §eiben? Klein, fie finb Gtyriften. 10. -Klein Kleffe mar lange in ^Berlin getoefen unb tyatte bort bie SSiffenfctyaften ftubiert. 11. -JJleine ©ctytoefter toar mit ityrer Sfrbeit nictyt fertig, all icty geftern bei ityr toar. 12. ©ie Slftrologen rebeten biel bom (Sinfluty ber $ometen unb fplaneten. 13. ©er Setyrer lobte feine ©ctyiiler unb fagte ju itynen : „^tyr feib fleityig getoefen." 14. SSenn icty nacty ©eutfctylanb reife, toerbe icty meine Dtyeime unb meine ©anten befuctyen. 15. ©ie $naben tyatten biel SSergniigen, all fie bie ifjafen unb fjtidtyfe burcty SBalber unb ©tyciler jagten. 16. ©ie ©rafinnen toaren fetyr gliicflicty, all fie bie Klactyrictyt bon ityrem SSater tyorten. 17. ©iefe £erren toerben arm toerben, toenn fte ityr 8o LESSON XV. [§§ 60- ©elb fo berfd^toenben. 18. Unfere 5Jieffen fxrtb lange bet un§ getoefen. B . 1. The castles of the count are magnificent. 2. The churches of this city are large and beautiful. 3. When will your brother be at home ? 4. Are these soldiers Prussians ? No, they are Russians. 5. The bears live in the forests. 6. The boys have two ravens and three hares. 7. The ladies have been in the church, but they are now at home. 8. Who was right? 9. For a boy of (bon) five years he is very large. 10. I should be happy, if I were rich. 11. He has not been at home to-day. 12. When she was in the city she lived at her aunt’s. 13. Would the girl be contented, if she were with her mother? 14. The students became tired, because they had studied too much. ORAL EXERCISE XIV. 1. Was hat Ihr Neffe in Berlin gemacht? 2. Hatte ich Recht? 3. Wer eilte mit der Nachricht nach Paris? 4. Haben Sie jemals Hasen oder Fiichse gejagt? 5. Wann wird mein Bruder zu Hause sein ? 6. Wiirde ich gliicklich sein, wenn ich reich ware ? LESSON XV. MIXED DECLENSION. — DOUBLE PLURALS. — PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING DATIVE OR ACCUSATIVE. 60. Declension of ber 9lamc, the name. Singular . Nom. ber Sftarne, the name Gen. be3 -JiamenS, of the name Dat. bem Barnett, (to, for) the name Acc. ben 9£ameit, the name Plural \ bie seamen, the names ber SRameit, of the names ben Barnett, (to, for) the names bte Barnett, the names 63 ] declension : — 9Zame model. 8i Observe: i. -c in the Nom. Sing, and -ot§ in Gen. Sing. 2. — cit all other cases. 3. No Umlaut, except in ©cfyabe (see below). Note. — The Nom. Sing, sometimes has -Jt. 61 . In this way are declined the following masculines : ber Sucf;ftabe, letter (of the Al- phabet) ber fyrxebe, peace ber gfunfe, spark ber ©laube, faith, belief, creed ber ©ebanfe, thought, idea ber §aufe, heap ber ©ante, seed ber ©cfyabe, harm, injury [pi. ©cf)ttben] ber SBiffe, will Also one neuter : bag §erj, the heart (Acc. Sing, iperj). 62 . Some masculine and neuter substantives follow the model of SJJaler (§ 16) or ©oljn (§ 21) in the singular, and that of HttaBe (§ 54) or ©raf (§ 55) in the plural, as : ©er 9?a$bar, the neighbour: Sing. n. da. 9Za$bar, g. barg; Plur . 9Ja$barit. ®ag Dfyr, the ear : Sing. n. a. Dfyr, g. DIjr(e)g, d. £)ljr(e) ; Plur . Dfyrett. 63 . In this way decline also : 1. Certain masculines, as : ber ©taat, state ber Setter, (male) cousin ber ©trafyl, beam, ray 2. Certain neuters, as : bag 2Iuge, eye bag Cube, end bag Sett, bed (A full List of these substantives will be found in App. G.^ 3. Foreign (Latin) masculines in unaccented -or, as : ber $Profeffor, the professor: g. $)3rofe[iorg; Plur. Srofeffo'rcit. ber ©of tor, the doctor: g. ©ottorg; Plur . ©ofto'rett. 82 LESSON XV. [§§64- 64. Substantives with Double Plural. The following have double forms of the Plural, with a different meaning for each : Singular. Plural. ba§ Sanb, ribbon Sanbcr ba§ Sanb, tie, bond Sanbe (ber Sanb, volume Sanbe) bie Sanf, bank (commercial) Sanlcit bie San!, bench Siinfe ba§ ©efic^t, face, countenance ©eficfhcr ba3 ©efic^t, vision ©eftdEjte ber Saben, shop Saben ber Saben, shutter Saben ba§ Sanb, land, country Sitrtber ba§ Sanb, province Sanbe ba3 28ort ( words considered separately , ' \ -ffiortc, words considered connectedly \ (as making sense) Remark.- — The plural Sanbe is also used in poetical lan- guage; and in the compound bie 9faeberlanbe, the Netherlands (= Lower Provinces). 65. Prepositions governing the Dative or Accusative. The following nine prepositions govern the Dative when they indicate locality merely, or answer the question ‘ where ? 9 or ‘ in what place ? 9 ; the Accusative when they imply motion , direction or tendency (figurative motion) towards, or answer the question place or person ? ’ : ‘whither?’ or ‘to what ait, auf, gutter, iit, ttebcn. iiber, sinter, nor and 65] PREPOSITIONS WITH DATIVE OR ACCUSATIVE. 83 an, 1. (of place) : (a) With dat., on, upon (adjacent to), as : The picture hangs on the wall (an ber SBanb). ( b ) With acc., to, towards, on, as : I hang the picture on the wall (an bie 23anb). surface ► non- horizontal. 2 . (of time , date ) with dat. only, on, upon, as : I was born on the eighteenth of August (am adbt^eljnten Sluguft). He will arrive on Monday (am SRontag). Observe : that in this use the Prep, and Article are always contracted. auf, (of place ) : (a) With dat., on, upon (on top of), as : The book lies on the table (auf bem Sifcf)). (J?) With acc., to, towards, on, as : I lay the book on the table (auf belt 3:ifcf>) . Ijinter, behind : surface horizontal (a) With dat., as : The dog lies behind the stove (Ijinter bent Dfen). ( b ) With acc., as : The dog goes behind the stove (Ijinter ben Dfen). in, x. (of place ) : (a) With dat., in, as : The gardener is in the garden (im ©arten). ( b ) With acc., into, as : The gardener goes into the garden (in ben ©arten). 8 4 LESSON XV. [§ 65 2. (of time) in (with dat. only), as : God made the world in seven days (in jteben Shgcit), ftrfien, near, alongside of, by : (a) With dat., as : The chair stands near (by) the table (neben bent Sifcfjc). (£) With acc., as : I place the chair near the table (neben be n £tfcf>). fiber, 1. (of place) over, above : (a) With dat., as : The bridge is over the river (fiber btm gluffe). ( b ) With acc., as : I go over the river (liber bett gluf$). 2. (of excess ) over, above (with acc. only), as : He remained over (more than) two days (fiber Sage). 3. about, concerning (with acc. only), as: He spoke with me about. his journey (iiber feine SJleife). tUtter, 1. (of place ), under, beneath, below : (a) With dat., as : The cat lies under the chair (tinier bent ©tiiljlc). ( b ) With acc., as : The cat creeps under the chair (untcr ben ©tul)l). 2. (of number) among: (< a ) With dat., as: The wolf is among the sheep (unter ben ©cfjafen). (J?) With acc., as : The wolf mingles among the sheep (nnter bie ©cfyafe). fear, 1. (of place ) before, in front of : (a) With dat., as : The chair stands before the win- dow (bar bent genfter). §65] PREPOSITIONS WITH DATIVE OR ACCUSATIVE. 8 5 (£) With acc., as : Place the chair before the window genfter). 2. (of order) before (with dat. only), as: He came before me (fear mir). 3. (of time) before, ago (with dat. only), as : He came before two o’clock (fear jtoet XU) r). He came two hours ago (fear jmet ©tunbeu). jfejifdjcn, between (of two objects) : (0) With dat., as : The chair stands between the door and the window (jtoijdjcn her Satire unb hem genfter). ( b ) With acc., as: Put the chair between the door and the window (jnufdjcu hie Satire unb baS genfier). Remark. — Observe the following contractions with the unemphasized Definite Article : an bem = nut an b as = anS auf ba§ = aufS Also the following, which are Winter bem = (jinterm Winter baS = fyinterS iiber bem = iiberm fiber baS = iiberS in bem = tm in baS = inS of less frequent occurrence: unter bem = unterm unter baS = unterS feor bem == feorm feor baS = feov 3 Vocabulary. please, lit., (I) beg, (I) pray, (i) bitte hang (trans.), fyangen fetch, bring, get, fyolen hear, [)oren hunt, chase, pursue, jagen lay, legen put, place, set (down), fe^ett put, place, set (upright), fteffen seek, look for, fuc^en kill, toten 86 LESSON XV. [§§ 65- wait (for), toarten (auf -f- acc.) strawberry, bie ©rbbeere fire, bad {yeuer Netherlands, bte -Jlieberlanbe philosophy, bie iPfyilofopfyie' stove, ber Dfen* school, bie ©cbule door, bie 3dj)ur(e) difference, ber ttnterfcbieb university, bie llniberfitat dictionary, bad -JBorterbudb open, offen heavy, hard, f defter ten, jel;n thereupon, on it, etc., barauf first, not before, erft if you please, gefafiigft no longer (lit., not more), nid)t meljr. where, too in order to, urn (foil, by infin. with ju at end of clause) EXERCISE XV. A. 1. Igener gjiann fetjte ficb gegen meineit SBiffert auf bie ©anf. 2. ©er 9leffe bed ?profefforS mar lange ©tubent, aber er ift jeitf ©oftor ber ipijilofopfyie. 3. Sffiarum baben tneine ©ettern fiber (at) mid) gelacfjt ? 4. -Klein SSater toirb und am ©lontag ober (am) ©iendtag in bie ©cbule fdjicfen. 5. ©er ©obn unb bie ©ocbter unfer(e)d Slacbbard fudfiten ©lumen unb ©rbbeeren im SBalbe. 6. -Klein SSater unb meine 3Jlutter finb feit bret 2Bod)en auf bem Sanbe. 7. ©ie ©anfen toerben erft morgen urn gefmllfto offen fein. 8. Segen ©ie gefafiigft biefe ©anbe neben mid) auf bie ©anf. 9. ©er Stonig ber Klieberlanbe reifte burdt? feine ©taaten unter bem Klanten eined ©rafen. 10. ©er ffriebe bed §errn fei mit eucfi. 11. ©er ©raf fd^idte feitten ©ofm auf bie llniberfitat. 12. ©ad Slinb ift fef;r franf unb bie Gutter fiat jtoei ©oftoren gebolt. 13. SBedbalb toarten ©ie fo lange bor ber ©Imre ? 14. ©ie §erren jagten ben ©aren Winter ben 28alb, too fie i£;tt toteten. 15. Qm SBinter fetjen toir und oft bor bad ffeuer unb betounbern bie gmnfen. 16. llnfere fper^en toerben immer traurig, toenn toir 9lacbrid;t bom $riege boren. 17. 23ad ift ber llnterfcbieb jtoifd)en ben SSortern ©anfen ttnb©dnfe? 18. ©ie 2lugen bed ©tubenten finb fditoacf), toeil er ju bid ftubiert bat. 19 . ©efcen ©ie fidb auf biefen ©tub l, btnn ©ie finb mfibe. 20 . 66 ] ANOMALIES OF DECLENSION. S7 23itte, ftellen ©ie mix biefert ©tuljl Winter ben Dfett. 21. 2)ie ©tubenten (emeu bom $)3rofeffor bie 5ftamen ber ©otter ber Corner. B. 1. The children were playing before the house. 2. What is the name of this professor ? His name is Schmidt. 3. Hang the picture of my father over the door. 4. Every human being has two eyes and two ears. 5. Why do the professors praise their students? 6. The professors praise the diligence of their students. 7. The difference between my brother and me is not great. 8. I laid the pens upon the table, but they are no longer there. 9. Our neighbours sent their children into the wood to search for flowers. 10. Our cousin lived happy and in peace with his neighbours. 11. The pupils would look for the words in a dictionary, if they had time. 12. Your eyes are tired, because you have studied too much. 13. These words are hard to learn, for every word has ten letters. 14. Place this chair, if you please, be- hind the stove for me. 15. If Charles is not ready, we shall go (reifert) without him to Germany. ORAL EXERCISE XV. 1. Wann wird Ihr Vater Sie auf die Universitat schicken ? 2. Weshalb hat die Mutter die Doktoren geholt? 3. Was lernten die Studenten von den Professoren ? 4. Werden Sie ohne mich nach Chicago reisen ? 5. Wo reiste der Konig der Niederiande? 6. Wann werden die Kirchen offen sein? SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON B. ANOMALIES OF DECLENSION. 66. Substantives without Plural. The following classes of substantives are used in the singular only : 1. Proper names, unless they denote a class (as: bie Utdfaefe, painters like Raphael), or several individuals of the same name (as: bie bier erfteu ^einritfje, the first four Henries, i. e . 9 kings of that name). 83 SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON B, [§§ 66 - 2. Names of materials, etc., unless they denote different kinds of the same material (as : ©rcifer, different kinds of grass, salt), or when they have a special meaning (as: ©elber, sums of money; ^apiere, docu- ments). 3 . Abstract Substantives, unless they have a concrete ( particular ) meaning, as: Sugenben, virtues; ©djonfyeiten, beauties, etc. Note. — M any nouns of this sort, when used in a concrete sense, use the plurals of other words, generally compound, as: ber &ob, death ; bie ^obesfcifle, deaths (i. e. cases of death). A list of these is given in App. H. For the plural of nouns of measure, etc., see Less. XXX. 07. Substantives without Singular. The following classes of substantives are used in the plural only: 1 . Names of certain diseases : 2)ie Slattern, the small-pox; bteSftafern or fttbtcln, the measles. 2 . The following names of festivals, etc.: Seil)rtad)ten, Christmas; gaften, Lent; Dftern, Easter; *j3ftngften, Pentecost (Whitsuntide). 3 . Those plural by meaning, viz. : 9Hpen, Alps ; 23einf teiber, trou- sers; 23rieffd)aften, documents; (Siufiinfte, income, revenue; (gftern, parents; gerien, holidays; ©liebmaften, limbs; §efeit, dregs, yeast; Soften, Unfoften, expenses ; £eute, people ; SJtolfcn, curds. 68 . Irregular Compounds. 1 . Substantives having -maitlt as the last component form the plural : (а) Regularly, when denoting male individuals or occupations , as: (El)emaiuter, husbands; (Sfyrenm tinker, men of honour; ©taatsmdnner, statesmen. (б) By changing -manri into -lettfc, when used collectively or in a general sense, or to include both sexes, as : Slrbeitsleutc, working-people; (Sfydeute, married people; §anbef§feufc, trades - people ; £anblcutc, country-people; £anb§leutC, people of the same country; 9ftiet$IcutC, lodgers (male and female). Notes. — 1. With words of common occurrence, such as ^aufmartn, merchant, £of* tttemn, courtier, the plur. with -Icutc only is used. 2. The form with -leute is the plur. of the fern, compound with -frau (e. g. eft (tu, married woman), as well as of that with -mamt. 2 . $Die Df)nmad)t, the fainting-fit, and bie the power-of- attorney (from 2ftad)t, pi. 9ftdd)te), have the pi. -madj ten ; bie SCnttnort, the answer (from ba§ Sort, pi. Sorte and Sorter), has pl.-en. 70] SUMMARY OF DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES. 89 69 . Special Cases. 1. A few substantives in -m, viz.: 2Item, Dbem, SBrobem, breath ; iBrofattt, crumb ; (£tbam, son-in-law, follow the Staler model (§ 16) in the sing. The plur., if it occurs, ends in c (§itnb model, § 21, b y no Umlaut), except $3rojam, which is more commonly weak in the plur. (— eit). 2. Weak feminines are often found with the old weak gen. and dat. in -Ctt, especially when used without article after a preposition, as: auf (Srbeit , on earth (but auf her (Srbe, on the earth) ; gu C^reit, in honour of; in ©Itabeit, in mercy, etc. LESSON XVI. DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES :-RECAPITULATION.-PROPER NAMES. — PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE. 70 . Summary of Declension of Substantives. The following tables show the endings of the various forms of Substantive Declension : A. Strong Declension. I. ^Mer Model. II. ©ofm Model. III. $orf Model. (Contracted Form.) (Primary Form.) (Enlarged Form.) Sing . Plur . Sing . Flur. Sing . Plur . Nom. — C — cr Gen. g — (e)§ -e — (e)§ — cr Dat. -(n) -(e) — eit -(e) — ent Acc. — c — cr Remarks. — i. The term ‘ Strong Declension ’ is applicable to all the three forms given above. 2 . The (2o!f)n Model is sometimes called the Primary Form of the Strong Declension, and shows the -g of Gen. Sing, and-e of the Plur. From this are derived the other two forms, viz. : 7 90 LESSON XVI. [§§ 7 »- 3- By contraction (dropping -e of the termination), the Staler Model, hence called also the Contracted Form of the Strong Declension ; and 4. By enlargement (adding -r in the Plur., the Sing, remain- ing the same), the ©orf Model, hence also called the En- larged Form of the Strong Declension. 5. Feminines remain unchanged in the Sing. 6. The Umlaut may occur in any of these forms, viz.: generally in masc. monosyllables, regularly in feminines and in Enlarged Form ; never in neuter monosyllables of Primary Form. (See Lists, App. A., B., C., E.) B . Weak Declension, itna&e, ©raf, 331ume Model. Sing. Nom. (e) Gen. (c)lt Dat. (c)n Acc. (e)tt Plur. (e)n (e)n (e)« (c)n Observe: i. The persistent -it. 2. The absence of Um- laut. 3. Uniformity of Cases. 4. Feminines unchanged in Sing. C. Mixed Declension. I. 5 ftame Model. Sing. N. — e Plur. — tt G. — — n D. — tt — n A. — tt — tt II. 9 ta$f>ar, Dfyr Model. Sing. Plur. — (e)tt —(e)* — (c)tt -(e) — (e)n — (c)n Remarks. — i. All three follow the $rtabe Model in the Plur. 2. The 9 tame Model is a Mixture of the -Staler and $nabe models in the Sing., usually taking -§ in the Gen., sometimes -n in the Nom. 7*1 DECLENSION OF PROPER NAMES. 9 r 3. The -Jlacfybar Model follows the SDJaler Model in the Sing. 4. The DI)r Model follows the ©ofm Model in the Sing. 71 . The Essential Parts for the Declension of a Sub- stantive are : The Nominative Singular, The Genitive Singular, and The Nominative Plural. These being given, the remaining cases of the noun can be formed from the above Tables, with the assistance of the following : Remarks. — 1. All Feminines are unchanged in the Sing. 2. The Nom. and Acc. Sing, are always alike, except in the Weak Declension (^nabe, ©raf and Carrie models). 3. The Gen. Sing, ends in -8 in Masculines (except in the Weak Declension) and in all Neuters. 4. The Nom., Gen. and Acc. Plur. are always alike. 5. The Dat. Plur. always ends in -it. Decline the following substantives throughout : 2 )aS 23 ucf), bie ©djinifjeit, ber ©titrm, bie £od)ter, ber ©cf)tDager, ber SSctter, bag Slegimeut, bie ©tabt, baS 2lugc, ber Skarnt, ber Sftenfd), ber $ataft', ber planet', ber ©pa^iergang, bag ©djaf, bie grau, bag grciidein, ber geiertag, bie ©djtoefter, ber ©laube. Declension of Proper Names. 72 . Geographical Proper Names: 1. If never used without an article, etc. (see § 44, 2, 3), are declined like common nouns, as : ber S^eirt, G. be3 9ttyein(e)8, d. bem 9t&ein(c); bie ©d) toetj, g. ber ©d^ueij, d. ber ©cfytoetj, etc. 2. If not generally used with an article, etc., they take no ending except -8 in the Gen. Sing, (unless they end in a 92 LESSON XVI. sibilant), as: ©eutj’ cf)tanb, Germany, G, ©eutfcfjlanbg ; gran!* reicfy, France, g. granfretd^g ; 9Iom, Rome, g. 3iomg. 3. If they end in a sibilant (£, fdf), $, y), the Gen. is replaced by the preposition turn, as: ®ie ©efeftigungen tom SPang', the fortifications of Paris. 4. ©on may replace the Gen. with other names also, and is always used after titles, as : ®te ^ortigin bott Cttglanb, the Queen of England ; ber ©urgermeifter bon Toronto, the Mayor of Toronto. 5. When the Name of a Place is preceded by a common noun, they are in apposition to each other, but the proper name is not inflected, as : SDie ©tabt fionbott (not turn Sons bon), the City of London, g. ber ©tabtSonbon. ®ag $onigretd£) $renf;cn, the Kingdom of Prussia, g. beg ^onigretcfyg SPreu^en. 6. Proper Names of Places are not used in the Plural. 73. Proper Names of Persons are now inflected in the Gen. Sing, only, as follows : 1. If preceded by an article, etc. (which shows the case), they remain unchanged, as : The letters of Cicero, bie ©riefe beg Cicero. 2. If not preceded by an article showing case, etc., those ending in a sibilant, and Feminines in -c, add -(c)ng in the Gen. ; all others add -g only, as : 9Jiay, G. 9fta£eng ; Soutfc, G. Soutfcttg ; $arl, g. $arlg. Remark. - — Surnames and classical names in a sibilant now commonly take an apostrophe instead of —eng, as: Dpi# SBerfe, Opitz’s works. 74. Family Names are used in the Plural with added -g, as in English, but without article, as : the Schmidts, ©cfymibtg (meaning the members of the Schmidt family). Further Remarks on the Declension of Proper Names and of Foreign Substantives will be found in Supp. Less. C., below. 75] PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE. 93 75. Prepositions Governing the Genitive. 1. SBcgeit, on account of, on behalf of, for the sake of (sometimes follows its case), as : I remained at home on account of (for the sake of) my child, (tticgcn meitiel 5Unbe§). Note. — 28egett always follows the Gen. of the Pers. Prons., which are then written in one word with the preposition, and have special forms ending in -t, as : meilteitDcgen, for my sake ; ifyrehnegen, for her (their) sake; unfertftcgen, for our sake, etc.; also with the Relative and Demonstr. fcct : bcrc(ii)ttt>cgeu (Sing. Fern, and Plur. for the sake of whom, which, that,’ etc.). 2 . SBS^renb, during, as : We went out walking during the rain (tMfjrenb be§ 9tegen3). 3 . Staft, or ailfiatt, instead of, as : He will come instead of his friend (ftfctt, or anfiatt fetneS greuttbeS). The other preps, with gen. will be found in Lesson XXXVIII. Vocabulary. give, present, make a present of (foil, by dat. of person and acc. of thing), fcfjenfert library, bte SJibliotfyeF bookseller, ber Sud^fyanbler cousin (fern.), bie Goujtne Elizabeth, ©lifabetfy Europe, @uro'!pa festivity, bte $eftItcT;fett Frederick, grtebrtcfy Fred, Freddy, $rt§ poem, ba$ ©ebicfyt George, ©eorg Greece, (ba§) ©rtecfjerdanb capital (city), bie §au^tftabt* Henry, §etnrtd) Ireland, (ba8) Srlartb Margaret, -Sftargarete speech, oration, bte SJtebe St. Lawrence, ber St. (Sanct) So'rettj Sarah, Sara Scotchman, ber Sd^Otte street, bie Strafe Thames, bte Sfyemfe work, ba§ SSkrf William, JBtlljelm broad, wide, breit high, fyodj clear, liar 94 LESSON XVI. [§§ 75* turbid, muddy (of water), soon, batb triibe everywhere, uberalF Idioms: to be on a visit at (any one’s), auf 35 efud) fern bei; as a birth- day present, 311m ©eburtStag. EXERCISE XVI. A. 1. SDer ®aifer bon ©eutfdjlanb ift audf Hbnig bon ipreufjen. 2. ®ie 93erge Gnglanbd unb ^rlanbS finb nicE)t Ijod;, aber bie Serge ber ©dftoeij finb fyocf) unb pracfdig. 3. 2Sir ftubiercn bie Sriefe bed Gicero. 4. ©arad Goufine tear bei iljr auf 23efucf), aber je^t ift fie fort. 5. -Hiutlerd toaren geftern bei und, aber tbir toaren nidjt ju §aufe. 6. 28 ad ift ber 9?ame bed Siirger* meifterd bon Sonbon? 1. 9J?ein Sater ffat mir Seffingd SBerfe unb Seined Sieber jum ©eburtdtag gefebenft. 8. 2tuf meiner Sieife befucfde id) bie ©tabte Sonbon, iparid, Serlin unb 9iom. 9. ®ie f^Iitffe Ganabad finb groft, aber bie fyli'iffe ©riedjenlanbd finb flein unb furj. 10. 28ir toerben bie Slumen fiir ©opine auf ben S£ifd; ftellen. 11. f$iriebrid;d SDiutter fcfycnlt if;m ^lopftodd SBerfe, benn E>eute ift fein ©eburtdtag. 12. £)ad 2Baffer bed ©anct Sorenj ift flar, aber bad 2Baffer ber St^emfe ift triibe. 13. Souife, bole ©opljie unb ©tifabetE> unb toir toerben einen ©pajier* gang im SBalbe madden. 14. ©iefer ©djotte rebet toiel non Surnd’ ©ebicf'ten. 15. §einridjd fyreunbe toerben balb nadj Gitglanb reifen, unb fie toerben aud) fyranfreid) befuefyen. 16. ®ie ©traffen SCorontod toaren toabrenb ber geftlidjdeiten fefyr fd;on. It. SBedljalb ftubieren ©ie bie Sieben bed ©emoftljened ? 18. 21m ftreitag ober ©onnabenb toerben toir nad> $ingfton reifen urn Souife unb SJiargarete ju befudien. 19. ©eorg ift feijt bei feinem Setter gritt auf Scfud;. 20. 21m ©onntag toaren toir toegen bed ©turmed ju §aufe. 21. 2d> fyabe in ber ©djtoeij nid;t biel Sergntigen geljabt, toeil id) auf ber Steife franf toar. B. 1. Charles, bring Freddy and Max, and we shall play in the garden. 2. We have looked for William’s book every- where. 3. The streets of Paris are wide and beautiful. 4. 76 ] DECLENSION OF PROPER NAMES. 95 Who has bought these gloves for Emma? 5. The city of Ottawa is the capital of Canada. 6. We live in Canada, but our parents live in Germany. 7. We have presented flowers to Elizabeth and Mary. 8. You have Goethe’s works in your library. 9. I bought Schiller’s William Tell at (bet) a bookseller’s in Hamilton. 10. We learn in this book the names of the gods of the Romans. 11. The Schmidts visited us yesterday. 12. What is the capital of Switzerland? 13. My father sent me instead of Max, because Max was too tired. 14. The city of Berlin is the capital of the kingdom of Prussia. 15. Would you be happy, if you were rich ? ORAL EXERCISE XVI. 2. Wer ist Konig von Preussen? 2. Wo war Saras Cou- sine? 3. Was hat Ihr Vater Ihnen zum Geburtstag ge- schenkt ? 4. Sind die Strassen Torontos immer schon ? 5. Weshalb waren wir am Sonntag zu Hause ? 6. Was ist die Hauptstadt Canadas ? SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON C. PROPER NAMES. -FOREIGN SUBSTANTIVES. 76. Further Remarks on Declension of Proper Names. 1. Proper names of towns, governed by a preposition in the genitive, do not take as : limned §ambltrg, not far from Hamburg. 2. Names of persons, even if preceded by an article, etc., take -§ in the genitive before a governing noun, as: be$ fleiueit $ad0 23 iid)ev (but bte 23 iid)er beS fleinen $ad). 3. Feminine names frequently take — (e)tt in the dat. and acc., especially if they end in -c, as : 2oui(e, d. a. 2oui}en. 4. Family names (and even Christian names) formerly added — (e)lt in the dat. and acc., and are usually so found in the classics, as: ©oetfye, d. a. ©octfyen ©filler, “ ©cf)iUerit $ad, “ rln £cf|titg, “ £effingcu Note. — This inflection is now obsolete and not to be imitated. 96 SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON C. [§§ 5. In the case of proper names in the genitive, preceded by a common noun as title : (a) If the governing word follows , the proper name takes the genitive ending, the title remaining undeclined and having no article, as : $oilig £einrid)0 0ol)ne, King Henry’s sons. (b) If the governing word precedes , the title has the article and the genitive ending, the proper name remaining undeclined, as : bie ©ol)ue be0 $onig$ §eittrid). Note. — The title $err takes -tt in the genitive in both these cases, as: §errrt ©djmibtS §au§, or ba§ §au 3 be§ £errn (Scfymibt. 6. In the case of a Christian name without article, connected with a family name preceded by bon (indicating noble rank) : (a) When the governing word follows , the family name only is de- clined, as : griebrid) Don ©d)itter$ ©ebidjte. (b) When the governing word precedes , only the Christian name is declined, as : 2>te ©ebidjte $:riebrid)3 bon ©djiUer. 7. The names of the Saviour, 3efu8 (£l)riftu§, usually both follow the Latin declension, thus : N. SefltS £t)riftU0, G. 3efit D. 3eflt a. Scfurn (Sfyviftum, Voc. 3efu GEIjrifte. Note. — Other biblical names, if without article, also follow the Latin inflection, espe- cially in the gen., as : ©oangeltunt (St. ^lattljai, the Gospel of St. Matthew. 77 . Declension of Foreign Substantives. 1. Most foreign substantives follow one or other of the regular forms of declension, all feminines being weak . 2. Most masculines and neuters from the Latin, ending in -u0, have the classical plural, but with no case-inflection in either number, as : ber 9J£obuS, the mood: n.g. d.a. Sing. 3ftobu0, Plur. 9ftobt ; beu (£afii0, the case: n.g. d. a. Sing. Gutfttg, Plur. (£afu0 ; baS $em{>U0, the tense: n.g. d.a. Sing. £etnpu0, Plur. Sempora. Notes. — 1. Others change -u§ to — Clt in the plur., as: ©lo buZ, Plur. ©lobeit (such forms as ©lobuffe should be avoided as barbarous). 2. ©er 2Itla§ has pi. bie 2ltlanten. 3. The Hebrew words Cherub and SerapI) have the Hebr. PI. in -im and take -3 in the gen. sing. 3. Neuters in -a from the Greek, and in -ttttt from the Latin, take -0 in the gen. sing., and change -a or — uitt into -eit in the plur., as : brt§ §)rama, the drama, g. Sing. 2)rama0, Plur . 2)ramett ; ba$ Sterna, tho 80] GENDER ACCORDING TO MEANING. 97 theme, Plur . £f)cmett ; b(l8 Snbitubuuttt, the individual, G. Sing. 3nbit>b buumS, Plur. 3nbi&ibuen ; ba§ SBerbum, the verb, Plur. bie $evbcn. Note. — $>a§ Jtlima, the climate, has pi. 5Uimata or $Iimatett. 4. Neuters from Latin Substantives with plur. in -ia add-§ in the gen. sing., often dropping the Latin sing, termination, and form the plur. in -ten, as: bd3 2lbt>erb(ium), the adverb, G. Sing. $lbt)erb(utnt)$, Plur. herbicn; ba§ $articip(ium), the participle, g. Sing. ^ai’ttcip(iitm)£, Plur . ^avticipien; ba§ goffil', the fossil, Plur. goffiUcn; ba$ jJJftneval', the mineral, Plur. 2Jftneralten. Notes. — 1 . These words formerly followed the full forms of Latin declension, gram - Tnatical terms (e. g. 33er6itm, etc.) retaining these forms longest. 2 . The German word ba§4Ueinob, the jewel, has Plur. 5Ueincbtcn as well as the regular Plur. tfleinobe. 5. Masculines and neuters of recent introduction from modern lan- guages take -§ in the gen. sing., and add -§ to form the plur., as : SovbS, (Slub3, ©ofcig, 33anquier0, portrait#, (SofoS, etc. Note. — Italian words are also found with their proper foreign plur., as <2oIi, Conti. 78. The Article with Names of Persons. Besides the cases specified in § 73, I, above, the article is used with names of persons : 1. Colloquially and familiarly , as: fcCt $arf, btC £onife. 2. When they denote a class , as: cilt SBelUnqtOU, a (man like) W el- lington. 3. Before names of paintings, etc., named from a pers., etc, as : cilt Rafael, a ( painting by) Rafael; trie 23eitU3 t»0U 2Jd(o, the (statue of) Venus of Milo. LESSON XVII. GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. - INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 79. The Gender of Substantives is determined in German : I. by Meaning ; or II. by Form (Ending, etc.). 80. I. Gender as determined by Meaning. 1. Masculine are names of : (a) Males, as : bet 9J?ann, the man ; bet §elb, the hero. LESSON XVII. [§§ 80- o3 Remark: But diminutives in-^cil and -lent are neuter, as: bag 2)iannletn or 2Rannd)en. (J?) Seasons , months and days , as: ber £)erbft, the autumn; ber 3 anuar / January; bet SKitttoodj, Wednesday. (elcf;cr Gen. toeld;e toeld&cS tbelc^e, which Dat. toeldjcm toeld;cr toefdiem toeldjctt, (to, for) which Acc. tt>eld£)en toeld;e toeld;c§ toeld^e, which Remarks. — ■ 1 . SBeldjer? asks ‘which of a number?’ of persons or things, and agrees in gender with the noun follow- ing it, as: 2BeId;er bon biefen SKSnncrn iff Ijter getoefen? Which of these men has been here ? SBeldkg bon biefen SBiisfico fyaben Sie ge^abt? Which of these books have you had? ICO LESSON XVII, [§§ 82^ 2. The neuter sing. UiClif)C£ is used before the verb ‘to be/ irrespectively of the gender or number of the subject (com- pare the similar use of e§, § 39, 1), as : Which is your sister (brother)? 2BeI$c8 ift 3$re Scfytoefter ($$r Sruber) ? Which are the children of the count ? 2£el$e§ fittb bie $inber be3 ©rafen ? 83 . 2 Bct? and Uw§ ? are used in the Sing, only, and are declined as follows : MASC. AND FEM. NEUTER. Nom. luer, who ? toa§, what? Gen. toeffen (or ft>e3), whose, of tocff en (or toe3), of whom what Dat. toern, (to, for) whom Acc. toert, whom toa 3 , what Remarks. — 1. SScr is used of persons only, for all gen- ders and both numbers, as : Sing. m. 23 er ift biefer 8JJamt? f. jene §rau? n. biefe3 Siinb? Plur. 2 Ber finh biefe SWiinncr? etc. 2. is not used of persons. 3. is never used in the Dative. In the Dat. or Acc. with prepositions, ft>a§ is replaced by (toor before vowels), placed before the preposition (compare § 38, Rem. 5, for similar use of fea), as : SBotauf fii$ert ©ie? On what (whereon) are you sitting? 28 of)on ff)ted;en ©ie? Of what (whereof) are you speaking? Note. — SSftrnnt? =for what, wherefore, why? not toOrum. 4. With prepositions governingthe Gen., Uie£ is used before the preposition, as: fticSfyalb, tocStoegen? on what account, wherefore, why ? 5. The neuter Gen. toeffen? is rarely used, except as above. 86] INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 10 1 6. is sometimes used (as interrog. advl) for toarum, why? (For the use of WaZ for etma§, see under et-toaS, § 149, 1.) 84. The Interrogative Adjectives are : 1. toddler, Incite, tudtfjcS? which? what? — Definite. 2. ftm§ fiir tin, fiir einc, Um§ fiir ein? ) what kind of? Plur , nw§ fill* ? ) — Indefinite. 85. 2®ctcf)Cr, as Interrogative Adjective, follows the biefer Model throughout, as : Singular , Plural, MASC. FEM. NEUTER. ALL GENDERS. Nom. toelcfjer toelcfie toelcfied toetefye, which Gen. toeldf)e§ tuclckr toelcfyed toelcfyer, of which Dat. toelcfyetn U>eld;er toeld;em toeltf;en, (to, for which) Acc. foeldjen toe lefye toetdjed Examples : toeld;e, which Which man was here ? SBeltfjer 3Jlcmn tear bier ? What books have you? 2Be(d|C 23iicfyer fya&en Sie? Remarks. — 1. 2Belrf;er is also used in exclamatory sen- tences (=what!), sometimes without termination, as: 2BcWj(c§) 33ergnugert ! What pleasure ! 2. The stem toelcfy is also followed by ein, and is unin- flected, as: $Beldj ein (Sturm ! What a storm ! 86. In declining Wa§> fur ein, \m§ remains unchanged, while cilt agrees with the substantive, as : n. m. 2Ba3 fur ein §ut? a. 2Sa§ fur einc n §ut? What kind of (a) hat ? d. 28a3 fur eincm §ut? To what kind of a hat ? 102 LESSON XVII. [§§ 86 - G. f. 2Ba<8 fur etner 33lume ? Of what kind of (a) flower, etc. In the Plur. fur is used without article, as : N. a. 2Ba3 fur ^tnber? What kind (sort) of children? d. 2Ba£ fiir ^inbern ? To what kind of children ? The ein is also omitted before names of materials and other words used partitively, as : fiir ^olj ? fiir SBetter? What kind of wood ? What sort of weather? 87 * Indirect Statements. Direct Statement or Quotation * He said:* I am tired.* Indirect Statement or Quotation : He said (that) he was tired. 1. An Indirect Statement is always a subordinate clause. 2. In Indirect Statements, the Verb is usually in the Sub- junctive (especially if the verb of the principal clause be in the Impf.), and has the same tense which it would have, if statement were made directly , as : ©te fagten, bajs e§ toafyr fei (i. e., fie fagten : iff toafyr/ pres.), They said that it was true. ©r anttoortete, ba§ er geftern angefommen fei (i. e., er anttoor* fete : 6in geftern angefommen,"/^/), He answered, that he had arrived yesterday. Note. — In English, on the other hand, a past tense is always fol- lowed by a past tense, as in the above examples. 3. The conjunction bafj may be omitted in such clauses, which then have the construction of a principal sentence (i. e., verb in second place), as : 6r fagte, er fei geftern angefommen. 88 ] INDIRECT STATEMENTS AND QUESTIONS. I0 3 88 . Indirect Questions. Direct Question i Who is there ? Indirect Question s He asked who was there ? 1. In Indirect (or Dependent) Questions the con- struction is that of a dependent clause (verb last ). 2 . If the verb of the principal sentence be in the Impf., that of the question will be in the subjunctive , and have the same tense which it would have in the direct question, as : ©agen ©ie mtr gefaffxgft, too jerter £err toofmt (Dir. Qu. : 9Bo toofmt jjener §err? pres .), Tell me, if you please, where that gentleman lives ? ©r fragte tnicfj, toefcfyer Don biefen §erren mein 23ruber fct. He asked me which of those gentlemen was my brother (Dir. Qu. : 28efcf;er, etc., ift 93ruber ? pres.) Vocabulary. *** The article will be supplied by the pupil, according to preceding rules, where not given. to use, Braucficrt march, marfdjiercit save, retten answering, b — SCntittorten paying, b — Sejafylen jewel, precious stone, b — Cbelftein asking (of questions), b — ftragen Italy, ^talien fire-place, b— Namin' elm, b — lllme blue, Blau light, easy, Iet$t useful, miMick buying, b— ftaufett life, b — SeBeit learning (act of), b— Sernett lily, b — Silie market, ber SRarft morning, ber 9-Rorgett afternoon, ber 9?ad)mtttag plum, b— $ftaume emerald, b — ©maragb' winter-month, ber 2Bintermo f * nat valuable, precious, tuertboll generally, usually, getoofynltdj etc., u.f. in. (= unb fo toctter, i. e. “ and so further ”) 104 LESSON XVII. G adverb'al th l * n ^ morn ^ n S’ n'orgcnS or bc§ 9)iorgen§ a force. 4 ) m the afternoon, nacfjmittagS or be» TacBmittagS The Cardinal Points of the Compass (= bie bier §immel§s gegenben) : North, (ber) Corbett; South, (ber) ©iiben; East, (ber) Dften ; West, (ber) SBeften. Names of the Months: ber iffjanuar, ber fyebruar, ber SJtfirj, ber 2©rU', ber Sltai, ber $>u'ni, ber ^u'li, ber Sluguft', ber ©ep» tember, ber DftoBer, ber StobemBer, ber ©ejember. Idiom : I saved his life, lit. I saved to or for him the life, 3 d) rettetc i \) in t> a $ £eben. See § 44, 6 (£). EXERCISE XVII. A. 1. SBer If at ba§ 23itb toon mcinem SHeffen iiber ba§ $amin gelfangt? 2. SBad fur eineit Tifcf; I;at lyobann auf bem 9Jiarfte gefauft? 3. 2fuf ioelc^e 93anf toerbcn itotr un§ fe^en? 4. 2BeU dfem^naben ge[;ortbiefe§ 9Reffer? ge^ort 2BiIlfeIm. 5. ^ene§ ■Btabdfen auf ber ©trafje iff ba§ Jodfitercfien unfere§ 9tad;bar§. 6. 2Ba§ madfen ©ie geibofmlicfi, toenn ©ie einen fyeiertag Ifaben? 7. ®e§ SRorgenS ftubiere idf, unb be§ 9tad£)mittag§ rubre idf auf bem gduffe. 8. SBeldfed fittb bie Stamen ber fieben Sage ber 2Bocf>e? -JRontag, u. f. in. 9. 2Bem fdfideit ©ie biefen SBrief ? 10. $jdf fcbide i£?u bem 33ucfd;anbler. 11. SBoriiber Ifabeit bie §erren gelacfit ? 12. SBer ift bie grau neben meiner Sante auf ber 23anf? 13. 2Ba§ fiir 3tugen fjat ber ©tubent ? ©eine Slugeit finb blau. 14. SBoraud maclfen luir ©dfiffe? SBir macfien fie au§ ©fen unb ©tafd. 15. Slarl tft mit bem Sernen feiner Stuf^ gabe nicfit fertig. 16. SBorauf fyaben bie ©dfiiiler fief) gefefd? ©ie Ijaben ficff auf bie SBriide gefeht. 17. 2Ba§ fiir Sbelfteine fiaben ©ie ba ? 18. fyabe einen SDiamant(en), einen 9tubin, unb einen ©maragb. 19. S)a§ §eer ift bon gtanfreidf nad; Qtalien marfcfiiert. 20. -Rafioleon fcfndte bem ©rafen einen 2)ia* mant(en), toed ber ©raf iljm ba3 Seben gerettet fyatte. B, 1. Which of your sisters are learning German? 2. For whom is this diamond? It is for the countess. 3. Which 8g] GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 105 are your pens ? 4. The asking of questions is very easy, but the answering is very difficult. 5. The north, the south, the east, and the west are the four cardinal points of the compass. 6. Which of these students is Mr. Braun ? 7. The boy buys himself pears and plums in the market. 8. My uncle has three children — a girl and two boys. 9. June, July, and August are very hot in Canada. 10. Buying is pleasant, but paying is very disagreeable. 11. Iron and steel are very useful. 12. The rose and the lily are flowers, but the oak and the elm are trees. 13. I blame Mary because she wastes her money. 14. What would you do with your money, if you were rich ? 15. We always hoped that William would learn German. ORAL EXERCISE XVII. 1. Wo hangt das Bild von Ihrem Neifen? 2. Wer ist das Madchen vor unserm Hause ? 3. Weshalb sthickte der Konig dem Biirgermeister einen Diamant(en)? 4. Was fur Augen hat der Student ? 5. Ist das Fragen leicht ? 6. Was wiirden Sie machen, wenn Sie einen Feiertag hatten ? LESSON XVIII. GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES (concluded). - GENERAL REMARKS. -DOUBLE GENDER. 89 . Gender of Substantives as determined by Form. 1 . Masculine are : (a) Substantives in -iff), — ig, -tttg, -lit, almost always , as : bcr ^ramdj, the crane ; bcr ^ponig, the honey; bcr trembling, the stranger ; bcr Sltetlt, the breath. ( p ) Those in -cl, -Clt (not infinitives), -ct, generally (names of agents in -cr always ), as: bcr Soffcl, 8 106 LESSON XVIII. [§§89- the spoon ; bcr ©arteit, the garden ; bcr ©artncr, the gardener. (e) Monosyllables — generally (but with many excep- tions), as : bcr ^rieg, the war ; bet Sag, the day, etc. 2. Feminine are : (a) Substantives in -ei, -Jjetf, -fcit, -ftfjttft, -ling, -ttt, always, as : bic etbe, heath ) btr ©rf'ilb, shield bu§ ©cl'itb, sign (of an inn, etc.) bcr ©ee, lake ) bie ©ee, sea ) ber Jfyor, fool, g. be§ SCfjoreit bu§ Tf)or, gate, g. be§ Scores Plural. Siinbc ) Siinber > See § 64, above. Sanbe ) Sauern Sauer £>eibeit ©cfjilbe ©c^ilber ©eeen S©f>orm £f>ore Vocabulary. (The pupil will supply the article in German where not given.) to visit, study (at a univer- sity), befucfjert (-f- Acc.) collect, gather, fammeln peasant, country-man, b — 33auer bee, b — Siene relate, tell, erjafylen paint, malert (female) neighbour, b — tylaS)* bavin orator, b — Sftebner bedroom, b — ©cfylafjtmmer DOUBLE GENDER. 109 9i] boat, ba§ SSoot friendship, b — $reunbfdf)aft inn, b — @afif;au3 district, locality, b — ©e'gcrtb history, story, b — ©efcfyid;te waiter, b — Kellner piano, ba3 Plainer' vice, ba3 Safter lesson, b— Seftion' people, bte Seute (pi.) love, b — Siebe mathematics, b — 9)?atl)ematif (sing.) so, fo Idioms : 1. I like to learn Gen 2. A week ago to-day, 3. A week from to-da little son, b — ©iMjrtcfyen sun, b — ©ortrte city-gate, town-gate, b — ©tabtifjor ingratitude, b — Unbanfbarfeit way, road, b — 28eg wind, b — SBinb rage, fury, bte 28ut sign, ba§ terrible, terribly, furcf)terItdE) strong (heavily, of rain, etc.), ftcirf willingly, with pleasure, gem nan, £>d) lerne .qern $eutfd). «£cute oor fld)t Siagcn (Dat.). y, $eute ii b e r ad>t Sage (Acc.)* EXERCISE XVIII. A. 1. ©fme (bte) greunbfdiaft, (bte) £>offnuttg unb (bte) Siebe tniirbe bag Seben fet>r traurig feitt. 2. llnfere SSettern toaren fyeute bor ad)t Shagen bei ung. 3 . (Die) ©cfymeicftelei ift fein geicfien ber grt'xtnbf c£>af t. 4. 2Bi!I)elm, lerne beine Seftion. 5. 2Bag fiir SSattbe ftnb auf bent Difcbe in $l)rer SBibtiotbef ? 6. @g fittb fiinf 93anbe bon ©cf>illerg SBerfen. 7. Die 2But beg ©turmeg ift fiircbterlicf), aber bag ©cf;iff ift fd)on tm §afett. 8. Sernt 3b c D ruber gem Sftatfyematif ? Slein, aber er lernt gem Deutfd). 9. 2BeIcf>em SKabdien ge^oren biefe Slinge, ber fbfarie ober ber ©ara ? 10. Die Danfbarfeit ift eitte Dugenb, aber bie Uttbanfbar* feit ift ein Safter. 11. $arl ©d)mibt befud)t tm SBinter bie Unis berfitat, aber int ©ommer tbofjnt er bet feinett ©Item auf bent Sanbe. 12. $cneg Jfrauiein J?at iftrer greuttbin ein S3anb jurn ©eburtgtag gefcfienfi, unb ibre greunbitt ift bamit febr jufrtcben. 13 . Diefe £>anbfcf)ul)e geboren nicfd mir, fie get)oren nteiitem IIO LESSON XVIII. [§§9i- ©cfytoager. 14. $)er SDcaler I;at ein ©cfyilb fiir ba§ ©aftfyau£ bor bem Sdjor gemalt. 15. SRarie, fyaft bu bie 23anber fur beine gutter gefauft? SRein, aber id) fterbe fie morgen ober am SKitt* food) faufen. 16. Heffner, I;oIen ©te mtr gefattigft ein 9Jleffer unb einen Soffel. 17. Ijat mir !eine Stnttoort auf meinen 93rief gefd^idt. 18. 2Ba3 fiir eine 9Mobte fpielt ba3 £od)terd;en unferer 2Birtin auf bem flamer? 19. SBenn id) ©elb fydtte, fo toiirbe id) einen SEeppicfy unb 3Sorf)ange fiir mein ©ddafjtmmer Jaufen. 20. SBenn 9JJarie it>re Seftion nid^t lernt, fo ioirb fie in ber ©djule nid;t gut anttoorten. B. 1. This country-man lives on a heath near the lake. 2. The tempest is terrible, but the ship is already in the harbour. 3. The stranger praises this locality on account of the beauty of the landscape. 4. What kind of a flower is it ? It is a violet. 5. We met a stranger on the way to the uni- versity. 6. Your aunt is my neighbour. 7. Who are these people ? They are the parents of my cousin. 8. The mother relates to her little son the story of the little man in the wood. 9. Have you heard the words of the orator? 10. During the tempest the wind shook the house. 11. The girl hangs the bird-cage before the window in the sun (acc.). 12. The bees gather honey from the flowers upon the heath, and the peasant sells it in the town. 13. When we hastened home yesterday, it was raining heavily. 14. I shall not wait for George, because I have no time. 15. When I resided at (bet) my uncle’s, I was always at home at ten o’clock in the evening. ORAL EXERCISE XVIII. 1. Wer war heute vor acht Tagen bei Ihnen ? 2. Was fiir Bucher haben Sie auf Ihrem Tische ? 3. Lernen Sie gern Mathematik? 4. Was macht Karl Schmidt im Winter? 5. Wer spielt jetzt auf dem Klavier? 6. Was werden Sie heute fiber acht Tage machen? 94l RELATIVE PRONOUNS, III LESSON XIX. RELATIVE PRONOUNS.-— IRREGULAR WEAK VERBS® 92. Relative Pronouns. The Relative Pronouns are : 1. bet, bic, bus, ) who (of persons), which (of 2 . tueldjet, tueld )t, mlfyti, ) things) — Definite. 3. mer, who (= he who, whoever) 4 . Uta$, what (— that which, whatever) Indefinite. 5. bc§glcid)en, ) ^ |j^ e 0 £ w j lom or which — Indeclinable. 6. bergletdjett, > 93. 2)er, bi t, bag, as Relative Pronoun, is declined as follows : Singular . Plural MASC. FEM. NEUTER. ALL GENDERS. Nom. ber bte bag bte, who, which, that Gen. beffcit berett beffen berett whose, of which Dat. bem ber bem bertcit, (to, for) whom, which Acc. ben bte baS bte, whom, which, that Observe. — These forms are the same as those of the Defi- nite Article, except the added -ett of the Gen. Sing., Gen. Plur., and Dat. Plur. 94. $&elcf)cr, as Relative Pronoun, is declined after the biefer Model, but, like the Interrogative toelc^er, lacks the Genitive. 1 1 2 LESSON XIX. [§§ 95- 95. Remarks on ber and tocldjcr 1. Ser and toeTcfjct refer alike to both persons and things, and are interchangeable, except that : (a) In the gen., beffen, berert, beffen,//. beren (not toeltf;e§, etc.), are always used (see § 82, above). (b) ®er is used when the antecedent is of the First or Second Person, the relative being, in that case, always fol- lowed by the Personal Pronoun, as : I, who am your friend, 3$, bet io) $reunb bin, (or : 3$, bic id) 3f)re $reunbin bin). O God, (thou) who art in Heaven, D ©ott, bet bu im §immel bift. 2. $cr and totldjer, referring to inanimate objects, are usu- ally replaced by too (toot- before a vowel) before a preposition (compare § 83, 3, above, for similar use of too for toa3), as 2 The table, on which {whereon) the book is, 2)er $if$, auf toelcfyem, or : toorauf ba3 33ucfy i(t 3. The Gen. beffen, etc., always precedes its case, as: A tree, the leaves of which are green, Gin 23aum, beffen flatter grim finb. 96. Remarks on toer and toa§. 1. 2Bcr and totf§ are declined like the Interrogative Pro- nouns toer? and toa3? 2. is used of persons only, for all genders and both numbers; tottS never of persons . REMARKS ON foet AND ftHlS. 96 ] 113 3 . 2 Bcr and tua 0 , as relatives, are indefinite and compound in meaning, and include the antecedent, as : SJBcr nid)t fjorert toitl, ntuj$ fuf)Ien, (He) who will not hear, must feel. tdE) $i)nen S^icft l)abe, ift nid)t btel. What (= that which) I have sent you, is not much. 4. Sfficr never has an antecedent, since it includes the ante- cedent itself ; therefore never say : 9Jtcinrt, User fyier toar, but: ®er 9 )iann, Uscld^cr I)ier toar, (The man who was here). 5. never has an antecedent, unless the antecedent be a neuter adjective or pronoun, such as ntd)i$, nothing ; eitoaS, something; atteS, everything ; or a phrase, in which cases UwS always replaces as: Nothing (that) I say, etc., 9iid)t§, ttm§ id) [age, etc. All (that) I have, etc., 2ltte§, toa§ id) I)abe, etc. The best (that) I have, etc., 3)a§ 33efte, toa3 id) I)abe, etc. He does not learn his lessons, which (i. e. 4 the not learning’) is a great pity, ©r lernt feme Seftionen rticfyt, ttm§ fe^r fd)abe ift. 6 . Ever = Mid) or tmmcr after toe r or toa§, as : 3Ser e3 Midj (immcr) gefagt I)at, Whoever has said it. 7 . The Relative Um8, like the Interrogative, is not used after prepositions in the Dative or Accusative, but is re- placed in the same way by too(r); with prepositions governing the Genitive, toc£ is used (see § 83, 3, above). Observe. — The relative must never be omitted in German, as it so frequently is in English, hence : ( Engl'. ) The man I met, {Germ,) Ser 9Kann, tocldjem (bem) id) begegnete. LESSON XIX. [§§ £ 7 ** 114 97. ©C^gleidjCtt and betglddjcn are indeclinable words, the former referring to a masc. or neuter noun in the sing., the latter to fern, or plural nouns, as : ©in 9 Jtann, be§gleid)en (dat.) id) nie begegnete, A man, the like of whom I never met. §abett ©ie jemalS be§gleidf>en gefyort? Have you ever heard the like of that ? ©irtegrau, bergleid^en, etc., A woman, the like of whom, etc. $inber, bergteidjen, etc., Children, the like of whom, etc. 98. Construction of Relative Sentences. 1 . Every relative sentence is of course a dependent sen- tence, and as such must have the verb at the end, as : The wine, which I have sent you, is very good. ©er 2Bein, ben id) %l)ncn gefdjiift Ijabc, ift fefyr gut. 2 . When the antecedent is subject, the relative immediately follows it (as in the sentence given above) ; but if the ante- cedent be object, the sentence in which the object occurs should be completed before the relative is introduced, as : I have not used the book which you sent me, !gd) fyabe ba 3 23ud) ttid )t gcbraudjt, toelcfyeS ©ie tnir fd)icften. I would have bought the book you showed me yesterday, if I had had money, $d) toiirbe ba3 33ud) gefauft l)a Beit, toeld)e3 ©ie mir geftern jeigten, ftenn id) ©elb gel)abt I)atte. 3 . In sentences with toer or the relative clause will be counted as the first member of the principal sentence, which will therefore begin with the verb, e. g. : 28er mcbt I)oren toitf, nutfj fallen, He who will not hear, must feel. Note. — In German, every dependent sentence or clause is separated trom the sentence on which it depends by a comma. The relatives tt)eld)er and ber must therefore always be preceded by a comma. 99 ] IRREGULAR WEAK VERBS. US 99. Irregular Weak Verbs, i. A Few Weak Verbs, besides adding the termination -tc to form the Impf., and -t to form the P. Part., also change the Stem Vowel in the Impf. Indicative and P. Part., but not in the Impf. Subjunctive. They are : Infinitive. Impf. Ind. Impf. Subj. P. Part. brcnnen (intr.), to burn, be brannte brennte gebrannt consumed with fire lennen, to know, be ac- fatmte fcitnte gefannt quainted with ttennen, to name nannte ncnnte genannt rennen, to run (at full speed) rnmtte rcmtte gerannt fcnben, to send ( fanbte ( jcnbete fcnbcte \ gefanbt l gefenbei tocnben, to turn ( tonnbte { tocnbtte 'roenbctc < \ getoanbt [ getoenbet Observe: i. The double forms of the last two verbs, of which the shorter are in more general use. 2. The three following verbs have also a consonant change, with Umlaut in the Impf. Subj. : Infinitive. brittgen, to bring bcitfen, to think bihtfen, to seem (impers.) (beu $ten, bciud;ten) Impf. Ind. bradjte badjte ( beurijte l (baucfyte) ( biinfte Impf. Subj. bradjte badjte bcudjte (baudjte) biinfte P. Part. gebradjt gebadjt gebcurfjt (gebaucfyt) gebiinft Remarks. — i. Compare the English: bring, brought; think, thought. 2. The forms baucfyte, gebaudjt, are as yet more common than beudjte, gebeudjt, but the latter are according to the new official orthography. LESSON XIX. [§ 99 1 16 3. Besides the Inf. beudE)ten, there is also a Pres. Ind. 3. sing. beucf)t. Note. — The German Perfect often replaces the English Past or Imperfect (see also Less. XLIII.), as : I sent you the book yesterday, 3d) Ijak Sfynett geftent ba§ 23ud) gefdjitft. I was working yesterday the whole day, 3d) (jak geftent ben gaiqett £ag gearkitet. Vocabulary. consider, bebenfen (trans.) order, bespeak, befteften think of, benfen art (-j- acc.) or benfen (-)- gen.) recognize, erfennen like to hear, gem f)5ren divide, share, ieilen burn, consume with fire acquaintance, bte 93ef anntfd^aft postman, ber ^ofibote title, ber 2ntel all, everything, 2lDfe§ unhappy, unfortunate, un* gludlicfy improbable, untt>af>rf d^einlid^ just now, ebert, foebett diligently, industriously, fleij$tg easily, readily, Iei$t (trans.), berbrennen wish, ftmnfcfyen apply to, fid^ toenben an really, Vnirflid^ (+ acc.) Idiom: It is a pity, (£3 if! fdjabe (adj.). EXERCISE XIX. A. 1. ©er ®aifer fanbte einen Soten mit ber 9ia$ridj»t nad) SBerlin. 2. 2Ber nicfjt fiir mic^ ift, ift toiber midff. 3. ©ie Sente, bet benen icfy auf Sefucf) getoefen bin, finb ©cBotten. 4. §at ber Kellner 2ltte§ geBracfyt, toir Braudjen? 5. ©er iJSoftBote fyat mir bte %jcl)ricf>t ge&racfit, ftorauf idj> toartete. 6. gdj erfannte toirltid^ ben §errn .nidjt, ber geftern mit meinem Setter in ber ^irdEte tear. 7. ©a§ ipferb be3 ©eneral§ rannte um ben $rei§. 8. ©er trembling, beffen Sefanntfcfyaft icb ju madden iounfdje, iuirb morgen fyier fein. 9. ©a§ geuer Brannte im Dfen unb ber* § 99 ] IRREGULAR WEAK VERBS. II 7 brannte ba§ §ot$. 10. 2Benn er itnglucfltd) mar, martbte er fid) tmmer an mid), ber id) fern greunb mar. 11. 3$ bacfyte tyeute an bie ©efd)i$te, bxe ©ie mir geftern erjaljlten, unb icf) I)abe fel)r bariiber gelacf)t. 12. §at ber ®iener bie S31’td)er nad; §aufe gebr add, bie id) beim23ud)l)anb(er gefauft I)abe? 13. SJienfcf), ^aft bu je bebad)t, ma3 bu bift? 14. 2Bir I)aben ba3 £>of$ fd)on fc>er* brannt, ba§ mir fcor ad)t Sagert gefauft fjaben. 15. 35iefe§ $inb erjafylt immer ju £>aufe, ma£ e3 in ber ©d)ule I)5rt. 16. 2lde3, ma3 er I)at, teilt er mit mir, ber id) fein^reunb bin. 17. ©lattbeu ©ie bie ©efc)id)te, bie §err 23raurt un§ erga^It )at? 18. ®ie grau, beren $£ocf)terd)en bei urt3 attf 33efud) ift, mirb morgen nad) §aufe reifen. 19. 2 Ba§ ©ie in ber ©tabt ge)ort I)aben, ift fefyr unmal)rfd)einficf). 20. @3 regnete geftern, ma3 fel)r fc)abe mar, ba mir auf bem Sanbe maren. B . 1. Do you hear what I say to you? 2. My father al- ways burnt the letters which were no longer useful. 3. He has not told me what he wishes. 4. The man, in whose house we lived, is the brother of our neighbour. 5. Here is the meat which you have ordered. 6. The honey which the countryman brought us yesterday is not good. 7. Do you know the artist who has painted this picture? 8. People who are not industrious do not become rich. 9. We readily believe what we hope and wish for. 10. What were you thinking of when you met me yesterday? 11. Have you all you need? 12. I believe that I know the man who is in front of the house. 13. I always burn the newspapers I do not need. 14. The students to whom these books belong do not study them diligently, which is a pity. 15. I do not know the song, the title of which you have just named. 16. What was burning ? The gardener was burning leaves. ORAL EXERCISE XIX. 1. Was machen Sie gewohnlich mit den Zeitungen, die Sie nicht mehr brauchen? 2. Wer hat Ihnen diese Nachrickt 1 1 s LESSON XX. [§§ ioo- gebracht? 3. Woran denken Sie ? 4. Was machen Sie, wenn Sie einen Feiertag haben ? 5. Glauben Sie jede Ge- schichte, die Sie horen? 6. Was erzahlt das Kind? LESSON XX. DECLENSION OF ATTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVES:- STRONG FORM. -CONJUGATION OF STRONG VERBS. 100. Declension of Attributive Adjectives. The boy is good — Predicative Adjective. The good boy — Attributive “ Remember: That Adjectives used as Predicates are not varied (see § 14). 101. Every Attributive Adjective either is or is not preceded by a determinative word (i. e., article or pronominal adjective), which shows gender, number and case by distinc- tive endings. 102 . First Form. — If not preceded by any such deter- minative word, the Attributive Adjective follows the Strong Declension, which is the same as the btefer Model through- out, thus : Strong Declension of gut, good. Singular. Plural. MASC. FEM. NEUTER. ALL GENDERS. Nom. gutcr gute gutc§ gute Gen. gutcS gutcr gutcS gutcr Dat. gutcm gutcr gutem gutcit Acc. gutctt gute gutc0 gute 102 ] STRONG ADJECTIVE DECLENSION. 119 Substantives with Adjectives. Singular. MASC. good wine Nom. gutcr SBein Gen. gutcg (en) 2Bein(e)g Dat. gutem 2Bein(e) Acc. gutcn SBein FEM. good soup gutc ©uftye gutcr ©uppe gutcr ©up!pe gute ©uppe NEUTER. good glass gutcg ©lag guteg(en)©lafel gutem ©laf(e) gutcg ©lag Plural. ALL GENDERS. Nom. gutc SBeine, ©u^en, ©Icifer Gen. gutcr Seine, ©uppen, ©lafer Dat. gutcn SBeinett, ©uftyen, ©lafem Acc. gutc Seine, ©ttypen, ©lafer Observe : In this form, where there is no other word to show the gender, etc., of the noun, this work must be done by the adjective, which therefore has as full a set of end- ings as possible. Remarks. — 1. The Gen. Sing. Masc. and Neuter generally has -cn instead of -eg before strong substantives, as : gutcn SBeineg, gutcn 33rotcg. 2. Adjectives in -c drop the -e of the stem in declension, as : tntibe, tired : tnub-er, tntib-e, utub-cg, etc. 3. If several Adjectives precede the aame substantive, all follow the same form, as : gutcr, alter, rotcr 23ein, etc., good, old, red wine. Decline throughout in German: sick child, high tree, long lesson, beautiful broad stream, young woman, lazy horse, tired boy. 120 LESSON XX. [§§ 103 - 103. Conjugation of Strong Verbs. Verbs in German are either Strong or Weak. The Weak Verbs, which indicate change of tense by the addition of a termination (usually without change of vowel), as: lob-cn, lobtc, gelob-i, have been treated in Lessons IX, X. 104. The Strong Verbs, on the other hand, indicate the change of tense by a change of the Root Vowel with- out adding a termination, as : fing-en, to sing, Impf. fang; blctben, to remain, Impf. blicb. 105. The Past Participle in Strong Verbs ends in -nt (not -et), usually also with change of Vowel, as: fing-en, P. Part, ge-fung-m ; blciben, P. Part, ge— blicb— cn ; but geben, P. Part, ge-gcbcn. Remark. — This change of Root-Vowel is called ‘Ablaut/ and is common to English and German. Compare Eng. sing, sang, sung; give, gave, giv-en. 106. Paradigm of Simple Tenses of ftngen, to sing. Principal Parts. Infin. f:ng-en Indicative. Impf. fang P. Part, ge-fung-cn Subjunctive. Present. tcf> fingc, I sing bu fing(e)ft, thou sing-cst ■cst bu fingcft id; fingc, I (may) sing, etc. er fing(e)t, he sing-s fthr fingcit, we sing if)r fing(e)t, ye sing fie fingejt, they sing fie fingcit Imperfect. (Ind. Stem withU mlaut, where possible.) er fingc toir fingcit ii)f fin get iefi ffing, I sang bu fong(e)ft, thou sangst icf) fiingc bu fangeft simple tenses of ftngen. 121 107] Indicative, er fang, he sang toir fangett, we sang if>r fang(e)t, ye sang fie fangett, they sang Subjunctive, er fitnge toir fongen ifyr fiinget fie fiingeit Imperative. fxng(e) [bu], sing [thou] finge er, let him sing firtgcn ttur, let us sing fing(e)t [t$r], sing [ye] fingeit fie, let them sing Observe : The Person endings are the same throughout as in the paradigm of lobert, in which -te of the Impf. is a Tense ending (see Lessons IX, X); this is shown by the following : 107. Table of Endings of Strong Verbs in Simple Tenses. Present. Imperfect. Imperative. Indic. SUBJ. Indic. SUBJ. Sing. 1. — t — c — — e 2. — (C)ft -eft -(c)ft -eft -(e) 3. — (e)t — e — _ — e — c Plur . 1 . — Ctt — Clt — en — en — en 2. — (e)t — et —(e)* — et — (e)t 3. —cn — en — en — en — cn Observe: i. The changed Vowel of the Imperfect, and ab- sence of person endings in 1. and 3. sing. 2. The Umlaut of the Imperfect Subjunctive. 3. The persistent -c of the Subjunctive (Imperf. as well as Pres.) 9 1 22 LESSON XX. [§§ 107- Remarks. — i. The -c of the termination in the 2. Sing, of the Pres, and Impf. Ind. is only retained in Strong Verbs after b, f, or a sibilant, as : id) reit-e, bu reit-eft ; id) £reif-e, bu preif-cft ; and in the 3. Sing. Pres. Ind., and 2. Plur. Pres, and Impf. Ind. after b, as : er reit-et, il)r reit-et, ifyr ritt-ct ; but er ^reif -t, ifyr !preif— t, il)r prief-i. 2. The compound tenses of a Strong Verb are formed pre- cisely like those of a Weak Verb, some being conjugated with fyaben, others with fein ; hence it is only necessary to know the Inf., Impf. and P. Part., and in some cases the 2. Sing. Imper.,in order to conjugate a Strong Verb throughout. 108. Paradigm of Compound Tenses of ftngen, to sing (with I)aben) ; fallen, to fall (with fein). Indicative. Subjunctive* Perfect. ip "*- ° f ! S' n ! + p - p ”'- o* ! £!' 1 ) i Ijabe gefungen, I have sung i$ Ijabe gefungen bu I)aft gefungen, thou hast sung, etc. bu babeft gefungen, etc. id; bin gefatten, I have (am) fallen, etc. id) fei gefatten, etc. Pluperfect. td) batte gefungen, I had sung, etc. id; I;atte gefungen, etc. id; War gefatten, I had (was) fallen, etc. id; tnarc gefatten, etc. Future. (Pres, of inetben + Infin. of | 1 ) icf) foerbe ftngen (fallen), I shall sing id; toerbe fingen (fallen) (fall) bu toirft ftngen (fatten), thou wilt sing bn luerbeft ftngen (fatten), (fall), etc. etc. no] compound tenses of fingett, fatten. 123 Indicative. Future Perfect. . ( fjciben Subjunctive. (Future of 1 . ( lew > id) toerbe gefungen fyaben, I shall have i$ toerbe gefungen fyaben sung bu toirft gefungen fyaben, thou wilt bu toerbeft gefungm have sung, etc. B a & en / etc * icf; toerbe gefatten feitt, I shall have id) toerbe gefallen fein. (be) fallen, etc. etc. Conditional. Compound. Simple. ( babett ) § (Impf. Subj. of werben + Infin. (Simple Cond. of j (dn f f of ftngctt, faUen) p. Part, of ftngett, fallen) iefy totirbe ftngen (fatten), I id) toiirbe gefungen fiaben, should sing (fall), etc. etc. id) toiirbe gefatten fctlt, etc. Infin. Perf. (P. Part, of { jjj" [ + Pres. Infin. of { g" } ) gefungen ($u) fyaUn, to have sung gefatten ju fetn, to have (be) fallen 109 . Compound Verbs. — Compound Verbs are con- jugated like the simple verbs from which they are derived; those having one of the inseparable particles Be-, et-, cm})-, cut- ge- Bet-, get-, do not take the prefix ge- in the P. Part., as : Be-fingen, P. Part, fi e-fun gen (compare Be-jafy Ien, P. Part. Be-jafylt, § 35, Rem. 6), and in the Inf. take ju before the prefix ; other compounds take the prefix ge- and the particle gu between the prefix and the verb (Part, or Inf. respectively). 110 . The Strong Verbs are divided into classes, according to the ‘Ablaut, ’ or Vowel-changes, of the root (see § 105, Rem., above). These classes, with the verbs belonging to each, are given in the following Lessons (XXII-XXXI). 124 LESSON XX. Bui 111 . Shorter Forms of the Conditional. The Impf. and Plupf. Subj. are frequently used in all Verbs instead of the Simple and Compound Conditional respectively, thus: id; fjat4e = id) toiirbe I;aben ; id) faitgc = id) toiirbe fingen ; id) fyaitc gcfjabt = id; toiirbe gefyabt fjaben; id; gcfungctt = id) tofirbe gefungen f)aben. Note. — These shorter forms are always to be preferred in the Passive Voice (Less. XXI), and in the Modal Auxiliaries (Less. XXXIV). Vocabulary. help (serve) one’s self, fief) bebienen acknowledge, confess, befen* nett catch cold, fief) erfcilten nominate, appoint, ernennen fill, fallen spread out, fid) fcerbreiten bough, branch, ber 2lft * ink, bie SDi nte or SCinte company, bie ©efetlf cf;aft governor, ber ©ouberneur' concert, ba£ $on§eri' queen, bie ^onigin paper, ba§ ^a^ier' advice, counsel, ber Slat singer, ber ©anger, bie ©an* gerin liberal, generous, freigebig friendly, kind, freunbfid) fresh, frifd; glad, frofy hard, fyart hoarse, I)eifer bad, fcf)led;t black, fd;toarj brave, valiant, tapfer true, faithful, treu weighty, important, toi$tig at last, finally, enbficf) yes (emphatic), yes indeed, ja toofyl Idioms: To appoint (as) governor, gum ©ouoerneur eritemten ; cheer- fully, froh^tt SQ^uteS (genitive with adverbial force); good morning, guten SJior* gen (i. e., 3d> roitnf Sfotien einen guten Gurgen). EXERCISE XX. A. 1. SRctn 30?effer ift bon gutem, partem ©tafyle. 2. $o fie §3aume fya&en getooljnli^ grofje ilfte. 3. 2i3a3 fur $ferbe Ijaben §111] SHORTER FORMS OF CONDITIONAL. 125 ©ie geJauft ? 3 $ tyabe fd^trarje uitb to.ei^e ?Pfcrbe gefauft. 4. gullen ©ie gefalligft mein ©la§ mit frifd;em SSaffer* 5. ©ctyfere ©olbatert eilen frozen 9Jcute3 in bie ©d;lacf)t. 6. gliicflicbe 9Jtenfd;en toofynen in jeitem ^jaufe. 7. £>aben ©ie ettoa3 9Reue3 in ber ©tabt ge^ort ? 2>a tool;!, Diet 9leue§, aber nic 3nte* reffanteS. 8. §ier ift guter $dfe unb frifcfye§ 93rob ; bitte, bebienen ©ie fief). 9. 2Ber bu bift geigt beine ©efeHfd;aft. 10. ©uten SRorgen, §>err 23taun, id; fyoffe, baft toir fteute fd;bne3 ^Better fyaben toerben. 11. 3 n tnelcbcm 3 a ^ re ernannte bie tonight ben ©rafen bon ©ufferin gum ©oubevneitr bon Ganaba? 12 3 $ ftabe gute§ papier, aber tneine ftebcr ift fc^Ied;t. 13. ©ie ^inber liebten meinen Dnfel, boeil er nie mube tourbe, ifynen fcftone ©e(d;icftten gu ergaftlett. 14. ©ie ftabcn enblid; befannt, baft ©ie Unved;t ftaben. 15. 3 $ fyabe mid) evfaltet; toenn id; jeftt fdnge, totirbe id) fyeifer Herbert. 16. ^d; ftabe fd;on oft ba3 Sieb gebort, toeld)e3 bie ©fingerin im $ongert gefungert f)at. 17. ©ute 33ud;er finb treue greunbe, bie immer 9tat fur un§ ftaben. 18. 2i3enn toir fleiftig finb, fo toerben unfere Scorer un3 loben. B. 1. Have you black ink or red? I have black. 2. Rich people are not always generous, and generous people are not always rich. 3. What kind w of neighbours have you? We have friendly neighbours. 4. Please fill my glass with pure fresh water. 5. High mountains and beautiful valleys spread out before our eyes. 6. I have something important to say to you. 7. New friends are not always good friends. 8. This mother buys her children something useful. 9. Have you white paper or blue ? I have white, but my brother has blue. 10. I like to hear the singer, who sang at (in) the concert yesterday. 11. My sister did not sing at the concert, because she was hoarse. 12. If she had not been hoarse, she would have sung. 126 LESSON XXI. [§ua ORAL EXERCISE XX. 1. Weshalb liebten die Kinder meinen Onkel ? 2 . Wer wohnt in jenem Hause ? 3. Was hat die Mutter ihren Kin- dern gekauft? 4. Was fur Papier haben Sie fiir mich gekauft? 5. Warum sangen Sie nicht? 6 . Womit haben Sie mein Glas gefiillt ? LESSON XXI. THE PASSIVE VOICE. 11 2 . The Passive Voice is formed by means of the various tenses of the auxiliary verb toerben, to become (see § 19 ) — |— the Past Participle of the Verb to be conjugated, as in the Paradigm below. Principal Parts of toerben : Infin. tnerbcn Impf. tourbc (toarb) Past Part, getoarbett Note. — The perfect tenses of toerben are formed with fcivt (see § 53. a), Perf. 3 d) bin getuorben; Plupf. id) toot geroorben, etc. For the formation of the future and conditional, see fein (§ 52). Paradigm of the Passive Voice of {often, to praise. indicative. Subjunctive. Present. (Pres, of toerben + P. Part, of loben.) I am (being) praised, etc. I (may) be praised, etc. id) toerbe ) id) toerbe bu toirft bu toerbeft er toirb [ abTiiM er toerbe toir toerben if)r toerbet fie toerben toir toerben ifyr toerbet fte toerben gcfattt gcfattt passive voice of loBen. 127 § 112 ] Indicative. Imperfect. Subjunctive. (Imperf. of toerben + Part, of Iobeit.) I was (being) praised, etc. id) tourbe (toarb) bu tourbeft (toarbft) cr tourbe (toarb) ioir tourben t^r tourbet fie tourben I might be (being) praised, gduBt id) tourbe bu tourbeft er tourbe totr tourben il)r tourbet fie tourben [etc. g elobt Perfect. (Perfect of toerben + P. Part, of toben.) (Part, of toerben omits gc-) I have been praised, etc, id) bin bu bifi er ift loir finb il)r fetb fie finb I (may) have been praised, gelobt toorben id) fei bu fetefi er fei fair feien il;r feiet fie feien [etc. gelobt toorben Pluperfect. (Plupf. of toerben + P. Part, of lobeti.) I had been praised, etc. I might have been praised, id) toar gelobt toorben i$ toare gelobt toorben [etc. bu toarft gelobt toorben, etc. bu toareft gelobt toorben, etc. Future. (Future of toerben 4. P. Part, of (oben.) I shall be praised, etc. I shall be praised, etc. id) toerbe gelobt toerben id) toerbe gelobt toerben bu toirft gelobt toerben, etc. bu ioerbeft gelobt toerben, etc. 128 LESSON XXI. [§na Indicative. Subjunctive. Future Perfect. (Fut. Perf. of toerben + P. Part, of loBen.) I shall have been praised, etc. I shall have been praised, etc. id) toerbe gelobt toorben fein id) ioerbe gelobt toorben feirt bu toirft gelobt toorben fein, etc. bu ioerbeft gelobt toorben fein etc. Conditional. (Cond. of toerben -f P. Part, of foBen.) Simple. Compound. I should be praised, etc. id) ftmrbe gelobt toerben bu iourbeft gelobt toerben, etc. Infinitive. (Xnfin. of toerben + P. Part of loBen.) Pres . to be praised gelobt Qu) loerben Perf, to have been praised gelobt toorben (ju) fein I should have been praised id) lourbe gelobt toorben fein bu toiirbeft gelobt toorben fein etc. Participles. (Part, of toerben + P. Part of loBen.) Pres . being praised gelobt toerbenb Past, been praised gelobt toorben Imperative. (Imper. of toerben + P. Part, of loBen.) be praised, etc. toerbe gelobt toerbe er gelobt toerben toir gelobt toerbet gelobt toerben fie gelobt Remarks. — i. The shorter forms, i. e. Impf. and Plupf, Subj. (see § in, and Note), are commonly used for the longer forms with totirbe in the conditional. § 1 1 *] PASSIVE VOICE. 129 2 . Observe the omission of the gc- in the P. Part, of merben (luorbcn for ge-morben) when used as auxiliary of the passive voice. 3. The personal agent with the passive voice (which is the subject of the active verb) is denoted by the preposition turn (Engl, by), as : ©er unartige $nabe mirb bon feinem Sefjrer beftraft. The naughty boy is being punished by his teacher. 4. The auxiliary participle morben is omitted whenever the state of the subject may be regarded as still continuing, thus : ©a§ §au3 ifi gebaut. The house has been (is) built (and is still standing). 5. The Engl. ‘ I am/ ‘ 1 was/ etc., as part of the passive auxiliary ‘to be/ must be rendered into German as follows : (a) By the proper tense of merben when they are equivalent to ‘I am being/ ‘ I was being/ etc., as : The child is (i. e., is being) punished by its parents, ©a§ &inb tuirb bon feinen ©Item Beftraft ; The dinner was being served, when we arrived, ©a§ SJtittagSejfen tourbe ferbiert, al3 fair anfamen; or when the verb, being turned into the active voice, is in the present or imperf. tense respectively, as : The boy is (was) always punished by the teacher, when he is (was) naughty, ©er £nabe mirb (murbe) immer bom Setter be* ftraft, menu er unartig ift (mar) ; Passive: < Active : The teacher always punishes (pres.) or punished (impf.) the boy, when he is (was) naughty, ©er Se^rer Beftraft (Bcfirafte) immer ben $naben, toenn er unartig ift (mar). 1 3 'o LESSON XXI. ( b ) By the proper tense of feitt (with or without toorben, see last Remark), when they are equivalent to ‘I have been/ i I had been/ etc., or when the verb, being turned into the active, would be perf. or pluperf. respectively, as : | I am (= have been) invited to the party, 1 %d) Bin jur ©efellfd&aft eittgriabeu (toorben) ; | They have invited (perf.) me to the party, ( -JJtan Jjat mid) jur ©efefffd)aft ctngclabcn. The dinner was (== had been) served, when we arrived, ( 9Jiittag§effen mat fcrbiert, aU toir anfamen; ( They had served (plupf.) the dinner, etc., ( SRan Ijatte ba§ 3Jtittag€effert fcrtiicrt, u. f. to. Passive: Active: Passive: Active : The following examples will serve to show more clearly the proper use of the various forms of the passive : ' (a) The Sab en tocrfecit j et$t gcfd^Ioffert, The shops are being shut now (present). (b) Tie Sdben filth biefe 2Bccf)e fritter gefc^loffen toarbeit, The shops have been shut earlier this week (perfect). (c) She Sdben filth jetjt gefd)Ioffen, The shops are (and remain) shut (past state, continuing in the w present). (a) Ter ©olbat tourbc bon einer Shtgel bertounbct, The soldier was wounded by a ball (a ball wounded him, hnpf.). (b) Ter ©olbat toar bon einer $ugel bertounbet toorben, 2. < The soldier had been wounded by a ball (pluperf). (c) Ter ©olbat toar fdfjtoer bertounbet. The soldier was severely wounded (and still suffered from his wound : past state, continuing in the past). LIMITATIONS OF THE PASSIVE VOICE. 1 13] 131 (*) (ft ®iefe 33riicfe hmrbe Dor jefyn ^afjren gebaitt, This bridge was built ten years ago (they built it then, that is the date of its being built, impfi) SDtefe 33riicfe tear Dor gel;rt $al)ren gebaut, This bridge was built ten years ago (and is still standing : past state, continuing in the present ). Exercise on the Preceding Rules. A. Turn the following sentences into German: 1. This house was built by my father. 2. My window is broken (gebrodjen). 3. The child is washed (getoafdjen). 4- This man is esteemed by everybody (jebennamt). 5. The garden must be sold. 6. The enemy was beaten (gc(d)Iageu). B. Turn the following sentences into the passive: 1. 2BoriUfc is the direct, but mir the indirect object. Hence it fol- lows, that 2 . Intransitive verbs can only be used impersorially in the passive, thus : 132 LESSON XXI. [§§ 113- I am allowed == toltb trtir cvlaufit (Lat. mi hi per- mit titur) ; He has been helped == ift tljm gebolfen toorben. This impersonal passive is also used in expressing an action without specifying any agent, as : G8 tour be geftern 2fl6enb biel gctanjt. There was a great deal of dancing yesterday evening. Note. — The pron. in these constructions is omitted if any other member of the sentence precedes the verb, as : 2Jiir nsirb erlaubt ; ©cflent TOcnb tourbe, etc. 114 . Substitutes for the Passive Voice. The passive voice is much less frequently used in German than in English, particularly in the longer forms. It is often replaced, especially with intransitive verbs : ( a ) By the indefinite pronoun man (Fr. on , see Less. XXVII), with the verb in the active voice, as : SOJatt glauM ifjnt nicfyt, He is not believed ; SHau faun iljrn md;t tvaucn. He cannot be trusted. (J?) By a reflexive verb, as : ©er ©cfylujjel toirb fidj finben, The key will be found; and particularly with laffen, as : liijjf fid) leicfyt madden. That can easily be done. Vocabulary. to conquer, overcome, ero'Bern believe, glauben (intr., -f- dat. of person) wait (for), toartert(auf -f- acc.) workman, ber Slr'beiter visit, visitors, ber Sefud^ mill, bie SDWiljfe beef, ba3 Stinbfleifdfj courage, bie ©ctyferfeit untruth, falsehood, bie Un'* toafyrljeit as, ali 114] THE PASSIVE VOICE. 133 once, ein'mal carefully, forg'faltig this evening, f)cutc 2lbenb severely, ftreng as soon as, fobalb' little, ioenig Idioms: As a child, when (I etc. was) a child, nl$ Sliitb; This honse is for sale (lit., to sell, to be sold), fciefeS £au$ ift ju oerEaufen; to have visitors, 33cfud) Ijabcn. EXERCISE XXI. A. 1. ©iefe323db tourbe bon meiner©cbtoeftergemaIt, unb e3 ift toiel gelobt toorben. 2. ©t e ©tabt ift hom ©eneral bombarbiert unb er= obert toorben. 3. 2Bir toerben beftraft toerben, toenn toir unfere 2cf= tion nid)t forgfattig lernen. 4. ®ie2aben fitib gefcftloffen, benn beute ift (ein) geiertag. 5. $jft bad §au3 neben ber Sltiifyle berfauft? 6. ^atoobl, c3 tourbe gcftern bon $d; rem Steffen gefauft. 7. Son toem tourbe ba3 $inb gerettet, al3 ba3 §au3 brannte? 8. ©3 tourbe bon einem 2Irbeiter gerettet, toeld;er toegen f enter STa^ferEcit Son ben Seuten gelobt tourbe. 9. 28are ber $nabe nad; £aufe gefdfidt toorben, toenn er nidtt unartig getoefen toare? 10. SJIebcn bem Igaufe unfcreS 5Rad;barg toirb eine fvircbe gebaut. 11. Go tourbe geftern 21benb Diet bei un3 gefungen unb gefpielt, benn toir batten 23efud;. 12. 3ft ba3 Siinbfleifcf) gefdiidt toorben, toeld;e3 id; beftetft babe? 13. ©er Sefjrer fagte, baft er mit meiner 2lrbeit jufrieben fei. 14. ©a3 23db toare bon ben ®unftlern niebt gelobt toorben, toenn e3 niebt febr fdton getoefen toare. 15. 2113 Sfinb tourbe idb imnter bon meinem SSater ftreng beftraft, toenn id; eine Untoafyrfyeit fagte. 16. 2Birb e3 un3 erlaubt fein, unfere 2lufgabeit ju berbrennen, toenn toir bamit fertig finb? 17. @3 toirb beute biet gefpielt, aber toenig ftubiert, toeil toir morgen feme eftern, iRinber 117 . Compound Verbs with Separable Prefix. 1. The prefixes Be-, tx-, etc. (see § 35, Rem. 6), hence called Inseparable Prefixes, are never separated from the verb ; other prefixes (chiefly the Prepositions) are Separable, but only in Principal Sentences with Simple Tense, as : SDer $onig fdjitfie glt>ei Soten gu£. The king sent out two messengers. SJtein 33ruber reift morgen afi. My brother sets out (= departs) to-morrow. Note. — These Prefixes contain an idea distinct from that of the verb, and hence, if retained before the Verb in the cases above, would throw the verb out of its place as Second Idea of the Principal Sentence. 2. The ge- of the P. Part, and ju in the Infin. follow the prefix, making together but one word, as : $Die 33oten be3 $onig§ firtb abgcreift. The messengers of the king have departed. 10 133 LESSON XXII. [§§ II7- SJJetn 35ater toiinfcbt morgen abjuretfen. My father wishes to depart to-morrow. 3 . The principal accent is on the Verb when the Prefix is Inseparable ; on the Prefix when Separable , as : befu'cfyen, bers fau'fen; but aus'fcfncfert, ab'reifen. 4. The principal parts of Separable Compound Verbs should therefore be given as in the following examples : Infin. Impf. P. Part. an'gretfen, to attack griff ... an angegrtffen ab'fcfyneiben, to cut off fcfmiti ...ah abgefcfynitten 118 . Strong Verbs: ficijjen Model. Infin. Impf. P. Part. Germ . Model : beijjen btfl gebtffett Engl. Analogy : bite bit bitten Ablaut : ti u I t LIST. Notes. — I. Compounds are only given in the Lists when the simple Verb is not found in the strong form. 2. R. = Reflexive; N. = Neuter, i. e., conjugated with fetn only; N. A. = Neuter and Active, i. e., with fein or l)abeit; W. indicates that the Weak form is also used without difference of meaning. Beigett, bite big gebtffen (er)bletdjen (W. N.), turn pale erbltdj erbltdjen (be)fteij$en (R.), apply one’s self Befli& befliffen gletd^ett, resemble, be equal to filicf) geglicfyen gleiten (N.), glide glift geglitten greifen, grasp, seize 0 «ff gegriffcn fnetfert, pinch fniff gelrtiffen leibett, suffer lift geltiten 1 18] STRONG VERBS : Betjjen model. 139 pfeifen, whistle m 0e^ftffen retfjen, tear geriffert retten (N. A.), ride tilt gerittcrt fdjdeidjien (N.), sneak gefd;lidjett fcfyleifen, grind WKff gefd;Iiffen fd^metfjert, fling fcfymijj gefcfymiffen fc^ttetben, cut fd;nitt gefcfynitlen fd^reitert (N.), stride fcfjritt gef Written ftteicfyen, stroke ftridj gefirid;cn ftreiten, contend ftritt geftvitten toeidjen, yield Itudj getoi$en Remarks. — 1. The root vowel being shortened in the Impf., the following consonant, if single, is doubled ; and stems in -b (fcf)neiben, leiben) change b into if. 2. Those whose stem ends in -jj change § into ff in the Impf. (unless final) and P. Part., as : beijjen, icfy bi§, toir biffen, gebiffen. 3. The following Verbs are weak when they have a different meaning, as below: bleicfyen (trans.), bleach bfeicfyte gebteicfjt fd^Ietfert, drag; raze (to the ground) fcfyleifte gefc^Ieift toeicfyen, soften, soak toeicfyte getoetcf;t 4. 33egleiten, to accompany, is no compound of gleiten, to glide, but of lexten, to lead (weak, = be— ge— leiten) ; berletben, to make disagreeable, spoil (not from leiben, but 2etb) is weak. Vocabulary. to set out, depart, ab'reifen slip, slide, au^gleiten cut off, ab'fcfmeiben comprehend, understand, be* paint (not pictures), cm 7 * greifen ftreic^en seize, evgrcifen 140 LESSON XXII. [§U8 fear, fi$ ftirdjten (fcor + dat.) tear (to pieces), jerrei^ert pass (time, etc.), ju'brirtgen Cinderella, 2ff$en:putiel barber, ber S3arbter / idea, notion, ber SBcgriff steamer, steam-boat, bd§ ©ampffcfyiff thief, ber SDteb grass, ba3 ©ra3 hair, ba£ §aar hay, bd§ §eu huntsman, hunter, ber $ciger illness, bte $rcmffyeit fever, ba3 ftieber slipper, ber ^antoffel rain, ber 3iegert rheumatism, ber 9tl)eumati§mu3 piece, ba§ ©ti 14 little piece, ba§ ©titcfcBen traveller, ber SBanberer tooth, ber gatyn* toothache, ba3 gabntoel) evil, angry, cross, bofe joyous, merry, fro!) ltd) smooth, slippery, glatt golden, of gold, golben violent, heavy (of rain), fyeftig naughty, ill-behaved (of children), un'artig true, ft>al)r furious, ftm'tertb on that account, be^toegen of it, bctOort the day before yesterday, fcor'* geftern Idioms : To be on the point of (be about to), tm Segrfffe f tin. You are tired, are you not? ®ie fmfc mufce, ntd)t tuafjr? So are we, 28 ir fuifc ed flud). George has torn my coat, ©corg I)at mir ben gerriffen* EXERCISE XXII. A. 1. ©er ©eneral 2R. ritt auf einem fefitoarjen ipferbe burdj bte ©trafsen ©orontog (bon ©oronto) . 2. 2Bie fiaben ©ie bte $eit auf bent Sanbe jugebraefyt ? 3. 2ln toag fitr einer $ranff>eit fiat Sfir SSater fo lange gelitten? 4. ©ie finb ntitbe, nid;t hiafir? SBir ftnb eg aud>. 5. 2llg mein 33ruber jung Soar, fiatte er fddedite 3afme unb litt fefjr an 3<*f>ntoefy. 6. ©er fcfihiarje §unb un» fer(e)§ -Jiacfibarg ift bofe ; er bat borgeftern etn Heines ^inb ge= biffeit. 7. Unf(e)re alten Sftacfibarn begleiteten ung nacfi bem §afen, alg tnir abreiften. 8. 2Bo Soofint ber Sarbter, ber 3fmen bag §aar gefdmitten fiat? 9. -Stein alteg -Dieffer fd;neibet jetjt gut, benn ber ©iener fiat eg geftern gefefiliffen. 10. 2llg icf> bor §xi8] STRONG VERES: Bet^en MODEL. I4I ber ©cfyule iiber bie glatte ©tra£e fd^ritt, glitt id) au§ unb gerrt§ mtr ben tteuen dlod. 11 . 2113 ber ®t eb tm Segriffe tear, in3 §au§ ju fd;Ieid^en, ergrtff i^n ber ©iener. 12 . Uttfer alter 9iacf)s bar Itti lange an (am) -JlfyeumattemuS, unb tear be^inegen immer 511 §aufe. 13. ©er ©eneral ritt mit feirten Offigieren iiber bie 33rudc. 14. ©er bofe Snabe auf bem 2©felbaum rifc bie reifen St^fel bom 23aume unb fdjmift fie auf bie Crbe. 15. SRetrt junger -Jleffe, ber auf ber Umber fit at ioar, fyat am gieber gelitten, aber er ift je£t toieber toobl. 16. 21 f d; en^puttel^ ©cf)ft>efter fd;nitt fief) (dat.) ein ©tlicf bom gotj^e ah , toeit er ju gro$ fur ben golbenen ^antoffel toar. 17 . %d) bin fd^nett nad) §au fe geritten, toeil id; mid; bor bem ftmtenben ©turme flirc^tete. 18. ©er SBanberer fcfjritt frozen 3Dtute§ burd; ben grlinen SBalb unb !pfiff ein frof)Ii d;e3 £ieb. 19. ©iefeS 9JJeffer ift nid;t fd;arf; Warn tottrbe e3 gefdjdiffert? 20 . $avl§ fd;cner, neuer 9 iocf tourbe bom §unbe gerriffen. B. 1. Where is the old knife that you ground? 2. When Mary was young she resembled her mother. 3. The bears sneaked (perf.) into the wood, but the hunters followed (perf.) them. 4. Where does the painter live who painted (perf.) our house ? 5. The industrious countryman cut (perf.) the grass yesterday, and is making hay to-day. 6. Why are you crying, Charles ? I am crying because George pinched (perf.) me. 7. The rain spoiled my (dat. -j- def. art.) journey to the country. 8. The steamer has whistled already. Now I shall say farewell. 9. Little Charles is a naughty child ; he has torn his (dat. of refl. pron. -f- art.) new dress. 10. Old people often suffer from rheumatism. 11. Have you understood what he said ? 12. The gardener was burning the boughs, which he had cut from the trees. 13. I have quarrelled with my old friend, because he was wrong. 14. This blue ribbon is too long, please cut a little of it off for me. 15. Why is Charles crying ? He has been bitten by a dog. 142 LESSON XXIII. [§H9 ORAL EXERCISE XXII. 1. Was fiir einen Hund hat Ihr Nachbar? 2. Wie wurden Sie die Zeit zubringen, wenn Sie reich waren ? 3. Was machte der Wanderer, als er durch den Wald schritt? 4. Wo wohnen Sie jetzt ? 5. Wann werden Sie Heu machen? 6. Weshalb sind Sie so schnell nach Hause geritten ? LESSON XXIII. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.- STRONG VERBS: WlUti MODEL. 119 . Possessive Pronouns. 1. The Possessive Pronouns are used when no substantive is expressed, as : The hat is mine ( Pronoun ) ; but : It is my hat {Adjective). 2 . They are formed from the stems of the corresponding Possessive Adjectives by adding certain endings, as follows : (a) Endings of btefer Model (without article), as: Singular. Plural. MASC. FEM. NEUTER. ALL GENDERS. Nom. ntetner meine metn(c)8 met ne, mine Gen. meincS meincr mcincS mctnct, of mine Dat. meincm meincr meincm meinen, (to, for) mine Acc. meineit meine mein(e)g meine, mine Observe : In the Nom. and Acc. Neuter, -e of the ending may be omitted. So for the other persons : MASC. FEM. NEUTER. Sing, beincr beinc beineg, thine feiner feinc feincS, his, its if/rcr ifyre ifyrcS, hers (its) POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 143 §H9] MASC. NEUTER. Plur . unf(e)rer unf(e)re unf(e)re§, ours eu(e)rcr eu(e)re eu(e)rc§, yours tfyrer i^re il)re 8, theirs (Sfyrer Sfyre $fyre8, y° urs ) (b) Preceded by the Definite Article, and hence with end- ings of Weak Adjective, thus: Singular . Plural. MASC. FEM. NEUTER. N. bermeine bie meinc ba§ meinc G. be3 meineit ber meineit be§ meinen D. bent meineit ber meinen bem meinen A. ben meinen biemeine ba3 meine ALL GENDERS. bie meinen, mine ber meineit, of mine ben meinen,(to, for)mine bie meineit, mine So : ber, bie, ba§ beine, thine ber, bie, ba3 eu(e)rc, yours ber, bie, ba$ feme, his, its ber, bie, ba§ ifyre, theirs ber, bie, ba£ ifyrc, hers, (its) (ber, bie, ba3 Sfyre, yours) ber, bie, ba3 unf(e)re, ours (c) Preceded by Definite Article, with ending ~ig -j- Weak terminations, thus : Singular. MASC. FEM. NEUTER. Nom. ber meinige bie meintge ba3 meintge Gen. be3 meinigen, etc. ber meinigen, etc. be3 meinigen, etc. Plural . ALL GENDERS. Nom. bie meinigen, mine Gen. ber meinigen, of mine, etc. So : ber, bie, ba3 beinige, thine ber, bie, ba3 feinige, his, its and so on for the other persons. Note. — 1. In unfrige and eurige the -c of the stem is always omitted 144 LESSON XXIII. [§§ 119- Remark. — i. These forms are interchangeable, without difference in meaning, as : I have my book, but I have not yours, ( 3$*(e)» Ijafte trtein Sucft, after tcf) Ijafte nicfit < bits $ljre ( ba§ Sifjrigc. His letter is here, but ours is not here, ( ttnf(e)rcr ) ©etn SBrief tft fyter, after ■< bcr mtf(e)rc >- ift nic£)t Ijiev. ( ber unfrigc ) 2 . When a Possessive Pronoun is used as predicate , it may be replaced by the Possessive Adjective without ending, as : This book is mine, ®tefe§ 33ucfy tft tucitt. 3 . Observe the following idiomatic uses of the Poss. Prons. : (a) Igdj tnerbe ba§ SSrtttige (neuter sing.) tfyutt. Is shall do my part, my utmost. ( b ) 3>ie Sdeintgen, bic ©etntgen (Plur.), My, his friends, family. (c) A friend of mine = dtitcr turn nteinett ^reuttben. This friend of mine = $tefer mein ^reuitb. 120. Strong Verbs: fclei&CU Model. Infin. Impf. P. Part. Germ . Model : Met ben ftlicft geftlieften Eng . Analogy: wanting Ablaut: et it te LIST. ftletften (N.), stay, remain ftlieft geftlieften (ge)betljen (N.), thrive gebiel) gebiel;ett leifyen, lend, borrow liefy geliefyen strong verbs : MeiSen MODEL. 145 120] tneiben, avoid tnieb gemieben pretfen, praise prieS ge!prtefen retben, rub rteb gerteben fcfjetben (N. A.), part (intr. and trans.) fefneb gefd;teben fcfyeinen, shine ; seem, appear fefyien gefefnenen fd)retben, write fefirieb gefd;rteben fdfjreten, scream, shout fd^rie gefc^rteen fdf)toetgen, be silent fcfytoieg gefcfjtotegen fyeten, spit frie gefyieen fteigen (N.), mount, ascend ftteg geftiegen tret ben, drive trie& getrieben toetfen, show, point out toie§ getuiefen jetljen, accuse gejiet;en Vocabulary. to copy, ab'fd)retben hang up, auf'fydngen ascend, befteigert (trans.) prove, demonstrate, be* iueifert appear, erfd^eirten shine, glitter, glcinjen descend, Ijerab'fteigen guard, keep, fyiiten rule, reign, govern, regteren write (to), fcfyretben (dat. or an -{- acc.) climb, fteigen (auf -f- acc.) pardon, excuse, berjeifjen remain behind, juritd'bletben cold, bte (Srfaltung family, bie gamtlie herd, flock, bte §erbe heat, bte Qxfyt last, ber Seiften pepper, ber $Pfeffer shepherd, ber ©d;afer shoemaker, cobbler, ber ©djufter silence (act of keeping s.), ba§ ©d)toeigen speaking (act of), ba§ ©:pred£)en throne, ber Stfyr on pasture, pasturage, bte 2Beibe fifty, funfjig, fltnfjig bright, brightly, ^eH loud, loudly, laut correct, ricfytig round, runb bad, fdfdtmm strong, severe, ftarl Idiom: Up to the present time, still, nod) tmmcr. 146 LESSON XXIII. EXERCISE XXIII. A. 1. ift nid>t 2tffeS ©olb, toa§ glanjt. 2. ©predion ift ©ilber, ©d;toeigen ift ©olb. 3. ©djufter, bleib’ bet beinem Seiften. 4. ©eit acfyt Shagen bin ic£> tbegen einer ftarlen ©rfaltung ju §aufe geblieben. 5. @ine bon meinen (Soufinen ift je£t bei un§ auf 33efud;, abet fie bleibt nid;t lange. 6. 2Ba§ fur $£iere finb in jenent SBalbe? finb 23aren. 7. ®ie Stutter unb ifjre Softer toeinten Ijeftig, al§ fie bon einattber fdfiieben. 8. Stein Dfyeim blieb tbegen bet grofjett §i|e mit feiner ^antilie auf bent Sanbe. 9. $arl Ijat an feinen SSater gefcfjrieben, unb i$ bin im Segriffe an ben meinigen ju fcfyreiben. 10. ©er $bnig fcfytbieg unb fdjien traurig ju fein, al£ er bie fdfilimme Sacbridjit fybrte. 11. SBitte, berjeifyen ©ie mit, baft icfy 3>l;nen nodf) nicfyt gefcfirieben Ijabe. 12. SBo fyaben ©ie Igfyren §ut aufgeljangt? $jtij fyabe ifm neben ben 3>firigen geljangt. 13. 2ll§ tbit auf ben 23erg ftiegen, fd;ien bie ©onne fcfwt fyell. 14. SSeldfie bon biefen 33ud;crn toimfd;en ©ie? ^ 5 d) tt)unfdf>e bie metrteu. 15. 2Bir toiirben auf bem Sanbe geblieben fein, toenn unfere greunbe audf» geblieben toaren. 16. 2>ie igerben tourben auf bie SBeibe getrieben, al§ loir bom 23erg tyerabftiegen. 17. ©§ ift un§ beioiefcn toorben, baft bie @rbe runb ift. 18. SBor funfeig Jgaftren beftieg bie ^onigiit Victoria ben Sftron, unb fie vegiert ttocft immer. 19. 2Bilrben ©ie nadj ©uropa teifen, toenn id; jumcf<ebe, um $jftr §au§ &u ftttten ? 20. 2)ie $naben pfiffen unb fcftrieen, al§ fie auf ben Serg ftiegen. B. 1. George has black ink, but mine is red. 2. Mary’s sister and mine are learning German. 3. We have looked for William’s books and ours everywhere. 4. Your exercise is not correct, copy it. 5. Whose gloves have you ? I have mine and yours. 6. Why did the boy shout so loud? 7. To whom were you writing the long letter yesterday ? 8. I have black eyes, but yours are blue. 9. In what year did Goethe’s ‘Faust’ appear? 10. Waiter, please bring me the vinegar and the pepper. 11. This lead-pencil is mine, where is I2i] TABLE OF ADJECTIVE ENDINGS. 147 yours? 12. Your aunt and mine are neighbours. 13. The professor seemed not to be at home, for his windows and shutters were not open. 14. I should write to him, if he wrote to me. 15. I was writing to my mother and Charles was writing to his when the postman brought us the letters. ORAL EXERCISE XXIII. 1. Seit wann sind Sie schon zu Hause geblieben ? 2. Was machten die Schafer, als wir vom Berge herabstiegen ? 3. Wann bestieg die Konigin Victoria den Thron ? 4. Was fur Tinte haben Sie? 5. Fiir wen ist dieser lange Brief? 6. Welches sind die Namen der Monate? LESSON XXIV. DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES (concluded): TABLE, CENERAL REMARKS.- STRONG VERBS: fdjtcfjcn AND ferfjtett MODELS. 121 . Table of Adjective Endings. I. Strong. Sin gular . Plural . Singular . MASC. FEM. NEUT. M. F. N. MASC. fem. NEUT. N. — cr — e — C§ — C — C — C — c G. — e§ (ett) — cr -c3 (ett) — cr — Cit — cn — cn D. — cm — cr —cm —ett —ett — cn —ett A. —ett — c — e§ — c — cn — c — e Observe: -ett for -e0 in Gen. Sing. Observe: Persist Masc. and Neuter before strong substs. II. Weak. Plur . M. F. N. — m — ett —ett — ett ent-rt, except Nom. Sing, of all genders, and Acc. Sing. Fem. and Neuter. 145 LESSON XXIV, [§§ I2t- III. Mixed. Singular . MASC. FEM. NEUTER. Plural. M. F. N, Nom. — Ct — C — Gen. — cn — Clt — eit Dat. — cn — cn — cn Acc. — cn — c — c£ — cn — cn —cn — cn Observe: Same as Weak (II), except Nom. Sing. Masc. and Nom. Acc. Sing. Neuter. 122. General Remarks on Adjectives. 1. Participles used attributively are employed and declined as Adjectives, as : geliebict SSater, beloved father ; ba§ toetnenbc $inb, the weeping child ; meirte geefyrtc SJiutter, my honoured mother. 2 . Adjectives and Participles used as Substantives vary their declension according to the rules for Adjective Declen- sion, but are spelt with capital letters, as: bet $ranfc, the sick man, patient; Fern, bic Strartfc, the sick woman; Plur. bi Z &rcmfen; cut $ranfcr, a sick man, patient; pi. Rxanit, sick people, patients. Remarks. — i. Many words, the English equivalents of which are Substantives only, are Adjectives in German, as : bet $rembe, the stranger, foreigner, PL bic gremben, but cin $r em* bet, PL grembe; bet Steifenbc, the traveller, cin SReifenbct, etc. These Adjective-Substantives, when Masc. and preceded by the Definite Article, have the same inflection as the Weak Declension. 2 . Names of languages from Adjectives are not declined when used without the article, as : 2Ba§ iff bte3 auf $CUtjd) ? What is this in German } 122 ] GENERAL REMARKS ON ADJECTIVES. 149 3. Adjectives of colour used substantively are indeclinable, or add -g in the Gen. Sing., as: bag ©run, beg ©riin(g). 4. If the Substantive is not expressed, the Adjective shows by its ending the gender, number and case, as : ©in fletner 9JJann unb etn groficr, A little man and a tall one. Note. — The English ‘ one * is in these cases not to be translated into German. 5. If a Substantive is preceded by a succession of Adjec- tives, they all follow the same form, as : guter, alter, roter SBetn ; ber gutc, altc, rote SBetn ; etneg guten, roten SBetneg. 6. Adjectives whose stem ends in -cl, -Ctt, -Ct, as : cbel, noble; golben, golden; Ijeifer, hoarse, drop -c of the stem when inflected ; those in -cl, -Ct may drop -e of the termina- tion instead, unless the termination is -C, -Ct, or -eg, as : bag golbne 33 auer; ber eblcn or ebcln $rau; bem ^eifren or ^etfern ©anger. 7. The Adjective fyoefj, high, drops c when inflected, as: ber Ijofye 23 aum, the high tree. 8. Adjectives can generally be used without change as ad- verbs, as : luftig, merry, merrily ; angenefym, agreeable, agree- ably ; gut, good, well. 9. Adjectives (so-called) in -ct from names of places are indeclinable, as : bte Sonbonct fettling, the London newspaper; hamburger ©cfytffe, Hamburg ships; etn 5 J 3 arifcr §anbfcyitl), a Paris glove. Note. — These adjectives correspond to the English use of the proper names without inflection. They are really substantives in the Gen. Plur., thus: bic £ouboner gettmtg is strictly bie |$cititng ber Soitfcanrr, the newspaper of the Londoners . Hence they are spelt with a capital letter. LESSON XXIV. 150 10. After personal pronouns, the Adjective follows the strong declension except in the Dat. Sing, and Nom. (and some- times Acc.) Plur., as : (for) me, poor man ; you good people ; us little children, tmr armen 9)tanne ; il)r guten Seute; un§ fleine(n) Sinber. 11. The Indefinite Pronouns (see Less. XXVII) ettoa§, ntd)t§, fcriel, are Substantives, and therefore not determinative words, and the following adjective has the strong declension, as: ettoa§ ©utc§, something good; mcf}t§ SfngeneljmeS, nothing pleasant. Observe : The Adjective is here used as substantive, and therefore spelt with a capital. 12. After the Indefinite Numerals in the Plural (see Less. XXIX) atle, all; einige (etlicfye), some; mcmcfye, many; tnefyrere, several ; folcfje, such ; fciele, many ; toentge, few, the Adjective may have either the weak or the strong ending. 13. After the interrogative ft>e Idfye in the plural, the strong declension is also found in the adjective ; and the exclama- tory toeld; is generally uninflected before an adjective, which then always has the strong form, as : 233eWj groj^eS 33ergnugen ! What (a) great pleasure ! 123 , Strong Verbs : ftf)tc§m Model. Infin. Impf. P. Part. Germ. Model: fcfyiefcen m gefd^Sffen Engl. Analogy: (shoot) shot shot Ablaut: ie u O u 0 LIST. (ber)brtef3en, vex berbrojj berbroffeit fflefjen (N.), flow M geflDffen giefjen, pour Segoffen I2 4 ] strong verbs: fd^ieften model. IS i gltmmen, glow glornm geglommett flimmen (W. N.A.), climb flotttm geflommen fviedE)en (N.), creep frod; gefrodjeit genteften, enjoy genojj genoffen riccfyen, smell (tr. and intr.) rod; gero dien (er)fd^aHen (W. N.), sound, resound erf^ott erfd^otten faufen, drink (of beasts) foff gefoffen fefyieften, shoot m gefc^offen fefylieften, lock, shut gefddoffen fteben (W.), boil (intr.) fott gefotten fprtefsen (N.), sprout gefproffett triefen (N.), drip troff getroffen Remarks. — 1. Observe, as under the bciften Model (§ 118, Rem. i, 2) the doubling of consonants and the interchange of fj and ff ; also the change of b into ft (as in leiben, jennets ken, ib . Rem. 1). 2. 9 ?acf)en, ‘to avenge/ is weak but has also P. Part, geraefyen. 3. ©aitfcn has also fiiufft, fauft in the Pres. Indie. 2. 3. Sing. 4. The simple verb fdjaffen is usually weak (fc^aUte, ge* 5. In fteben the weak P. Part, (gejiebet) is rare. 124. Strong Verbs: fedjtctt Model. T 2. 3. S. Pr. Ind. t _ Infin. 0 t Impf. P. Part. 2. S. Imper. Germ. Model: fedfjten fid^t fud^t gefod^ten Engl. Analogy : wanting Ablaut: C t DO LIST. fed^ten, fight ficfytft, fic^t, fidErt foefyt gefodEden flecfyten, weave, twine fUcfyift, fliefyt, flid^t gefloc^ten 152 LESSON XXIV. [§ 124 (er)Iofd^en (N.), be- (erlifd)eft) erlifd^t ertofd^ erlofc^eix come extinguished (erltfc^) melfett (W.), milk (milfft, milft, mill) molf gemolfert queffen, gush forth (quiffft, quitft, quelle) quoK gequoKen fdjmeljen (N.), melt (fc^mtlgeft) f$miljt fd&ntolj gefcbmoljen (intr.) (fd&tmlj) fcfytoetten (N.), swell (fd&toittft) fd&toillt fd;tooll gefcfytooKen (fc^totO) Remarks. — 1. Rare forms are enclosed in ( ). 2. The simple verb Iofcfyen, ‘to extinguish’ (tr.), is weak (tofd^te, gelofcfyt), as are also its separable compounds, e. g., au^lofd^en. 3. ©cfynteljen (intr.) has also the forms (fd&meljeft), fd^meljt (fd^melge) . 4. ©d^meljert, ‘to smelt’ and fd£)toeHert, ‘to cause to swell' (trans.), are weak. Vocabulary. extinguish, put out, au^'Iofcfyen water (flowers, etc.), begiefsen prescribe, berfdf)reiben flow past, boru'berffie^en close, shut, $u'fd;liej$en exhibition, bie 2(u§'ftelfung health, bie ©efunbfyeit drink, beverage, b a£ ©etranf cow, bie maid, maid-servant, bie 3Jf agb * mid-day, noon, ber SD^ittag pain, ber ©cfymerj snow, ber ©dEmee eight, acf)t celebrated, famous, beriibmt blind, blirtb healthy, healthful, gejurtb dear, tieb Limburg (adj.), Simburger dead, tot Toronto (adj.), £orontoer thereon, bar an past, by, borliber Idioms . 1. To go past tlie house, am $aufe t>oriibergef)em 2. In German, awf $eutfd) or im 5T>eutfd)em §124] strong: verbs fedEden model. 153 EXERCISE XXIV. A. 1. 2Bte ftmrbert ©ie biefe SBorter ctuf Seutfd) fcfyreiben? 2 . Ijabe meinett 23rief gefcfyloffen unb toerbe x£?n jefct na$ ber $oft bringen. 3. Se§ 9Jiorgen3 fteigen bie !Ieinen SSogel gum £>im* mel auf unb fingen luftig. 4. 2Beld; grof$e3 23ergnitgen, gute ©e= funbfyeit gu genieften! 5. ©n fleiner ©from floft luftig an unferem £aufe boriiber. 6 . Ser fjuft be§ $ranfen ift gefcfjtootten unb er leibet fefyr baran. 7. Unfer geeE>rter ^rofeffor ift feit afyt 3a^ren tot. 8 . Ser Softer fyat bent $ranfen guten, alten, roten 223 ein berfd^rieben. 9. ®ie geitungen ergafylen biel Don ber Sorontoer 2 Iu 3 ftedung. 10 . Ser 9tcgen quod bom §immel unb lofcbte ba§ glitnmenbe gfeuer auS. 11. Unfcre ©olbaten fc^Ioffen bie ©tabts tfyore unb foefyten ta^fer gegen ben geinb. 12 . Sie OJJdgbe fyaben bie $iifye gemolfen unb jeijt begieften fie bte 23lumcn. 13. 25itte, fcfytoeigt, ifyr guten Seute, benn bie $ranfen leiben je£t grofte ©dfjmergen. 14. 2Biirbe ber Sifyrer bofe toerben, toerut ber©d;uler feine Stufgabe gerrijfe? 15. Ser ©deafer fyat bem Steifenben ben 23eg naefy ber ©tabt genriefen. 16. SBurbe eS 3 $nen bie 9teife berleiben, ioenn id) guriidbliebe? 17. §aben ©ie bie pradfdigen 23Iumen gefeljen, bie \v\x bem $ranfen fdjiden? 18. Ser ©d;nee fdjmolg unb ba§ SBaffer troff Don ben §aufern, ate bie ©onne gegen SRittag toarm fd^ien. 19. Ser 23Unbe, ber neben un3 toofmt, flocfyt gftei $orbe fur meine SRutter. 20 . Ser junge unb ber alte $rembe, bie im SBalbe jagten, fyaben biele SBogel ge* fd^offen. 21 . 33on toem finb bie 33Iumen begoffen toorben? ©ie finb bom ©artner begoffen toorben. B . 1. The golden slipper was too small for Cinderella’s sisters. 2. Paris gloves and Limburg cheese are famous every- where. 3. The huntsman shot a hare and brought it home. 4. Our neighbours are not at home, for their doors and windows are closed. 5. I do not believe every story I hear. 6. Please, dear mother, tell us little children something new and pretty. 7. If Charles tears his new book, his mother 11 LESSON XXV. [§§ 124- iS4 will be very angry. 8. He seemed not to hear what I said to him. 9. These flowers are for the patients in the hospitals. 10. (The) green is agreeable for those who have weak eyes. 11. The horse is drinking the water which we have brought him. 12. Pure fresh water is a healthful beverage. 13. A week ago I was at (in) a concert, where this singer (/.) sang. 14. When the weather becomes cold, the dogs like to creep behind the stove. 15. The travellers enjoyed the beauty of the landscape, when they were ascending the high mountain* 16. Please tell me how this word is written in German. ORAL EXERCISE XXIV. 1. Haben Sie Ihren Brief schon geschlossen? 2. Wie lange ist Ihr geehrter Professor schon tot? 3. Was hat der Doktor der Kranken verschrieben ? 4. Weshalb wurde der Lehrerbose? 5. Wer hat diese Vogel geschossen? 6. Was hat der Jager mit dem Hasen gemacht, welchen er im Walde geschossen hat ? LESSON XXV. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. - STRONG VERBSj fncren model. 125. Comparison of Adjectives. In German, as in English, the degrees of comparison are formed by adding to the Positive : ~cr to form the Comparative, and —(c) ft “ “ “ Superlative, as : tteu, new neucr, newer neu(e)fi, newest rexc 1 ), rich reiser, richer reidjf richest angertefym, agreeable angertebmct, more agreeable cmgenefymft, most agreeable 126] COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 155 Remarks. — 1. Monosyllabic adjectives with a, 0, U (not an) generally take Umlaut (but with many exceptions, given in App. K.), as : lang (anger langft furj larger fiirjeft 2. The syllables -er, (e)fi are added to every adjective, without regard to its length, as in the case of angertefym (given above, but see §161, note). 3. Adjectives used attributively in the Comparative or Superlative degree are declined, and add the usual endings after the syllables -et / -eft respectively, as : ber retcfyere 9 Jtann ein reid^ercr 3 Kann mein d(te[tc£ $leib liebfter greunb * 4. Participles are compared like adjectives, as : geliebt, beloved geliebter geliebteft 5. -c of the Superlative ending is retained only after b, t or a sibilant (f, fdj, 3, fj, y), as: alt, Superl. dlteft; but groj$ always has Superl. gro[3t. 5. Adjectives in -e, -cl, — en, -Ct drop e of the stem in the Comparative, as : trage, trdger, trag[t ; ebel, ebler, ebelft. 126 . The Comparative. 1. ‘Than* = af§ after the Comparative. 2. The compound form with mefyr (Engl, ‘more’) is never (except with the adjectives given in § 161) used in German (as it is in Engl, with polysyllabic adjectives), unless when two adjectives (i. e., two qualities of the same object) are being compared, as : @r iff meljr fdntmdj al§ fvanf. He is more (i. e., rather) weak than ill. 156 LESSON XXV. [§§ 126- 3. Comparison of equality : I am (just) as rich as he, %e, before, conj.) (ef)er, sooner, adv.) | ^\ S °° neSt (f)inten, behind, adv.) fainter, hinder fyinterjt, hindmost (innen, within, adv.) inner, inner innerft, innermost COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. l 59 131] (Iaf$, late, obsolete) (mittel, middle) (nib, below, obsolete) (oben, above, adv.) (unten, below, adv.) (born, before, adv.) mittler, middle nieber, lower ober, upper unter, lower borber, fore le^t, latest, last mittelft, middle nteberft, lowest oberft, uppermost unterft, lowest, undermost borberft, foremost 131 . Strong Verbs: friercn Model. Infin. Impf. P. Part. Germ. Model : fricren fror gefroren Engl . Analogy: freeze froze frozen Ablaut: ic, etc. 0 0 Note. — The long 0 is what distinguishes this Model from the fdjiejiett Model (§ 123). LIST. A. (Infin. ie - it ) biegen, bend bog gebogen bieten, bid, offer bot geboten fliegen (N.), fly (on wings) flog geffogeit fliegen (N.), flee (escape) m gefloljen frieren (N. A.), freeze, be cold fror gefroren fyeben, lift, raise f)ob, Ijttb gefioben (er)fiefen, (er)furen, choose erfor erf'oren Iligen, lie (tell a falsehood) log gelogen (ber)lieren, lose feerlor fcerloren fcf)i eben, shove, push fcfiob gefdjoben fcf)tooren, swear fdjioor, fcfitour gefdjtooren (be)trligen, deceive, cheat betrog betrogen toiegen, weigh, have weight (intr.) toog getoogen jieljen (N. A.), pull (tr.) ; move (intr.) m gelogen Remarks. — 1. 3Si egen, bieten, fliegen, fliefyen, jiefyen, have also the forms (now used only in poetry) with eu for ic in the l6o LESSON XXV. [5 131 2. and 3. Sing. Pres. Ind. and 2. Sing. Imper., as : bcugft, bcugt, 6 tug ; flcucf)ft, ficud) ; jeudjft, jeud}. 2. SHegen, to rock, is weak (toiegte, getoiegt). 3. Observe the change of lj into g in jie^en, 309, ge3ogen. B. (Infin. e, •*.) fcfjeren, shear fd^or gefdjoren toeben (W.), weave toob geiooben foagen, weigh (trans.) toog getoogen (be)toegen, induce, persuade betoog beloogen Remark. — 23etoegen, ‘to move (set in motion)’ is weak (behxgte, betoegt). Vocabulary. to offer, an'bieten abolish, annul, cancel, auf'* peben put off, delay, postpone, auf'* fd;ieben remove (neut.), aus>'jief)en prefer, toor'^tef^en (dat. of pers.) fly away, toeg'fliegett roof, ba§ ®ad} colour, bie §arbe hunger, ber hunger cook, ber $od} * metal, bag detail' red (subst.), ba§ 9iot sparrow, ber ©peeling part, portion, ber Steil shore, bank, ba§ lifer on that account, therefore, beSpcdb yet, still (in spite of all), bocf; straight, gerabe (adj.) exactly, just, gerabe (adv.) as soon as, fobalb Idioms : 1. I prefer gold to silver, 3<*) ©olb bent elb alg fern 33ater. 5. ©ie Sleifenben fdjobert bag 33oot bom lifer unb ruberten liber ben 6. ?lufgefd;oben ift nid;t aufgef/oben. 7. SBelcfieg bon biefen SRabcjien ift bag grofjte ? 8. 3e f;ol;er ein 93ogel fliegt, je fleiner fcfieint er ju ioerben. 9. ©er grembe £;at tnir tnel;r fur mein §aug angeboten alg ©ie, aber id) glaube nic£)t, bafj er fo gut bega^Ien tbiirbe. 10. $e fteijjiger loir finb, befto mefir lernen ibir. 11. 3m ©ommer Ijabe id; bag Sanb ganj gern, aber im SBinter jief>e id; bie ©tabt bor. 12. 2Rir Un= gliidtidjen ift ber fyufe erfroren, alS id; nacb §aufe ritt. 13. © 0 = balb toir unfer §aug berfauft fatten, jogen ibir au§. 14. 2llg id; auf bem Sanbe tear, toog idf) mefir alg icf) jei;t tbiege. 15. ©g ift toaljr, bafj bie reicfiftett ?eute nic^t tmmer bie gliicflicfiften finb. 16. ©er 9iegen, toetdfier ung bie 9teife berleibet fiat, ioar me^r nitfdicf) alg angeneljm. 17. ©ie SRutter fiob bie ©tiide bon bem ©lag auf, toelcfieg ifir unartigeg $ittb auf bie ©vbc gefcfnniffen Jjatte. 18. ©iefer $nabe fiat feine ©Item betrogen, unb begfialb ift er ungliidlicf). 19. grieren ©ie, §err ^rofeffor? nidfit, aber icf) fror, alg id; auf ber ©trajje Soar. 20. ©er 3«ger fiat ben SSoget gefcfioffen, gerabe alg er auf ben 93aum flog. 21. 93on tbern iourbe 3f> r gefauft? 22. 33on einem f^retuben, ber feit bierjefin ©agen bei meinem Setter auf 33e* fud; ift. B. 1. Lead is a heavy metal, but gold is the heaviest. 2. This painter is not so famous as his father, but his pictures are just as fine. 3. George lost his parents when he was still very young. 4. Those students have lost a great deal of time, but now they are studying more industriously. 5. The bird flew away, just as the huntsman was on the point of shooting it. 6. When is the weather coldest in Canada ? In the month of January it is coldest. 7. Which bird flies fastest ? 8. The useful is better than the beautiful. 9. What kind of a dog has the huntsman lost? 10. Iron is heavy, lead LESSON XXVI, [§§ 133 - 162 is heavier, but gold is heaviest of all. 11. Green is a more agreeable colour for the eyes than red. 12. If the stick is too long, cut a piece of it off. 13. The upper part of the city of Quebec is much finer than the lower. 14. The weather seems to be warmer to-day, but it froze (perf.) yester- day. 15. When I was younger, I weighed more than my brother, but now he weighs more than I. 16. The upper part of the city of Quebec was built earlier than the lower part. ORAL EXERCISE XXV. 1. 1st der junge General ein tapferer Mann? 2. Ziehen Sie das Land der Stadt vor ? 3. Weshalb ist der Knabe so traurig? 4. Wann hat der Jager den Vogel geschossen? 5. Welche Studenten lernen am meisten ? 6. Welches ist besser, reich und ungliicklich oder arm und gliicklich (zu) sein? LESSON XXVI. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. - STRONG VERBS* fingen model. 13&. Demonstrative Pronouns. The Demonstrative Pronouns are: 1. her. Me, bag, that 2. biejer, btefc, biefeg, this, that 3. jener, |cne, jeneg, that, yonder 4. berjeuige, biejeutge, bagjemgc, that 5< ber uamlttfje, bie tmmlidjc, bag namltdje, the same 6. bcrfel6(ig)e, bie?db(ig)e, bagfefb(ige), the same 134] DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 1 63 7. folder), foIcjjCe), falrij(eg), such, such a 8. beggfeidjen, bcrgfetdjeit, of that kind (of those kinds) Remark. — These may all be used either as Substantive or Adjective Pronouns, except beggleicfyen (see § 139, 1, below). 133. 1. $er, fete, bag, used adjectively (i. e., before a substantive), is declined like the Definite Article (which is merely the demonstrative adjective weakened and un- emphasized), as : $er' 9Jlann, that man. £)er SOlamt', the man'. 2. When used substantively it is declined thus : Singular . Plural. MASC. FEM. NEUTER. ALL GENDERS. Nom. ber bie ba§ bie Gen. beffeit bereit beffeit berer (berett) Dat. bem ber bem benen Acc. ben bie ba§ bie Note. — The form bcreit (Gen. PL) is only used as = ‘of them/ as: How many children have you ? I have seven of them. 2£te Diele Winter Ijabeit @ie ? 3d) Ijafte beven fiebeit. 134. SDtcjcr and jener both follow the btefer Model (see § 6), but bieg is used for biefeg in the Neuter Nom. and Acc. Sing, when used substantively, as : Sdeg tft mein 33udb, Gr frntte bieg niefyt gefyort. This is my book. He had not heard this, btefet = this (the nearer of two objects, hence also =) the latter, as: jener = that, yonder (the more re 7 ?iote of two objects, hence also =) the former; Sdcfer Scium tft grof$, after jener if t grower. This tree is large, but that (one) is larger. 164 LESSON XXVI. [§§ I 34" ScttCt 33aum, yonder tree (pointed out as remote ] ). $arl unb -JBiUjelm ftrtb 33ruber ; biefer tft fleifttg, jcncr tft trage, Charles and William are brothers ; the latter is diligent, the former is idle. 135. 1 . 2>erjcnige is declined in both parts, like the Defi- nite Article followed by the adjective form jenig with weak endings, thus : Singular . Plural . MASC. VEM. NEUTER. Nom. berjenige biejentge Gen. bcSjentgcn berjemgen etc. etc. ba§jentge bcijentgeu etc. ALL GENDERS. btcjenigctt berjenigctt etc. 2 . SDer or bcrfenigc is used : (a) before a genitive case, as : E>abe 3f>ren £>ut unb bcn(jcntgen) 33ruber§, I have your hat and that of your brother (your brother’s) ; Note. — The demonstrative may also be omitted in this construction, 35 in English ; or the simple ber may be used. (£) before a relative clause, as : 2>er(jentge) , weldjft jufrieben tft, tft gliictlid). He who is contented, is happy. $ie(jcntge) ffrau ift am fdjonften, ttsefdje gut tft. That woman is most beautiful, who is good. §au§ unb ba§(jcnige), toorin toir toofmen, Your house and that in which we live. Note. — In sentences like the first, where ber(jenige) is used substantively, the demonstrative and relative together may be replaced by the compound relative tt>er, thus : Set* ^ufrieben iff, ift gliicfttdj. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 165 I39l 130 . $crfcI6c (berfelbige) = 'the same/ as: the sams hat, bcrfclfcc §ut ; and is declined like berjenige, in two parts, written as one word, thus : Singular . MASC. FEM. NEUTER. Nom. berfelbe btefelbe ba^felbc Gen. bedfelbett berfelbett bcSfelbm etc. etc. etc. Plural . ALL GENDERS. bicfelben berfelbett etc. (For examples of its use see § 143, 2-4, below). Note. — @efbig is sometimes used without article, with strong end- ings: felbiger, -e, -e8. 137 * $er namlidjc sometimes replaces berfelbe. 138 . 1. ©old), when used alone, follows the biefer Model, as : fcdd;er 2 Beirt, such wine; fol d;c£ ©rob such bread. 2. After eitt, it follows the mixed declension of adjectives, as : Nom. citt folder 28 ein, such a wine Gen. eiite$ fold;ett 2Betrte3, of such a wine, etc. 3. Before etn, fold) is always, and before an adjective, gen- erally, uninflected, as : ©old) etn 2Beut ; foldj guter SBetn, or folder gute SBein. Note. — The adjective has the strong endings when fold) is uninflected, otherwise it has the weak endings, except in the plur., where it some- times has the strong. 3. @ofd) with etn is often replaced by fo, as: So eitt SBeiu ; eitt fo guter SBetn. 139 . 1. $>c£gleid;en is used as an indeclinable neuter sub- stantive (never as adjective), thus: 3d; batte bc§gletd>en nie gefyort, I had never heard that sort of thing (anything of that kind). 1 66 LESSON XXVI. [§§ 139- Note. — 2)e3gteid)en is- also used adverbially, = ‘in the same way, also.* 2. Scrgleid^en is used both substantively (referring to a fem. or plur. noun) and adjectively. In the latter case it is invariable, standing before substantives of any gender and number, as : Sergletdjert 2Betn, $ergletc£)en SBeirte, Wine of that sort. Wines of that sort. Note. — The phrase: unb bergteidjen rneljr (abbrev. it. bgt. nt.) is used for unb fo lueiter (it. f. in.) = etcetera General Remarks on Demonstrative Pronouns. 140. The English ‘ that ’ is rendered in German : 1. As Demonstrative Pronoun : (a) Most generally by btV or feiefer, when there is no contrast with any other object, thus : That man, feet' SDiann or bicfcr SWann. ( b ) By bet or berjcmge before a genitive case or a relative clause (see § 135, 2, above). G) By jntcr, when the object is distinctly pointed out as remote (= yon, yonder), or as more remote than another, thus : Sencr Saum, That tree (over yonder). 35tefe§ unb jcneS, This house and that one. 2. As Relative by ber or luctdjer (see § 95), thus : The book that I have, £)a3 33u$, ba§ (tticWje§) idj fyabe. 3. As Conjunction by bajj, thus : I shall tell your father that you are diligent, 3 cf) toerbe beinem SSater fagen, bafj bu fleifng bift. 141. The neuter pronouns bag, btcf(c8), JCUC3 are used (like c3, see § 39, 1, and tuelff)e3, § 82, Rem. 2) before the verb DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. M3] 167 ‘to be/ representing the real subject, which follows the verb, and with which the verb agrees, as : tft mein SSrttber, That is my brother. 2>icf(c§) iff 3fy re ©d^tuef ter, This is your sister. ,3enc§ finb feme Sucker, Those are his books. 142. ®cr and \tXitX, when referring to inanimate objects, are often replaced by the adverb ba(r), ‘there/ before pre- positions (compare § 38, Rem. 5) and biefer by {per, as ; 3d; £)abe ni d;t8 bamit gu tljun, I have nothing to do with that (there with). fnermit muft id; fd;lief$en. With this (heremXh) I must close. Note. — This substitution is not made before a relative, as 3d) bad) te ait ba3 (not baran), ©ie fagten, I was thinking of that v/hich (what) you were saying. 143. Use of Demonstratives to replace Personal Pronouns. 1. The neuter gen. bcffcit replaces that of the neuter pers. pron. (feiner) referring to things, as: 3d; ertnnre mid) beffen niefyt, I do not recollect it (feiner = him, of him). 2. The genitive of bet and that of bcrfdfce are frequently used to replace the possessive adjective of the 3. person, in order to avoid ambiguity, as : SDer ©raf Wax mit feinem (be§ ©rctfen) 3dger unb bcffeit (be3 3ager3) §unben (or mit ben §unben begfelbcn) auf ber Sagb, The Count was at the hunt with his (the Count’s) huntsman and his (the huntsman’s) dogs. Note. — 9Jfit feUtCU §unben would mean ‘with the Count’s dogs.’ 3. Serfclbe is used in other cases also to prevent ambiguity (also biefer in the same way), as : i68 LESSON XXVI. [§§ 143- Sftetn ©ruber tft bei metnem $rcurtbe, uttb berfelfic (or biefer) acfytet ilju fefyr ; or: er(mein ©ruber) ad^iet bcttfdlieti fef;r. My brother is at my friend’s, and he (the latter, the friend) esteems him (my brother) very much ; or : he (my brother) esteems him (my friend) very much. 4. ®crfcl6e also replaces the personal pronouns, to prevent repetitions like if?tt — 2$ nen / ©ie — fte, etc., as : SDtefer 2Betn tft gut, id) farm $$rten benfcl&cit (for iljn Sfjlten) em^fel;len, This wine is good, I can recommend it to you. 144 . Strong Verbs: fiitgen Model. Infin. Impf. P. Part. Germ . Model : ftitgett fang gefungen Engl. Analogy : sing sang sung Ablaut: 1 a u LIST. Btnben, bind Banb geBunben brtngen (N.), press brang gebrungen finben, find fcmb gefuitbeit flingen, ring, sound llang gellungen (ge)lingen (N.), succeed (impers., gelang gelungen with dat. of pers.) rtngen, wring (the hands, etc.) rang gerungen fcpngen, twine ; swallow fcfdang gefcffiungen fdj)ft>inben (N.), vanish fdftnanb gefcfiiounbon fcfyitnngen, swing fcfnuang gefcfyhnmgen ftngctr, sing fang gefungen finfen, sink fanf gefunfen fpringen (N. A.), spring, leap f^rang gefprungett trinfen, drink (of human beings) tranf getrunfen hnnben, wind toanb gewunbeti jhnngen, force ?h>ang gejtoungert STRONG VERBS : fingCU MODEL. Vocabulary. M4l 169 to press in, penetrate, ein's escape, eptfliefyen [bringen invent, erfinben remember, fid£) erinnern (-{-gen. of thing) drown, be drowned, ertrinfen spring upon, log'flpringen (auf -)- acc,) mean, suppose, meinen oblige, berbinben vanish, berfcbminben on board, am Sorb grammar, bie ©ramma'ii! dealer, ber £anbler lion, ber Some diver, ber ©audEjer telephone, bag SeIe^on f clever, gefcf)icft prudent, cautious, t>or f fid^ tig unfortunately, leiber below, unterfyalb (-{- gen.) never yet, nod) rue EXERCISE XXVI. A . 1. ©ieg ift mein Setter aug SDtontreal ; fennen ©ie tyn? 2. gatoofyt, biefen fenne tcf> ganj gut, aber nicbt ben, ber mir geftern ben Srief gebracfyt bat. 3. ©in bofer $nabe fcbmang ficb auf ben 9tyfelbaum im ©arten feineg Sacfybarg unb fcbmifc bit $©fel auf bie ©rbe. 4. %n biefem gclbe f)aben bie Sauern fcE>on bag ©rag gefcfynitten, aber in jenern merben fie eg erft morgen fdfmeiben. 5. „2iebet bie, bie eu$ fyaffen." 6. ^eneg fxnb meine §unbe, aber bieg finb biejenigen, toel^e ber Sager hor acf)t ©agen berloren bat, unb bie id) gefunben babe. 7. ©rinnern ©ie fid) beffen, mag icb g[)nen bom alien ©d)loj 3 am Ufer beg ©eeg er^dblt babe ? 8. 2) e m miirbe id) feinen STfjaler Ieif>en ; b er miirbe nie bejat)Ien. 9. ©ie ©deafer trieben i£?re §erben fiber benfelben Serg auf melcben mir ftiegen. 10. ©er Seifenbe ftieg bom ^Bferbe unb banb bagfelbe an einen fleinen 23aum. 11. ©ag ©dbiff fiieft an einen f^elfen, bag SBaffer brang ein, unb bag ©cfyiff fan!. 12. S$ babe micb fo 5 fliffen, Satein ju lernen, aber eg ift mir nxd)t gelungen. 13. ©er Some mar gerabe im Segrtffe auf ben Seifenben log§uft)ringen, alg ber Sager i^n fd)oj3. 14. fennen ©ie §>errn Sell ? 23elcben §errn Sell meinen ©ie? 15. ©enjenigen, ber bag ©elepbon erfunben 12 170 LE3S0N XXVI. [§§ *44- f;at. 16. 2Ba§ tft au§ meiner beutfcfyen ©rammattf getoorben? ©ie fc£)etnt gang berfcfytounbert gu fern. 17. £)a§ finb fcfyone Crbbeeren ; too fyabert ©ie biefelbert gefauft ? 18. ©ie finb fcftort, liicfyttoaljr? ©oldf) pracbtige Seeren finbcn ©ie ni$t bet jebem ^dnbler. 19. ©o fyeifce3 SBetier Ijaben toir ttocfy nid^t gefyabt. 20. 2Ba§ tourbe bir geanttoortet, ate bu nacf; bent $ranfen frags teft? 21. 9Uan fagte ntir, er fet eirt toenig beffer. B . 1. The patient is just as weak to-day as he was yester- day. 2. Such happy days I have never yet passed ! 3. Where do you generally pass the winter ? 4. Where is my pen ? Have you found it ? 5. This is my neighbour of whom you have already heard so much. 6. The ship has sunk, and the people who were on board have been drowned. 7. I was looking for my coat, but found my father’s. 8. I should be very much obliged to you, if you sang me a beautiful song. 9. Which is poorer, he who has no money, or he who has no friends? 10. How should we escape if the boat sank? 11. Charles has already finished (the) learning (of) his lesson ; he is cleverer than I thought. 12. The diver that jumped from the bridge has unfortunately been drowned. 13. It will have been a good lesson for us, if it makes us more prudent in future. 14. Is that a new song? No, it is the same that I sang a week ago at your house. 15. The St. Lawrence River is the broader.t in Canada ; below the city of Quebec it is broadest. 16. The patient is better to-day; he will be allowed to go out to-morrow. ORAL* EXERCISE XXVI. 1. Was ist aus dem Taucher geworden ? 2. 1st Karl ge- schickter als Johann ? 3. Was hat der bose Knabe gemacht ? 4. Ist der Reisende dem Lowen entflohen ? 5 Ist es Ihnen gelungen, Latein zu lernen ? 6. Wessen Hunde sind das ? *451 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS* I/I LESSON XXVII. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. - STRONG VERBS: tytmteU AND Ijelfen models. 145 . Indefinite Pronouns. The Indefinite Pronouns are: (a) Substantive : 1. tnan (indecl.), one, they, people (Fr. on) 2. jcbcrtltamt, everybody, everyone 3. jcmanb, i somebody, anybody * I cnmp* nnp nm; nnp ( some one, any one 4. ntemanb, { nobody ’ no , one ’ no person ( not anybody, etc. 5. eitottS, something, anything 6. nidjtg, nothing, not anything 7. titter, one, some one 8. fciltcr, no one, none of persons only ^ of things j only { (biefer Mod- el) persons and things {b) Adjective (also used substantively) : 1. einige, cfiidjc (plur.), some, a few, several 2. feb(&eb)cr (jegltdjcr), each (one), every one 3. UUtncfjer, many (a one) 4. tneljrere (pi.), several 5. fckt, much, pi. Hi efe, many 6. toeing, little, pi. toenige, few 7. toeJdjer, some Remark. — The Indefinite Pronominal Adjectives are also used as Indefinite Numeral Adjectives (see Less. XXIX). (btefer Mod- el) persons and things 172 LESSON XXVII. [§§ 14* 146. SJifltt (spelt with small letter and one tt, to distinguish it from ber SJicmn, the man, from which it is derived) is the Indefinite Personal Pronoun, and is used to make a state- ment without specifying any particular person. It is equivalent to Engl. 4 one, they, we, you (indef.), people/ etc., (French on), or to the impersonal use of the passive voice, as : SOiau fagt, One says; they, people say; or it is said. 9Jicm fanrt Dl unb SBaffer nicfyt gufammen mtfcfyen. One (we, you) cannot mix oil and water. Remarks. — 1. One’s self (red.) = fid) ; one’s = fcin (poss. adj.), as : 9Jlan f$amt fidj feiner Seller, One is ashamed of one’s faults. 2 . 9J?an cannot be replaced by any other pronoun, as : 93? an toirb miibe, frenn matt (not er) gu lange arbeitet, A man (one) gets tired, when he works too long. 147. ^ebermann is used in the Sing, only; it takes -8 in Gen., but is otherwise uninflected, as : Scbermann3 ©a$e ift niemanbeS ©a$e. Everybody’s business is nobody’s business. ©te Sibel ift etn Su cfy fur jebermamt (acc.), The Bible is a book for everybody. 148. Semattb and its negative tttemanb are used in the Sing, only, and are declined thus : Norn, jemanb ntemanb Gen. jemanbeS ntemanbc§ Dat I i emcmbem \ ™ eman knit * X jemanb(cn) ( niemanb(cn) Acc. jemanb(en) niemanb(cu) INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 173 Note. — The uninflected forms are preferable for the Dat. and Acc., as : 2£ir fjabeit niemanb (acc.) getabeft, We have blamed nobody. Herbert ©ie e§ jcmaith (dat.) fagert ? Shall you tell it to anybody? 149 . 1. is sometimes abbreviated to as : ft>iH bir ttm§ fagen, I will tell you something. 2. After eflM 3 and mdjfS, an adjective has the strong neuter ending -e£ (see § 122, Rem. 11, above). 3. df!M§ and ttid)f3 are also used as Indefinite Numerals (see Less. XXIX, § 168). 1 50 . diner (bxefer Model), ‘ one, some one, any one/ is used : 1. In the Nom. Sing. Masc. = man. 2. To supply the missing cases of man, as : @3 tf)ut einem (dat.) leib, bon fetnen greunben ju fcfjeiben. One is sorry to part from one’s friends. 3. Before a substantive, as : diner meiner greunbe (butt meinen greunben), One of my friends. din(e)3 bon biefen Silvern, One of these books. 4. To represent a preceding substantive, as : §aben ©te etn 33ud; ? ga, id) fyabe cin(e)§. Have you a book ? Yes, I have one. Note. — The e maybe dropped in the ending of the Nom. and Acc. Neut. 151 . Seiner (biefer Model) is the negative of einer, and is used : 1. As equivalent to ntemanb. 2. Before a substantive, as: Seiner bon meinen greunben. None (not one) of my friends. 3. To represent a preceding substantive, as : §aben ©te etn 33ud) ? DIetn, id) t>abe fein(e)§. Note. — Like eiltcv, it may drop e in the Nom. and Acc. Neuter. 174 LESSON XXVII. [§§ is*- 152. dtnige (effidje), indjme, = 4 some, a few, several/ as : (Stnige bon meinen^reunben, Some (a few) of my friends, ©ic^rcre biefer SBucfyer, Several of these books. 153. Sober, jebtoeber, jeglicfyer (biefer Model) or cut jebcr, etc. (def. art. -f- adj. with mixed declension) are used, especially in the Masc., for jebermann, as : SDie S3iE>eI iff eirt 33ud; fur Jcbctt. ((Sin) jcber iff femes ©ludeS ©djmieb, Every man (one) is the architect (lit. smith) of his own fortune. 154. ©ianrfjcr, 4 many a one, many a person ’ (biefer Model), is used to express indefinite plurality, as : ®lanif)Cr benft. Many a one (person) thinks. 155. SBellfjcr (biefer Model) is used for ‘some/ referring to a preceding substantive, as : £>aben ©ie 33rot? i$ I;abe toeliJjeS. 156. For t>tcl and tontig see Less. XXIX, § 17 6 . 157. When the Engl. 4 anybody, anyone, anything/ = ‘anybody, etc., at all' (indefinite and general), they are rendered by trgenb jemanb, irgcub einer, irgcttb ettoaS, as : Anybody (at all) will tell you, where I live, Sfgcttb jemanb (or einer) toirb 3$n en fagen, too id; toofyne. Sd^ bin mit irgeitb ettoaS jufrieben, I am contented with anything (at all). 158. Strong Verbs: fpiitnen Model. Infin. Impf. P. Part. Germ. Model : fptnnen fpann gefponrten Engl. Analogy: spin span (spun) (incomplete) Ablaut: too strong verbs : fyimten MODEL. 175 *59] LIST. (Note. — The Impf. Subj. is also given, on account of variations occurring.) (be)ginnen, begin Begann Begonne Begonnen rinnen (N.), flow r am rdnne geronnen f$ft>immen (N. A.), swim fct;ft>amm f fcfytoamme 1 fd£;tt)iimme gefd)toommen finnen, think faun fanne gefonnen fpinnen, spin fpann ( fya nne ( fyiinne gefiponnen (ge)toinnen, win, gain getoann ^ getnanne | getobnne getoonnen Note. — Observe the subjunctive forms with vowel of P. Part. -f* Um- laut, instead of vowel of Impf. Ind. 159. Strong Verbs: Ijelfm Model. Infin. Pr. Ind. 2. 3. Sing. Pr. Imper.2.Sing. Impf. Subj. P. Part. Germ. Model: fyelfen fytlft, fyilf fyalf fyiitfe gefyiilfen Engl. Analogy : wanting. Ablaut: t i n 5, Sorit 0 LIST. (Note. — The 2. 3. sing. Pres. Ind., 2. sing. Imper., and Impf. Subj. are also given.) Bergen, hide Birgft, birgt, Birg Barg Barge geBorgen ^ burst N ’ ) ’ (fctrfteft, fcirft, 6irft) barft geborften (ber)berben(N.), berbirbft, etc. berbarb berbiirbe berborben spoil (intr.) brefcfcen, thrash brtfdjeft, etc. brSf^e } 9 ebro ^ en gelten, be worth giltft, gilt, gilt gait gcilte gegolten 176 LESSON XXVII. [§ 159 Ijelfeit, help tytlfft, etc. Mf bitlfe geI;oIfen fd;elten, scold fdjnltft, fdnlt/fdjilt fc^alt fdEjalte gefdftlten jterben, (N.), die ftirbft, etc. ftarb ftitrbe geftorben toerben, woo ftnrbft, etc. toarb tourbe geftorbett toerbett (N.), be- come toirft, toirb, toerbe f toarb l iuurbe totirbe geftorben toerfen, throw toirfft, etc. toarf toiirfe geftorfen Remarks. — i. Most of these verbs have 5 or ii in the Impf. Subj. instead of ii, which cannot be distinguished in sound from the e of the Pres. Ind. ; thus fterbe and ftarbe would sound alike. 2. SSerberben, when trans., is both strong and weak (tier* berbte, fcerberbt). 3. S&erbert has toarb or tourbe in the sing.; tourbert only in the plur. (see § 19). 4. The Imperative never has the final -e in these verbs, except fterbe. 5. Observe the omission of (c)t of 3. sing. Pres. Ind. in the verbs with stem in -t, -b. Vocabulary. to be or do (of health), fid) befinbert reflect, deliberate, fid; be* finrten accomplish, leifien remain over, be left, ii'brig blctbert hide, conceal, fcerbergett requite, reward, bergelten complete, finish, botten'ben throw away, fteg'fterf en run away, vanish, jerrinrtett the conduct, ba£ 33etragen poet, ber 35id)ter barley, bie ©erfte oats, ber £>afer sailor, ber 9Jktrofe musician, ber SJlufifer need, necessity, bie dove, pigeon, bie Saube plate, ber better loss, ber SSerlufi' * §159] strong verbs: fyetfen model. * 77 embarrassment, perplexity, thereto, baju' bie 23erle'genljeit no longer, nicfd melji? wheat, bet SB3eisen as, toie evil, bbfe Idiom: I like the country, 6tn eitt $reun& t)om Sanfee# EXERCISE XXVII. A. 1. 9Ber gu biel rebet, leiftet tbenig. 2. ©erjenige, toeldier ju ijiel rebet, leiftet menig. 3. ©ied firtb meine ©djulje, aOer jened finb (bie) $$re(n). 4. 23 er jebermannd fyreunb ift, ift niemanbed gveunb. 5. ©n guter GIjrift bergilt 23ofed mit ©utem. 6. @d ift fo eben jernanb fyier geioefen. 7. SJBeldied bon biefen Saits bern jte^ert ©ie hot, bad rote ober bad blaue? 8. 2Ben fudjft bu? fudje bie arme gamilie, bereit Sater geftorben ift. 9. §aben ©ie fd;on 5$ten SSeijen gebrofdjen? SRan brifd^t fjeute ben £>afer unb bie ©erfte, aber man toirb erft morgen ben SBeijen brefdjen. 10. @d ift ein SSertuft fiir bad gauge Sanb, toenn ein grower unb guter -JJiann ftirbt. 11. ©er grojje ^nabe fd;dmt fid; feineS Setragend unb bedijalb berbirgt er fein ©efidjt. 12. „2Bie geioonnen, fo gerronnen," bad ift, man berltert leicfd, load man leidjt getoinnt. 13. ©ie ©rbbeeren, ioelcfye id) geftern faufte, finb berborben. 14. iBian l;ilft gent einem, ber fief) felbft £;ilft. 15. §iermit fd^idEe icf) 3^ nen bad ©elb, toeldjed ©te fo freunblid) getoefen finb, mir ju IeiE;en. 16. ©inb ©ie ein greunb bom ©dftibimmen? !yei$t nicf)t meftr, aber iefy fdjtoamm gern, aid id; jitnger tbar. 17. ©er UngUidlidje befann fid) lange, fdjritt aber enblid) an ben 9ianb bed Sooted unb fprang ind SKaffer. 18. $jft er ertrunfen? 9iein, er tourbe bon ben 2Iiatrofen gerettet. B. 1. Good morning, Mr. Bell, how are you to-day? 2. Have you any money? Yes, to be sure, I have some, but not enough for my journey. 3. Where is the tree to which the traveller tied his horse ? 4. People take cold easily when they are tired. 5. Schiller and Beethoven were Germans, the i ;8 SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON D. [§§ 160- latter was a great musician, the former a great poet. 6. Mr. A. is a lazy man; he would not work at all, if necessity did not force him to it. 7. We found the money we lost a week ago. 8. Many a one begins what he will never finish. 9. Mary, my child, throw that apple away ; it is spoilt. 10. Have you shot many pigeons ? We have shot only a few. 11. Except my brother and me nobody is at home. 12. The mother is scolding, because her naughty child has thrown a plate upon the ground. 13. Where is the River St. Lawrence broadest? 14. When the children had drunk, the cat drank the milk which remained over (was left). 15. The women on (art) the shore screamed and wrung their hands, when the boat sank in which their husbands were. 16. Has the money which was lost been found ? ORAL EXERCISE XXVII. 1. Wann wird man den Hafer dreschen ? 2. Warum ver- birgt der bose Knabe sein Gesicht ? 3. Wem hilft man gern ? 4. Sind Sie ein Freund vom Jagen ? 5. Was fur ein Mann ist Herr Bell? 6. Weshalb schilt die Frau? SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON D. ON CERTAIN ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS. 160 . Adjectives used as Attributes only. The following classes of adjectives are not used as predicates : 1. Derivatives in -en, -Cm (denoting material), as; golben, of gold, golden; filbern, of silver. These are replaced in the predicate by the substantive with Don, as : SHcfe Ufyr ift toon ©ilber, This watch is of silver. 2. Many in -ifd) and -ltd), as : biebifd), thievish; tierifd), bestial; Ijeudp ler if d), hypocritical; tdgtid), daily ; jdtjrUd), annual ; tturfhdj, actual, real. 3. Those in -tgfrom adverbs of time and place, as: Ijeutig, of to-day; fyieftg, of this place. 162] adjectives used as predicates only. 179 161 . Adjectives used as Predicates only. The following classes of adjectives are not used as attributes : 1. Those that are really nouns (though spelt with a small letter), such as: angft, afraid; feittb, hostile; fremtb, friendly; leib, sorry; not, needful; ttii(3e, useful ; fdjulb, guilty. 2 . The following among others : bereit, ready gctroft, confident etngebenf, mindful gemaljr, aware gar, cooked, done (of food) gram, averse gang nttb gcibe, current (of money, etc.) irre, astray, wrong teilljaft, partaking Note. — Both these classes of adjectives are incapable of comparison in the ordinary way, and form the comparative and superlative by prefixing ntcfjr and am Utciften respec- tively, as : Qv ttmrbe meirtem 23 ruber tmmer mcljr grant, He grew more and more averse to my brother. 2)a§ ifyat mir am mcifteit lei&, I was most sorry for that {relative superl.). 162 . Remarks on certain Pronouns. 1. The pronouns Voer, are frequently followed by the demonstrative ber in the after clause, and always so when the latter (the seeming ante- cedent) is in a different case from that of the relative, as : SBer l)at, hem mirb gegeben, To him that hath shall be (is) given. 2. The neuter pronouns c8, ba§, It) a 8, jebe8, atfe 3 are often used in the Nom. and Acc. Sing, in reference to a number of persons or things, espe- cially if of different gender, as: banner, SBeiber, Uinber, alle£ fdjrte itm §ilfe, fo taut fomtte. Men, women, children, all cried for help as loud as they could; gnil) iibt fid), ein Sfteifter mcrbeit mill, Those practice early, who would become masters. Note. — Observe that the verb is singular. 3. 2Ba8 is sometimes used for marimt? (‘why?’), as: 2 Ba 8 meinft bit? Why dost thou weep? 4. The relative adverb mie (‘as *) after fold) etn or fo etn (‘such a’) is usually followed by a personal pronoun, agreeing in gender and number with the antecedent, as : ©old) (fo) eiit Sftaitn, (or ein SDhnn) mie mir tljit nie gefannt fatten, Such a man as we had never known. Note.— T he demonstrative fotcfyorfo is often omitted, as indicated in the above example. i8o LESSON XXVIII. [§§ 163- LESSON XXVIII. NUMERALS: CARDINALS AND ORDINALS. - STRONG VERBSi tyred) ett model. Numerals. 163. Cardinals. 1. ein§ ; etn(er), -c, — (cS) 2. gtoei 3. bret 4. bier 5. fiinf 6. fecf)§ 7. fieben 8. ac^t 9. ncuit 10. jel;n 11. elf 12. gtoolf 13. bretje^tl 14. biergefyn 15. fitnfjefm or funfjefyn 16. fedjjelty 17. fleBgc^n 18. acfytjelty 19. neunjefin 20. gnmttjtg 21. eitt unb glnartgtg 22. jltsct unb atoanjtg 30. breifjig 40. bterjtg 50. funfjtg or fiinfjig 164. Ordinals. 1st. ber erfte 2nd. tt gireite 3rd. tt britte 4th. tt bierte 5th. rt fiinfte 6th. tt fcdi^te 7th. tt ftebente 8th. tt acfite 9th. tt neunte 10th. tt jefmte 11th. rt elfte 12th. rt jtbolfte 13th. rt breijefmte 14th. tt bierge^nte 15th. rt funf* or fimfjefmte 16 th. tt fed^efmte 17th. tt fiebjefmte 18th. tt acfdjefmte 19 th. tt neunjcbnte 20th. tt jtoangigfte 21st. tt ein wub jtoanjtgfte 22nd. tt jtoei unb ginangigfte 30th. tt bretyigfte 40th. tt bierjigfte 50th. rt funfjigfte or fiinf* i*OP« 165] REMARKS ON THE CARDINAL NUMERALS. 1 8 1 60. fedfoig 70. fieb(en)jtg 80. ac^tgig 90. neunjtg 100. Ifunbert 101. fnmbert (urtb) ein§ 123. Ifunbert (unb) brei unb gtoangig 60th. ber [ed^tgfte 70th. „ fieb(en)gigfte 80th. „ acfdjigfte 90th. „ neunjigfte 100th. „ E>unbertfte 101st. „ fyunbert unb erfle 123rd. „ fyunbert (unb) brei unb jtoanjigfte Cardinals. 200. jtoei Bunbert 300. brei Ijunbert 1000. taufenb 1001. taufenb unb ein§ 1036. taufenb (unb) fecfy§ unb breiffig 1887 { tau f en ^ ( un ^) ac ^ t Bunbert (unb) fieBen unb ad/tjtg 1 or acffijefntfyunbert fieBen unb acfytjig 10,000. jefm taufenb 100,000. Bunbert taufenb 1,000,000. eine 9Mion' 2,567,849. jlnei SRillionen, fiinf Ijunbert (unb) fieBen unb fecfigig taufenb, ad)t Bunbert (unb) neun unb Uierjig. Interrogative Ordinal: ber teietnclfie ? which (in order) ? what day of the month? (See § 166, 3, Note 2). 165 . Remarks on the Cardinal Numerals. 1 . din only is declined throughout, thus : (a) Before a substantive after the mein Model (§ 8), like the Indefinite Article, which is the same word un- emphasized, as : din 7 9Jiann, one man ; ein 23iann', a man. LESSON XXVIII. IS2 [§ 165 Note. — The numeral etlt is sometimes printed with a capital, or spaced out (= Engl, italics) to distinguish it from the Article, as : SBir fyaben din' (c t n) 33ucf), We have one book. SStr tjabeu ein SBud)', We have a book. ( b ) Used substantively (see also § 150, above) without article, after biefer Model (§ 6), as: Gtrtcr bon trteirten greunbert, One of my friends. Unfer etrtcr. One of us (of our sort). (0) After an article or other determinative word, like an adjective, as : ©er eine 33ruber, The one brother. Sfteirt etncr ©cfmb, (The) one of my shoes. Note. — With the definite article it may be used substantively also, as : $er eine unb ber anbcre, (The) one and the other; and even in the plural (= some, one party), as : ^ic eineit fasten bte§, bie anbern jeneS, Some (the one party) said this, others (the other party) that. (d) @irt3 is the form used in counting. 2 . and ferei may have -er in the Gen. and -eit in the Dat. when not accompanied by any article, etc., as : 2fu§ gtoexer ober breier .geug en 3Jtunb fommt bie 95 ?aE>rf>ext, Out of the mouth of two or three witnesses cometh the truth. SJlart farm nidjt gVueten §errert Irienen, One cannot serve two masters. Note. — The Gen. -et is necessary to show the case, but may be re- placed by but the Dat. -cn before a substantive is rare, the -it of the substantive sufficiently showing the case. 3. Setbc = ‘both/ refers to two objects taken together, and is declined like an adjective in the Plur. : N. beibe, G. beiber, etc.; bie beibcn; nteine beiben SBrtiber. It often REMARKS ON THE NUMERALS. §165] 133 replaces gtr>ei after determinative words, as in the last example. The neuter sing, form betbc£ is also found, as : 33 etbc§ iff toafyr, Both (things) are true. Notes. — 1. Both of us = tint* beibe(n) (we two). 2. * Both 9 as conjunction = foh)ol)f, etc. (See Less. XL.) 4. Other cardinals are not declined unless used substan- tively (see next section). 5. The numbers from 13 to 19 are formed by adding -JcJjtt (Engl, -teen) to the units (but fecftjefyn drops -f>). 6 . The multiples of ten (20 — 90) add -jtg to the units, gtoanjig, bretfjig being irregular, and fedtjig dropping -5. 7. The tmits always precede the tens in compound numbers from 21 upwards, both being joined by the conjunction unb ‘and ’ ; hence 25 = fitnf UU& gtuangig (Engl. ‘ five and twenty ’); 156 = fyunbert fed )3 nuts funfgtg, etc. 8. Humbert and 2aitfeub are generally used without ein be- fore them, and the conjunction unb may be omitted after them. 9. ‘One by one, two by two/ etc. == je einer, je Jftei (or je jtoet unb jtoet), etc. 10. The Cardinals may be used as substantives : (a) With a substantive understood (as simple numbers only), with -c in Nom. Acc., -ett in Dat., as : Sffle hiere, All fours. ■JJht fecfyjcn. With [a coach and] six [horses]. (J?) As feminine substantives, of the spots on dice, etc., or of the figures 1, 2, 3, etc., see § 80, 2, (e), with plur. in -etc as : 2)ie (StnS, the one-spot, figure one, plur. ©infctt. 184 LESSON XXVIII. [§§ 165- (<:) §unbert and £cmfenb are used as collective sub- stantives, declined after the §unb Model, § 21, (b) f as : $m erften $>unbert, In the first hundred. Saufenbe bon SJJenfcfyen, Thousands of men. ( d ) 9JtiHion is a fem. subst. of the weak declension. 166 . Remarks on Ordinal Numerals. 1. The Ordinals are formed from the Cardinals by adding: (a) Up to 19, -tc, except ber crfte, britte, adf)te. ( [b ) From 20 upwards, — fte, which in compound numbers is added to the last co 7 ?iponent only . Note — £)er anbere is the older ordinal for ‘second.* 2. The ordinals after proper names (of sovereigns, etc.) are spelt with a capital letter, and must (with the article) be de- clined throughout, the proper name being undeclined, as : $arl bet ©rfte, Charles the First. ©eorg bc§ 3 Sierten, Of George the Fourth, etc. Note. — The Roman Numerals I., II., etc., after names of sovereigns must always be read as def. art. + ord. num. in the proper case. Thus: £etnrid) IV. = ®einrid) ber $ierte (Nom.) ; or §etnrid) ben ©ierten (Acc.); but: ber £l)roit §einrid) IV. = ber £f)rcm §einrid) bc$ SSievlen (Gen.); untcr $einrid) IV. = unter §etnrid) bent $tcrfcn. 3. The ordinals are used adjectively before the names of the months, as : £)er adjtjefynte Sluguft', The 18th [of] August. Sim gtoei unb gmangigften gum. On the 22d [of] June. Notes. — 1. The figures 1, 2, etc., before the months are to be read as ordinals, thus : 21m 1 . 3anuar = am erften Sannar. Toronto, (b.) 25.(ften) = Toronto, ben (acc. of time, see § 184 , 1 ) fiiuf unb amauaigftcn^rh- I&7] strong verbs: fyrec^en model. I8 5 2. * What day of the month is it ? * 2)er tmetrielfie if! tjeute ? or: hen nueinetften babeit fair ^eute ? * It is the fifth,* @8 if \ Ijeute her fiinfte, or: Sir Ijabett ^eute hen fiiufteii. 107. Strong Verbs: fysterfjen Model. _ Pr. Ind. 2.3. Sing. 1 _ _ _ Infin. u T 0 \ Impf. P. Part. " Imper. 2. “ j f foremen fpr?d>t, f'prid; ftnad; gefyrocf>cn ’ 1 ftefden ftic£;t fta^l geftofden Engl. Analogy : speak wanting spake spoken Germ. Models : ■ Ablaut: i i, tc LIST A. (i, a, 0 .) brec^ert (N. A.), break 6vicf)ft, etc. bradj ge&rodictt neljmen, take mmjttft, etc. nafttn genommett (er)fd^retfen (N.), be erfd;ricfft, etc. erfdiraf erfcfyrotfett frightened fprecfyen, speak fpridjft, etc. fpradj gefpvocfyen (tecfyen, sting (trans.) jtidtfi, etc. ftadj geftod>en treffen, hit triffft, trifft, triff traf getroffen Remarks. — 1. ©rfcfyrecfen, to frighten (trans.), is weak (er* fc^recfte, erfc^redt). 2 . Observe the dropping of § and doubling of m in nefjmen, and the single consonant in the Imperfect of erfcfyretfen and treffen. list E He, a, o.) (The Imperf. Subj. is also given.) (ge)baren, bear, gebierft, etc. gebar gebcire geboren bring forth (be)fefylen, com- befiefylfi, etc. befall before befofylen mand 13 1 86 LESSON XXVIII. [§167 (em^fe^Iett, re- empftefylft, etc. empfafyl em^fijfyle empfoijlen IS «' wi ' n fame gefommen Remarks. — 1. The simple verb fefylen, to be wanting, to make a mistake, is weak (fefylte, gefeljft). 2. $ommen drops one m in Impf. 3. All verbs of this Model (A. and B.) drop the final -e of the 2. sing. Imper. Vocabulary. commend ftcfylen, steal ftieljlft, etc. ftaljl Also : fommen (N.), f fontmft, fommt £ f come to add, abbieren arrive (at), an'fommen (in -f- dat.) obtain, get, befomnten divide, btoibieren celebrate, feiern multiply, multiplicieren subtract, fubtrafyieren happen upon, meet with, treffen care, attention, bie 2td^t railway-station, ber SBafynljof * holidays, bte fjerien (pi.) fishing, ba§ gifdjen prison, ba3 ©efangni3 hunting, ba§ ijagen James, ^afob mile (German), league, bte Rleile minute, bte -JJftnute government, reign, bte Re* gierung Reformation, bte Reformation' second (of time), bie ©efunbe voyage, bie ©eereife far, ioeit about, ungefcifjr twice, jtoeimal as far as, bi3 ju (dat.) Idioms: 1. He was born twenty-five years ago, (£r ifl ©or futtf unb groanjig Sabren geboren. J5. Please take another apple (i. e., yet one more), Sitte, ne&* men <©ie nod) einest 2lpfd. 3. Take care, ??el)men ®ie fid) in Sld)t. § 16 ;] STRONG VERBS: fprCC^en MODEL. 1 8 / EXERCISE XXVIII. A. 1. SBie alt finb ©ie ? $d) bin in mein cm neun unb jmans gigf ten gatyre. 2. ©iefe§ 3al)r befamen mir am acfyt unb ^man* gigften ^unt gerien. 3. 2jeber SJlonat aufter bem gebruar fyat entmeber breif$ig cber ein unb breifcig Sage. 4. Sen bier unb jmanjigften Rtai mar id) bet meinern Rater auf 33efud>, benn an biefem Sage feiern mir ben ©eburtstag ber ^onigin. 5. $arl ber Grfte bon Gnglanb mar ber Rater $arl II. unb ^a!ob II. 6. Sa§ mar eine fd()lecfyte Ra$rid)t, nid)t mafyr ? Unfere SRutter erfc^raf, al§ ©ie biefelbe I)orte. 7. Sen fiinf unb jmanjigften trafen mir §errn Rett auf bem RaI)nI)ofe, gerabe al3 er im Regriffe mar ab* gureifen. 8. ber ©tabt Sonbon finb mel)r al3 brei Rlittionett Ginmoljner. 9. Sie einen empfal)len il)m gu bleiben, bie anbern abgureifen. 10. 23ie meit ift e3 bon fyier bis gum ndd)ften Sorfe? Ungefa^r fiinf unb gmangig englifd)e Rtcilen. 11. Gr nal)m bie gifd)e je gmei au§ bem $orbe unb legte biefelben auf ben Sifd;. 12. Sa§ Gi3 brid^t, nef )men ©ie fid) in 2 ld)t. 13. ^unberte bon 5Jlenf<$en I)aben mal)renb be§ GrbbebenS ba£ Seben berloren. 14. Unter ber Regierung £>einrid) VIII. begann bie Reformation in Gnglanb. 15. Rteine beiben SSruber reiften am fiinf unb gman* gigften $unt bon Siber!pool ab unb famen erft am a$tgel)nten Suit in Duebec an. 16. SBann !ommt $l)r ©eburt^tag? 21m ein unb gmangigften Robember. 17. Sie Regierung §einrid) VIII. mar eine ber berid)mteften in ber ©efd^id;te Gnglanb^. 18. 2113 mir einen ©pagiergang marten, I)abert mir mefyrere unferer greunbe angetroffen. 19. Ron mem ift $I)nen geraten morben, eine ©ee* reife gu madden? G3 ift mir bon mefyreren Strgten geraten morben. B . 1. One general commands thousands (dat.) of soldiers. 2. Mary has broken her pen, but she has taken Louisa’s. 3. The ice is breaking ; take care, Fred. 4. This is my lead- pencil, not William’s. 5. You have taken only one apple, please take another. 6. When do we celebrate the Queen’s Birthday ? On the 24th of May. 7. What day of the month is it to-day? 1 38 LESSON XXVIII. [§§ 157- To-day is the 31st of March. 8. The thief was thrown into (the) prison, because he had stolen five hundred dollars. 9. Which do you prefer, (the) hunting or (the) fishing? I like both. 10. A bee stings, but a dog or a cat bites. 11. The days are longest in the month of June, and shortest towards Christmas. 12. When our neighbours were at church, a thief went (fommen) into the house and stole several hundred dollars. 13. In the year eighteen hundred and eighty-seven Queen Victoria celebrated the fiftieth year of her reign. 14. The eldest son of the Queen of England was born the ninth of November one thousand eight hundred and forty-one. 15. Tell me how much thirty-two and eighty-eight make. 16. There are sixty seconds in a minute, sixty minutes in an hour, twenty-four hours in a day, seven days in a week, four weeks in a month, and twelve months in a year. 17. Would you make a voyage to Europe if you were advised to do so ? 18. Yes, I should like very much to make a voyage to Europe. Read in German: 2 mat 11 iff 22, 3 inert 12 ift 36, 4 mat 8 iff 32, 5 mat 9 iff 45, 6 mat 7 iff 42, 7X10 ift 70, 8X11 ift 88, 9X12 ift 108, 10X10 ift 100, 11X11 ift 121, 12X12 ift 144. Stbbiert 2,342, 25,891 unb 989,346. ©ubtrafjiert 27,763 bon 31,551. SD^uttipticiert 591 mit 478. S)ibibiert 2,581,640 mit 61. ORAL EXERCISE XXVIII. 1. Wie weit ist es von Hamilton nach Toronto ? 2. Wann sind die Tage am kurzesten? 3. Wie viel macht das, wenn man 337 mit 2 multipliciert ? 4. Wie viele Tage sind in einem Jahre? 5. Wann bekommt ihr Ferien ? 6. Wessen Bleistift haben Sie? INDEFINITE NUMERALS. I89 169] LESSON XXIX. INDEFINITE NUMERALS. - STRONG VERBS: effett MODEL 168. Indefinite Numerals. The Indefinite Numerals are: 1. all, all 2. gfltlj, whole, all 3. jcber, ) 4. jcbhscbcr, > each (btefer Model) 5. jcglidjcr, 3 6. f'cilt, none, not one 7. eiuige, ) 8. etlidje,} 9. maitdje, many 10. mcfjrcrc, several 11. hie!, much (pi. many) 12. toenig, little (pi. few) 13. etttiaS, some \ 14. getutg, enough j- (indeclinable) 15. me!jr, more ) Remark. — All these, except aK and ganj, are used as In- definite Pronouns (see Less. XXVII). some, a few 169. 1. si expresses number as well as quantity, and denotes that every individual part of a whole is present. 2. When declined, it follows the biefer Model, whether used with or without a substantive, as : after Safe ; afte Slrheit tear hergeblicfi ; aff?§ 23rot ; all [the] cheese ; all labour was useless ; all [the] bread. 3. Unless used substantively, it always precedes the deter- minative word, and then generally remains uninflected in the sing., and often in the plur., as : LESSON XXIX. [§§ i59- 190 $l£f mein ©elb, All my money. 2111(e) meine greunbe, All my friends. 4. When used substantively and preceded by a determin- ative word, it still follows the strong declension, as : ®iefeg (bag) allcg, All this (that). Set bem aftem. With all that. 5. It is not (as in English) followed by the definite article, but may be followed by the demonstrative ber, bie, bag, as : 2tlle8 ©elb, All [the] money. 2fH(eg) bag ©elb, All that money. 2111c 9Jtenj’cf>en, All [the] men. 2111e bie SJlenfc fyen, All those men. 170. 1. ©anj expresses quantity , not number, and repre- sents an object as complete and undivided, ’ without reference to its parts. When therefore the Engl. * all 9 = ‘ whole ’ it must be rendered by gauj, not by all, as : I have been working all (the whole) day long, 3$ fyabe ben ganjeit ®ag gearbeitet. 2. ©attj is declined like an adjective, and always follows the determinative word, as : ®er ganjc ®a g. The whole day. 9)tetn ganjeg ©gentian, [The] whole [of] my property. 3. Before names of countries and places it may remain un- inflected, if unaccompanied by an article, etc., as : All (the whole of) America does not belong to the United States, ©anj (or bag ganjc) 2tmerifa gefyori nic £)t ju ben SSereinigten ©taaten. — But : ®ie ganje ©cfjtoetj, All Switzerland. 171. 1 . ^ebcr (biefer Model) is used to denote each indi- vidual belonging to a whole, as : 3>ebe x 23aum Ijai Stfte, Every tree has branches. INDEFINITE NUMERALS. 175 ] 191 2. It is sometimes preceded by exit, and then follows the mixed adjective declension. an< ^ jeglid^er are less common forms, used in the same way. 172 . $ein is the negative of ein. 173 . 1. (Sinige (plur., btefer Model) = ‘some, a few/ denotes a small number taken collectively, and is used with- out article, as : Sinige 33 ogel fonnert nicfjt fingert, Some birds cannot sing. SSor cintgen Safyren, A few y ears a g°- 2. It is used in the sing, only before names of materials to denote a limited quantity , as : 2$ Ijabe eintgcS ©elb, I have some money (but not much). 3. mid)t is a less usual word with the same meaning and use. Note. — (gin Jmar 4 a pair, couple * (with small p) is also used in the sense of 4 a few,* the eiit being then indeclinable, as : eitt J)aar Stfyatern, With a few dollars. 174 . 9 Kancfjcr (biefer Model), 4 many(a)/ denotes indefinite plurality, as : Sftandjer SSoget f amt nicbt fxngen. Many a bird cannot sing. %$) fyabe ntand)c$ Ungtiicf gebabt, I have had many a misfortune. SRattifje Seute glauben, Many people believe. It may remain uninflected, especially before an adj., as : •Stancher gute, or nxatxd) gutcr 9Jtanrt. 175 . SRcfjtCtC = c several, a few/ taken individually , as: SHetjrere Seute tourben frcxnf, Several people became ilk 192 LESSON XXIX. [§§ *76- 176 . SSicX and toemg, in the sing., are inflected (biefer Model) when they denote number , and uninflected when they denote quantity, as : Sente nicfyt fctele#, fonbern iiiel, Do not learn many (a great number of) things, but much (a large quantity ) . They are usually, though not always, declined in the plural. Note. — The Engl. * little * == ‘ small * is rendered by fleiit. 177 . (StttJUS is used before names of material, etc., in the sing., like eintge3 (see § 173, 2, above), of a s?nall quan- tity, as: (Stltw 3 23 rot, Some bread (but not much). 178 . ©cttttg may precede or follow its substantive, as: ©elb gcttug, or geitug ©elb, money enough. Note. — As adverb, it always follows its adjective, as : £)a§ SBanb ift nid)t tang gcttltg, The ribbon is not long enough. 179 . SJlcljr is the comparative of btel, and is inde- clinable, as : $d£) fxxbe mcljr greunbe ate er, I have more friends than he. 180 . The Engl, ‘some, any * are generally omitted be- fore substantives, unless a small quantity (some, but not much) is denoted (see § 157, above). In answer to a question, without a substantive, they are rendered by eirttge§ (sing.), etrttge (plur.) or (sing, or plur.), not by ettoa3 (which = ‘ some- thing ’), as: §aben ©te ©elb? 3$ etnigeg (toelcfjeS). £abcn ©te greunbe? gd) l;a£>e eittige (toelcfye). 181] strong verbs: effen model. 193 181 . Strong Verbs: effen Model. T Pres. Ind. 2. Sing Infin. t ... & ' [ Impf. P. Part. lmper. 2. bing. ) Germ. Model : effen iff eft, ifjt, iff ge(g)cffen Engl. Analogy: eat wanting ate eaten (incomplete) Ablaut : *- *' 5 I LIST. bitten, beg, ask bitteft, bittet, bitte bat gebeten effen, eat (of man) iff eft, ifet, if? gegeffen freffen,eat(of beasts) f riff eft, frifjt, frijj gefreffen geben, give 0i(e)bft, gi(e)bt, gi(e)b gab gegeben (her) geffen, forget bergiffeft, fcergifft, bets Dergajj Dergeffen Sife lefen, gather; read liefeft, lieft, lies I a§ gefefen licgen, lie down liegft, Uegt, liegn lag gelegen meffen, measure miff eft, mijjt, miff maf gemeffett (ge)nefen (N.), re- genefeft, geneft, genefe gena§ genefen cover (from illness) (ge)f<$e$en (N.), — - gefdfyiefyt 0efcf)af> gefd?eben happen (impers.) fefjerr, see fief) ft, fieljt, fief) faf? gefef>en fitjen, sit fifjeft, fitft, fitt(e) H gef effen treten (N. A.), tread trittft, tritt, tritt trat geireten (fr>efen,N., obsolete), — — — tear getoefen to be Observe. — i. The changes from jf to $$ ; also that of the Impf. is retained through that whole tense, the vowel be- ing long, as : fair afjen, tdj afje. 2. That genefert does not change c into ic* 194 LESSON XXIX. [§ i8i 3. The change in fx^ert of into § and ff. 4. That the long e of the root is changed into tC, the short e into short i. 5. The inserted g in the P. Part, of effen (gegeffen). 6. The doubling of t in 2. sing., etc., of treten, and omission of final -f in 3. sing, (tritt) . Vocabulary. to experience, feel, emlpfxnben intend, contemplate, fcor'* Ijaben absence, bxe 2l6toefenf)eit Francis, granj century, ba§ 3al)rl;mn'bert cherry, bxe $irfd;e province, bte ^rofcunj' romance, novel, ber Ionian' swallow, bxe ©cfytoalbe telegraph, ber £elegr a$f misfortune, ba§ Urtglud world, bie 28elt pardon, bie SSerjet^ung thin, bunn almost, nearly, bexttafye, faft immediately, (fo)gleicfy lately, not long ago, neultcfy late, fpat while, toafyrenb Idioms: 1. There is, there was, etc. (general statement), gicbt, e8 gab, etc. (obj. in acc. see Less. XXXVII). 2. To cut one’s hand, fid) in bie £anb fd)ndbett (lit., to cut one’s self into the hand), 3. To beg- pardon, uni 23er$eil)uttg bitten. 4 . To speak to (with), fprecbcn + acc * person. EXERCISE XXIX. A. 1. ganje Sanb em^finbet ben SSertuft eine§ guten ttnb gro§en 9ftanne§. 2. giebt fd;bne 33ogel, ioeld^e gar nicf>t fittgen. 3. SBittc, geben ©ie mir nod; einen Staler ; id; fyabe nic^t ©e!b genug. 4. (STeorg ben Slpfel, ben er getauft Ijat, ober ben« jenigen, welcfyen id; iljm gegeben I;abe? 5. 3)er $rembe trat mir auf ben gufj, abet gleic§ bat er mid; um 33erjeiljung. 6. SBatyrenb $ 5 ^rer 2ibloefenf;eit finb mefyrere Seute gefommen, um ©ie ju § iSl J STRONG VERBS : effcn MODEL. I95 fprecfien. 7 . ©eorg fagte mir neulicfi, baft er fyritj. bor einigeit Socmen gefe^eu fiabe. 8. 91imm bicfi in 2lcf>t, bag ©ig, toorauf bu trittft, ift feljr biinn. 9. $jcf> bitte um SBerjeifmng, baft id) fo f^jat gefommen bin. 10. 28enn bu meinen Dnfel fief)ft, fo fage ifim, bitte, bafi id^ borfiabe, ifin ju befudfen. 11. ©g liegt ein Sioman bon ©ir ©alter ©cott auf bem 3Tiffien fybrt faft bie ganje ©elt in bier unb jtoanjig ©tunben bon bem, toag in irgenb einem Sanbe gefdfiiefit. 17. 2llg ein 3icicber au§ feinem §aufe iam, bat ibn ein 2lrmer um ein toenig ©elb, aber er gab bem 2frmen being. 18. 3)a§ ^Sferb beg SReifenben frafs ein toenig §eu unb §afer, toafirenb fein §err bag ©ittaggeffen im ©aftfjaufe afj. 19. SDag $inb fiat fdjon atteg 33rob unb gleifcfi gegeffen, eg fiat audE> affe SRild) getrunfen, bie im ©lafe tear. 20. ©inem Siigner ioirb nidft geglaubt, felbft toenn er bie ©aljrfieit fpricfit. B. 1 . The whole of England is not so large as the Pro- vince of Manitoba. 2 . Henry VIII. of England, Francis I., of France, and Charles V. of Germany were the greatest monarchs of the 16th century. 3 . Where did you find the money ? It lay in the grass. 4 . Every summer the birds eat the cherries in our garden. 5 . The sick man lay seven weeks in the hospital, but he has now recovered. 6. The rich (man) gave the poor (man), who sat before the house, some money. 7 . This youth has read all the books in the library of his father, but unfortunately he forgets just as fast (as) he reads. 8. Napoleon I. died on the 5th May 1821 ; he was 52 years old. 9 . Have you forgotten what I told you two months ago ? 10 . During the rain we sat under a tree and 1 96 LESSON XXX. [§§ 18a- told stories. 11. One forgets easily what one reads too quickly. 12. If you have more paper than you need, please give me some. 13 . Nineteen hundred years ago the Romans pos- sessed almost the whole world. 14 . Many young people read hundreds of novels, and forget after some time almost all they have read. 15 . Twenty-five years ago our neighbour possessed only a few hundred dollars, but now he is one of the richest men in the city. 16 . Speak the truth, whether you are believed or not. ORAL EXERCISE XXIX. 1. Giebt es in Amerika Vogel, die nicht singen? 2. 1st jemand wahrend meiner Abwesenheit gekommen? 3. Was haben Sie meinem Onkel gesagt, als er hier war? 4. Was sagen Sie vom Lesen der Romane ? 5. Welchen Apfel iszt Georg? 6. 1st das Telephon eine neue Erfindung? LESSON XXX. DERIVATIVE NUMERALS. — TIME, MEASURE, DATE. - STRONG VERBS: jtfjlltgen MODEL. 182. Derivative Numerals. From the Cardinal and Indefinite Numerals are formed the following Derivative Numerals: (a) By adding -ntaf, adverbs denoting 4 so many times/ as : etnrnal, once ; fctcrmal, four times ; etnunb* jtoanjigmal, twenty-one times; tnancfjmal, many a time. Notes. — 1. is neuter, hence }ebe§trta(, each time; and with Xndef. Numerals sometimes adds as: t)ielmal(0), mdjnnalS. 183 ] DERIVATIVE NUMERALS. I 9 7 2. (Sin'ntat = ‘on one (single) occasion,* as: 3d) Ijabe il)n nur eirnnal gefeljen, I have seen him only once. (5inmar (ein3mal3, einft) = ‘once upon a time,* as: (53 mar einmai' ein $i3ntg, etc. (Grimm.) 3. Sftidjt etn'mal, ‘not once,’ as: ( 5 r ift xticf)t cin'mat l)ier gemefen, He has not been here once. Sftidjt einntar (or nidjt ntal'), ‘not even,’ as: (5r ift nid)t (ein)mar l)ier gemefen, He has not even been here. (J?) By adding -jadj or fiiltig, adjectives denoting ‘so manyfold/ as: etnfadj, simple; gtoeifad) (^Vuiefad^), twofold, double ; bterfadj (^fdtttg), quadruple ; bieU fad), mannidijad), manifold. Note. — (5infd(tig= ‘foolish, silly.’ (c) By adding -lei to the gen. fern. sing, or plur., indecli- nable adjectives denoting ‘of so many kinds/ as: einetlei, of one kind ; breietld, of three kinds ; bielerlei, martdjcrlci, of many kinds, etc. Note. — ( 53 ift mir etnerlei = ‘It is (all) the same to me.’ 183. From the Ordinals are formed : (a) By adding -f, the fractional Numerals, as : etrt 35rits tel = i; ba§ SSkvtel, the quarter; bret ^anjigftel = ^ [ 20 ) etc. Notes. — 1. These are substantives formed from the ordinal + £eit (= part), and are therefore neuter, thus : 2)a3 3)rittcl = ba3 britte Seif, ‘the third part,’ etc, 2. ‘ Half’ as substantive = bte §iUfte ; as adjective or adverb = !jalS, which is declined like gang (see § 170, 2), as : 3d) fyctk bte meine3 (5igentum3 oerloren, I have lost half (of) my property. $)er $n abe mar fialb tot, al3 man iljn fanb, The boy was half dead when he was found. 1 98 LESSON XXX. tss ** 3 ' galB SBafljtngton, or IjaUie SBafttngton, (The) half (of) Washington. or ba§ l)albe ^ranfretcfj, half France; but Sie t)ClXbc @cf)tt)ei$, half Switzerland. ( b ) By adding -fjalf), Mixed Numbers with the Fraction ‘half,’ as: britfe^alfi =2J ; bierte^alfi 9 Jteilen, three miles and a half ; fiinfte^alB ©Hen, four and a half yards. Remarks. — 1. Observe that the ordinal is one higher than the cardinal of the Engl, idiom ; thus ‘ two and-a-half ’ is a number consisting of three parts, of which the first and second parts are wholes, but the third is only a half, hence brittc* lb. 2. li = (not jtoeitefyalb ; see § 166, 1, Note), as: 8tnbertl)alb glafcfyen (pi.), A bottle and a half. 3. These are invariable adjectives. (c) By adding -ett£, ordinal adverbs denoting in what place or order, as : er(ten§, firstly; gtoeitcns, secondly; britteng, thirdly, etc. 184 . Expressions of Time. 1. Both point and duration of time are expressed by the Accusative without a preposition, as : 2>en erften ^anuar, (On) the first of January. @r fam lenten Sftontag an. He arrived last Monday. $3$ toar lefjte 2 Sod)e Irani, I was ill last week, gdj tear einc ganjc 2 Boc£)e Irani, I was ill (for) a whole week. 2. Point of time is also expressed 2 184] EXPRESSIONS OF TIME. 199 (a) By the preposition ait with the Dat. (always contracted with the article), of date , as : SKm erften ^artuar, On the first of January. Sint Sonntag, On Sunday. Sim 9Jforgen biefe3 Staged, On the morning of this day. ( р ) By the Genitive case, with Xd§, days of the week, or divisions of the day, when denoting indefinite time or habitual action, as : £agc$. In the day time, by day. ©ortntagS, On Sundays. (3Dc$) 2l6enb§, In the evening. 2 . The Time of Day is thus expressed: (a) The quarters of the hour, with reference to the following hour (not the past hour, as partly in English), thus : It is a quarter past twelve = iff (ein) SBiertel auf etn$ (i. e., one quarter towards , or on the way to> one). It is half past twelve = ift Ijalll ein§ (i. e., half one). It is a quarter to one = @3 ift brct SSiertel auf eirt§ (i. e., three quarters towards one). ( b ) The minutes past by ttaclj, as : @3 ift jtoanjig -JJlinuten narf) Jfaei, ft is twenty minutes past two. The minutes to by tun*, as : ftzfyn 5Diinuten liar brei, ten minutes to three. (с) at = urn; o’clock = Uljr, as: Um ein ttljr, At one o’clock. 200 LESSON XXX. [§§ 184 ^ Urn tin 33iertel auf filltf Ufyr, At a quarter past four o’clock. ift brei SSiertel auf fiirtf (Ul)r), It is a quarter to five (o’clock). (jat f eef)£ (Uf;r) gef^Tagen, It has struck six (o’clock). Note. — The impersonal Verb ‘to be,* in expressing the time of the day, is always singular , as in English. 185. Expressions of Quantity. 1. A substantive expressing Quantity (Measure, Weight or Number), if Masculine or Neuter , retains the form of the singular, as : 23 ier unb jtoanjig $0$ macfjen gtoei gufj, 24 inches make two feet. Stoet Two pounds. Saufenb 9 J?ann, A thousand men. — But: gtoet $lafcf)en (fern.), Two bottles. ©hen (fern.), Twelve yards. 2. The substantive, the quantity of which is expressed, is generally put in apposition with that expressing the quan- tity, as : gtoei 23 uc£) papier. Two quires of paper. SDreitaufenb 3 )lann ^nfantevie. Three thousand infantry soldiers. gfftnf ©Ia§ § 3 tev, Five glasses of beer. §ft>et tyaax (dat.), With two pairs of shoes. 3. But if a determinative word precedes the substantive measured, etc., use the Gen. case, or bon with Dat., as: !)abe fe$S $funb btefeS guten 3ucfer§ (or : ban biefcm guten gucfer) gefauft. strong verbs : fcf^agen model. 201 1 86] 4. The measure (of weight, distance, etc.) is put in the accusative, as : S)iefer Slciftift tft ttur eirtcn 3oft lang. This lead-pencil is only an inch long. 3 babe erne ganje 9Jletle (acc.) marj'cfner t, I have been marching a whole mile. ©iefe§ $afet' ftnegt ein ^aI6e§ $furtb (acc.), This parcel weighs half-a-pound. 186. Strong Verbs: fdjlageit Model. Infin. Pr. Ind. 2. 3. sing. Impf. P. Part. Germ . Model: fcblagen i fcfclogft, f^logi ; fcfylug gefifdagen Engl. Analogy : slay wanting slew slain (incomplete) Ablaut : a a u a LIST. bcufen (W.N. A.), bake badft, bacft buf gebaden fasten (N. A.), ride (in fafirft, fafyrt fu^r gefafyren a conveyance), drive graben, dig grcibft, grcibt grub gegraben Iaben (W.), invite ; load Idbft, Idbt lub gelaben fd^affen, create fcriaffft, fcfiafft fcfmf gefc^affen fcfdagen, strike fc^lagft, fd;Iagt fdblug gefc^Iagen tragen, carry trcigft, tragt trug getragen toadftfen (N.), grow toiicfyfeft, ftmdjft t»ucf)§ gctoa^fert toafcfien, wash hJdfc^eft, toafcfyt hwfcfy getnafcfjen Also the irregular : fteljen, stand Mft (tefjt | ■ (ftunb) > . ftattb ) geftattben and the usually weak : fragen, ask j fragft, fragt fragft, fragt fragte J gefragt 14 202 LESSON XXX. [§ 1 86 Remarks. — i. 53acfen is usually weak in the Impf. (bacfte), but strong in the P. Part, (gebaden). Observe also the single f in Impf. 2 . ^afyren is conjugated with feirt when intr., with fyaben when trans. 3 . ©cfyaffert ‘to work’ and ( v>er) fd^aff en ‘to procure , are weak. Observe the single j in the Impf. Vocabulary. to set out, depart, leave, ah'* fasten rise, auf ft efyen invite, ein'laben understand, fcerfiefyen dine, gu SRittag effert go for a drive, fyajierenfafyren absence, bie -H&'toefenljeit littlejree, ba3 Saumd^en dozen, ba3 SDu^'enb yard, bte (Site multiplication-table, ba§ ©in* tnaleinS thread, ber $aben * driving, ba3 ftafyven driver, coachman, ber^uifcfyer hole, ba§ Socfy night, bie Idioms: 1. The Boston train, 3) 2. What time (o’clock) minute-hand, bet 2Rinuten» geiger pound, ba§ ipfunb post-office, bie $oft riding, bag 9ieiten sentence, ber Sat; * hour-hand, ber Stunbenjeiger cup, bie 3Tafje tea, ber £Ijee clock, watch, bie Ufyr train, ber $ug * two weeks, a fortnight, toier* jefm Stage then, bann early, frith slow, slowly, langfam at least, inenigfteng first, first of all, guerft 8"9 { uad) it? 2Bte met Unified? EXERCISE XXX. A. 1. ©in breifacfjer gaben bricffi nicfyt leidjit. 2. ®er $utfcfier fafyrt fo langfam, bafj fair nicfyt fcor brei 93iertel auf jtoolf an* Jommen toerben, 3. ^n ber einen §alfte ber 5SeIt ift eg 3iug,. § 1 86] STRONG VERBS : f^Iagen MODEL. 203 mdbrenb e§ in ber anbern §alfte yiatyt ift. 4. 28a§ giebt e§ fyeute 9icue3? 5. 2Be3fyalb Ijaben ©ie mid; geftern nid;t befud;t? GrftenS meil e§ regnete, unb jmeitenS meil id; felbft 93 efudE) fyatte. 6. ©u fyaft gut gelefen, lies nod; einen ©a£. 7. 2Bie biel miegen ©ie? %d) miege ungefafyr fyunbert unb fimfjig $funb. 8. ©cr 3ug fommt um brei 3SierteI auf neun an unb fdfyrt um fieben SSJtinuten nad; gef>n ab. 9. §aben ©ie Sfyte UI;r bei fid;? $a, aber bie fteber ift gebrodEjen. 10. %d) fyabe jmei ©ut$enb ©lafer befteflt, aber fie finb nod; nid)t angefommen. 11. 2Bir ^aben unfere 33ettern eingelaben, mafyrenb ber $erien bierjefyn ©age bei unS jujubringen. 12. SBir effen im ©ommer um Ijalb jmei ju SJitttag. 13. %d) miirbe gern mit Igfynen f!pa§ieren fafyren, menn ©ie mid; einliiben. 14. ©er §unb berbarg ben $no$en in ein So d), meld;eS er Winter bem Sfyfelbautn grub. 15. ©ie SUJagb field friify (beS) SSJiorgenS auf, mdfcfd bie Kleiber unb badt 35rot. 16. ^ot^ann ift ein fe£>r einfaltiger $nabe ; er ijat nod) nid)t baS (SinmaleinS gelernt. 17. 2Sie me! Ul;r mar eS, alS ber 9Jtinuten* geiger auf fed^^ unb ber ©tunbenjeiger jmifcfjen brei unb bier ftanb? 18. ©er 33auer frug ben Sleifenben, mie t>iel ttfyr eS fei (mare), unb biefer jog feme Ufyr auS ber ©afd;e unb fagte ifym, eS fei fyalb einS. 19. Slbbiere brei SSiertel, bier ©iebentel, neun ©reijefyntel unb elf gmanjigftel; mie biel ift (macfyt) baS? 20. ©er §unb mtirbe ben Snaben gleid; beiften, menn berfelbe i£;n fcfdiige. 21. ©efyen ©ie jur ©efellfdfyaft ber $rau 33.? 22. %d) bin nid;t eingelaben ; mein 33ruber murbe eingelaben, aber id; nid;t. B. 1. In six days God created Heaven and earth. 2. The patient drank two glasses of wine and three cups of tea yester- day. 3. This silly boy has not even understood what I said to him. 4. Here is good, strong cloth ; it costs two and a half dollars a (the) yard. 5. This tree grows quickly; it is at least four times as high as it was three years ago. 6. This exercise is very easy; we shall have finished (with) it in half an hour. 7. The dealer showed us many kinds of ribbon, 204 LESSON XXXI. [§ 1*7 red, blue, yellow, etc. 8. Which do you prefer, (the) riding or (the) driving ? It is all the same to me. 9. Please tell me what time it is ? It is exactly thirteen minutes after eleven. 10. It is nine o’clock, for the hour-hand is (stands) at (auf) nine and the minute-hand at twelve. 11. These three school-boys bought themselves a melon, which weighed almost five pounds. 12. The coachman drove first to the post-office and then to the bank. 13. Between April and September the little tree grew a foot and a half. 14. Precisely at five o’clock the Boston train left, and at 9.45 we arrived. 15. Was this house built before you came here ? 16. Add 31 /4o, 1. Wie viel macht drittehalb, fiinftehalb und neuntehalb? 2. Um wie viel Uhr kommt der Zug von Boston an ? 3. Was sagte der Reisende, als der Bauer ihn fragte, wie viel Uhr es sei? 4. Wie viel Uhr ist es nach IhrerUhr? 5. Wie viele Satze hast du schon gelesen ? 6. Ist jemand wahrend meiner Abwesenheit gekommen ? Adverbs may be arranged according to their meaning as follows, with examples of the simpler and more commonly oc- curing ones under each class : ORAL EXERCISE XXX. 187 . LESSON XXXI. ADVERBS. -STRONG VERBS: fatten MODEL. Adverbs. I. Time. (a) Past: bamal§, at that time eben, just, just now fle'ftern, yesterday neultcfy, the other day, lately fcor'gefterrt, the day before yesterday border', before §187] ADVERBS. 205 (p) Present: f) eute, to-day mi nun, f now (c) Future: 6alb, soon tyernad^', afterwards morgen, to-morrow nacfyfyer', afterwards nimmer, nevermore ii'bertnorgen, the day after to- morrow (d) Interrogative: hmrtn? when? (e) General bann, then (past or fut.) einft, once upon a time (past) ; some day (fut.) enbltcfy, at last erft, only (not sooner than) (fo)g[ei$, at once, directly inbeffen, j j n meanwhile unterbeftert , ) tmmer, always, at all times je(mal§), ever, at any time nie(mals), never, at no time no$, still, yet oft(maI§), often f$on, already feltert, seldom, rarely II. Place and Direction. (a) Demonstrative : there, in that place ba, ) bafelbft, i (ba)fyin, thither, to that place bort, there, in that place (ba)fyer, thence, from that place fyier, here, in this place f/ie(r)fyer, hither, to this place (p) Negative: nirgenbS, nowhere (e) Interrogative and Relative : too, where, in what place toof)in, whither, to what place toober, whence, from what place (d) General: tr'genbtoo, anywhere xiberaH', everywhere III. Measure au$, also, ever ettoa, about, nearly and Degree. beinafye, ) . , fdft ) nearly, almost 206 LESSON XXXI. [§§ 187- | wholly, altogether ganjlidj, gar, at all, very genug, enough gerabe, just, exactly fount, hardly, scarcely, no sooner ttodj, still, more tiur, only feljr, very fo, so ungefaljr, about itberfyaupt', generally foie? how? gu, too giemlidfy, tolerably IV. Affirmation. ja, yes ; to be sure jatuoljl, certainly freiltd), to be sure, indeed fiirtoaljr, truly, really getmfj, certainly natur'Iid), of course tnirf tidb, to be sure, indeed gtoar, it is true, certainly netn, no V. Negation. nicfjt, not VI. Possibility. ettoa, > , to a £7 r [ cf; etn li c£; , probably bietteic^t, } per aps tooljl, perhaps VII. Necessity. aUerbingS, certainly bureaus, absolutely, entirely VIII. Cause. bafjer, 1 trarunt, ) wherefore, why barum, >- therefore hxsfyalb, j (interrog. or rel.) beSfjalb, ) Note. — These last, as well as many of the others, are also used as Conjunctions, See Less. XL. 1 88] STRONG VERBS : fallen MODEL. 20 / 188 . Strong Verbs: fatten Model. Infin. Pr. Ind. 2. 3. Sing. Impf. P. Part. , (same as Inf.) Germ . Model : fallen fallft, fallt fid gefatteit Engl. Analogy : fall wanting fell fallen (incomplete) Ablaut: a a te tt (Note. — This is only a seeming Ablaut ; LIST. see § 192, Rem. 4.) blafert, blow blcifeft, blaft Bites geblafen braten, roast (tr. and intr.) bratft, brat brief gebraten fallen (N.), fall fattft, fallt ftel gefallen fangen, catch fangft, fangt ft(e)ng. gefangen fyalten, hold ttaltft, lialt §ielt gefyalten fangen, hang tiangft, fyangt f>i(e)ng gefangen fatten, hew fyaueft, Ijaut fyieb geljauen fycif$en, bid ; be called fyeifjeft, fjeipt f)ie§ gefydfcen laffen, let laffeft, Idjjt liefc gelaffen laufen (N. A.), run Idufft, lauft lief gelaufen raten, advise (gov. dat.) ratft, rat riet geraten rufen, call rufft, ruft rief gerufett fcftlafcrt, sleep fc^lafft, fcfjlaft fcf ; lief gefdjlafen ftofsen, push ftojjeft, ftojjt ftie| gefto{3en Also the irregular : ge^en (N.), go gefieft, gefjt 0t(O«9 gegattgen Remarks. — 1. Observe in braten, fatten, raten the con- tracted forms of the 3. sing. Pres. Ind. 2. §angen is the strong verb (fyieng, gefyangen) and is proper- ly intr. (= ‘to be suspended’); Ijangen is weak (fyangtc, gefydngt) and trans., but the distinction is not strictly ob- served. 208 LESSON XXXI. [§ 188 3. Observe that beifjen and ftofjen, having the root vowel long, retain jj throughout ; whereas laffen varies according to rule, thus : icfy laffe, gelafjen, but er lajjt, Iiep, fair Kejjen. Vocabulary. to begin, commence, an'fangen receive, get, erfjalten please, gefatfen leave, leave behind, laffen skate, ©cblitt'fcfmf) lau'fen kick, strike, bump, ftofjen cut down, um'haucn butter, bie Gutter play-mate, ber ©efpiele mouse, bie 3Jlau§ * man-of-all-work, (farm-) ser- vant, ber $necbt beef, ba§ fJlinbfleifcb skate, ber ©cfditt'fdmf) skating, ba§ ©cfylitt'fcfmfylaufen bacon, ber ©pecf language, bie ©pracfye study, ba€ ©tubium last, preceding, borig 2Bfe T SBie foeiflen <2ieT 3d) beipc «6emrid). Idioms : 1. What is the name of? 2. What is your name? 3. My name is Henry, 4. I think highly of him (i. e., esteem, value him highly), 3d) fialte otel t>cn tbm. 5. How do you do? (How are you?) 3Bic gef)t 3f)iten ? 6. He has not been here for a long time, ed fangt man SJiaufe. 2 . £)er $nabe ftel, al§ er ©cfdittfcfiul) lief, unb ftiefj ficf> ben $opf auf§ Si 3 . 3 . Sin fcfdafenber $ucf )3 fangt fein £ufm. 4 . !ym §erbft bldft ber SBinb fait, unb pfeift burdi ben SBalb. 5 . Sffen, trinfen unb fcblafen, fieifjt (ift) ba§ Ieben ! 6. £;m SBinter fcfdaft man getbbfmlid) (anger al§ im ©ommer. 7 . 3 Jlan lafjt jeijt bie $enfter offen, benn ba3 2Better ift ttarm getoorben. 8. 3$ Iaufe ni<$t 9 ern ©dfdittfcfml), aber meine ©efpielen finb grojje $reunbe babon. 9 . ®ie “Dlagb ging jum Saben unb faufte brei ip f unb £l)ee, jibei ipfunb Gutter, § 1 88] STRONG VERBS I fallen MODEL. 20g jefm $fttnb gucfer unb jtoet $lafcfyen $3ter. 10. SDort ftanb ber 33aum, ben ber $necfyt neuli $ umgefyauen Ijat. 11. ©agett ©ie mir, toofyi n ©ie Dorgeftern gingen, al£ idE) ©ie in ber $onig3ftrafte traf. 12. SDer ©cfyiiier liefc feine 33ucfyer ju §>aufe, aber er ift gleicfy nacfy §>aufe gelaufen unb fyat biefelbert gefyolt. 13. 3Sorige SBocfye erfyielt meine ©c£;Vuefter einen 33rief Don ifyrer greunbin ; faft jebe 2Bodje credit fie einen. 14. $iefelbe fdjjrieb, bajj fie ben ganjen SBinter in SBofton jubringett ftmrbe, toenrt e§ \i)x bafelbft gefiele. 15. ®er 2Binb blie3 ben £ag fo ^eftig, ba£ ©eorg§ 33ater ifym riet, nidE)t auf§ SSaffer ju gef;cn. 16. 3$ bitte um 3Ser^ ^eifyung, baft id; ©ie fo lange attein gelaffen fyabe. 17. franfe $inb toiirbe beffer gefd;fafen fyaben, toennbie anbern ^inber toeniger 2arm gemad;t fatten. 18. 33or jtoanjig ^a^ren tying ba§ 93ilb meine$ 33ater§ an ber 2Banb iiber bem $amin, unb e3 tyangi nocty immer ba. 19. 23enn er nictyt fo friity gegangen todre, fo ^dtte icty ityn jutn 3Jtittag^effen eingeiaben. 20. ©uten 9J?orgen, grau Sett ; toie getyt e§ Stynen? 21. @3 getyt mir ganj gut ; foie getyt e£ ^tjrer gamilie? 22. $riebricty II. Don ^reuften tourbe griebricty ber ©rofte genannt. B . 1. My father speaks German almost as well as English. 2. Good evening, my little friend ; how do you do ? 3. I have not seen you for a long time. 4. A cold, cutting wind blew through the open window. 5. When I was young, I liked to skate. 6. Do you like (to eat) beef? 7. It was a quarter past eight when the concert began. 8. That horse kicks; take care. 9. At what o’clock will you be at home ? I shall not be at home before half past ten. 10. When we were going home, we met our friends, who were coming out of church. 11. What is the name of the long street, which runs from King Street towards (nacty) the north ? 12. My friend, of whom I thought so highly, died in his nineteenth year. 13. In September we began to learn German, and the study of that language pleases us ver^much. 14. A lost child was crying 210 LESSON XXXII. [§i3 o upon the street, and calling after its mother. 15. Some one asked it what its name was. 16. The poor child answered that its name was William, and that it lived in Frederick- Street. 17. I wrote to my cousin a month ago, but I think he is angry, for the letter has not yet been answered. ORAL EXERCISE XXXI. 1. Was ist geschehen, wahrend die Knaben Schlittschuh liefen ? 2. Weshalb sind diese Fenster often gelassen worden? 3. Was kaufte die Magd auf dem Markte ? 4. Weshalb ist der Schuler so schnell nach Hause gelaufen ? 5. Wann haben Sie Nachricht von Ihrem Bruder erhalten ? 6. Sprechen Sie Deutsch ? LESSON XXXII. ADVERBS (continued) FORMATION AND COMPARISON. — TABLE OF STRONG VERBS AND GENERAL REMARKS ON THE SAME. 189. Formation of Adverbs, i. From Adjectives (including most adverbs of manner): (a) Most adjectives may be used without change as adverbs, as : Iduft fcfyneff. He runs quickly. (3) By adding Aid) (Engl, -ly), sometimes with Um- laut, as : of course, to be sure neulirf), lately, the other day gi injM), entirely hardly, scarcely fiirjlitfj, recently Also to participles, as : fyoffentlidj, it is to be hoped Voiff entlidj, knowingly § 189 ] FORMATION OF ADVERBS. 211 (c) By adding -littgS, as : blinblingS, blindly (i d ) By adding -S, -CttS, as : cmber§, otherwise linfS, to (on) the left bereitS, already recfytS, to (on) the right befonb^rS, especially tibrigcttS, moreover Also to participles, as : eilenbS, hastily 2. From Substantives , by the use of the genitive case (sometimes with article), to express : (a) Time , as : abenbS (or beS SCbenbS), in the evening morgens (or beS -JJlorgenS), in the morning (b) Manner, as: flugS, in haste ciuftcn, ) outside, out of brau£en, ) doors innett, ) within, in-doors brtnncn, ) fyinten, behind nadEfiS (or beS 9 tad&tS), by night (anomalous, SJiacfyi being fern.) atifangS, in the beginning teilS, in part sometimes with b(a)r- born(e), before obett, above imten, below brubeit, over there 3. From Prepositions , by adding -eit, prefixed, as : Note. — Prepositions in composition with verbs are really adverbs (also the particles ab, eiit, entpor, meg, guriicf). 4. By combination . For these see Part III. 212 LESSON XXXII. t§ 5 190- 190 . Comparison of Adverbs. 1. Some adverbs are compared, as: balb, ) „ Y soon ef>e, j oft, often gem, willingly well efyer after Heber beffer am efyeften am Hfteften am liebften (< different root) am befien ( “ “ ) 2. Adjectives are used as adverbs in the comparative , as in the positive, without change, as : @r Ifiuft fdjncffcr al§ fetn ©ruber, He runs more quickly than his brother. 3. In the superlative degree, the form with ant is used for the relative superlative (see §§ 127, 2, and 128), as: 6r Ifiuft ant fdjncllften bon alien, He runs most quickly of all. 4. The absolute superlative (see § 127, 2) is usually formed by prefixing an adverb of eminence (such as fefyr, fyocfyft. Suffer ft, etc.), as: 6r febreibt Suffer ft fcfjon. He writes most (i. e., very) beautifully. 5. Adverbs from adjectives in -ig, -Hfij, -fain use the un- inflected form for the superlative absolute , as : @r Ififjt freunblirfjft grfifjen. He desires to be most kindly remembered. Also a few monosyllables, as: langft, long ago; tjbd) ft, most highly. 6. The superlative absolute may also be expressed by auf fea§ (auf$) prefixed to the superlative adjective, to express the highest possible degree , as : TABLE OF STRONG VERBS. 213 X92J @r Beforgt feme ©cfcfmfte auf tm§ (auf§) ©etotffenfyafteflc. He attends to his business in the most conscientious manner (possible). 7. A few superlative adverbs end in -ett£, with special meanings, as : at most meiftcnS, for the most part toenigftcuS, at least ndd)ftcn§, shortly Also the ordinal adverbs, erfien§, etc., see § 183, (r). 191. Position of Adverbs. Adverbs generally precede the word they modify (except genug, see § 178, Note). For further particulars as to their position in the sentence, see § 45, Rule 5. 192. Table of Classification of Strong Verbs. German Model. English Analogy. Ablaut. Class. Div. Infin. Impf. P.Part. 2. 3. sing. Pr.Itjd. 2.s.Imp. Lesson. M a beifteit bite ei t t XXII. b bleibett (wanting) ei te te — XXIII. II \ a fcf)iej3cn shoot ic,etc. u 0 d — XXIV. b fricrcu freeze ie,etc. 0 0 — XXV. / a fingen sing f 0 a it — XXVI. m.) b c fpinncn belfett spin (wanting) t c a a 0 0 t jxxvn. IV. — fpredbeit speak e, etc. a 0 t, te XXVIII. V. — effen eat e, etc. a e htc XXIX. VI. — fcfjlageu slay a u a Umlaut XXX. VII. — fallen fall various te same as Umlaut XXXI. Infin. 214 LESSON XXXII. [§§ 192 - Remarks. — i. The Umlaut of classes VI., VII. does not occur in the Imperative. 2. The varying vowels of the Imperf. Subj. are given in the lists, where necessary. 3. The English Analogies printed in Italics are incomplete. 4. The vowel-change of class VII. is not an Ablaut, but the result of reduplication. 5. The lists of the various classes contain only the verbs of common occurrence ; all others will be found in App. L. 193. Distinguish between the verbs of the following groups : { bitten, beg, ask bat gebetcn beten, pray (intr.) betefc gebeiet bicien, bid, offer bot Q^bottn ! liegen, lie (be recumbent, intr.) lag gelegcu legen, lay (trans.) legtc gelegt liigen, lie, tell a falsehood lag gelagen ! jicfyen, pull (trans.), move (intr.) jag gejagen jetfyen, accuse jiel) gejic^en jeigen, show jeigte gejetgt 194. Remember the irregularities of : effen (P. Part, gegeffen) fietjen, ftaitb (or ftunb), ge* fjauen (Impf. fyiei) ftauben geijen, ging, gegangen jieljett, jog, gejogcn Also the double forms in the Impf. of : fyeben (fyttb, fyob) fcfytoorm (fcfyhmr, fcfttoor) Note. — There are a few strong P. Parts, from verbs now otherwise weak, as: gentafylen, from matjlen, to grind (Impf. mal)ftc) ; gefal$en, from fallen, to salt (Impf. fatgte) ; gefpalten, from fpaftcit, to split (Impf. (paltetc) ; also some strong participles used only as adjectives, viz.: 194] GENERAL REMARKS ON STRONG VERBS. 215 erfyabett (from erbeben), exalted, sublime befcfjeiben ( “ befc^eiben), modest tteurorren ( “ oertoirren), confused Vocabulary. to wind up (a clock, etc.), aufjiefyen pass (an examination), be* ftefyen greet, salute, griij$en go (or be) too slow (of a clock, etc.), nad/gel;en run after, nacfj'laufen (-J- dat.) cry, rufen go (or be) too fast (of a clock, etc.), bo rgefyen command, ber 33efcf>I visit, visitors, ber 23efudf) examination, ba§ @£Ctmen kitchen, bie $iteJ unb ©opI)ie ift un ten in ber JUicfye. 7. 2(nfang§ tool)nten loir nid)t gern in biefer ©trafte, aber jeijt gefdllt un3 biefelbe ganj gut. 8. !gd) glaube, loir loerben einen f)ei$en ©ornmer f >aben; ioa§ meinen ©ie? 9. S5ie meiften Seute efjen lieber frifd;e£ gleifcfy ai$ ge* 2l6 LESSON XXXII. [§§ 194- fafjeneg. 10. £rot$ beg 33efel;lg beg Kottigg Betctc Mantel jeben £ag breimal. 11. 9Jleine SEante, bie in Berlin tooljnt unb beren 33 ruber ©ie fennen, ift fel;r franf. 12. ©riifjen ©ie freunblidjft Sfyre ©Item fiir mi$, toenn ©ie nad; §aufe fommett. 13. §offent» Iicf> toirb $tif3 fein Gjamen gut befteben, benn er bat aufg getoiffen* tyaftefte ftubiert. 14. ©r toirb eg fcbtoerlicfy befteben, ba er crft feit jtoei ^aijreit in ber ©djule ift. 15. S)er liigt, toefcber toiffentlicb eine Untoafjr^eit fagt. 16. %d) effe gem gebrateneg Stinbffeifcb, befonberg toenn id; recbt ljungrig bin. 17. 9iecbtg bon ber ©dntle fte£;t eine 5tircf>e r finfg ftei)t ber 9Jiarft. 18. 2Bir ftaben lieber abenbg S3efucb alg morgeng, benn morgeng finb toir getoofntlic^ befcbaftigt. 19. ®iefeg $inb toirb nacbfteng franf toerben, benn eg £?at feit brei SEagen faft gar nicbtg gegeffen. 20. ©g ftanb friiber eine $ird;e auf ber ©teffe too toir Jefd finb, aber fie ift fd;on langft fcerfcbtounben. 21. 33on toem tourbe bie $ird?e gebaut, toobon ©ie fpred;en ? 22. $cb toeiff eg nicfit, eg ift mir nie gefagt toorben. B. 1. Please show me the way to the post-office. 2. If George is up-stairs, tell him that I am down-stairs. 3. 1 do not like London ; I prefer to live in a smaller city. 4. The pen still lies on the book upon which I laid it. 5. Please tell me who lives over the way. 6. This boy has been stung by a bee. 7. Of all animals the horse runs quickest. 8. Give me what you have in your (the) left hand. 9. Lessing died on the fifteenth of February 1781. 10. The soldiers ran blindly into the battle and fought like lions. 11. The train for (nad;) Montreal leaves (ab'fafyren) at twelve o’clock at night, and arrives in Montreal at ten o’clock in the morning. 12. A little beggar ran after a gentleman, and asked him for some money. 13. ‘My father is dead,’ cried he, ‘my mother is dead, and all her children are dead ! ’ 14. ‘ Who are you then?’ asked the gentleman. 15. What answer was given to the beggar by the gentleman, when he was asked for money? I9jl idiomatic uses of adverbs. 217 ORAL EXERCISE XXXII. 1. Was wiirden Sie sagen, wenn ich Sie fragte, wie viel Uhr es sei? 2. Gefallt Ihnen die Strasze, worin Sie jetzt wohnen ? 3. Hat Fritz sein Examen gut bestanden ? 4. Wo ist meine Feder? 5. Was fur Sprachen haben Sie studiert? 6. Glauben Sie, dasz der Herr dem Bettler etwas ge- geben hat ? LESSON XXXIII. ADVERBS (continued): IDIOMS. - IRRECULAR STRONC VERBS. 195. Idiomatic Uses of Certain Adverbs. 1. tut it, well, fllutt, e§ iff mtr etrterlei. Well (why), it is all the same to me. Note. — 91un is here really an interjection, and hence does not throw the subject after the verb. 2. ebcn, just, exactly, iff elicit berfelbe 9Jlann, That is the very (exactly the) same man. SBir ftrtb (fo)cfictt angefommen, We have just arrived. £>a3 f arm man elicit nicfyt fagen, One cannot exactly say that. 3 . gem, Ucber, ant liebften. e ff e Sifd), 1 am fond of (eating) fish, effe liebcr aU fylexfd^, I prefer (eating) fish to meat. 6r toiirbe e§ gem tfmn, He would be glad to do it, would do it with pleasure. SEBelcfye ©pra$e fjircdjcn ©ie am Itebfien? Which language do you prefer (speaking)? 218 LESSON XXXIII. f§*95 4. etff, first, only, not before, etc. SJlart mufe crft benfen, bann fyrecfyen, One must think first and then speak. 9Jfetn SSruber toirb crfi morgen fommen. My brother will not come before to-morrow. 2Bir fatten erfi jtoet 9Jletlen marfcfyiert, We had only marched two miles. SJietn Sruber iff erft jtoet ^afyre alt. My brother is only (not more than) two years old. 5. Sticrft, first of all; for the first time. SiefeS ©djiff iff jucrfl (pox alien anbern) im £afen ange* fommen. This ship arrived in the harbour first (i. e., before any other). %(f) toerbe jucrft (or erft) jum ©$neiber, bann jum S8u<^)= fjanbler gefyen, I shall go first (of all) to the tailor’s, then to the bookseller’s. Qtf) fya&e iljn geftern jucrft (sum erften 2JtaI) gefeben, I saw him for the first time yesterday. Note. — guerfl refers to //ff^only, as above; erjleit# = ‘firstly, in the first place,’ refers to order only, as in enumerations, thus : 3cf) founte nid)t fommen, erfletiS, meil e§ regnete, jtoeitettS, met! id) fvanf mar, I could not come, first (in the first place) be- cause it rained, secondly, because I was ill. 6. fcftoit, already, as early as, etc. ©inb ©te fdjmt ba? Are you there already? 3f t %\jX Sruber fdjmt in $ranfrei d) gemefen? Has your brother ever been in France ? $cf) bin fcljon brei Sage in ber ©tabt, I have been in the city for the last three days. ®a$ ©d&iff iff frfjon geftern angefommen. The ship arrived (as early as) yesterday. §195] IDIOMATIC USES OF ADVERBS* 219 @r tmrb fdjon fommen, He will be sure to come (he will come, no doubt). Note. — ©d)on is often, as in the fourth of the above sentences, to be left untranslated in English. 7. nocf), yet, still, more. (a) Of Time: ©tub ©ie nod) I)ier? Are you still here? bin nod) nie in ®eutfdjlcmb g etoefen, I have never yet been in Germany. @r mar nod) bor einer ©tunbe fyier. He was here only an hour ago. Jlodj fyeute, Even to-day (while it is yet to-day, not later than to-day). Note. — Observe that nod) precedes the negatives nie, nid)t, etc. (b) Of Number : 9lod) erne Staffe £l)ee, Another cup of tea. 91odj Jtoei, Two more. 9!od) (ein)mal fo biel. As much again. 8. bod), yet, after all. (a) Adversative : Gr toirb bod)' fommen, He will come after all (em- phasis on bod)). Gr toirb bod) fommen', He will come, I hope (emphasis on fommen). igabe i e§ 3$nen bod) gefagt ! I told you so (did I not tell you so ?). Note. — Observe that in the last example the verb is at the beginning of the principal sentence. (b) With Imperatives : fommen ©ie bo$ fyeretn. Pray come in (j urgent ). 220 LESSON XXXIII. [§§ 135 - (c) In answer to a negative question or statement: £aben ©ie il )n ttt djt gefel)en? (^a), bodj. Have you not seen him? Yes, I have. $d) I)abe e§ nic^i getfyan. ©ie I)aben e£ bod) getl)an. I did not do it. Yes, you did. (For bo$ and nod) as Conjunctions, see Less. XL.) Note. — 2)od) gives an affirmative answer, where a negative one is expected. 9 . aud), also, even, etc. Sludj fein SSciter tear gegen il)n, Even his father was against him. SJtein 33ruber tear nid )t miibe, unb \ar audj miibe. My brother was not tired, and I was not tired either. §aben ©ie aud) bebacbt', fr>a3 ©ie fagen, Are you sure you have considered, what you say ? (emphasis on bebacfyt). 10. mo 1)1, indeed, etc. Gr leugnet e§ tootyl, aber e§ ift bo$ toabr, He denies it indeed (to be sure) but yet it is true. ©ie finb tooljl ein grentber? I suppose (presume) you are a stranger (no doubt you are, etc.). Note. — @ut, not n>oi)b is the adv. of the adj. gut, good, when modi- fying a transitive verb. 11. id, yes, to be sure, etc. £I)un ©ie e§ ja', Be sure to do it, do it by all means (emphasis on ja). Gr ift ja mein 33ater', He is my father, you know (em- phasis on SSater). 12 . nur. (With the Imperative.) JKommen ©ie nur herein. Just come in (reassuringly). IRREGULAR STRONG VERBS. 221 196] 196 . Irregular Strong Verbs. I. 2 rf)un, to do, Impf. tljat, P. Part, getbatt. like Engl, ‘did,’ is a relic of the old Impf. by re- duplication, the old form being tc-ta, i. e., the stem fa- with reduplicating syll. te- prefixed, then tc-te, fct, tfjat. 3 : 1 >un rejects c of the termination throughout, except in 1. Sing. Pres. Ind., and in the Pres. Subj. II. Imperfect-Present Verbs. In fin. totffen, know biirfen, dare fiinnen, can magen, may miiffen, must fallen, shall Pres. Ind. Pres. Imperfect 1. Sing. i.Plur. Subj. Ind. Subj. * ART * toeig tuiffen toiffe tougte toiigte geftmgt barf biirfen biirfe burfte biirfte geburft fann fiinnen liinne fannte fannte gefonnt mag miigen miige marf)fc madE )te gemadE)t mug miiffen miiffe mugte mitgte gemugt fall fatten fatte fattie fattte gefollt III. SBotten, will, Pres. Ind. 1. Sing, tottt, 1. Plur. fatten. Pres. Subj. toatte, Impf. Ind. toattte, Subj. tuattte, P. Part, getoatlt. E.emarks. — 1. Observe the following peculiarities in the verbs under II. and III. : (a) All have the same vowel (mostly with Umlaut) in the Inf. and the Plur . of the Pres. Ind. ; but (except fotten) a differeiit vowel in the Sing, of the same tense. ( b ) The Impf, Ind, and P, Part, have the weak endings -te, -t, but the vowel is without Umlaut; toiffen changes t to u; mogcn changes g into dj. (c) The Impf, Subj, has Umlaut, except in fotten and tootten. 222 LESSON XXXIII* [§ 196 ( d ) The Sing, of the Pres. Ind. of these Verbs is as follows, the Plural being regular : toiffen ■ r id) tocifc < bu tocijjt (. er toctfj biirfen - r id; barf bu barfft (. er barf Ibnnen j • id) farnt bu fannfi .. er fanu tnijgen ( tcf> mug 1 bu magft ( er mag miiffen - ' ic^ tnujj bu mufst ( er ntujj foden -< ' ic^ fotr | bu forrft L er fad tooderJ ' tdE) totd | bu toidft [ er toid Observe here the different vowel of the Inf. and Indie, (except foH) ; also the want of the person-ending in the 1. and 3. Sing, (tefy, er toeift, barf, fantt, etc., not toeift-t, barf— t, fann-t ; com- pare Engl, can, may, etc., not can-s, may-s, etc.). 2. The forms of the Present in the verbs under II. were originally Strong Imperfects (hence their want of person-end- ings), which came to be used with a Present meaning ; the new (weak) Imperfects were formed from these, with vowel- change. 3. The Present of troffen was originally a Pres. Subj., used as Indie., and therefore also without full person-endings. 4. The Imperative is wanting in all under II., except ftriffen, Imper. toiffe. Notes. — 1. SBiffert (= Fr. savoir) is used of knowledge, and of things only; fenrtett (= F x . connaitre') of acquaintance ,of persons and things, thus: Stiffen @ie ben 2Beg? Do you know the road? (i. e., do you know which is the right road ?) Hcnnen ©ie ben 2Beg? Are you acquainted (familiar) with the road ? Iteitnen @te tneinen SBruber? Do you know my brother? Stiffen 0ie, er gefagt l)at? Do you know what he said? § 196 ] IRREGULAR STRONG VERBS. 223 2 . All these verbs, except ttnffen, govern another Verb in the Infiiu without (see Less. XLV), as: 3d) barf geljen, I am permitted to go. Vocabulary. to put on (a hat), auf'fetjen expression, ber SluS'brucf * French (language), granjo'ftfd) building, ba3 ©ebaube commandment, ba§ ©ebot' watch-key, ber U^rfd^Iuffet dwelling-house, bd3 SJBofyn* clear(ly), distinctly ), beutlid) although, obgleicf)* Idioms : 1 . Will you be so kind as to lend me your pen ? SBofleit ®ie fo gut fem uitfc mir 30re ftcfcer leil^en ? (lit., will you be so kind and, etc. 1 ) 2. I am sorry (I regret), (5$ tfcut mir leib (leib to be treated as a separable particle). 3. What is that in German ? SBie fca$ auf &eutfd) ? 4. I do not need to go to school to-day, 3d) braud)e fyeute ttid)t gur ®d)uk gu gcbcn. 5. He knows French, (Sr faun 3frangofifd)« EXERCISE XXXIIL A. 1. $;dE) !ann bid) nicfjt t?erfteE>ert ; ftmd) bods beutlicber. 2. $omtnen ©ie nur fjerein, toenit ©ie Gotten. 3. ^ft e§ 3>I)nen fdjon gelungen, fjvansofifcf) ju Iernen? 4. gd) toerb« nod) beute biefe Seftion Iernen miiffen, unb e§ ift fcfion brei SSiertel auf jebn. 5. 9?ocb Dor biergefm Sagen liefen toir ©irb ben ganjen^ag ju §aufe bleiben mitffen, Vr>etl er ficfy erfaltet fyat. 21. SSJlein 33ruber fyricfyt gut 5Deutfd;, obgleid^ er erft in in feinern ftebjef^nten ^aljre ba3 ©tubium btefer ©prad?e ange* fangen I?at. 22. 28oUen ©te fo gut fein unb mix fagen (rnir ju fagen), foie bid Ul)r e3 ift ? B . 1. A stranger wants to speak to (fpred^en + acc.) you. 2. That building was first a bank, then a shop, but it is now a dwelling-house. 3. How do you know that ? I know it be- cause I have heard it from my father. 4. What shall I do ? I have lost all my money. 5. Do you know who has torn this book? 6. No, I do not know who has torn it. 7. Can you write the name of that stranger? 8. Do you know German? No, but I know French. 9. Do you know the difference between the words 4 fennen ’ and ‘toiffen’? 10. I had already put on my hat, and was just on the point of going out, when the rain began. 11. These two ships set sail (abs faljrert) at the same time, but the smaller arrived first. 12. I could not wind up my watch yesterday evening; I had no watch-key about me. 13. I cannot remain now any longer; I must be at home at ten o’clock. 14. I know this street, but I do not know the name of it (say : how it is called). 15. A brave man is esteemed by everybody. 16. Of what is bread made ? ORAL EXERCISE XXXIII. 1. Wie heiszt ‘I am sorry ’ auf Deutsch? 2. Weshalb bleiben Sie heute nicht langer? 3. Konnen Sie Deutsch? igS] THE MODAL AUXILIARIES. 225 4. Sollte man gegen jedermann freundlich sein ? 5. Wie ge* fallt Ihnen Paris ? 6. Wie viel Uhr ist es, wenn der Stunden- zeiger zwischen vier und fiinf und der Minutenzeiger auf zehn steht ? LESSON XXXIV. THE MODAL AUXILIARIES. 197. The Verbs biirfnt, fihttien, tniigcn, miiffcn, foffett, ttJoffeu (see last Lesson), with the Verb Iftffcit (Class VII, Less. XXXI) are called Modal Auxiliaries, or Auxiliary Verbs of Mood, since they are used to form combinations equivalent to various Moods. Thus: lafjct urt§ gefyert, Met us go/ is really equivalent to an Imperative Mood i. PI. of geljen ; tcf) fmtn gefyen, ‘ I can go/ to a Potential Mood \ etc. 198. These Modal Auxiliaries differ from the English Auxiliaries can , may, must, shall, will, in having an Infinitive and a Past Participle, and in the consequent ability to form a complete set of compound tenses, which are wanting in the English Verbs, and must therefore be supplied in that language by equivalent phrases, as shown in the following partial paradigms (see also Less. XXXV). biirfctt, to be per- mitted fihtncit, to be able (can) tttiigett, to like, be allowed (may) Present Indicative. id) barf, I am per- mitted, may id) fantt, I can, am able tcf) mag, I like, may Present Subjunctive. id) burfe, I (may) be permitted, tcf) fottrte, I be able (may) moge, I like (may) 226 LESSON XXXIV. [8 198 id; burfte, I was per- mitted Imperfect Indicative. id) fonnte, I could, 1 icf) tnodde, I liked, was able j might Imperfect Subjunctive. id; burfte, I might be permitted id) fonnte, I could, might be able \dtte gefonnt, I might have been able id) f)atte gemod;t, I might have liked Future Indicative and Subjunctive. id) toerbe burfert, icf) toerbe fonnen, id; toerbe mogett, I shall be permitted I shall be able I shall like § 198 ] THE MODAL AUXILIARIES. 227 Future Perfect. id) merbe geburft I )a* ben, I shall have been permitted id) fterbe gefonnt I)af>en, I shall have been able id) toerbe gemod)t !)a6en, I shall have liked Simple Conditional. inurbe biirfen, I id) miirbe fonnen, I id) tniirbe tnogen, I should be per- should be able should like mitted Compound Conditional. i$ toil rbe geburft l)a= ben,I should have been permitted id) mitrbe gefonnt l)aben, I should have been able id) ftmrbe gemocfyt l)aben, I should have liked tmiffett, to be com- pelled (must) {often, to be obliged (shall) UJOftcn, to be willing (will) Present Indicative. icfy tnuf$, I am com- pelled, must id) foff, bu foftft, I am (obliged) to, thou shalt idf) ioiff, I will, in- tend to, am about to Present Subjunctive. td) rrtitffe, I (may) be compelled id) foffe, I (may) be obliged idf) faoffe, I (may) be willing Imperfect Indicative. idf) mu^te, I was compelled id) foffte, I was (obliged) to, ought id) moffte, I was willing 228 LESSON XXXIV. l§§ ^98- Imperfect Subjunctive. id) miiftte, I might be compelled id) babe gemufct, I have been com- pelled id) Ijabe gemuf^t, I (may) have been compelled id; fottte, I might be obliged Perfect Indicative. id; fyabe gefottt, I have been obliged Perfect Subjunctive. id) fya be gefofft^ I (may) have been obliged id; toottte, I might be willing, would id) tyabe getontft, I have been wil- ling id; I;abe getoottt, I (may) have been willing Pluperfect Indicative. t$ Ijatte gemufct, I had been com- pelled id) fyatte gefottt, I had been obliged id) fyaite getoottt, I had been willing Pluperfect Subjunctive. id; tyfitte germtf$t, I might have been compelled id) fyatte gefottt, I might have been obliged, ought to have id) fyatte getoofft, I might have been willing Future Indicative and Subjunctive. id) toerbe mitffen, I shall be com- pelled id) toerbe gemujst ijaben, I shall have been com- pelled id) fterbe fatten, I shall be obliged Future Perfect. id) toerbe gefollt fya* ben, I shall have been obliged id) toerbe tootten, I shall be willing id; it>erbe getoottt f)dben, I shall have been wil- ling 199 ] THE MODAL AUXILIARIES. 229 tdj ftiirbe muffett, I should be com- pelled Simple Conditional. id; tolirbe follen, I should be obliged id) toiirbe toollen, I should be wil- ling Compound Conditional. t$ toiirbe gemuftt Ijaben, I should have been com- pelled id} tolirbe gefofft ben, I should have been obliged icf} toiirbe getooflt fyabert, I should have been wil- ling 199 . Further Peculiarities of Modal Auxiliaries. 1. They govern an Infinitive without $u, as: @r mufc geljcit, He must go. 2. In the compound tenses, when a governed Infin. occurs, the weak P. Part, is replaced by the Infinitive (really the old strong P. Part, without prefix gc-, which coincides in form with the Infin.), as : $d) fyabe gemu^t, I have been obliged ; — but $c£} ijabe e§ tljun miiffeit, I have been obliged to do it. 3. In subordinate sentences, their auxiliary of tense does not come last, but precedes both the governed infinitive and the participle of the Modal Auxiliary, as : 6r fagte, ba£ er e§ fjabe tfyun mtiffen, He said, that he had been obliged to do it. Note. — The foregoing peculiarities are all shared by the verbs beiften, !)effen, l)oreit, laffert, ntadjen, fefjert ; for other verbs governing an Infin. without gu, see Less. XLV. 4. The shorter (and older) forms of the Conditional (viz. : Impf. and Plupf. Subj., see § 111) are preferred to the longer ones (with toiirbe), thus : 230 LESSON XXXIV, Simple Conditional. t$ biirfte = tcfy fimntc = id? tuutfjtc = id? mufjte = icfy foffte = i$ feoflte = I should be permitted I “ “ able I “ like I “ be compelled I “ “ obliged I “ “ willing l§ i99 Compound Conditional. icfy I?atte ' geburft, biirfen gefonnt, fonnen gemod?t, mogen gemufjt, miijfen gefoflt, foffen _ getoolft, feoflen ' been permitted “ able I should have liked been compelled “ obliged _ “ willing Remarks. — 1. The Engl, auxiliaries also use by prefer- ence shorter forms of the Comp. Condit., but differently constructed, thus : tcfypttc eStljutt ' fonnen ' could mo gen might - miiffen Y II must l foffen should feoff en N. ^ would have done it Observe that the Engl. Verbs have the Modal Auxiliary (‘could/ ‘might/ etc.) in the Simple Tense (Impf.), and the governed verb (‘have done’) in the Compound Tense (Perf. Inf.); whereas the Germ. Verbs have -the Modal Auxiliary (fyatte . . . fonnen, etc.) in the Compound Tense (Plupf. Subj.), and the governed verb (tfyun) in the Simple Tense (Pres. Inf.). 2. Distinguish carefully between ‘could/ Indie. (= was able, fonnte) and ‘ could/ Conditional (== would be able, fiinnte) ; and so with the other verbs, thus : § 199 ? THE MODAL AUXILIARIES. 231 ©r fcnnte e§ nid^t tfjun = He could not (was not able to) do it ( Indie . ). ©r fbrmte e3 tfyurt, faenn er toaftic = He could (would be able to) do it, if he were willing ( Condit .). Vocabulary. fellow-creature, neighbour, to remain up ,sit up, auf bletben go out, au^'gefyert thank, banfen (+ dat.) bow to, greet, graven (trans.) depend, rely (upon), fid) her* laffert (auf + acc.) moment, ber SCu'genblicf railway, bie ©i'fenbafyn ber 3}a$fte disaster, ba§ ttn'gliicf untruth, falsehood, bie Un'* toafyrfyeit over again, rtoefy (ein)maf whether, if, ob else, otherwise, fortft Idioms: X. Will you have a cup of tea? No, thank you, SEBoKeii cine ^affc $0ee ? 3d) fcanfe (3I)iien). 2 , In fine weather, 33c t fd)C>nem 28ctter. 3. I have heard (it) said, etc., 3d) ijabe fngen fyoren, u. f. ro. EXERCISE XXXIV. A. 1. ®u fiaft beine 21ufgabe fel)r fcf)lecf>t gemadfit; bu mirft fie gemifj nod; (ein)mal' mad;en miiffen. 2. Sarf id) einen 2lugen= blief 3>l;ren SKeiftift braudicn? 2>cf) ben tuetnen berloren. 3. SBir miiffen g(eid) jur ©djule ge(;en, fonft !ontmen mir ju fpat. 4. SRait foffte fetrten 9?acbften lieben, mie fid; felbft. 5. SSovige SBodfie Ijatte mein SSater fein §au§ berfaufen iiinnen, aber er fiat eg niefit gemofft. 6. 2>et;t moebte er eg gern berfaufen, aber nie* manb miff eg. 7. Seine SSettcrn taffen bid; freunbliefift grufjen. 8. -JBiffen ©ie, mie ber §err beif;t, ber mid; foeben gegriigt fiat? 9. Su foffft ju beinem SBater gefien ; er miff biefj f^red^en. 10. Ser ®nabe mag fagen, mag er miff ; id; meijf, bafj er eine Un= mafirljeit gefagt fiat. 11. SJlocfiten ©ie niefit bei biefem fcfionen SBetier fpajieren fafiren? 12. §aft bu ben ^ug bon Buffalo an* fommen fefien? 13. Iga mol;!, iefi Ijabe ifm anfommen fefien, aber eg mar niemanb barauf, ben id; !annte. 14. @r fiat geburft, aber 232 LESSON XXXIV. [§§ 199 - er I)at n\d)t getooflt. 15. Igcb l)abe in ber ©iabt fagen I)6ren, baft etn grofteS Unglue! auf ber ©fertbafyn gefrf;ef;en ift. 16. © foil bon biefem 23aum geftprungen fein, aber id) faun e§ !aum glauben. 17. %d) barf nid)t fo fpat aufbletben ate mein alterer SBruber ; id) muft jeben 2lbenb um jetyn Ul)r ju 33ette gel)en. 18. %d) toill tfmn, ioaS id) fann; barauf fonnen ©ie fid^ berlaffen. 19. SSon U>em tourbe ba§ 23udE) gefcfmeben, ba£ ©te foeben lafen? 20. © tl)ut mir letb, baft ©ie fo lange auf mid) fyaben ioarten muffen; id) lonnte meine §anbfd)uf)e nid)t finben. B. 1. By whom was this picture painted? 2. I should like to know what time it is. 3. May you go out, if you want to? No, we are obliged to stay at home the whole day. 4. I do not like (I like no) tea ; I prefer (the) coffee. 5. Could you help me with my lesson ? 6. I should certainly help you with it, if I could. 7. He may say, what he will ; it is all the same to me. 8. My father could have sold his house last year, but now it is impossible, for nobody wants to buy it. 9. Charles has beaten his dog with a stick ; he should not have done that. 10. May I offer you a piece of meat? No, thank you. 11. Have (let) the messenger wait, till I write an answer. 12. I should like to read this French book, but I do not know any French. 13. I am sorry that I have not been able to come sooner. 14. He will be obliged to study another year, if he does not pass his examination. 15. Sophia should not have gone for a walk, since the weather is so cold. 16. The horse I wanted to buy was already sold. ORAL EXERCISE XXXIV. 1. Wie heiszt das erste Gebot? 2. Wissen Sie, ob wir morgen zur Schule gehen miissen ? 3. Darf ich Ihnen eine Tasse Thee anbieten? 4. Weshalb haben Sie mir mit meiner Aufgabe nicht helfen wollen ? 5. Wie lange werden wir auf Fritz warten miissen ? 6. Sollte man seinen Nachsten lieben? THE MODAL AUXILIARIES. 233 loo] LESSON XXXV. MODAL AUXILIARIES (continued): — IDIOMS. 200. The following are the most important of the various meanings of the Modal Auxiliaries : i. Surfeit denotes permission, as: ®arf id) fragert ? May I ask? ©ie biirfeu je|t nacb £>aufe gefyen, You may go home now. @r bat nid&tg fagen biirfeit, He has not been permitted (allowed) to say anything. Siinnen denotes : ( a ) ability (of persons ), as : @r fanittc fd)5rt fcfyreiben, He could (was able to, knew how to) write beautifully. $d) fjiitte nid)t fommen fiimten, I could not have (would not have been able to) come. (p) possibility (of events ), as : @3 fttmt fetrt, It may be (so), it is possible. 3 . SWiSgctt denotes : (a) preference, liking (of persons ), as : $cf) tttag btefe§ ©ebid;t nid;t, I do not like (care for) this poem. ©r modjtc nicfyt arbeiten, He did not like to work. $>d) tyatte Sfyrert Sruber fefyert magett, I should have liked to see your brother. Note. — This is the usual meaning in the first person; also in the Impf. (Indie, and Condit.) throughout. ( b ) concession, possibility (in 2 . and 3 . person only), as : 16 234 LESSON XXXV. [§ 200 @r mag gefyen, He may go (as far as I am concerned), or : Let him go. mag fetn. That may be (for all I know). Note.— -The Engl, ‘may* denoting permission must be rendered by bUtfCtt in the first person, as : May I accompany you? ®arf id) begteiten? (e) Observe this idiom : 8 $ toerbe morgen auSgefyen, mag e§ regnen ober ntcfjt, I shall go out to-morrow, whether it rains or not. 4. ©Jitffen denotes necessity, as: 2lDfe StRenfd^en muffett fterben. All men must die. mufj geftern gefcfyefyen fein, It must have happened yesterday. SBir toerben auSgefyen miiffen, We shall be compelled (or ‘ obliged/ or ‘ shall have ’) to go. Note. — To be obliged, compelled > after a negative is rendered by brand) en, as : I am not obliged to go, 3d) braudje nidjt gu gebett. 5 . ©often denotes duty or obligation, imposed on the subject by the will of another . (a) Imposed by the speaker, as : ®u fattft nicf)t fteljlen, Thou shalt not steal. ( b ) Imposed by some person other than, but recognised by, the speaker, as: 8 $ faff gefyen, I am to go. (Sr fycitte geljen fatten^ He ought to have gone, 2Ba3 fall gefefyefyen? What is to be done ? S S$a3 faffte iefy tbun? What was I to do ? ( c ) It also denotes a statement on the part of another as to the subject, as : @r fall feljr reiefy fein, He is said to be very rich. §200] THE MODAL AUXILIARIES. 235 6. SBottctt denotes (a) the exertion of the will on the part of the subject, as : @r Uiitt nicfjt gefyorcfyen, He will not (refuses to) obey. ( b ) intention or impending action, as : @r mitt morgen abretfen, He intends (means) to depart. £>a§ ©3 miff brec^en, The ice is about to break (threatens to break). mutttc eben gefyen (= tear eben xm 33egriff ju ge^en), He was just on the point of going. ( c ) a statement or claim on the part of the subject, as : @r ttsitt in Snbien getoefen fetn, He asserts that he has been (pretends to have been) in India. 7 . Caffeit is used (a) as auxiliary of the Imperative Mood, as : fiaffcn ©te un§ fyier bleiben. Let us remain here. (£) to express permission, etc., as : 9Kan I)at ben ©ieb entfprtngen laffeit. The thief has been allowed to escape. (c) to express the agency of another, as : 2)er Officer Ite^ ben ©olbaten Beftrafctt, The officer ordered the soldier to be punished. 2lfcf>en:ptittel3 33ater fic§ ben 93aum umfjauett, Cinderella’s father had the tree cut down. Note. — The infin. in the former of these examples is rendered by the passive infinitive in English, the object of the verb laffen being under- stood. Supply the ellipsis as follows : ' 2)er Officer fjat jemctnfc (obj. of laffeit), ben ©olbaten (obj. of beftrafen), beftrafen laffen, The officer has ordered somebody to punish the soldier. * ( d ) reflexively, as: 236 LESSON XXXV. @r lief) ftdj leicfyt betrugen. He suffered himself to be deceived easily. 3d) tieft e§ mir gefaHen, I submitted to it. G£ liifjt fid) nicfyt leugnen, It cannot be denied. 201. How to render shall and will. 1. The Engl. 4 shall ’ and 4 will 9 must both be rendered by t&Cfbcit when they express mere futurity, as : I shall be drowned and nobody will save me, 3$ tocrbe ertrinfen unb niemcmb mirb mid) retten. 2 . But if they express more than mere futurity (e. g., obligation or detenjiination ), they must be rendered by fotteii and fooHett respectively, as : I will be drowned and nobody shall save me, mill ertrinfen unb nietnanb foil mid; retten. 202. Observe the following parallel idioms : id) ©r Ijat e§ nicfyt tljun fimnctt, He has not been able to do it. ©r fttltlt e§ nicftt gcifjntt IjaBett, He cannot (possibly) have done it. (*) ©r Ijat nic^t tljun mogctt, He did not like to do it. ©r mag e§ getljan IjaBcn, He may (possibly) have done it. r @r Ijat tljuit mitffen, He has been obliged to (u toirft fie lenten fonnen, toenn btt e§ nur auf bie ric£;tige SBeife berfucfift. 9. 9Jfan barf nicftt tn ber ©djule plaubern; ba3 ftort ben Secret unb bie ©cfmter. 10. 2Be§« fyalb fiat 2lfcf)enputtel3 SBater ben SBaurn umljauen laffen? 11. ©ollte §err S3, toafyrenb rnetner Slbtoefenljeit fotnmen, fo laffen ©ie iljn auf mid) tnarten. 12. $d) mbdjte nur toiffen, toarum ©eorg auf fid) ioarten lafst ! 13. $;d) mod)te ©ie rtidfjt ftoren, aber fagen ©ie inir gefaKigft, mie biefer ©a£ auf ©nglifcf) Ijeifjt. 14. ©eorg§ SSater foil gefafyrlid) Irani fein ; man Ijat jtoei Str^te l;olen laffen. 15. ®er 33ogel motlte eben bom S3aume fliegen, al4 ber o>ager iljn fdjojj. 16. ©uten -morgen, $err 23raun, mein SOater lafjt 2>Ijnen f«8«n, bafj er ©ie beute 2lbenb ertoartet. 17. §abe id) ©ie fagen fyoren, bafj ©ie jeben£ag eine beutfcfye ©tunbe neljmen ? 18. mein, id) neljme eineit £ag urn ben anbern eine ©tunbe. 19. 2Ba§ micf) betrifft, fo mocfde id) lieber aHe brei Stage meine ©tunben neljmen. 20. SDa§ foCCte id) meinen, benn ©ie miirben tneljr geit S um ©tubieren Ijaben. 21. ©fjrlidf) toa^rt am langften, unb Unredjt fdjlagt feinen eigeneit §errn. B. 1. Let us take a walk ; I cannot work any longer. 2. The beggar-woman, who has just asked us for money, says that she is (claims to be) a hundred years old. 3. She is not quite so old, but she is said to be at least above (liber -j- acc.) ninety years old. 4. The fox said : ‘ The grapes are sour ; I do not like them.’ 5. The fox said the grapes were sour, and that he did not like them. 6. Might I ask you how far you are going ? As far as Montreal. 7. Should I put on my overcoat? 8. I should think so ! The thermometer is (stands) below zero. 9. Is it true that this traveller knows three languages? It may be [so], but I do not believe it. 10. If you should see little Freddy up-stairs, let him come to me. 11. By which shoemaker do you have your shoes made ? 12. The steam-engine is said to have been invented by an Eng- lishman. 13. Lazy boys learn only because they are obliged COMPOUND VERBS. 239 205] to learn. 14. He must have been very ill, as (ba) he is still so weak. 15. This house is said to have cost four thousand dollars, but I should not like to give two thousand for it. 16. He has not been able to come on account of the storm, otherwise he would be here already. ORAL EXERCISE XXXV, 1. Mochten Sie nicht eine Reise nach Europa machen ? 2. Gehen Sie alle Tage nach der Stadt, oder nur alle zwei Tage? 3. Was machen Sie, wenn Sie nicht mehr studieren konnen? 4. Wer soli das Telephon erfunden haben ? 5. Hat man einen Arzt holen lassen ? 6. Haben Sie das Geld be- zahlen miissen ? LESSON XXXVL COMPOUND VERBS. 203. The Prefixes of Compound Verbs may be either Inseparable or Separable. 204. A . Inseparable Prefixes. Remember : The omission of ge~ in the P. Part. The prefixes 6e~, er-, mp~, cut-, ge- her-, $er~, mt§-, ttntlcr- are always inseparable and unaccented, the principal accent falling on the verb. Remarks. — 1. The particle mijj- varies in usage, as shown in the Supplementary Lesson E., § 209, 1, below. 2. Remarks on the force and meaning of these particles are given in Part III. 205. B . Separable Prefixes. Remember: i. The Prefix is separated from the Verb only in Simple Tenses and Principal (including Direct Interrogative and Imperative) Sentences. 240 LESSON XXXVI. [§§ 205- 2. The gc- of the P. Part, and ju of the Infin. come between prefix and verb. 3. The principal accent is on the prefix. 206 . The Separable Prefixes are : 1. The simple prepositional and other adverbs, rtfi— , ait-, auf-, au8-, etc. ; ba(r)- fart- crnpar- Jjer- etc. 2. The compound adverbs, such as: babatt-, ba$U-, etc.; baratt- barauS-, etc. ; entgcgen-, cntjiaei- juriicf-, etc. Notes. — 1. Observe that these compound adverbs are all accented on the second syllable. 2. The use of the compound prefixes with Jjer- and Jjin- is defined in the Supplementary Lesson E., § 210, below. Examples of Verbs with Prefixes. (a) Simple Verbs. grfjcn, go rci^ett, tear fommctt, come fhtbett/ find (b) Inseparable Compounds. bergeljen, pass away jerret^en, tear to pieces Befommen, obtain Ctfinben, invent (c) Separable Compounds. auggefyen, go out jurutfgeljen, go back entgcgcnfommen, come to meet nuSfinben, find out Other Separable Prefixes are : 3. Substantives, forming one idea with the verb, ( a ) as objects of the verb, as : arfjtgeben, pay attention (attend); banffagett, return thanks (thank); ftattfinben, take place (occur); teilnefymen, take part (interest one’s self). Note. — The substantives in these combinations are usually spelt with a small letter, and written in one word with the verb when they pre- cede it. ( b ) with prepositions (== adverbial phrases), as : 807 ] DOUBLE PREFIXES. 24I ft<$ ilt ®djt neljmen (red.), take care (be careful); gu Seibc tljun, injure, hurt; gu Stanbe brirtgen, complete; 311 m fiir feine greunblicfyfeit banf, I thanked him for his kindness. Note. — Observe that in the above sentences the simple objects with- out preposition (acf)t, banf) follow the prepositional phases (auf fein 53c* tragen, fiir feine greunblid)feit), contrary to rule, on account of their character as separable prefixes. 4. Adj ectives as prefixes are usually separable , as : frcilafjert, set free (liberate); fcftfyatten, hold fast (de- tain) ; fic^> loSfagen (refl.), renounce. But many are inseparable, of which fuller particulars are given in the Supplementary Lesson E., § 212. For boff- as prefix see § 208, below. 207 . C. Double Prefixes. 1. Separable -f* Separable prefix; these are compound adverbs, and both separable (see § 206, 2, above). 2. Separable -f- Inseparable ; the former alone is se- parated, as : an'crfennen, acknowledge, id) crfenrte an (but see Suppl. Less. E., § 213). 3. Inseparable-]- Separable; both inseparable, as: 6cauf f tragen, authorize, id) fieauf tragte ifm, I authorized him ; Uer an [fatten, arrange, icfy beran[tattete bieS, I ar- ranged this. 242 LESSON XXXVI. [§§ 207- Note. — These are really not compound but derivative verbs, from compound nouns ($tuf'trag, Sfn'ftalt) ; hence also the verb (as in the former example) is always weak, not strong — beauftragte, beauftvagt. 208. D. Prefixes Separable and Inseparable. The prefixes fenrd)-, Jjtntcr- fiber-, unter-, um~, feoff- are sometimes separable, sometimes inseparable. They are : (a) Separable as long as both prefix and verb retain more or less of their literal or concrete meaning; ( b ) Inseparable when both have lost this meaning, and form together one new idea. A compound of the same verb and prefix may therefore be both sepa- rable and inseparable according to its meaning, as in the following examples : (a) Separable and Literal. (Accent on Prefix, Trans, and Intr.) fcurdj'reifen, pass (travel) through, as : ©r iff gefterrt f;ier imrdj'geretft. He passed through here yesterday. Ijin'tergefyen, go behind fi'berfel 5 en(tr. or intr.), cross ; jump over, ferry across, as: ©r feijtc mit einem ©grunge fiber. He jumped over at a bound. gdfyrmann, bitte, fefjcn ©te mid; fiber. Ferryman, please ferry me across. (b) Inseparable and Figurative. (Accent on Verb, always Trans.) burcbrei'feu, traverse, travel over, as : ©r f >at ba3 gartje Sanb bitrd)* reift', He has traversed (travelled over) the whole country. fyintergc'ljcit, deceive, as: ©r Ijinterging' feinert greunb, He deceived his friend, iiberfeij'cn, translate, as : 3d; uberfe^e cin beutfcfye323ud;, I am translating a Ger- man book. 208] prefixes separable and inseparable. 243 wn'tcrfd/retkn, write under, subscribe, as : ©djretbcu ©te 3^ ren 9?ame« fyier unttr. Subscribe your name here. Uttt'gefien, go round, as : ©ie miiffen um'ge^en. You must go round. boll'gtejjen, pour full, as: (Sr gojj ba§ ©la§ bod, He poured the glass full. unterf^rci'fictt, sign, as : l)abe ben 53rief nod; nt$t unteririjric'ben, I have not yet signed the letter. umge'jjctt, evade, as : SJian umging' ba§ ©efe|. They evaded the law. bodeit'bcn, complete, as : fyabe metne 2(rbeit bod* cn'bel, I have completed my work. Notes. — 1. These separable prepositional prefixes are only rarely used with the verbs given above, except as prepositions proper, governing % case, as : (Sr fling tyinter ben Ofen (urn bas §cut$), He went behind the stove (around the house). 2. The adverb tuietier is separable, except in tBicfcCl’tyo'fcn, repeat (but tnic / &ert)Olen, fetch again). 3. Many compounds with these prefixes are used as inseparable com- pounds only; others as separable only. Vocabulary. to meet with, an treffen give up, auf'gefren cease, stop, auf'fyoren open, auf'mac^en leave out, omit, aus'Iaffen pronounce, auS'fprecfyen assist, aid, bet'ftefyen go away, fort'gefyen come out, I)erau3'fommen come in, fyevein'fommen set (of the sun, etc.), urt'ter* gefyert read to, bor'te[en (+ dat. of leave, berlafjen [pers.) promise, berfprecfjen present', introduce, bor'ftetten (+ acc. and dat.) go past, pass by, bor&ei'gefyeit close, shut, ju'madjen come back, juritcffotmnen 244 LESSON XXXVI. [§208 collide, jufam menftofjert marriage (-ceremony), bie send to, ju'fcfnden (+ dat.) ©rauung coffee, ber Haffee Northern Railway, bie -Kerb's eifenbafm slave, ber ©flabe even if, ii pale, bletd; by heart, attS'toenbig since, feitbem' (adv. and conj.) closed, shut (predicate), ju n . . . aud; Idioms: 1. What is the matter ivith him? 20a8 Ijut er? 2. He feels ill, tft 311 SHute ; or: e§ beinalje fertig ; nacfyfte 2Bod;e fangen toir an, ben jtoeitett ©eil jit iiberfefjen. 7. gtoei 3uge ftnb auf ber SRorbeifenbafjn jufammengeftofjen. 8. fyorte auf ju fingen, tueil id; ^eifer tourbe. 9. SReitt ICater madde ben 93rief auf unb Ia§ benfelben ber gamilie Dor. 10. 2Ber ein= mal liigt, bent glaubt man nid;t, unb toenn er aud; bie 3Bal;rf>eit fpridjt. 11. £mben ©ie bie geitung befommen, bie id; lyljnen ber ©tabt jugefd;idt babe? 12. @ffen ©ie getoofytdid; in ber ©tabt ju SRittag? 13. $ja toofd, id; gelje jeben ©ag urn neun llf;r fort unb fomme erft urn fecbS lU;r juriid. 14. SRandjer (;at angefattgett, toa§ er nid^t bodenbet l;at. 15. Httfere -Kad;bam mitfjen toobl fort fein, benn a lie Sabett finb bei il;nen ju. 16. $ommen ©ie bod; fierein; id; toil! ©ie §errn 33raun borftellen. 17. ^d) banle bielntal3, aber icf> bin if>m fd'on borgefteHt toorben. 18. 33ei § 208] COMPOUND VERBS. 245 fdjonem SBetter gefyen fair urtferm 3Sater erttgegen, toettn er ttacfy ipaufe fommt. 19. ginbet bie framing 33etter£ morgen ober iibermorgen ftatt ? 20. 2BoUen ©ie eine S'affe £fyee? ©eben ©ie mir lie&cr eine Staff e $affee. B. 1. The Reformation took place in the sixteenth century. 2. Have you closed all the doors and windows ? 3. What is the matter with you ? You look so pale. 4. I do not know; since I have come back, 1 do not feel at all well. 5. In the year 1865 all slaves in the United States were set free. 6. Have you opened the letters which have just arrived ? 7. The sun sets earlier now, and the weather begins to grow colder. 8. Mary is learning a poem by heart ; she has already repeated it ten times. 9. Have you found out at what o’clock the meeting takes place ? 10. Do you know the gentleman who has just gone past ? 11. When we were going past the church, the people were just coming out. 12. Pay attention to youi work ; you always leave out words, when you are copying. 13. Why have you closed the window ? I was beginning to catch cold. 14. I have tried to learn this poem, but it is too hard for me, and I have given it up at last. 15. Goethe’s ‘Faust’ has been translated into English by Bayard Taylor 16. The marriage of my brother takes place to-morrow at eleven o’clock. ORAL EXERCISE XXXVI. 1. In welchem Jahre wurden die Sklaven in den Ver- einigten Staaten freigelassen ? 2. Lernst du gern Gedichte auswendig ? 3. Glauben Sie, dass unsere Nachbarn fort sind ? 4. Kennen Sie den Mann, deram Hause vorbeigeht ? 5. Wer hat diesen Brief aufgemacht ? 6. Wie sprechen Sie das Wort G-o-e-t-h-e aus ? 246 SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON E. [§§ 20 £- SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON E. ON CERTAIN PREFIXES. 209. The Inseparable Prefix wig-. The particle tni§- is inseparable, but : (a) With certain verbs it takes the gc- of the P. Part, and $tt of the Infin. after it, as : mi&'ljanbetn, act amiss miB'gefjartbelt nUg'jufjaitbeln With other verbs tttifj- either : (b) Has ge- before it, as : ttiiBljau'betn, ill-treat P. Part. gemife'fjcutbeft — or: (c) Drops ge- altogether, as : tmftfanett, displease P. Part. miftfal'len Note. — Observe that the principal accent: under (a) is on the prefix throughout ; “ ( b ) is on the prefix in the P. Part, only, otherwise on the verb; *' (c) is on the verb throughout. 210. Use of tpie Prefixes Ijer- and gin-. 1. The particles Ijer (* hither ’) and fjt!t ( ‘ hence ’) are prefixed to verbs, both simple and compound, to indicate the direction towards or from the speaker respectively, as : Hcmmcn ©te fjcr, Come here (hither, to me). (Deceit ©ie l)ilt, Go (there) thither (hence, from me). Hence, a person standing up-stairs would say to one below: $ommen ©ie fjevcmf, Come up here (up-stairs); but to one up-stairs : ©eljen ©ie [jinunter, Go down there (down-stairs). 2 . The simple prepositional adverbs aft-, an-, auf-, QU0-, citt- meber-, fiber-, ttntcr-, unt-, Dot- are only used with verbs of motion, when the compound verb denotes motion in a general way, without specified direction, or when it has lost the idea of motion altogether. 211 ] USE OF THE PREFIXES. 247 3 . (a) When, with au#-and hot*-, also with oB-in the sense of ‘down/ the place from which the motion proceeds is implied, but not specified, the direction to or from the speaker is further indic- ated by prefixing (jet- and (jin- respectively. (6) When, with the remaining prefixes (ait-, llllf-, etc.), the place to which the motion is directed is implied, but not specified, (jet- or Bttt- is similarly prefixed. 4 . The following examples will serve to show more clearly the differ- ence between verbs with the simple prefixes and those with f)Ct- or ^itt— I (a) With Simple Prefix : auSgeljen, go out (for a walk, on business, etc.) fcOtsieljen, prefer a&fteigen, dismount anfommen, arrive ii&ergeljett, desert [perish ttlttcrgeljen, set (of the sun); sink; 5 . When the place from or to which respectively is specified, these words are used as prepositions proper , governing a substantive, but may be re- peated as adverbial prefixes with (jet or (jin, as : (Sr ging nu$ bent dimmer (BtnattS). (Sr $og ben 23rief au3 ber Safdje (IjcrauS). Notes. — 1 . 25b-, meaning ‘off, away/ does not require these prefixes, as: abrefien, abgeljen, to depart, go off; — but: binabgefyeit, to go down. 2. (?in- is replaced, when the place to which is specified, by the preposition in with the accusative, as : ©r ritt in bie Stabt binein. (£) With Bet- or (jin-: (jinaitSgeljen, go out (from the house) (jerborsicljen, draw forth (jerabfieigen, descend Beranfommen, come up to, ap- proach Bintibergeljen, go over, across Btnnntergeljen,godown (stairs, etc.) 3. Sometimes other prepositions are used to indicate the place from or to which, in which case the compound prefix is used, as : tnerbe nad) Chtropa btniibergefyeit, I shall go over to Europe. (Sr ift 00m 2 )ad>e berabgefaUen, He has fallen down from the roof. Other Prefixes. 211. Verbs derived from compound substantives are treated as simple Verbs, as : £)a3 the breakfast, frul/ftucfen, to breakfast ; id) friiB'* ftiicfte, gefruB'ftucft 248 SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON E. [§§2IX 2)ie ^anb'fjabe, the handle, Ijanb'fyabeit, to handle; fjanfc^abte, geljattb'lja&t. 2)er SRat'jcfjIag, the counsel, rat'fdjtagen, to take counsel ; rat 7 * fcf)Iagte, gerat'fdjfagt. Note. — Observe that all such verbs are weak, as in the case of the last two of the above verbs, which are not compounds of Ijaben or fd)lagen respectively. 212 . Adjective Prefixes are frequently inseparable, but retain the principal accent and require ge- before them in the P. Part., as : toeift'fagen, to prophesy, toetfHagte, gctoeifjfagt; recfjt'fertigen, to justify, redji'ferttgte, geredjt'fertigt; Ueb'fofen, to caress, licb'* fofte, gelieb'foft ; also the substantive compound : lufi'roanbeln, to walk for pleasure, gefuft'ttxmbelt. 213 . Some verbs with Separable -f- Inseparable Prefix are used only in constructions which do not require the separation of the former particle from the verb ; thus we may say : (£f)riftU0 ift auievftanben, Christ is risen from the dead, — or: 5H0 (Ef)riftu0 auferftctnb, — but instead of : (Sr erftcmb auf, — we say: (Sr ftanb bon hen $oten auf. Similarly with auSerfefert, borentfjalten, and a few others. EXERCISE E. 1. Have you answered all the letters ? I have answered all except this one. 2. I have asked my sister, if (whether) she is ready, but she has not answered. 3. She has gone up-stairs ; perhaps she has not heard. 4. Let her come down, for I cannot wait for her any longer. 5. I should like to speak to your father ; is he at home ? 6. Yes, he is up-stairs in his study ; please go up. 7. Some one is shouting in the street ; go out and see what is the matter. 8. Are you going out to-day ? I am going out, as soon as I have breakfasted. 9. George, go out of the room ; you have been behaving badly. 10. Many people say that Mr. B. has acted amiss in this affair, but he has justified himself. 11. We started so early yes- terday morning that we had no time to breakfast. 12. Several people were standing on (auf) the street before a burning house, and were looking up. 13. A poor woman with her child was on the point of jumping down. 14. At last a fireman went up and saved both [of them]. 15. The boy has abused his dog, and therefore he was punished by his father. 16. The dog was howling in the street, but some one went out and brought him in. REFLEXIVE VERBS. 249 ai5l LESSON XXXVII. REFLEXIVE AND IMPERSONAL VERBS. Reflexive Verbs. 214. 1. All Reflexive Verbs are conjugated with Jjafictt. For an example of their conjugation see § 41, and observe the use of fitfj as special reflexive of the third person for all genders and both numbers. 2. The reflexive pronoun is introduced as near to the beginning of the sentence as possible, sometimes even before the subject, when the latter follows the verb and is not a pronoun, and especially if the subject has adjuncts, as : ©eftern fjat fid) mein lieber, alter SSater befdjabigt, My dear old father injured himself yesterday. 215. 1. Any transitive verb may be used reflexively, when the action of the verb is on the subject ; but Reflexive Verbs proper are : (a) Those which are used only reflexively, especially such as indicate a state of mind or feeling , as : ficfy beffei^en (gen.),) apply n befleijjigen, j one’s self „ begniigm (mil), be con- tented „ befimten (gen.), recollect „ erbarmen (gen.), take pity, have mercy „ erfdlien, catch cold fid; gramen (gen., or liber + acc.), grieve u fcfydmen (gen., or liber 4- acc.), be ashamed „ fefynen (nacf)), long (for), yearn „ tounbern (iiber + acc.), be astonished (J?) Those which, though used also as transitive verbs, have a special meanmg as reflexives, as : frcuen (impers.), rejoice (tr.), freuen (gen., or liber + acc.), make glad rejoice (intr.), be glad IT 250 LESSON XXXVII. [§§ 21 5 ~~ fiirdjtcn, fear fir^ fiirdjtcn (bor + dat.), be Ijiitcn, protect {Men, place betlaffen, leave afraid „ Ijitten (bor + dat.), beware „ ftellen, pretend „ berlaffen (auf + acc.), jutragen, carry (to) rely (upon) „ jutragen (impers.) hap- pen, occur 2. Transitive verbs are often used in English with the direct (personal) object unexpressed, e. g., ‘change, turn, open, spread/ etc. ; such verbs have the object expressed in German as the reflexive pronoun, e. g. : The weather has changed, 2)a§ -Setter fyat fidj geanbert. The wind is turning to the east, £)er SSirtb brefyt ftdj rxai) Often. The door opened, ®ie S^iir offnete fid). The disease was spreading over the whole town, ®ie $ranff>eit berbreitete fid) iiber bie ganje ©tabt. 3. For the use of Reflexive Verbs for the Passive Voice, see § 1 14, (< b ). 4. From what has been said above, it will be evident that Reflexive Verbs are used to a much greater extent in German than in English, which indeed has no Reflexive Verbs in the strict sense defined above. 216 . Government of Reflexive Verbs. 1. All true reflexives take the reflexive {personal) object in the accusative ; the remote object (the thing) is in the genitive, or is governed by a preposition, as shown in the examples given in § 215, 1, above, thus : 217] MPERSONAL VERBS. 25 T 3$ fd^dme tntd) meine3 33etragen§, I am ashamed of my behaviour. Grirmerft bu bid) bcffcnni^t? Do you not remember it? SBtr fefyrtten un3 nadj unferer Gutter, We longed for our mother. 3$ erbarmte midj feiner, I had pity upon him. 2 . Some spurious reflexives have the reflexive (persona/) object in the dative, and the thing in the accusative, as : 3$ fann nttr ba3 benfen, I can imagine that. 3d) bilbete tlttr bte3 nur etn, I only imagined this. Note. — ©id) fdjmeidjeht takes the dative of the person with a clause as direct object, thus: 3d) fd)metd)efle nttr, baft idj eg tfjun fonnte, I flattered myself, that I could do it. 217 . Impersonal Verbs. Impersonal Verbs Proper are those used only in the third person sing., with the neuter pronoun e3 as subject. 1 . Those expressing Natural phenomena, as : e3 fcfyneit, it snows e3 blitff, it lightens e3 regnet, it rains e3 bonnert, it thunders, etc. also with the verbs feirt or toerben, as : @3 ift (totrb) fait, Inarm, bunfel, etc., It is (grows) cold, warm, dark, etc. (S3 ift (fcfylcigt) fiirtf. It is (strikes) five. 2. Those expressing bodily or mental affections (a) with accicsative of person. 63 friert mid), I am (feel) cold. 63 bevlangt micf) (nad;), I am (feel) desirous. 63 freut mtcfy, I am glad (it rejoices me). 63 ftmrtbert mi$, I wonder (it makes me wonder). 2 52 LESSON XXXVII. [§§ 2i 7- ©§ jammert mtd£) (gen.), I pity (it moves me to pity). ©3 reut mid) (gen.), I repent (it rues me), etc. ( b ) with Dative of person. ©3 biinft (beucfyt) tnir, Methinks. ©§ gelirtgt trttr, I succeed, etc. (e) with fetn or toerben ( Dative of person), as : ©§ ift (totrb) nut iibel, tool) l (ju SJiute), I feel ill, well (it is ill, well to or with me in spirit). ©3 ift lltir lieb, leib, I am glad, sorry (it is dear, sad to me). Note. — In this class of verbs the subject is omitted when the per- sonal object precedes the verb, as: mid) ttmttbcrt, etc. 3. Verbs used impersonally with a special sense, as : 2 Bie mit ^fynen? How fares it with you? ©3 geljf mir gut, I am well. 3 Bd§ giebt^ ? What is the matter? 23 a§ fcljft Sfynen? What ails you? Also feirt and toerbert, as under 1 and 2, (c), above. 4. For the impersonal use of the passive voice, see §113. Note. — Of the above classes, those alone are strictly impersonal which admit only of e3 as subject; others, which are used with other sub- jects, but only in the third person (sometimes plur. as well as sing.) are properly called unipersonal. 218 . Conjugation of Impersonal Verbs. 1. Impersonal Verbs form their various tenses, moods, etc., in precisely the same way as other verbs, but are used only in the third person singular. 2. Some are weak, others strong, as : frieren, to freeze, Impf. e 3 fror, gefrorctt; fcfyrteien, to snow, Impf. e 3 f cfyrteite, P. Part, gefd^neit. 2ig] GOVERNMENT OF IMPERSONAL VERBS. 253 3. Most of them are conjugated with fyabett, as : @3 {jut gefdjneit, gefroren, etc.; but some take fern, e. g., gelirtgen, glucfen, to succeed ; gefcfyefyen, to happen (compare § 53), as : @3 ift gefcfyefyen, It has happened. 219 . Government of Impersonal Verbs. 1. Impersonal Verbs expressing bodily or mental affections, etc., take the immediate (personal) object (== Engl, subj.) in the Dative or Accusative (see § 217, 2, 3, above). 2. Those under § 217, 2, ( a ), denoting a mental affection may be used ( a ) impersonally, with the thing ( cause of emotion) in the genitive, as : @3 jammert mid) fritter, I pity him (it moves me to pity of him). @3 reuet mid) meincr ©iinbert, I repent (it makes me repent) of my sins. ( b ) personally, with the thing (cause of emotion) as subject, as: (Sr jammert mid}, I pity him (he moves me to pity) . Sftetne ©itnben reuctt (pi.) mid), I repent of my sins (my sins move me to repentance). Remark. — Observe that the English subject is object in German, the verb remaining always in the third person, as: (S3 freut mid), I am glad. ic£en§, tuelcber // 5TJifoIa§ SJIidlebty" fyeifst, There is a novel (nom.) by Dickens, called 6 Nicholas Nickleby.’ 2. The verb (gebert) is always in the singular in German, being a true impersonal ; and e§ is never omitted, as : SDiefeS %ai)x giebt e§, etc. 2. There is, etc., must be rendered into German by eS ifl, t$ filth (e§ toctr, etc.), when definite existence is expressed, or in particular assertions, as : ei ffiogel auf biefem 33aume, There are two birds on this tree. Remarks. — i. The English subject is also subject (nomi- native) in German, as : ift ein Stotmtn (nom.) t>on ©icfenS auf bem 3;if, There is a novel (nom.) by Dickens on the table. 2. The verb (feirt) agrees in number with the real subject, and e£ is omitted, unless it begins the sentence, as : THERE IS, THERE ARE. 255 §220] ©in SSogel ifi in biefem Sauer, There is a bird, etc. Note. — This shows that c$ is the indefinite e§, replacing the real sub- ject (see § 39, 1), and not the impersonal e$. Vocabulary. to dress (trans.), an'fleiben dress (intr.), fid) an!Ieiben resolve, decide, ftcfy entfd) lichen explain, erflaren be mistaken, fid) irren turn around (intr.), fid^ urn's breljen get married, marry (intr.), fid^ herljei'raten marry (trans.), fyei'raten hurt (wound), fcerlet$en lightning, ber 33Ii% thirst, ber ®urft lemonade, bie Cimonabe caterpillar, bie 3taupe sleighing, bie ©dfdittenbafyn way, mode, bie SBeife successful(ly), gliicflid; now-a-days, fyeut^utage long (adv.), Idngft past, fcorbei in all ages, ju alien geiien Idioms: 1 . I feel well, SDfcfr ifi tttofd 511 SfRute. 2. He has married the daughter of the doctor, (Sr fcat ftcfc tuft ber Zod)tev feed ^oftord t> erf) et rate t. 3. In this way, 5luf t*fcfe 2Beffe (acc.). 4. I was hungry (thirsty), 3 d) fcatte hunger ($urfl). EXERCISE XXXVII. A. 1. @§ bonnert, urtb icb furefite, c§ toirb bafb regnen. 2. tlm tote toiet 11 (jr toirb bci ifjfmen ju fDiittag gegeffen? 3. bat todfirenb ber 3RadE;t gefroren unb fieute toerben toir ©cfilittfdbub laufett fbnnen. 4. 2Be§f>afb bonnert e§, toenn e§ bli|t? S)a4 lafjt fid? niefit leiefit erflaren. 5. Jjd? fiabe meinen beften §unb berloren ; fo ein §unb finbet fid; nid;t leiebt ioieber. 6. freut un§ fefr, bafj §einritf; fein (Sjamen glitdlicf; beftanben l;at. 7. ^d; fiird^te, e§ toirb biefe§ Safir nur toenige $jpfel geben ; bie Staupen fyaben faft alte flatter bon ben 33aunten gefreffen. 8. ©uten fDiorgen, §err Skaun; giebt’S finite ettoa§ fj?eue§? 9. SEUein altefter SSritber fiat fid; berbeivatet. 10. 5DJit toem fiat er ficfi ber= beiratet ? 11. 9Jlit ber Siodjter bes fDoftor S3. ; erinnem ©ie [id? 256 LESSON XXXVII. nicfytifyrer? 12. ©cbmeicbeln ©te ftcb, baft e§ 3b nen auf bxefe SBetfe gelirtgen toirb? ©te ^aben nic^t ©elb genug. 13. ^d; babe biel me^r ©elb ate id; braucbe ; icb tDiirbe micb mit ber ipalfte begnugt babert. 14. Gte toiirbe mid; gar nid^t ftmnbern, menu fair nod; bcute 9tegen befamen. 15. 2Ite icb an bem §aufe boruber* ging, dffnete ficb bie ©b^ unb ein alter §err Jam ^erau§. 16. ©id) friert; bu foUteft beinen tlberjieljer anjieben. 17. Gte faaren nocb biele Seute auf ber ©trafte, ate icb nad; §aufe lam. 18. @3 fairb bid; balb beine§ 93etragen3 reuen, faenn id; micb nid&t irre ; bu foUteft bid; fcbamen. 19. @3 giebt b^atjutage ©I;oren, unb leiber bat e§ ju alien 3eiten©b oren gegeben. 20. ©ie fonnen fidb benfen, baft e3 midb faunberte, ate icb midb umbrebte unb meinen Icingft berlornen $reunb bor mir fab. B . 1. Are you afraid when it lightens? 2. Yes, I am always afraid of the lightning. 3. What is the matter with you? You do not look at all well. 4. I do not know what ails me ; I do not feel well, perhaps I have caught cold. 5. It has been snowing the whole night, and to-day we have tine sleighing. 6. Have you hurt yourself ? Yes, I have cut my finger. 7. There are two gentlemen at the door ; do you know them ? 8. I know one of them, but I cannot remember his name. 9. I must dress immediately, or else I shall not be ready at seven o’clock. 10. If you do not dress more warmly, you will catch cold. 11. I am thirsty; please give me a glass of lemonade. 12. I am glad that the thunder-storm is past; the lightning is dangerous. 13. Do you remember whether he was here on the 15th or on the 16th of January ? 14. Have you decided to leave (the) town, and to pass the summer in the country? 15. I hear somebody shouting in the street ; what is the matter ? ORAL EXERCISE XXXVII. 1. Sollte man sich vor dem Donner fiirchten ? 2. Wie lange wohnen Sie schon in dieser Strasze? 3. Stehen Sie 223 ] PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE. 257 gewohnlich friih des Morgens auf ? 4 . Weshalb hast du die Fenster zugemacht ? 5 . Wie gefallt es Ihnen in diesein Hause ? 6. Wird es dieses Jahr viele Pflaumen geben? LESSON XXXVIII. PREPOSITIONS. 221. The Prepositions with the Dative only have been given in §§46, 51 ; those with the Accusative only in §§ 34? 5 °; those with Dative or Accusative in § 65. Prepositions with the Genitive. 222. The Prepositions governing the Genitive are chiefly nouns used adverbially. The following lines contain the principal ones, and will aid the memory : Itntocit, mittclft, fraff imb toiiljrenb, fiaut, tonnage, ungeacfjiet, DkrljaUi unb 3mtcr^ttI6 unb aufjcrfjalti, $ie§feit, fcnfcit, TjaHicn, tuegen, ©tatt, aucf) Iiing§, jufolge, tra£ ©tefyen mit bent ©cnitit) ; &od) ift f^ter nicfyt $u bergeffert, bet btefen lenten brei 2lucfy ber ricfyit g jet. 223 . The meanings of these prepositions are as follows : 1. WKett), ) forthe sake of> on account of 2. tuegen, ) Remarks. — 1. §alb(en), fyalber, always follows the case; toegen may follow or precede a noun, but always follows a personal pronoun. 258 LESSON XXXVIII. [§ 223 2. fwlt) is used only in behalf) and mfyalh ; !jalf>cn after the personal pronouns or substantives with a determinative or attributive word ; Ijalbcr after a substantive used alone, as : $rieben§ fyalben. For the sake of peace. 33eifyiel3 falter, For the sake of example. 3. The personal pronouns have a special form ending in -i before fyctl&en and toegen, thus : meinetljal&en, for my sake unf ertoegen, on our account, etc. 3. an^cr^affi, (on the) outside 5. flBerfjalB, above of 6. unterljttfl), below 4. tnuerljaHi, (on the) inside of Examples : Urtfer ©arten iff auficrljafli (tttttcr^alB) ber ©tabt. Our garden is outside (inside) of the town. SfJJontreal liegt untcr^alfi be£ DniariosSeeS, Montreal lies below Lake Ontario. Remark. — in expressions of time may be fol- lowed by the dative of a substantive without article, as : ^nnerfyalb Jtoei Sagett, Within two days. 7. fraff, by virtue of 1 1. Jttf olgc, in consequence of Remark. — ^ufolge governs the genitive when it precedes its case, but the dative when it follows, as : @r tl )at bte§ jufotge tneirte£ 23 efef)I§, or metnem Sefefyle jufolge, He did this in consequence of my order. 12. bieSfcit, on this side 13. jcttfeii, on that (the other) 8. laut, in accordance with side § 223 ] PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE. 259 Remark. — and jenfeit are prepositions (governing a noun); bte§feit§ and jenfeit# adverbs (without a case), as : tooljne bte^ett, er jenfeit be§ gluffeS, I live on this, he on that (the other) side of the river, — but : SBtr toofyrten beibe nafye amgluffe; id£) bie3feit§, er jen* feit§. We both live near the river ; I on this, he on the other side. 14. ftatt, anflatf, instead of Remark. — SInftatt is sometimes divided, thus : Stnftttft meine§ 33ruber§, Instead of my brother, — or: 9ln meine§ 33ruber§ Statt, (In my brother’s stead). 15. ungeae reitet tvo| einent Marine, This boy rides Remarks. — i. 2artg§ also governs the dative , and always precedes its case, as : SangS be§ Ufer§, or bent lifer, Along the shore. 2. ©ntlang governs the genitive when it precedes its case; but it more commonly follows its case, and governs the accu- sative, as : @r girtg bm entlang, He went along the river. To these may be added : 20. angefid)t§, in presence of 22. utn . . . ttutfcn, for the sake 21. itvnitten, in the midst of of as well as a man. 17. toiiljrcnb, during 18. ISng§, 19. entlang, 26 o LESSON XXXVIII. l§§ 223 * Remarks. — 1 . Um . . . ftu Hen takes the case between um and toiflert, as : Um mcme0 9Sater§ Gillen, For my father's sake. 2 . The personal pronouns have the same forms with um . . • fthlfen as with fyalben and toegen, thus : um feittef mitten, for his sake um f° r y° ur sake, etc. 23. uttfern, \ notfarfrom 24. untoctt, ) 224. General Remarks on Prepositions. 1 . An Adverb of direction is frequently placed after an accusative, like a preposition after its case, as : 2)ett 33erg Ijiltauf, Up the mountain. 2 . (< a ) Some prepositions may govern a substantive clause with btt§, as : @f)re 93ater unb Gutter, auf baf* e§ btr mofyl gef>e. Honour father and mother, that it may go well with thee. Notes. — 1 . Such are auf, auger (also used with tocntt), bi§, oljne, (an)ftatt, ungeadjtet, tuafjvenb. 2 . SBiS, ungeadjtet, ttmfyrenb are also used as conjunctions without bag. ( b ) Um, oljne, and (an)ftatt may govern an infinitive with ju, as : @r Jam geftern, um bid) ju Befudjcn, He came yesterday (in order) to visit you. 3$ faun nte baran benfen, oljne ju ladjen, I can never think of that without laughing. ©tefer 9Jlamt follte arbetfert, anftatt ju bctfcln. This man ought to work, instead of begging. Remark. — But if the subject of the infinitive clause is different from that of the sentence on which it depends, baft must be used, as : GENERAL REMARKS ON PREPOSITIONS. 26l Q24] 3 d; fonnte ntd;t borbeigefyen, ofjne ba§ er tntd> falj (not oljne micf) ju fe^en), I could not pass by without his seeing me. 3. Prepositions may govern adverbs, as: nacfy 0 ben, up- ward ; nacfy fyinten, to the rear ; cut f tmmer, forever ; Don fern, from afar ; and the compounds with ba(r)- and ft)o(r)- (see § 38, Rem. s ; 83, 3 ; 96, 7). 4. A substantive governed by a preposition may be followed by an adverb, for nearer definition, as : SJltuf) etner 9 ?tcf)tung Ijiit, In one direction. 8S(JU alien ©etten Ijcr, From all sides. (Sr ritt Winter bem geinbe Ijer, He rode in pursuit of the foe. Utn bag £>aug fjentm, Round (about) the house. 83on nun an, From henceforth. 83an Sugenb auf, From youth up. Vocabulary. to observe, remark, bemerlen elect, erfr)dt;len (+ ju) permit, allow, erlauben inquire (about), fid^ erlunbtgen (+ nad;) go about, around, fjerum'gefyen ring (a small bell), flingeln go for a walk, fpajteren gefyen divide, teilen let (of houses, etc.), Dermteten go away, toeggefyen the opposite, bag ©e'gentetl custom, habit, bte ©etoobnfyeit microscope, bag SKifroffop' (the) little Red (Riding) Hood, bag Stotfabb^en umbrella, ber 9tegenfcf)irm drop, ber S^robfen drunkard, ber Srunfenbolb will, testament, bag Seftamentf stairs, staircase, bte ^reppe deceased, ber (bte) 93erftorbene warning, bte SSarnung living, leben'oig loose, slack, log in w time, punctually, re$f* geitig except that, aufter baft 26 2 LESSON XXXVIII. [§ 224 Idioms : 1. For all I care, 2 . This house is for sale, 2 >iefe 3 gauS iff 3« hcrlflufett (lit., to bo sold). 8. Ho was elected mayor, ©r tourbe 311m ©iircermeiftev erUiafjU (lit., to or for a, etc., — 3um = 3U cittern). 4 . I have been here for a week, 6itt felt ttdjt 2 fl 0 Ctt I)ier. 6. To laugh (at), make sport (of), lujtifj ntodjcn (ti&cr + acc.). 6. What is the matter? ift Io 3 ? 7 . There is a ring (at the door, etc.), (£3 tttngeU. EXERCISE XXXVIII. A. 1 . ©ag §aug, toelcfieg ju berfaufen ift, ftefyt aufferfyalb ber ©tabt, nicbt toeit bom See. 2. SEBenn eg nur iraterfialb ber ©tabt ftiinbe, fo toiirbe id) gem taufenb Staler mefir bafiir geben. 3. ©efallt eg 8$nen beffer bie§feit beg fluffed ju ioofmen, ober jenfeitg? 4. Jrotj beg ©turmeg fam bag ©cfiiff reefitjeitig in -Jietb 3)orf an. 5. ©iefer Strunfenbolb fiat um feiner gamilie mitten bag Sminfen aufgegeben. 6. @r fiircfitete, baft feine ©ofme bie fcfilecfite ©emofm* f?eit lernen molten. 7. ©er fiungrige 2Bolf ging mefirmalg um bag $aug unb fuefite fRotfappdjen. 8. SSermittelft feineg groften ©influff eg bei ben Steicfien fiat fid; §err 31. jum SMirgermeifter ermdfden laffen. 9. ©eit tcann mofmeit ©ie in biefer ©trafte? ©eit brei ^afren. 10. Um meinetmiden mitt er nidit mit mir gefyen ; bietteiefit miirbe er um tjfiretmitten ge£?en. 11. §ft ©eorg oben? !ya, er iftfoeben bie ©reftfte ftinaufgegangen. 12. Saffen ©ie un§ Ueber nad) oben gefien ; eg mirb un§ beffer gefatten oben ju fiften alg unten. 13. @g fiat bor einigen SRinuten geltingctt; mer tear ba? 14. @g toar jemanb, ber fiefi erlunbigen mottte, ob biefeg §aug gu bermieten fei. 15. Sent ©eftamente gufolge murbe bag (Sigentum unter bie beiben ©ofme beg SSerftorbenen geteilt. 16. SJteinetmegen mag er gefien, fobatb eg ifim gefaHt. 17. ?tufter baft ©eorg ein menig grower ift, bemerft man gar feinen Unterfcfiieb jmifcfien ben beiben Sritbern. 18. §err ©. ift einer meiner beften g-reuube ; er gefit faft nie am §aufe boruber ofme fiereinjufommen. 19. Untoeit bet ©tabt 33. ftefit bag §a«g, morin id) geboren bin. §* 24 ] PREPOSITIONS. 263 B . 1. I shall take my stick instead of my umbrella; I am not afraid of the rain. 2. Have you been taking a walk along the shore? Yes, in spite of the bad road. 3. Not far from the school I let my new knife fall into the snow, and could not find it again. 4. Do you know what was the matter ? I heard a great noise down-stairs. 5. I do not know (it), bat I shall inquire. 6. Were you allowed (perf.) to stay? No, we had (perf.) on the contrary to go away again immedi- ately. 7. We have been here since yesterday, and we must wait three days more for the ship. 8. One part of the city lies on this side, the other on that side of a broad river. 9. I do not think much of this gentleman ; he would do anything for money. 10. By means of a microscope living animals can be seen in a drop of water. 11. In^con sequence of this bad news we must be back inside of a week. 12. Should we make sport of other people? 13. No, that is a bad habit. 14. Yonder is the river; on this side stands my house, on that side his. 15. Notwithstanding the warning of his father the youth often went on the water in bad weather. 16. In- stead of taking the large boat he always took the small one. ORAL EXERCISE XXXVIII. 1. Weshalb hat der Trunkenbold das Trinken aufgegeben? 2. Auf welche Weise hat sich Herr B. zum Biirgermeister erwahlen lassen ? 3. Haben Sie klingeln horen ? Wer war da? 4. Wo sind Sie geboren, und in welchem Jahre? 5. Fiirchten Sie, es konnte regnen ? 6. Kannst du mir sagen* was auf der Strasze los war i 264 LESSON XXXIX. [§§ 225- LESSON XXXIX, PREPOSITIONS (continued) s-IDIOMS. 225. Prepositions vary more, perhaps, as to idiomatic usage in different languages than any other part of speech. Their proper use must be acquired chiefly by practice and memory, but below are given the German equivalents, in various idioms, of the most commonly occurring English Prepositions, more particularly in cases where the usage of the two lan- guages differs. 220. About. ( a ) In the sense of ‘around’ = um, as : ©ie fcerfammelten fief) um ifyn. They assembled about him. (b) Of time = UUgcfiiljr Utn (um alone = ‘at’; see § 227, (J?) 1, below), as : Uttgefafjr um getyn Ufyr, About ten o’clock. Itngcfiiljr um 2 Beif)nacf)ten, About Christmas. ( c ) In the sense of ‘nearly’ (of number) == etUHt, UUgCs fitljr (adverbs), as : @r Bat etma (uttgcfiiljr) taufertb Staler Iibrig, He has about a thousand dollars left. ( d ) In the sense of ‘with,’ ‘about’ (the person) = Bet, as: 3d) Babe tein ©elb Bet mir, I have no money with me, about me. 227. At. (a) Of locality : 1. = in, when the action, etc., is within a building, etc., as : $n ber ©d)ule, in ber $trd)e, im tin £ongert. At school, at church, at the theatre, at the concert. 228] PREPOSITIONS. 26 i > 2. = att, when the action, etc., is adjacent to the object of the preposition, as : 8lm $enfter, Art ber S^iir, am £ifd?e, At the window, at the door, at the table (but bet 2tfd)e, at table). 3. = auf, when the action is on the surface , or on an elevation, as : Sluf bem SKarfte, auf bent Salle, auf ber sjjoft, auf ber Uniberfitdt, auf bem ©cfylojfe, At market, at the ball, at the post-office, at the university, at the castle. 4. = gu or in with proper names of towns (also with §au3, ‘home ’), etc., as : $U (tit) $ari3, At Paris. $U §aufe, At home. (b) Of time: 1. = tun (most usually), as: lint fyalb bier Ufyr, At half past 3 o’clock. Um Dftern, At Easter. 2. = ju, with and ©tunbe, as : Sur redf)ten $t\t, At the right time. $u btefer ©tunbe, At this hour. Note. — Unt with the acc. is also admissible with these words. 3. = fid, as : Set £age§anbru$, At day-break. ( c ) Of price — ju, as : Stefer gucfer totrb jn gtt>ei SEfmlern b a§ $funb berfauft, This sugar is sold at two dollars a pound. 228. By. ( a ) Expressing the personal agent after the passive voice = tum, as: £)a§ $inb totrb ban fetnen @Itern geliebt, The child is loved by its parents. 18 266 LESSON XXXIX. [§§ 228- ( b ) Of a part of the body, etc. = Bet, as : 6r nafjm ba§ $tnb Bet ber §anb, He took the child by the hand. ( c ) Unclassified : ©Ct 2 id)t, By candlelight. ©ei 9 tad)t, By night. SBit ©etoalt, By force. SJlif ber Eufenbafm, By the railway, gtt Sanb, SOB after. By land, by water. 229. For. Rendered usually by fur, but : (a) Of purpose = ju ( never fur), as : $)ie 3 iff fcf)one§ SBetter jam (S^pagierenge^en, This is fine weather for taking a walk. @r reift jtuu ©ergniigen, He travels for pleasure. ( b ) Of time : 1. Past = feit, as : @cit einem donate. For a month (past). 2. Future — auf -f" acc,, as : £5$ toerbe auf einige %aa>t berretfen, I shall go away for a few days. 3. Duration = acc. without preposition, as : 6r Wax emeu garden -Jftonat f>ter. He was here for a whole month. ( c ) Of cause au3, as : @r tfyat au$ gurcfji, He did it for fear. w Unclassified : @rfte. For the present. gum erften (jtoeiien, etc.) 3 WaI, For the first (second, etc.) time. 23 i] PREPOSITIONS. 267 gum ©eburtStage, JU ©eifynacfjten, For (as) a birth- day-present, for a Christmas-present. 230. In. Rendered usually by in, but : (a) = auf, as : In the street, 9lu( ber ©tra£e. In the country, §tuf bem Sanbe. In this manner, biefe SBeife (acc.). In German, 9luf ®eutfcfy. ip) = Ulltcr, as : Untcr (Slif abetfyS 9legierung, In Elizabeth's reign. (0 = 3«, as : 2Bagen, In a carriage. 231. Of. (a) By the genitive without preposition, to express the relation of the possessive case, as : 2)er SBiffe unferS SSaterg, The will of our father (i. e., our father’s will). ( p ) = b on: 1 . After verbs, etc., as: fyrecfje boil ifym, I speak of him. 2 . Between titles and names of places , as : ®ie ^ortigin toon ©nglanb, The Queen of England. 3 . After numerals and other partitives, as : ©irter turn metnen $reunben, One of my friends. £>er altefte bon meinen 33rubern, The eldest of my brothers. 4 . Replacing a genitive plural without article, as : ©r iff ber SSaier bon bier $naben, He is the father of four boys. 268 LESSON XXXIX. [§§ 231- 5 . To avoid a succession of several genitives, as : SDte §rau fcom Setter metne3 Dn!el3, The wife of my uncle’s cousin. ( c ) Of cause, when the cause is a disease = ail, as : ©r ftarb an ber ©fyolera, He died of the cholera. ( d ) Of place, with names of battles : 1 . = Bet, if named after a town , village , etc., as : 3)ie 0cf)la$t Bet Sei^gig, The battle of Leipzig. 2 . = an, if named after a river, as : ®te 0cf)lac an ber SUma, The battle of the Alma. (e) Unclassified : 5ERartgeI an ©elb, Want of money. Siebe jum ©elbe, Love of money. 2Sa§ foil an£ mtr toerben ? What is to become of me ? 232. On. Rendered usually by auf, but : (a) Of time or date = Acc. without preposition, or = an Dat., as : $en (or ant) jtoolften ^anttar, On the twelfth of January. (b) Of modes of progression = jn, as : $n ^ferbe, On horseback. 3u ftufte, On foot. (e) Of situation, on a river, sea, etc. : 1 . When it means on the water = anf, as : Stele ©cfjtffe fafyren anf bem §ubfon, Many ships ply on the Hudson ; — but : ?. When it means on the shore = an, as : Hamilton liegt ant Ontarto^See, Hamilton lies on Lake Ontario. 233 ] PREPOSITIONS. 269 ( d ) Unclassified: SJiit gleife, On purpose. 83ci biefer ©elegenfyett, On this occasion. Itnier (or nti t) biefer 33ebingung, On this condition. 3tn Segrtffe, On the point of. 233. To. (a) When replacing the indirect object = Dative without preposition, as : $$ l)abe meiner ©cf)toefter etn 33 u$ gegeben, I have given a book to my sister (i. e., my sister a book). (3) Of motion or direction to persons = ju, as : toil! ju metnem 23ater gefyen, I will go to my father. ( c ) Of motion to places : 1 . With proper names of countries, towns, etc. = natfj, as : 3$ gefye nadj $art$, nad) ®eutfcf)lanb, I am going to Paris, to Germany. 2 . With common nouns (i) = itt, an, or auf respectively, with the Accusative , in various idioms, where these prepositions with the Dative — ‘at’ (see § 227 , (a), above), as : 3n bie ©cfyule, $ir$e, in§ Sweater, $onjert u. f. to. gefyen. To go to school, church, the theatre, concert, etc. 9ltt$ genfter, an bie Sfyitr gefyen, To go to the window, door. 5luf ben Sail, auf bie llniberfitat gefyen. To go to market, to the ball, post-office, university. (ii) Frequently = ju, which may usually replace the prepositions in the above idioms also, as : Gr tft jur Stabt, jur $trcf)e u. f. to. gegangen. He has gone to town, church, etc. 270 LESSON XXXIX. [§234 234. With. Observe the following Idioms : ©on ganjem §erjen, With all my heart. Gr jtttert Imr SUiltc, He trembles with cold (cause). 5Da§ ift Bet un§ nicBt ©itte. That is not the custom with (= among) us. $lt biefer Stbfic^t, With this intention. Remark. — For the proper use of prepositions after partic- ular adjectives and verbs, see Less. XLIX. Vocabulary. to intend, gebenfeti be„enough, suffice, E)inreicE?en bring with (one), mit'bringen sign, untergeicty'nen bring back, guriidbringen excursion, pleasure-trip, ber 2fu§flug * harvesting, bfl-3 Grnten favour, ber ©efaUen Louis, Lewis, Subtoig measles, bie 2Jlafern (f. pi.) account, bill, bie Stedjnung dressing-gown, berScfdafrtxf * evil, ba§ libel relative, ber 33ertoanbte treaty, ber SSertrag* root, bie SBurjel this evening, Ijeute 2(6 enb thorough(-ly), griinblicfj fortunately, gliicfli^ertoeife possible, titoglicB absent (on a journey), berreift Idioms : 1. To be accustomed, $te ©etoofjn&eit Ijabett (+ infin. with ju). 2. In the middle of summer, 3Ritttn im Sommer. 3. To take a pleasure-trip (excursion), (Etnett QluSfiug madjctt. 4. It looks like rain, fietjt ttad) $egcn atif*. 5. Two or three, #toei &t3 brei. 6. He sprang out of the window, <£r fjjrattQ jum Jenifer tyiitauS (point of ingress or exit denoted by 3 It -f- dat.). Note : It is customary, in referring to the relatives of the person addressed, to prefix £err, §rau or ^rauleitt, as the case may be, but this is not done in speaking of one’s own relatives, thus: SSUe ge$t e§ $f)rem #emt SSater? — But : SRein Safer ift ganj tt>o$L §*34l ^REPOSITIONS. 271 EXERCISE XXXIX. A. 1 . Stuf toelefye SBeife Ijaben ©ie bie fran^oftfcfje ©f)racf>e fo gut gelernt ? 2. 3aufe. 4. 2Ba§ gebenlft bu fyeute 2(benb ju tfjun? 3$ toetfi e§ nid^t ; fiir’§ ©rfte muff td^ meine 2lufgaben ntacfien. 5. 2Bo Ijaft bu ben fyubfc^en ©$lafrocf befommen? 3$ babe if)n sum ©eburtstage befommen, unbjiefye ifm ^eute jum erften •Kale an. 6. @3 flingelt ; toer ift an ber ^Ef>ur? @3 ift jemanb, ber ben $errn fprecfien hull, aber er ift bei £ifcf)e unb lajjt fidj nicf)t ftoren. 7. $>u fitjeft am genfter; fielj bodf) einmal jum genfter ljinau§, unb bu toirft ifm bieffeicbt fefyen foitnen. 8. $u toelcfyer $eit lebte 2)toliere? @r lebte unter ber Kegieruttg Subtoig XIV. bon granfreidi). 9. 3ft e§ moglidf), ju berfelben $eit bon einer ©adjie ju fforedtjen unb an eine anbere ju benfen? 10. SDie Siebe junt ©elbe ift bie 3Burjel aHe§ libels. 11. Unfer §au§ ftebt am ©t. Sorenjsglufj, unb bon ben genftern fie^t man bie SDampffdjiffe borbeigeffen. 12. SBiffft bu mir beine ©rammatif Ieifyen? 3 a toof)I, mit ber Sebingung, bajj bu biefclbe bor morgen jurucfbringft. 13. 3ft §«rr S3- §aufe? Kein, er ift auf brei 2Bodjen berreift. 14. 33ei i£age3anbrudj) fingen bie 23ogel am fcffonften. 15. 2Iffe genfter unb Sljuren tocrben be§ KacfitS au§ gurdjt bor ©ieben bei un§ jugefdfdoffen. 16. SBeSbalb finb bie $inber nicfit jur ©cfmle gegangen? 17. finb mefjrere ^inber in ber ©cfmle, bie an ben SJtafern gelitten fmben, unb bie SKutter furdjtet fief) bor biefer ^ranffyeit. 18. Sfeifen ©ie lieber ju Sanb ober ju SBaffer ? 3 m ©ornmer jiefie id) e§ bor, ju 2Baffer ju reifen. 19. -Kem 25 a ter f)atte bie ©etoofin^eit, un§ Slinbcr um fief) ju berfammeln unb un§ ©efcf)icf)ten ju erjdfylen. 20. ^Kitten im ©ommer, unb bann hneber um 2Beif)nacf)ten, gelje id) auf§ Sanb, um meine 25ertoanbten ju befuefjen. 21. 23origen ©ommer blieb icf) mel)r al§ bierjeljn 3iage bei benfelben. 272 LESSON XXXIX. [§§ 234- B. 1. Good morning ; you have come just at the right time ; I was on the point of going to your house (say : going to you). 2. There is a ring at the door ; go to the door and see who is there. 3. When you go to the market, do not forget to go to the post also. 4. Do you intend to take a pleasure- trip this summer? Yes, I intend to leave the town for three or four weeks. 5. Last summer we stayed away only a week. 6. Does it not look like rain? 7. Yes, I am afraid it might rain, but fortunately I have brought my umbrella with [me]. 8. Have you any money about you ? I should like to pay this bill, and have left my purse at home. 9. I have about seven dollars and a half with me ; would that be enough (suf- fice) ? 10. Would you do me the favour to lend me the half of it (batten) for two or three days? 11. What magnificent weather for harvesting; it has not rained for two weeks [past]. 12. Is the servant going to (the) market? No, she was at (the) market (already) two hours ago. 13. The battle of Waterloo took place on the 18th of June in the year 1815. 14. Some months afterwards the treaty of Paris was signed. 15. When (at what time) and in what war did the battle of the Alma take place ? 16. It took place in the year 1855, during the war between England and Russia. ORAL EXERCISE XXXIX. 1. Wann gedenken Sie die Stadt zu verlassen ? 2. Wo steht das Haus Ihres Herrn Yaters ? 3. Auf welche Weise gedenken Sie diesen Sommer zuzubringen ? 4. Wollen Sie emmal 7 zu mir kommen und den Nachmittag bei mir zubringen? 5. Es hat geklingelt; wer ist da? 6. Was fur Wetter bekommen wir heute Abend? 236 ] CONJUNCTIONS. 273 LESSON XL, CONJUNCTIONS. 235. Conjunctions are either : A. Coordinating, or those which connect sentences of the same rank or order (principal with principal, or dependent with dependent), or : B. Subordinating, or those which connect one sentence with another, on which it depends, or to which it is sub- ordinate . 236. I. Conjunctions Proper. — The Coordinating Conjunctions proper merely connect sentences without affect- ing their structure. They are : > flbcv, or {general disjunctive') a\i6) f (* ^ ut ^ a ^ versative ') . Remarks. — 1 . Sottbcrtt is used after negative sentences only, and introduces a sentence correcting or contradicting the state- ment contained in the preceding sentence, in whole or in part, as : bin itidjt Irani, fottbertt g anj gefunb, I am not ill but (on the contrary) quite well. But if there is no inconsistency or contradiction between the two statements, abet is used, as : @r Ijat e§ niefyt getfyan, aber er foirb e3 tfmn. He has not yet done it, but he will do it. 2 . Slbcr does not necessarily begin the sentence and often comes after the verb. When abet does not begin the sen- tence, it has rather the sense of ‘ however/ as : A. Coordinating Conjunctions. bcitlt, for ( causative ) fonbertt, J 274 LESSON XL. [§§ 236- $a§ Bofe SGeib abcr ging t>or ben Spiegel, The wicked woman, however, went to the mirror. Note. — When there is any other conjunction present, aber seldom begins the sentence. 237. II. Adverbial Conjunctions* — Many adverbs and adverbial phrases have the function of conjunctions, when they are used to express the relation between sentences, rather than to modify any particular member of the sentence in which they occur. The principal coordinating adverbial conjunctions are : and), also, too ] nuffrrbnn, besides I ^ (relaKd , 0 „„„> Dull 11, then | fogar, even bcitnod), bod), £ still jeboi$, ) bcitlt, unless bcffcmutgcadjtet, nidjtlbcftoiocmgcr, inbcffcit, however fonft, else, otherwise tool)!, indeed jltJttr, it is true, to be nevertheless adversative > (related to akr) ire therefore baljcr, barunt, beSljalfi, beStncgctt, . olfo, \ folglidj, >- accordingly mitrin', ) causative (related to kntt) # 37 ] CONJUNCTIONS. 275 fo, so olfo, so, thus rtcnfo, just as V comparative ? e ^ 0 ' l the V' ) as, as far as — restrictive barauf , afterwards f feifbcitt, since then J Remarks. — i. Unlike the conjunctions proper, these adver- bial conjunctions, if they introduce a sentence, throw the subject after the verb ; but they may also follow the verb, thus : @r ift franf ; beffcuungcadjtet tottb er fommen (or : er toirb bcffeuungcfid)tct fommen), He is ill; neverthe- less he will come. @3 regnete, barum (bafyer, beC'megen) fonnte tdj (or : idj fonnte barum, etc.) nicfyt au^gefyen. 2. Sind) and fogat, when they refer specially to the subject or any other member of the clause preceding the verb, do not throw the subject after the verb, as : Sind) fein 23ater toar jugegen, His father, too, was present. ©ogar feinen getnben Ijat er berge&en, He has pardoned even his enemies. 3 . The verb often comes first in a sentence with bod;, to express a strong affirmation, as : £abc id; e£ bod) gcfagt, Did I not say so? 2jQ LESSON XL. [§§ *38- 238 . III. Correlative Conjunctions. These are: citttoeber . . . obcr, either ... or tteber . . . ttdtfj, neither . . . nor nidjt ttwr . . . fotiberit audj, joniofjl ... all and), tlidjt . . . all, not so much ... as balb . . . balb, now . . . now (again), at one time at another | disjunctive not only but also connective teU$ . . . tcilg, partly . . . partly eittcrfeit§ . . . anbctjcifg, on the one hand ... on the other. Remark. — The last three are adverbial conjunctions, and either follow the verb, or throw the subject after it, unless they modify a particular member of the sentence (compare § 237, Remarks 1, 2, above). 239 . B . Subordinating Conjunctions. 1. Sentences introduced by subordinating conjunctions are always dependent , and therefore have the verb last (see § 32)- 2. Some of these also are adverbial, but, as this distinction does not affect the construction, they are not separately arranged. 3. The principal subordinating conjunctions are as follows: (a) Introducing substantive clause : fcafb that fib, if, whether (< b ) Introducing adverbial clause : al§, 1 ^ 6t§ (baft), until ba, [when Vtime C^e (btt§), J be f ore toettit , ) ) bettor, I 239 ] CONJUNCTIONS. 277 >• while, whilst ittbcffeit, iitbetn', unlcrbcffeit, toiitjrcnb (bafj), fdt(bcm), since fobalb' , as soon as jd Idltge, as long as (fo)ttJte, as soon as tdtc, how — manner bcitlt, than dig, 1 A »<«. } ,han - as intoicfcrn', inasmuch as j|c nddjbetn', according as bd, since bdfe, that tdcil, because bdft, that oufbujj, 1 l 1 in order that tutt bn§, bamit', in order that menu, if dig ob, as if in case l dig to cun fuff*/ } i ton fern, J dbgletd), tocmt gletcf}, obi^dit, menu fdjan, cb dutfj, ttiemt fludj, nbidofjl, tstctoul)!, wngcdf^tct (bdfe), tocnit . . . nitfjt, if not, unless > although time degree cause purpose - condition > concessive 278 LESSON XL. [§§ 239 - Remarks. — 1. fflBetttt and oB take the subjunctive when the verb of the principal clause is in the impf., plupf., or conditional, as : 3c f) toiirbe Jommen, toertn genug toiire, I should come, if I were well enough. 3 toufjte mcfyt, oh er gefommen mdre (fei), I did not know, whether he had come. 2. SBentt may be omitted in conditional sentences ; the verb then begins the clause, as in the question order (compare § 59). This construction is much more common than in English, and is generally used when the dependent clause, containing the condition , precedes the principal clause, con- taining the consequence, as : gwtte id) ©elb, fo toiirbe id) $reuttbe I)aben, If I had (had I) money, I should have friends. Note. — The particle fo should not be omitted in the latter clause when the former is without roenn. 3. In the compound conjunctions obgletdj, obfrtjdtt, obtddljl, etc., the two parts may be separated, and the latter part placed after the subject, as : ©bgletd) (obfffjdtt, etc.) er Irani tear, etc. ; or : Ob er gldcl) Irani tear. Although he was ill. Note. — With tt>enu the particles gleicf), etc., always follow the subject. 4. The ob or toenn may also be omitted in these conjunc- tions and in al£ dB, aU fcscmt 0 as if ’) ; the verb then begins the sentence, or immediately follows al3, as : er glcidj Irani, Although he is ill. fdjetnt nttr, nlS ob (toenn) id) < 3 ie trgenbtoo gefeljen Ijiitte ; or : al 3 Jjtttte ill), etc., It seems to me, as if I had seen you somewhere. 2 4 o] INTERJECTIONS. 279 240 . Interjections. 1. Interjections proper are not, strictly speaking, mem- bers of the sentence, and consist of sounds expressing either : (a) Independent outbursts of natural feeling, as : 0 , dlj, of various emotions ; alj, Ijci, Ijeifa, \VL&fyt (hurrah), joy; et, Ijtt, $ 0 $, surprise; ad), 0U, pain; jjfui (fie), disgust ; bal), contempt ; or ( b ) Intimations of will, as: Jiff, fc(j (hush), enjoining silence ; Ije, Ijc&a',, §0, ffatiof), Ijoflalj, to call attention. 2. Various parts of speech, and even whole phrases, are employed interjectionally, as: fyeil, hail; \ woe (subst.) hurrah ; brat), bravo ; leiber, alas ; fort, toeg, away (adverbs); gottlob, thank God; also in oaths and adjurations. 3. Akin to Interjections are imitations of natural sounds, as : f)ui/ whizz ; Jiiff, Jmff, jmff, shot ; bauj, fall ; JllutltflS, splash. 4 . (a) The Interjections 0 , acf), Jifut, are sometimes fol- lowed by a genitive, as : 0! (adj! J)fui !) ber S^aubc ! Oh! (ah! fie!) what disgrace ; or by fiber -f- accusative, as : <]5fui ! fiber bid) getgen ! Fie on thee for a coward ! ( b ) The substantives used interjectionally, as under 2, above, are sometimes followed by a dative, as : SBel) mix ! Woe’s me ! £>eil bem tftiiuige ! Hail to the king ! Vocabulary. to call for, abfyolen go in, tyineingefyen wear (intr.), fidj tragen prepare, fcor'beretten 280 LESSON XL. 1§M° lay up, lay by, juriidlegen old age, ba§ 2tlter joy, delight, bie fjfreube Lord, ber £err price, ber ^Brei§ tortoise, bie ©d)ilbfrote guilt, debt, bie ©dmlb to be to blame (for), fcf'uio (adj.) fetrt (an + dat.) cheap, bittig certainly, in any case, jeben* faH§ in vain, bergebenS even if, although, toenn audf> Idioms : 1. I am studying (preparing) for an examination, Bereite mt<& ouf ein tinmen (acc.) Dor. 2. Do you consider that good? §alien Sic DcS fiir gut? 8. To make calls, ©ejudje tmtdjcn. 4. In the world, Wuf Der SBclt. EXERCISE XL. A. 1. 2Bir foUten atte Sllenfdjen liebett, toenn fie un§ aucfy fyaffen. 2. ©ie berfpracfyen, mid; abjuf) olen ; attein id; toartete bergebenS, benn ©ie famen nidjt. 3. 2Bemt icfy an S$rem §aufe tooriiberge^e, fo gefye id; getoof;nIi Ijinein. 4. 2ll§ id; aber geftern Stbenb boruberging, fat; id; fein £id;t unb bai;er bin id; nid;t l;ineingegangen. 5. £;e me^r toir lernen, befio rneljr finb toir im ©tanbe ju lernen. 6. ®ie ©critter befomnten morgen $erien, barum fpriitgen unb fingen fie bor greube. 7. 2Bie febr id; mid; aud; bemiifje, e§ gelingt mir leiber bod; nidjt, atte ©aije bief-er 2tufgabe ridjtig ju fdjreiben. 8. ©u tabelft micf), afe ob i$ fdfmlb baran toare. 9. @in borfidjtiger Sllann tegt in feiner ^ugenb juritd, auf bafj er in feinern Sitter nid;t SRangel leibe. 10. 2tufjer toenn id; franf ober fefyr befdjaftigt bin, gefye idf) jeben £ag fpagies ren. 11. @r ift nidjt nur reicf;, fonbern antcfy freigebig, unb beg* tjatb fiat er fo biele greunbe getoonnen. 12. fatten toir getoujjt, bajj ©ie Ijeute Sfefud; l;aben, fo toaren toir erft morgen gefommen. 13. 2Botten ©ie fid; erfunbigen, ob $rau ©. nod; in bctnfetben §aufe tooljnt ? 14. giebt nod; biele Seute auf ber 2Belt, bie toeber lefen nod; fdjreiben fonnen. 15. ©ie fatten mir Ijelfen tonnen, toenn ©ie e§ getoottt fatten, atlein ©ie toottten e§ nicfyt. §240] INTERJECTIONS. 28l 16. gate ©ie be§ $fta$mtttag§ nid^t fommert fonnen, fo fommen ©ie bocfy be§ 2lbenb§. 17. Dbgleid) Karl fd;on jefyn gal) re aft iff, farm er toeber gut lefert nod) gut fd)reiben. 18. ©ie ©cfnlbfrote Itef, tnbem ber £afe fdjtief, be^fjalb ift fie aud) juerft angelom* men. 19. §atte ber &afe nid;t gefddafen, fo tocire er jebenfate juerft angefommen. 20. ®u follft beinen SSater unb beine Shutter efyren, auf baft bu lange lebeft im Sanbe, ba3 bir ber §err bein ©ott giebt. j B. 1. We shall come, even if it rains. 2. Before I leave the town, I must make some calls. 3. Shall we go without him, or shall we wait till he comes back ? 4. Whilst we were away, a thief came and stole the money. 5. Do you sit up late when you are studying? 6. Not generally; however, when I was preparing for my last examination I used to sit up late. 7. Do you consider this cloth dear ? The price is not high to be sure, but it will not wear well. 8. Here is cloth, which is dear, but I believe that it is good. 9. I do not, on the contrary, consider it dear, but cheap, since it is good cloth. 10. Since I have been ill, I am allowed neither to read much nor to write much. 11. It seems to me that it is colder to-day than yesterday. 12. It is w all w the same to w me, whether I travel by the steamer or by the railway. 13. [If] I had thought of w that, I should have gone to meet you. 14. The hare slept, and in^the^meanwhile the tortoise ar- rived. 15. If the hare had not slept, he would have arrived first. ORAL EXERCISE XL. 1. Die Fenster sind alle auf, wer ist daran schuld ? 2. Legen Sie viel Geld zuriick? 3. Weshalb haben Sie mich nicht abgeholt? 4. Konnen Sie mir sagen, in welcher Richtung von hier der Fluss liegt ? 5. Hast du dein letztes Examen bestanden? 6. Halten Sie diesen Hut fur teuer? 19 282 SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON F. [§*4l SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON F. ADDITIONAL REMARKS ON CERTAIN CONJUNCTIONS. 241 . 1. Sltlein follows and limits, or corrects, affirmative statements, as fonbertl does negative, thus : (Sr ift reid), ottetlt er ift nid)t gfiicfUd), He is rich, but he is not happy. 2. $eftO or unt fo (but not je) may be used with a single compara- tive, as : (SUen 0ie, bamit 0ie fceflo (urn fo) fritter anfommen, Make haste, so that you may arrive all the sooner. 3 - £og is the most general in meaning of all the conjunctions. It may be omitted when it introduces a substantive clause, as in indirect state- ments. The sentence then has the construction of a principal clause (verb second ; see §87, 3). But bag cannot be omitted when it expresses purpose or consequence . 4. The Engl, if must be rendered by ofi (not toemt) when it = whether, as : I asked him if he could come, 3 (f) fragte il)n, 06 er fomrnen fomte. 5. For the distinction between af§, toemt (as conjunctions of time) and toamt, see § 58. 6. ‘Than’ should be rendered by al 3 after an adjective in the com- parative degree, not by toie. 7. £enit = ‘ than ’ is obsolete, except when used to prevent the re- petition of al8, as : (Sr ift grower af$ £)id)ter, bcitlt af§ Sftenfd), He is greater as a poet, than as a man. 8. In comparisons of equality , as ... as = (e&ett) fo . . . totC, or al$, tote being more common, as: He is as tall as I, (Sr ift (eben)fo grog tote id). After a negative, eben is omitted, as : dx ift nid) t fo grog true id). 9. So . . . fo are used with correlative clauses, containing adjectives compared together in the positive degree (compare the use of je or bcfto with the compar. degree, § 126, 4), as: §241] ADDITIONAL REMARKS ON CONJUNCTIONS. 283 So groft cr ift, fo feige ift er ctud), He is as cowardly as he is big; or: ‘ equally big and cowardly’; lit.: Big as he is, he is just as cowardly. Note. — In the first clause of the above example fo is subordinating; in the second coordinating , but does not throw the subject after the verb. Observe also the following construction, where the clauses cannot be rendered as correlative in English : 00 gent id) Sfynett (cutd)) l)etfert modjte, fo unmoglid) ift e 8 mir, However glad I should be to help you, it is quite impossible for me (or : Glad as I should be, etc.). 10. As, when denoting cause [= ‘since’) must be rendered by ha, as : 1 could not come, as I was not well, 3d) fonnte md)t fommett, fco id) itidjt mof)l wax. 11. As, in the sense of ‘ while ’= inbeffert, as: He fell asleep, as I was reading to him, dx fdjfief eitt, inbeffett id) iljin doda§. 12. Distinguish carefully between the following uses of Engl. since: (a) Since as preposition = feit (not feitbem), as : Since last Tuesday, 0 eit (extern 2 )ienftag. (b) Since as adverb or coordinating adverbial conjunction = feitbem (not feit), as: He was here the day before yesterday, but I have not seen him since, ^orgeftent wax er t)ier, feitbem Ijabe id) il)n aber nicf)t gefefyen. fc) Since as subordinating conjunction of time = feitbem or feit, as: I have not seen him since he recovered from his illness, 3d) l)abe it)n nid)t gejeljen, fcit(bnn) er genefen ift. (d) Since as conjunction of cause = foa, as : Since I have no money, I cannot pay you, id) fein ©eft) ^abe, fann id) ©ie nidjt bcgaljten. 13. After elje, bedor and ttialjrcnb, daft may be omitted. 14* S 3 et) 0 r expresses time only, efte may also express preference (== ‘rather ’), as: id) ba8 tljue, mitt id) fterben, Rather than do that, I will die. 284 SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON F. [§241 15. Observe that the adverbial conjunctions infccffcit, Utttcricffcil are coordinating when they = ‘meanwhile’ (the pronoun beffen being demonstrative ), but subordinating when they — ‘v/hilst, while’ (the pron. being relative ), as : ©ie fpradjen mit einaitber ; tubeffen (unterbeffen) gt’itg id) auf unb ab, They were speaking to each other; (in the) meanwhile I was walking up and down ; but : ©ie fyrarfjen mit einaitber, iitbeffen (unterbeffen) id) anf unb ab giltg, They were speaking to each other, while I was walking up and down. In the sense of ‘however,’ inbeffen is coordinating only. 16. ^nbcitt is subordinating only, and denotes cause as well as time, as: 3d) brand^e mefyr ©elb, indent id) niele ©dptlbeit git bega^(eu babe, I need more money, since I have many debts to pay (having many debts to pay). •Snfcern er tnir bic §anb gab, Icidjelte er, As he gave me his hand (giving me his hand), he smiled. 17. SBetl must be used (not ba) in answer to the question why ? or wherefore ? as : Sarunt famen ©ie nicbt? 3Beil id) franf mar. Why did you not come ? Because I was ill. 18. ‘Unless’ is rendered by tuemt • . . llid)t (if • . . not), or by fcCItlt (coordinating adv. conj.), as: Sir merben nid)t au$geben fonneit, tocitn fid) ba§ Setter nid)t dnbert, We shall not be able to go out, unless the weather changes. 3d) laffe bid) nid)t, bit fegueft mid) Senn, I will not let thee go, except (unless) thou bless me. Note. — £)enn in this sense always follows the verb. 19. ‘ But ’ after a negative = al 0 , as : 3d) batte nid)t8 a($ UngUicf anf nteiiter $eife, I had nothing but misfortune on my journey. Note. — 9Udjt§ tnertiger al§ = * anything but y (not ‘ nothing less than ’), as: (Sr ift Uieniger «13 rei$, He is anything but rich. 20. Distinguish between : (a) = ‘there’: adverb of place, as: 3d) mar tm, I was there. §241] ADDITIONAL REMARKS ON CONJUNCTIONS. 285 (b) = * then * : adverb of time , as : ©cr 2)ieb fdjtid) iu« §a u§ ; im ergrtff id) Ujrt, The thief sneaked into the house ; then I seized him. (*) $)d a=s ‘since/ ‘as ’ : subordinating conjunction, as : 3d) fonnte nid)t fommett, Ha id) fvanf toar, I could not come, since (as) I was ill. 21. Distinguish between t)effeitlingcad)tet, * nevertheless * (coord, adv. conj.) and ungead)tet, ‘although? ‘ notwithstanding that ’ (subord. conj.). EXERCISE F. 1. Our neighbour has failed, but he is only the richer on that account, since he has not paid his creditors. 2. The hare was sleeping, whilst the tortoise crept slowly towards the goal. 3. Rather than accept your con- ditions, I will give up my position. 4. He has not been here since last week, and I have not seen him since. 5. Since you have not seen him, I must either go and see him (say : go to him), or write to him. 6. I con- sider him an ignorant man ; he is anything but learned. 7. Have you been at the railway-station? Yes, I was there as the train arrived. 8. We shall not go out this afternoon, because it looks like rain. 9. We shall not go out to-morrow either (ctud)), if the weather does not change. 10. The whole family was absent yesterday from eight o’clock till twelve o’clock at night ; meanwhile the house took (fangeu )fire. PART SECOND, SYNTAX. LESSON XL I. SYNTAX OF THE CASES NOMINATIVE AND GENITIVE. 242 . Nominative. 1. The Nominative is the case of the subject , or of a Word in apposition to the subject, or of a predicate noun quali- fying it. The nominative is also used in address, there being no special form for the vocative. 2. Neuter verbs indicating a state or transition, such as fein,tobe; toerben, to become; bleiben, to remain; fcfyetnen, to seem, appear ; fyetfjen, to be called, take a predicate nomi- native, as : @r tft Solbat getoorben (geblieben), He has become (re- mained) a soldier. 3. Verbs of calling take a predicate nominative, verbs of considering a nominative with al3, in the passive , as : $atfer §eirtrid) I. tourbe ber SSogler genannt. Emperor Henry was called the Fowler. Sftein 23 ater tourbe immer bon mir nU mein befter greunb betracfytet. My father was always regarded by me (as) my best friend. Note. — Verbs of choosing generally take the preposition 311 instead of the English nominative. §244] GENITIVE, 28; 243, Genitive, The Genitive is used chiefly as the complement of sub- stantives, its use in this respect being much the same as the English objective with ‘of/ and also covering that of the possessive. Thus we have : j. The Genitive of Origin, as: 2)ie $ruerbad;tig, suspected ho H (also + acc., or + non), full Inert (also + acc.), worth tolirbig, worthy Remarks. — i. The neuter pronoun ‘ it ’ after most of these adjectives may have the form c8, which is the old genitive, and is the origin of the later use of the accusative, first with the pronouns ba£, tna3, and then, by analogy, with substan- tives, as : 3$ bin e§ (ba8) tniibe, I am tired of it (that). 2 . With tnitbe, Inert the Accusative is more usual than the genitive. 245. Genitive after Verbs. i. Verbs of meanings similar to those of the adjectives under the previous section take a genitive of the nearer object, as: acfden (also + auf with acc.), benfen (generally + an with (also + acc.) pay attention bebiirfen, need E>egel)ren, desire braud&en, want entbefyren, miss, do without ertnaI)nen,mention y Also the following : barren (also + auf with acc.) wait fcmrten (also + acc.), tend, nurse acc.), think gebenfen, mention gentefsen (generally + acc.), enjoy hergeffen (generally + acc.), forget lac^en, laugh at gotten, mock fcfyonen (also + acc.), spare ADVERBIAL GENITIVE. 289 247 ] 2. Transitive Verbs of accusing, condemning, acquittal ’ deprivation, emotion , take a genitive of the remoter ob- ject, as: artflagert, accuse berauben, rob befdjmlbigert, accuse entbinben (also + fcon), re- lieve entfleiben (also + fcort), dis- robe Io§fyred;en, acquit iiberfiify'ren, convict iiberjeu'gert (also + fcon), con- vince bevjicfyern, assure iDlirbtgen, deem worthy get fyen, accuse 3. Also many reflexive and impersonal verbs (see §§ 215, 216, 219). 246. Adverbial Genitive. For the use of the genitive in forming adverbs from sub- stantives, see § 189, 2. The adverbial genitive may express place, time or manner, as : Stnfet §anb, On the left hand. ©enter 9Bege gefyen, To go one's way. Stefcr Sage, During these (last) days. 2lbenb§, In the evening. SERorgen§, In the morning, etc. 2lEfe0 @rnfie§. In all seriousness. Srocfnett gufecS, Dry-shod. And particularly with 2Betfe, ‘manner,* after an adjec- tive, as : ©liicflicfycr SBetfe, — or : ) Fortunately (lit., in afortunate ©ludlidjertoeife, ) manner) 247. For Interjections followed by a genitive, see § 240, 4, («)• For the genitive after prepositions, see §§ 222, 223. LESSON XLI. £§§ 247- 2QO EXERCISE XLL A . 1. Guten Morgen, Karl; was hast du fiir Eile, mein Junge? 2 . Guten Morgen, Herr B. ; es ist bald neun Uhr und ich gehe jetzt in die Schule. 3. So, hast du noch weit zu gehen ? 4. Bis nach der Friedrich strasze ; Herr G., unser Lehrer, besteht sehr auf Piinktlichkeit. 5. Steige nur ein, du kannst mit mir fahren, da mein Weg durch die Friedrichstrasze fiihrt. 6. Ich bin Ihnen sehr dankbar ; das ist sehr freundlich von Ihnen. 7. Sitzt du dabequem? 8. Ja, aber sind meine Bucher Ihnen nicht im Wege ? 9. Nicht im geringsten, aber was fiir eine Menge Bucher hast du da ! Du hast gewiss viel zu studieren. 10. Ich arbeite jetzt sehr fleissig, da das Examen nachstens stattfindet. 11. Auf welches Examen bereitest du dich vor ? 12. Auf das Ein- trittsexamen der Universitat. 13. Was fiir Sprachen stu- dierst du ? 14. Ich studiere Englisch, Latein, Deutsch und Franzosisch. 15. Natiirlich studierst du auch die Mathe- matik? 16. Wir miissen Rechnen, Algebra und Geometrie lernen. 17. Bist du ein Freund von der Mathematik, oder ziehst du die Sprachen vor ? 18, Ich lerne sehr gern Ma- thematik, besonders Algebra ; mein Lehrer glaubt, ich habe nicht viel Sprachtalent. 19. Deshalb solltest du desto fleissiger die Sprachen studieren, (auf) dass deine Bildung nicht einseitig werde. 20. Mein Vater ist auch derselben Meinung. 21. Hoffentlich wirst du dein Examen gliicklich bestehen ; da sind wir aber schon bei der Schule. 22. Ich danke Ihnen vielmals fiir den freundlichen Wunsch, wie auch fiir die Fahrt. B. 1. “ An honest man is the noblest work of God.” 2. A pound of iron is about as large as two pounds of silver. 3. Mr. Cleveland was elected president of the United States in the year 1884. 4. I was to have taken (made) a journey to Europe this summer, but my father needs me in his busi- 2 4 8] DATIVE. 29I ness and I shall be obliged to remain at home. 5. I have been offered five thousand dollars for my house, and I shall sell it, for I am glad of the opportunity of getting (to get) rid of it. 6. The Duke of Wellington, a great English general (^elbs fyerr), was called the “ Iron Duke,” as Prince Bismarck, the great German statesman, is called the “ Iron Chancellor.” 7. He (the former) has deserved that title not only as a soldier but as a man. 8. My neighbour, the merchant, has been accused of forgery, but I do not believe that he is capable of such a crime. 9. He was in w need of money, and is said to have done it on that account. 10. I hope that he will be acquitted of this accusation, for I am convinced of his innocence. 11. The discovery of America by (burd;) Columbus was perhaps the greatest undertaking of any man or of any age (^cxtalter). 12. Columbus was a man of great bodily as well as mental power. 13. His whole fleet con- sisted of three small ships, of which two were very old. 14. Have you seen your brother the lawyer ? 15. Excuse [me] ; my brother is not a lawyer, but a doctor. I have not seen him since Christmas. 16. As a student he always used (pflegen) to say he meant w to be (toerben) a lawyer. 17. We are tired of studying; let us go out. 18. Shall I send for (nad)) a carriage? 19. No, it is not worth while (ber 3Jili£?e toert), I would rather walk. 20. Unfortunately it has rained and the roads are bad. 21. We can try (the) walking, and if we get tired of it, we can take the street-cars (^[erbeba^n, sing.). LESSON XLII. SYNTAX OF THE CASES (continued).- DATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. 248 . Dative. The Dative is the case of the Indirect Object. The Dative is used to denote the person for whose advan- tage or disadvantage a thing is or is done, as : 292 LESSON XLII. [§§248- (Sr I)at mir ein 23ud) gefauft, He has bought me a book. 249. The Dative is very freely used in German to denote the person who has some interest in an action or thing. This is called the ethical dative or dative of interest, and must usually be left untranslated in English, in which language its use is obsolete, thus : fyabe mir bie ©acf)e artgefefyert, I have considered the thing (for my own satisfaction). £l)u mir ba3 rticfyt toteber, Don’t do that again (I tell you). For the possessive dative replacing, with the definite ar- ticle, a genitive case or (with pronouns) a possessive adjective, see § 44, 6. 250. Dative after Verbs. 1. The Dative stands as the Indirect Object of transitive verbs, as : (Sr giebt mir ba§ 25u$, He gives me the book (the book to me). 2. It stands as the sole object after verbs which express a personal relation only, such as verbs of : ( a ) Approach or removal , etc., as : begegrten, meet gletcfyett, resemble entgefyen, escape nctcfygefyen, follow erttfyrecfyen, correspond to nacfyftefyen, be inferior fefylett, be wanting nafyert, approach folgett, follow gufefyen, watch (b) Pleasure or displeasure , as : beljagen, please broken, threaten banfen, thank flucben, curse * 5°1 DATIVE AFTER VERBS. 293 gefaften, please geniigen, suffice grotlen, be angry tniftfal'len, displease fcfymeicfyeln, flatter ftefyen, suit, become (c) Advantage or disadvantage , as : beiftefyen, assist btenen, serve fyelfen, help tnangeln, be wanting mit$en, be useful fcfyaben, harm (d) Command, resistance and their opposites , as : gebieten, order gefyorcben, obey berbieten, forbid befefylen, command frozen, defy toeidjen, yield toiberfte'fyen, oppose toiberftre'ben, resist (e) After verbs expressing possession , trust , and various other personal relations, as : Also with fein and toerben, expressing a state of feeling (with gu SDIute expressed or understood), as : SEie iff gotten ? How do you feel ? Observe also the idiom : 2Benn bent fo iff, i If that is the case/ in which bent is dat. neut. (/) After many verbs expressing similar relations, com- pounded with the inseparable prefixes CX-, tilt-, bev-, tmber ; with the separable prefixes an-, atif-, bet-, cntgegcn-, nadj-, bar-, jn-, etc., and with adjectives, nouns or adverbial phrases, such as : letb tljun, be sorry gu Seil toerben, fall to one’s toofyltoollen, be well-disposed share gu ©fatten fommen, be of use ba3 SSort reben, defend anttoorten, answer beiftimmen, agree with ertotbern, reply gefyoren, belong glauben, believe fcfyetnen, seem trauen, trust gureben, encourage 294 LESSON XLII. [§§ 250- REMARKS. — i. The great majority of these verbs have become transitive in English, on account of the loss of dis- tinction between the dative and accusative ; their construc- tion in German should be carefully observed. 2. Many of the verbs under (//), (cfj fdjreifie morgen einen 93 rief an nteinen SSater, I am going to write a letter to my father to-morrow. 258. The Imperfect. The Imperfect is used : 1. As the historical ( narrative ) preterite, when an event is told in connection with others, as : Slnfang fdjuf ©ott £immet unb Srbe, unb 2 lHe§ mar toiifte unb leer u. f. to.. And in the beginning God cre- ated heaven and earth, and all was waste and void, etc. 2. To denote customary, continued or contempo- raneous action, replacing the English forms ‘was doing/ ‘used to do/ as : Sr giitg jeben £ag um bier Uf;r au§, He used to go out every day at four o’clock. 2Sir fuljreit art ber ^ird^e borbet, aU bte Ufyr elf fdjfag. We were driving past the church, as the clock struck eleven. 259. The Perfect. 1. The Perfect indicates a past event as complete and no longer continuing, thus : $cf) Ijabc geleSi unb gcliebet, I have lived and loved (and both my life and my love are ended). 2. The Perfect is used of an event as a separate and independent fact, simply asserted as true without reference to any other, as : ©ott Ijat bte 2 BeIt etfcfjaffett, God created the world ; 20l] THE PERFECT. 301 but in the sentence : ©ott fcf)uf bie 2BeIt in fecf )3 Shagen unb ruljtc am fiebenten, God created the world in six days, and rested on the seventh, the imperfect is used, because the two events are connected. 3. The Perfect is used (apart from historical narrative), in preference to the Imperfect, of an event which has not been witnessed or participated in by the speaker, as : ©eftern ift ein $inb crirunfen ( Perf . ), A child was drowned yesterday ; — but : ©eftern crtratt! (Imp/.) ein Sinb, aU id) am Ufer fianb, A child was drowned yesterday, when I was stand- ing on the shore. Remark. — This distinction between the use of the Perfect and Imperfect is not accurately observed, but it is always better to render the English forms 4 was doing/ 4 used to do/ by the Imperfect. 4. The Perfect replaces the Future-Perfect, as the Present does the Future, as : %d) toerbe fommen, fobalb idb meinc ©efcbafte afigemadjf Ijafie, I shall come, as soon as I have (i. e., shall have) finished my business. 260 . The Pluperfect. The Pluperfect is used, as in English, of a past action completed before another was begun, thus : @r Ijattc feine 2lufgabe twffenbct, djc ©ie famen, He had finished his exercise, before you came. 261 . The Future. The F uture is used : x. Of an action about to take place, as : Unfer 3Sater luirb un£ lobcn. Our father will praise us. 302 LESSON XLIII. [§§261- 2 . To denote probability or supposition, as : toirb mein 23ruber fein, ber cmgefommen ift. It is probably my brother who has arrived. 262. The Future-Perfect. The Future-Perfect is the Perfect in the Future, and expresses probability even more frequently than the simple Future, as : SDer 33rief to irb f$on geftern gcfommett feitt. The letter probably arrived yesterday. EXERCISE XLIII. A . 1. Diese Hitze ist unertraglich ; ich glaube, nie einen so heissen Sommer erlebt zu haben. 2. Und wie schwiil es ist ! Sieht es nicht sehr nach Regen aus ? 3. Richtig, da sind schon die ersten Regentropfen, und ich meine, vor einigen Minuten Donner in der Feme gehort zu haben. 4. Das macht mir einen Strich durch die Rechnung. Bei diesem Wetter kann ich unmoglich zur Stadt gehen. 5. Fur’s Erste allerdings nicht, aber das Gewitter wird nicht lange anhalten. 6. Das ist ein wahrer Platzregen ; so ein Regen ist dem Lande sehr notig. 7. Ja, wir haben diesen Sommer iiberhaupt sehr wenig Regen gehabt, aber vorigen Winter desto mehr Schnee. 8. Horen Sie, das war ein Knall ! 9. Ja, und wie schnell der Donner auf den Blitz folgte ! Fiirchten Sie sich vor dem Blitze? 10. Seitdem es voriges Jahr in unserer Nahe eingeschlagen hat, bin ich ein wenig angstlich. 11. Das glaube ich schon, aber sehen Sie doch, jetzt hagelt es noch sogar! 12. Das braucht das Land gewiss nicht, aber die Hagelkorner sind nicht grosz genug, um viel Schaden anzurichten. 13. Es fangt schon an, sich aufzuhellen ; das schlimmste ist vorbei. 14. Wie sich die Luft abgekuhlt hat ! 15. Und wie schnell ! Das ist oft der Fall hier zu Lande. 16. Jawohl; erinnern Sie sich nicht des s 62] SYNTAX OF THE TENSES. 303 wechselhaften Wetters, das wir vorigen Friihling gehabt haben ? 17. Besonders im Marz und Anfang April. 18. Einen Tag thaute es, den nachsten fror es, und am dritten Tage regnete Oder schneite es gar. 19. Dann gab es wieder eine Hitze wie mitten im Sommer; schon im April hatten wir fast achtzig Grad Fahrenheit. 20. Da scheint die Sonne wieder ; ich sagte Ihnen ja, dass das Gewitter nicht lange anhalten wtirde. 21. Da haben Sie Recht ; jetzt muss ich mich auf den Weg machen. B. 1. A misfortune seldom comes alone. 2. Schlegel trans- lated Shakespeare’s works into German. 3. Is your father at home ? No, he has been away for three weeks, but he is (prob- ably) coming back to-morrow morning. 4. As soon as I have news of his arrival, I shall come again. 5. During my illness I used to go for a drive two hours every day. 6. Are you going (to go) to the concert this evening ? I do not think I shall go. 7. Have you an engagement elsewhere ? No, but I am going to bed immediately, as I start for Boston to-morrow morning at seven o’clock. 8. People (man) are often con- scious of bad habits, which they cannot get rid of. 9. Have you been long in America? I have been here since my fifteenth year. 10. This is probably a letter from my mother, for that is her hand-writing. 11. We had hardly been at home half an hour, when it began to rain. 12. Shakespeare is considered the greatest poet of the English nation. 13. He was born at Stratford-on-Avon, and passed his youth in that place. 14. As a young man he went to London, became celebrated there, and died in the year 1616 in his native^town. 15. The sun was setting, and the long [and] desperate combat was not yet decided. 16. For the third time our brave soldiers throw themselves upon the batteries of the enemy. 17. Nothing could resist this attack ; the enemy wavers, and the victory is ours. 18. But what a dearly-bought victory ! 19. He, who 304 LESSON XLIV. l§§ 263- led the soldiers into the combat, comes not back with them. 20. Yonder he lies cold and silent, and our triumph becomes bitter mourning. LESSON XLIV. THE CONDITIONAL AND SUBJUNCTIVE. 263. The Conditional. 1. The Conditional tenses are, in form, subjunctive past tenses, answering to the Future as a present. 2. They indicate possible futurity , and coincide with the Impf. and Plupf. Subj. in their use in conditional clauses, and will therefore be treated conjointly with them (see § 267, below). Note. — The Tenses of the Condicional are a new formation; the Impf. and Plupf. Subj. having, in the older stages of the language, per- formed the function of the Conditional. 264. The Subjunctive Mood is used much more fre- quently in German than in English, the distinction between Indicative and Subjunctive being almost entirely obliterated in the latter language. 265. The Subjunctive in Indirect Statements. The Subjunctive is used in Indirect Statements or Quotations (see also § 87), i. e., when the words used are quoted in substance only , and not as they were spoken, espe- cially after a verb in the principal clause signifying : (a) Imparting of information (statement, report, con- fession, reminding, etc.), as: cmttoorten, answer erjci^Ien, relate bebaupten, assert gefteljen, confess berid^ten, report fagen, say 266] SUBJUNCTIVE IN INDIRECT STATEMENTS. 305 (b) Apprehension , as : benfen, think erinnern (refl.), remember meinen, be of opinion merfen, observe fcftfieften, conclude tuiffert, know fufylen, feel fyoren, hear ( c ) Contemplation with various emotions, as : furc^ten, fear freuert (refl.), rejoice glauben, believe Ijoffert, hope tounbern (refl.), wonder toiinfcften, wish gtoeifeln, doubt (el) Request , command , advice , etc., as : befeblen, command bitten, ask raten, advise berlangen, demand ermahnen, admonish 266 . The Tense in Indirect Statements. The verb of the Indirect Statement is, as a rule, in the same tense as it would have, if the statement were made directly (see § 87, 2), i. e., the tense of the Indirect Statement is the same as that of the Direct. Remarks. — i. An Indirect Statement is always a subordi- nate clause. 2. The conjunction baft may be omitted in such clauses, which will then have the construction of a principal sentence (i. e., verb second ; see § 87, 3). 3. The Indicative may replace the Subjunctive in Indirect Statements, when the speaker wishes to represent his own belief in the correctness of the statement, as : %§ fyabe gefyort, baft mein Sruber franf t{t, I have heard that my brother is ill (and he is ill). ©ie ttmftte, baft ber ©piegel feme Untoafyrfyeit fftratfj, unb merfte, baft ber £$ciger fie betrogen Ijatte, etc. (Grimm, 306 LESSON XLIV. [§§ 266- Sneewittchen, p. 52, 1 . 1), She knew that the mirror did not tell a lie, and saw that the huntsman had deceived her ( and he had deceived her). But the Subjunctive is used, when the truth of the state- ment is not vouched for, or when any doubt is cast upon it, as : $Da§ fcoSfyafte SBeib aft fte auf urtb mettttc, fie Ijatte ©neetoittcf)en 3 Sttnge urtb Seber gegeffen (ibid., p. 49, 1 . 8), The malicious woman devoured them, and thought she had eaten Sneewittchen’s lung and liver (whereas she had not eaten them). 4. The tense of the Indirect Statement does not depend on that of the principal clause, and the sequence of tenses which is observed in English is not found in German, as: ( Engl'. ) He said he was not ill. (Germ.) @r jagtc, er fei nid;t !ranf. Notes. — 1. The Subjunctive is unusual after the verbs under (b) and (r) in the previous section (except Ijoren), if the principal clause has a present tense . 2. The rule as to tense is not always strictly observed, the tense used being sometimes determined by the want of distinctive subjunctive forms. Thus in the following sentence two different tenses are used : 2Utd) fdjloft er, es mi’tffc tie @age horn ©taSmaunteiu rtidjt feljr befannt fein, uub ben@prud) miiftten nuv toentge luiffcrt (Hauff, Das kalte Herz, p. 8, 1 . 7), Further, he concluded that the legend of the Glass-manikin could not be very well known, and only a few people could know the verse. 3. After an Impf. in the principal clause, the Subjunctive is usual in the Indirect Statement, except as in the second example under Remark 3, above. 4. The verb of the principal sentence sometimes remains unexpressed, or is replaced by a noun of kindred meaning, as : (Sr tieg miff) abmeifeit, metf er franf fei, He refused to see me, because (as he asserted ) he was ill. 267] HYPOTHETICAL PERIODS. 307 3d) lief fo fdjiiett toie rnog(td), ait-3 3urd)t, id) tnodjtc ju fpat !om» men, I ran as quickly as possible, from fear that I might come too late. 5 )a§ Jjiitte ^ (D° you mean to say that) I said that? This last construction is very frequent in German, to express emph^* tically a doubt as to the truth of a statement. 267 . The Subjunctive and Conditional in Hypothetical Periods. Example of a Hypothetical Period: If I had followed your advice, I should have been happy. 1. The above sentence consists of two parts. Of these the one expresses a condition , conceived, in this instance, as unreal or impossible, viz. : If I had followed your advice ( which I did not) ; the other expresses a result , also unreal or unrealized, which would have followed, had the condition been realized, viz. : I should have been happy ( which I am not). 2. In both parts of the above period (in the condition and in the result), the verb is in a past tense (Impf. or Plupf.) of the Subjunctive Mood, as : SBenrt td) Sfyrert 9 ^at fccfolgt ptte (Plupf. Subj.), fo tuare tcf) gliicflicfy gcUicfcn (Plupf. Subj.). Remarks. — 1 . Either of the two clauses may stand first; thus, the sentence given above may have the form : 3$ toare gliicflid) getoefert, toenn u. f. to. 2. The conjunction ioenrt may be omitted, especially when the condition precedes the result, in which case the verb will begin the sentence, as : £wttc uf) Ski Befolgt, fo ioare iti) glucflt$. 3°8 LESSON XLIV. t§§ 267- 3. If the result clause follows the conditional clause, it is usually introduced by the particle fo, and always when toCUU is omitted in the preceding conditional clause (see § 59, and Note). 4. The conditional tenses may replace the Impf. and Plupf. Subj. in the apodosis, result or conclusion only, as : 2 Benrt id) $I)ren 9 tat befolgt I)atte, fo tour be id) gliidlid) getocfen fetn. 5. If the condition- is stated without its unreality being implied, the verb is in the Pres., Perf., or Fut. Indicative , as : 2Benrt er fontmi, fo toerbe id; fortgefyen, If he comes, I shall go away. 6. A condition may be introduced by al£ toCUU or at8 ol), i as if/ thus : (Sr fiel)t au§, al§ toemt ( 06 ) er franf toare. He looks as if he were ill. Note. — In clauses of this kind, toemt or ob may be omitted, and the construction is then inverted accordingly (see § 239, 4), as : (Sr fief)t au§, at§ toare er franf. 268 * Other Uses of the Subjunctive. 1. The Pres. Subjunctive replaces the missing persons (1. and 3.) of the Imperative Mood, the subject being then put after the verb, except in the 3. person, where it may also precede, unless the pron. ©ie is used for the 2. person, as : @elje cr (or er gef;e) nad) §au fe. Let him go home. 2. The Impf. and Plupf. Subjunctive are used to express a wish, as : 2Sare id; f>ei $l)nen ! Would that I were with you ! Note. — This is really an elliptical conditional clause, with the result unexpressed; the full form may be supplied thus: ^CSdre id) bei 3 fynen, ({0 todre id) gliidUdj). 268] USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 309 3. The Subjunctive is used in clauses expressing purpose , with the conjunctions baf$, auf baj$, barnit, as : @r cilte, baft (auf bafc, bamit) er gur reef )ten 3eit anftttne. He hastened, (in order) that he might arrive in good time. 4. It is also used after a negative or an indefinite relative , as : ovt (gefefyen), er angefommen fei, I have heard that he is come. 3. The verbs Ijelfen, lefyren, lernert also take an Infin. with JU after them, as : 3$ fyabe gelernt, ju geljorcfyen, I have learnt to obey. 4. For the use of the Infin. for the P. Part, with these verbs, see § 199. Note. — The verbs fjelfett, lefyrert, lenten do not substitute the Infin. for the P. Part, when followed by an Infin. with §u (see Rem. 3, above, and example). 5. For the Infin. with passive sense after lafferi, see § 200, 7 (e), Note. 272. The Infinitive with ju. The Infinitive with ju is used after other verbs, such as : (a) Those implying something to be attained, \ done or left u?idone , as : THE INFINITIVE WITH Jtt. 315 272] anfangen, beginnen n ' 1 begin V ' fucfien, Derfucfyen, ..w unierrtefy'men, undertake bevbteten, forbid toagen, venture teamen, warn teimfcfyen, wish befefylen, command t'.iten, beg erlauben, allow furd)ten, fear boffen, hope ratcn, advise ( b ) Those implying a suspension of judgment, as: befcfyulbtgeit, accuse foremen, seem etubilbert, (refl.), imagine fcfymeicfyeln (refl.), flatter one’s glauben, believe self, leugnen, deny ( c ) Those indicating various states of mind, as : bcreuen, repent lieb fein, be acceptable (be freuen (impers.), j re j oice g lad ) freuett (refl.), J Ieib fein (tfyun), be unaccept- able (be sorry) Remarks. — 1. With most of these verbs the Infinitive may be replaced by a clause, and must be so replaced unless the subject of the action in the dependent clause is either subject or direct object of the principal clause, as : ©r glaubt, fefyr gefdndt ju fcin, He believes himself to be very clever ; — or : ©r glaubt, tmfj er fefyr gefdndt ift. ©r fyoffte, jn fotnmcn, He hoped to come ; — but: ©r fyoffte, fca§ fein 3 Sater fommett teerbe, (see § 265, c\ He hoped that his father would come. ©3 tf)at mtr letb, ©te nid;t gefefyen ju Ijabctt, I was sorry not to have seen you ; — or : ©3 tfyai mtr Ieib, bo§ id} ©te ntdfd gefefyen fyatte ; — but: 3i 6 LESSON XLV. [§ 275 ift mir IteB, ba§ ©te gefommen finb, I am glad thal you have come. 2. The Infinitive clause as direct object is often represented in the principal clause by the neut. pron. e£ (with prepositions by ba, see § 277, below), as : toage nicfyt, affetn ju fornmen, I do not venture tc come alone. Observe the idiomatic use of the Infinitive with ju aftei tyaben, fern, fteljert, in the following examples : Scf) Ijafic tfern eirten 93ricf JU ii&ergeben, I have a lettei to deliver to him. @3 ift (ftefyt) ju ertoarten, It is to be expected. Note. — In the latter example, the infin. has a passive signification. EXERCISE XLV. ■ A, 1. Guten Morgen, alter Freund ; nichts konnte mir gele- gener sein, als dich anzutreffen. 2. Ich freue mich herzlich, dich zu sehen; ich habe schon lange einen Besuch von dir erwartet. 3. Du solltest doch wissen, dass man wenig Zeit hat, Besuche zu machen, wenn man sich auf ein Examen vor- bereitet. 4. Das ist wahr, aber lass dir gratulieren ; du hast ja| ein glanzendes Examen bestanden. 5. Es ist mir freilich viel besser gelungen, als ich erwartete. 6. Was gedenkst du jetzi zu thun, da du promoviert hast ? 7. Gerade das wollte ich mif dir besprechen ; du kannst mir vielleioht mit gutem Rate bei- stehen. 8. Ich habe mich entschlossen, auf ein Jahr nach Europa zu gehen ; ware es nicht auch fur dich sehr vorteilhaft, ein Jahr dort zuzubringen ? 9. Sehr vorteilhaft, besonders wegen meines Sprachstudiums, aber ich furchte meine Verhalt- nisse erlauben es mir nicht. 10. Das sehe ich nicht ein, es wird nur wenig mehr kosten dort zu leben als hier. 11. Bist du deiner Sache gewiss ? 12. Ja wohl, weisst du, ein Vetter von mir ist kurzlich von Europa zuriickgekommen, und ich habe §272] THE INFINITIVE WITH JU. 3 1 J mich bei ihm genau nach Allem erkundigt. 13. Wo hat er die Zeit zugebracht? 14. Teils in England, teils in Frankreich (und) teils in Deutschland, und er behauptet, dass man in Eu- ropa wenigstens ebenso billig leben kann wie in Amerika. 15. Aber du hast die Reisekosten nichtmit eingerechnet. 16. Na- turlich nicht, aber man reist jetzt viel billiger als man friiher reiste. 17. Hast du dein Billet schon gelost? 18. Noch nicht, aber ich habe mich darnach erkundigt und finde, dass man fur hundert Thaler oder weniger iiber New York nach Liverpool reisen kann. 19. Zweite Klasse natiirlich. 20. O nein, erste Klasse, und mit einer sehr guten Dampferlinie. 21. 1st es mog- lich ? Du hast mich fast iiberredet, die Reise zu unternehmen. 22. Komm nur heute Abend zu mir und wir werden die Sache weiter besprechen. 23. Gut ; also bis Abend. 3 . 1. Have the goodness to read this letter for me ; I have left my spectacles up-stairs, and cannot see very well. 2. Please read pretty loud, for my hearing is bad. 3. Help me to do my work, and I will help you to learn your lessons. 4. When you (man) do not know what to say (what you shall say), say nothing. 5. You will now close your books ; we have read enough for the present. 6. “ To err is human ; to forgive, divine,” is a verse from a poem by the English poet Pope. 7. I have so much work to do that I do not know where to begin. 8. Show the child how it is to learn its lesson. 9. I am tired of read- ing, and must now retire to rest. 10. “ Eat, little^bird, eat,” said a child to her bird. 11. “Thou shalt not steal” is (called) the eighth commandment. 12. The habit of rising early is of great importance when one has a^great^deal^of work to do. 13. If one wants to rise early, one should go to bed early. 14. An old, well-known proverb says : “ Man does not live to eat, but eats to live.” 15. Another proverb says : “ Speaking is silver; silence is gold.’ 16. When I arrived at the railway- station I found that I had no money with me ; imagine my LESSON XLVI. [§§ 273- 318 embarrassment. 17. The art of making glass was already known to the ancients. 18. Are there any houses to sell or to rent in your neighbourhood? 19. I wish to speak to Mr. Bell. 20. Have (laffen) John black my shoes, for I am in a hurry. 21. I have heard say that the celebrated bishop of G. is coming ; would you not like to hear him preach ? 22. Yes, I should like very much to hear him preach ; when is (f often) he to come here? 23. We have had the good^fortune to shoot three hares. 24. Some people would rather die than beg. LESSON XLVI. THE INFINITIVE MOOD (continued). 273. Infinitive of Purpose. The Infinitive with gu is used to express purpose, as : •JJtein $reunb font, trtid^ gu ftmvnen. My friend came to warn me. Remarks. — 1. The Infin. expressing purpose is generally governed by the preposition uttt (see § 276, 1, below), which begins the clause, as : fomme, urn Sie na$ §aufe gu bringen, I come to fetch you home. 2. An Infin. clause with gu is always preceded by a comma in German. 3. This Infin. is also used, with or without gu, after adjec- tives preceded by gu, ‘ too/ or gemtg, 6 enough/ as : gd) wax gu ntiibe, (uut) au§gefyen gu fBmteu, I was too tired to be able to go out. @r ift retcfy gemtg, (um) mele ®iener fyalten gu fauucn, He is rich enough to keep many servants. INFINITIVE OF PURPOSE. 319 *75l Note. — After an adjective with ju, a clause introduced by aB baft may be used, as : 3d) war git miibe, aB imfe idj aiiSgeljctt Jonnte, I was too tired to be able to go out. 274, The Infinitive after Substantives. The Infinitive with ju is used after substantives, nouns and adjectives, akin to the verbs in § 272, to express purpose, etc., as : pabe Sufi, ctnert ©pajtergang jtt ntadjen, I have a mind to take a walk. 3d) f >atte feme $cit, micf) nacf; iljm ui^ufepcn, I had no time to look after him. 6r iff ftetS Bcreit, ben Strmen ju pelfen, He is always ready to help the poor. 275. The Accusative with the Infinitive. The Accusative with the Infinitive is inadmissible in modern German; hence verbs denoting statement, know- ledge, perception, etc., must be followed by a bap clause, as : (Engl.) I know him to be a good man, {Germ.) £5$ bap er etn guter 9 Jtann ip. (. Engl. ) I perceived her to be inattentive, (Germ.) Igd; merfte, bap fie unaufmerffam toar. Remarks. — 1. In such sentences as those in the examples given in the above section, the passive construction with the Infin. is also inadmissible in German except impersonally, as : {Engl?) He is known to be a good man, {Germ.) $lan tocip, bap ct etn guter SJtenfdj ip ; — or : @3 ift befannt, bap er u. f. in. 2. Observe the different relations of the accusatives in tha following sentences : 320 LESSON XL VI. [§§ 275 - {Engl.) I begged him {obj. of ‘ begged ’) to come, (Germ.) 3d? bat iljn ju Jommen. {Engl.) I wish to see him {obj. of ‘ see’), {Germ.) 3$ toimfcfye, iljn gu fel?en. {Engl.) I wish him (subj. of ‘come’) to come, {Germ.) 3d? toimfcfye, baft er fomme. 3. After glauben, the Infin. is admissible in German, but not in English, when the subject of the action is the same in both clauses, as : {Germ.) $$ glaubte, r ed?t gefyort ju I?aben, {Engl.) I believed that I had heard aright. When, on the contrary, the subjects are different, the Infin. (with accus.) is admissible in English, but not in German, as: {Engl.) I believe him to be an honest man, {Germ.) 3d? glaube, bafj er ein efy rlid?er SJtenfcfy tfi. 4. The English Infin. in objective indirect questions is unusual in German, and should be replaced by a finite clause, as : {Engl.) He did not know where to go, {Germ.) gr toujste ni d)t, toofyin er geljen foftte. {Engl.) He told me what to do, {Germ.) gr fagte mir, icfy tl?un fottte. 276 . The Infinitive governed by Prepositions. 1. Only three prepositions can govern an infinitive (with $u) directly, viz.: um, ‘in order/ flljne, ‘without/ and (an)ftatt, ‘instead of/ as : gr fam, urn mid? Don biefem Unfatt ju Bcnatfjridjtigcn, He came, in order to inform me of this accident. 3d? formte if?n nid?t anjefyen, aljtte ^erglic^ ju Iad?en, I could not look at him, without laugh ing heartily. 277] THE INFINITIVE GOVERNED BY PREPOSITIONS. 32 1 mid) gebulbxg anjufyoren, unterbrad) er mid) beftdnbig, Ifistead of listen^ to me patiently, he kept constantly interrupting me. Remarks. — 1. Observe that in each of these examples the preposition stands at the beginning of the clause, the Infini- tive at the end) with the words dependent on the Infinitive between. 2. The Infinitive after obne and (an)ftaft may be replaced by a baft clause. This is always the case when the subject of the action is different in the two clauses (compare § 224, 2, by Rem.). Thus we may say : 3$ fudffe ttorbetjufommen, o!)ne gefefjen ju tocrben (or : ol)ne baft icfy gefefyen tourbe), I tried to go past without being seen ; but we must say : fucfffe fcorbeijufommen, oftne baft man mi$ fal), I tried to go past without any one's seeing me, because the subjects of the two clauses are different. 277. With other prepositions, the Infinitive or baft clause is represented in the principal clause by the adverb ba pre- fixed to the preposition, as : 3$ begniigte mtcb bamit, tfmmetne Unjufriebenfteit merfen JU laffcn, I was contented with showing him my dissatisfaction. 2 Bir Derlaffert un 3 barauf, baft Sie fommen, We rely on your coming. 3$ fonnte ifm nicfyt baran berfytnbern, auSjngefjen, I could not prevent him from going out (or : his going out). tear eiferfiicfytig barauf, baft fair etngelaben toorben toaren, He was jealous of our having been invited. 322 LESSON XLVI. t§§ 277- 2Bir fe^nett un§ baitadj, ©ie imebcrjufeljcn, We long to see you again. ©r finbet SBergnugen boran, $inber ju ttcdcn, He finds pleasure in teasing children. ©ie argerte ftd^ bariibcv, ba|j ttnr fo f pat famen, She was angry at our coming so late. Remarks. — 1. The preposition ‘of* is often omitted, as: ©ie 9?acf)rid?t, bafj ber griebe unterjeicfynet toorben tear, The news of the peace being (having been) signed. 2. The Infin. clause is only admissible when the subject of the action is the same as in the principal clause (compare § 276, Rem. 2, above). 3. The English Infinitive in -ing, or Gerund, must be carefully distinguished from the Present Participle, with which it has no connection. 4. The genitive or possessive adjective in English before this Gerund will become the subject of the m clause in German, as : She was angry at our coming late, ©ie tear 1)0 [e bariiber, baj$ mlr ju tyat famert. He insisted on his sister’s learning Latin, ©r beftartb barauf, ba§ feme ©rijtocfter Sateirt lernte (lenten foflte). 5. In an indirect question , 0b takes the place of baj$, as : ©3 gefyt rnief) nid)t3 an, 0b er fomtnt ober nic^t, It does not concern me, whether he comes or not. 6. When the Gerund expresses an adverbial relation (time, cause, etc.), it must be expanded into an adverbial clause, as : Before concluding, I shall make one more obser- vation, ($Jje fdjUejje, toerbe id; no$ eine Setnerfung tnac^en. 278] THE INFINITIVE GOVERNED BY PREPOSITIONS. 323 On seeing me, he held out his hand to me, 5113 er tnid) faf), fyiett er mir bie §anb fyin. In persuading others we persuade ourselves, ^ubem tour anbere iibemben, itberreben fair un§ fel&jt 278. The Infinitive in Elliptical Constructions. 1. The Infinitive is used, as in English, in various elliptical constructions, without being dependent on any other word, as : SBarum mtcfy toecfen? Why waken me ? Sftacf) feinem SCu^feljen ju urtetlert, To judge from his appearance. 2. For the Infinitive with the force of an Imperative, see § 269, Rem. 5, above. EXERCISE XLVI. A . 1. Nicht wa,.r, Fraulein B., Sie waren gestern Abend im Konzert? 2. Ja, waren Sie auch dort ? Ich habe Sie nicht gesehen. 3. Das ist gern moglich ; unter so vielen Menschen findet man sich nicht leicht. 4. Der Saal war gedrangt voil, wahrscheinlich weil das Konzert zum Besten des neuen Waisen- hauses gegeben wurde. 5. Nicht allein das, sondern auch weil die neue Sangerin, Fraulein M., zum ersten Male auftrat. 6. Das Publikum schien von ihr ganz entziickt zu sein, und die Zeitungen sind heute Morgen voll ihres Ruhmes. 7. Ich habe nie eine so klare und starke Stimme gehort. 8. In der Arie aus Lohengrin hat sie sich besonders ausgezeichnet. 9. Das Lied von Schubert mit Harfen-Begleitung gehel mir am besten. 10. Frau S. sang auch sehr gut, aber Sie schien ein wemg heiser zu sein. 11. Trotz dem, was die Kritiker sagen, gefiel mir ihr Gesang besser als der von Frl. M. 12. Ich finde auch, dass sie mit mehr Gefiihl singt und dass ihre Stimme geschulter ist. 13. Was halten Sie vom Geigenspiel des Herrn K. ? 14. Es muss sehr gut sein, dem Beifall nach zu urteilen, aber ich ver- 3 2 4 LESSON XLVI. t§§2 7 3- stehe mich nicht auf die Geige. 15. Ich ziehe die Geige jedem andern Instrumente vor. 16. Spielt Ihr altester Bruder nicht die Geige ? 17. Nein, aber er spielt die Flote und begleitet mich oft, wenn ich auf dem Klavier spiele. 18. Ihre Familie ist iiberhaupt sehr musikalisch. 19. Ja wohl, wir spielen fast alle mehr oder weniger. 20. Selbst Ihre kleinen Geschwister ? 21. Ja, Marie spielt die Guitarre, Anna die Geige und Frie- drich nimmt seit einigen Monaten Stunden auf dem Violoncell. 22. Wissen Sie, ob viel fiir das Waisenhaus iibrig bleibt, nach- dem alle Kosten bestritten sind? 23. Etwa ftinf hundert Thaler, doch beabsichtigt man, ein zweites Konzert im Laufe des Winters fur denselben Zweck zu geben. B . 1. Let us (indef.) not return evil for evil. 2. Do what is right, let it cost what it may. 3. The eighth command- ment says that we are not to steal. 4. He was punished for having neglected his duty. 5. The teacher told us we should close our books, we had read enough for the present. 6. Freddy, do you stand, and give your little brother your chair. 7. In German they say of one who buys anything without seeing it that he buys a cat in a bag. 8. Do you care to go for a drive with us ? 9. No, thank you. Do you ride (fafyren); I prefer to walk. 10. Who has left these books lying on the table ? 11. John ; and he says he forgot to take them up. 12. Bid him carry them up immediately into the study, and then let him come down here. 13. Every one thought Mr. N. to be a rich man, but he failed (perf.) lately. 14. I have not a single pen fit to write with, and I have a dozen letters to write. 15. Do not allow yourself to be disturbed by my com- ing ; do not stop writing. 1 6. The beggar, of whom we were speaking in another exercise, passed his youth in idling instead of working. 17. Little Frederick had the misfortune to break an arm while skating, and he was obliged to remain lying in bed a week. 18. Alfred the Great divided the day 28 o ] THE PARTICIPLES. 325 into three parts : one part was devoted to business, the second to reading, praying and studying, and the third to eating, sleeping and pleasure. 19. We wished our friends to come in, but they had no time. 20 . I am glad to have made your acquaintance. 21 . If you go hunting without your father knowing it, he will be very much displeased. 22. Our teacher used to insist on our writing a German exercise every day, and it was impossible for us to neglect this duty without his knowing it. 23. Before going home we must go to visit your old friend L. If you went away without his seeing you, he would be very sorry. 24. We heard some one coming behind us on the street, and we remained standing at the corner to see who it was. 25. Our old neighbour has three sons, but instead of their supporting him, he is obliged to support them. Is he not very much to be pitied ? LESSON XLVII. THE PARTICIPLES. 279 . The Participles are properly Verbal Adjectives, and their uses and constructions are those of Adjectives. There are three Participles, the Present, the Past and the Future- Passive or Gerundive. The English compound Perfect Par- ticiple (e. g., ‘having praised ’) has no corresponding form in German, and must be rendered by a clause (see § 284 , below). 280 . The Present Participle. The Present Participle has active force, and, like the Present Indie., marks a p?'esent or continui?ig state or action, the substaitive which it qualifies being the subject of the action, as: 326 LESSON XLVII. £§§ 280- 5Dct§ ftJjlafenbe $inb, The sleeping child (= ‘the child that sleeps ’). @irte fyaarfiraufienbe ©efcfyicfyte, A story that makes one’s hair stand on end. The Present Participle is for the most part used only attributively, as in the above examples. It is used predica- tively only : (a) When it is a true adjective in function, without any idea of time, as : ©erne $ranff)eit ift rticfyt bebeutcnb, His illness is not serious. SDie ©djonfyeit btefer Sartbfd^aft ift eitfjiiifenb, The beauty of this landscape is enchanting (i. e., delightful). (b) In apposition with the subject (sometimes also with the direct object) of the sentence in which it occurs, when the action of the Participle is simultaneous with that of the principal verb, as : ©id) fcfmell nad) mir umtoenbettb, fal) er ntir in§ ©efidjt. Turning quickly around, he looked into my face. (irrihenb fcfdug fie bie Slugen nieber. Blushing she dropped her eyes. SPreifcnb mit fciel fcfyonett 9teben £$rer Sanber 23ert unb gafyl, ©af$en biele beutfdje gatrften ©nft ju 2Borm§ im ^aiferfaal. (Kerner.) Praising with many fine speeches the worth and num- ber of their territories, many German princes were sitting one day in the Imperial Hall at Worms. Remarks. — 1. This construction is more usual in poetic or exalted diction than in ordinary language, where it is gen- erally replaced by an adverbial clause (see § 284, below). 281 ] the present participle. 327 2. The Present Participle is not used in German, as it is in English, with the auxiliary ‘ to be ’ (see § 31, Rem. 3). 281 . The Past Participle. The Past Participle of a transitive verb has passive force, not necessarily with any distinct reference to past time, as : £)a§ gefiefite $inb, The beloved child (i. e., the child that is or was beloved). But when the participle indicates a single action, it has perfect force, as : gefiofjlcne ^ 3 ferb, The horse which has been stolen. The Past Participle of an intransitive verb has active force, as : £)te 9 Dhtftf fyat aufgeljiirt, The music has ceased. Remarks. — 1. The Past Participle of transitive verbs may be used attributively as well as predicatively, as in the first two examples above. 2. The Past Participle of intransitive verbs conjugated with fein is sometimes used attributively and denotes a state produced by the action of the verb, as : T)a§ toeggefaufenc $ferb, The horse which had run away; but not: 2 )a 3 gelaufene 5 pferb. 3. The Past Participle, like the Present (compare § 280 £, above), may be used predicatively in apposition to the sub- ject (or sometimes to the direct object) of the sentence in which it occurs, as : 2)a§ 3 SoIf, bom ftiirften unferbriitft, emborte fid; gegen ifyn, The people, oppressed by the prince, revolted against him. 328 LESSON XLVII. [§§ 281- 4. For the Past Participle with Imperative force, see §269, 5, 5. The Past Participle replaces the English Present Parti* ciple after fommett to specify the manner of the motion, as : feint gegangen, gelaufcn u. f. to., He came walking, running, etc. 6. After verbs of calling , it is used for the Infinitive, as : 25a§ Ijetf ]t (nertne id£)) fur bie gufunft geforgt, That is (I call that) caring for the future. 7. It also replaces an Infinitive in such phrases as the following : $c£) muj$ fort ! Steber l)ter 2We§ tm ©tiefye gelaffen ! I must go ! Rather (would I) leave everything in the lurch here. (Lessing.) 8. It is used in a few absolute constructions, with or with- out a substantive, which is usually in the accusative when present, as : Sugegeben, baj$ bie3 toafyr ift, Granted that this is true. 9Jteincn ©ruber auSgemmtmcn, toaren atte jugegen, Ex- cept my brother, all were present. 282 . The Future Passive Participle. This Participle, also called the Gerundive, has the form of the Present Part, preceded by ju. It is formed from transi- tive verbs only, and is only used attributively, being replaced in the predicate by an infinitive with ju, as : Sine ju fafiettbe §anbluttg, An act to be praised ; but : ©ine §anblung, toeld;e ju U ben ift. 283 . General Remarks on the Participles. 1. Many words with the form of Participles have the value of adjectives. Some occur as adjectives only (see also § 194, Note), others with a special meaning, as: gelefyrt, learned; befannt, acquainted; berfe^ieben, different; bejafyrt, aged, etc. 284] GENERAL REMARKS ON TIIE PARTICIPLES. 329 2. All Participles (except the Past Part, of some intransitive verbs, see § 281, Rem. 2, above) may be used as pure adjec- tives, and as such may be compared or used as adjectival substantives (see § 122), frequently with concrete meaning, as: ber SReifenbe, the traveller; ber Sefenbe, the man who reads; ber SSorfi^enbe, the chairman; ba3 ©elefene, what one has read. 3. Participles, unless they have become pure adjectives, are used sparingly as adverbs ; but the Participle in apposition (see §§ 280, b ; 281, 3, above) may sometimes be construed as an adverb, e. g. : Sdjtodgcttb brudte er tnir bie §anb, Silently (in silence) he pressed my hand. Remark. — This participial adverb of manner may be replaced by an adverbial clause with irtbem. 4. The Participle, when used attributively, always follows all words qualifying or modifying it, and immediately precedes its substantive ; as predicate, it sometimes, especially in poetry, precedes them (see § 280 b, above), but generally and more correctly follows, as : bon feinen ©Item tunic; geltefilc Stub, The child, dearly beloved by its parents. •Kit ber einen §anb fdjmhntnenb, mit ber anbern ba3 £tnb iiber bem SBaffer cmporljaltenb u. f. in.. Swim- ming with one hand, with the other holding the child above water, etc. ©a3 33 olf, bom fttirften unterbriiift u. f. to., The people, oppressed by the prince, etc. 284. English Participial Constructions. 1. The Present Participle is never used in German, as it so frequently is in English, to express adverbial relations of time 22 330 LESSON XLVII. t§ 284 or cause, and must be replaced, where so used, by a regular adverbial clause, introduced by the proper adverb or con- junction, as follows : (a) To express time, the conjunctions bd, al 3 , ‘when/ inbcm, toaljrenb, ‘while/ must be used, as : Seeing him turn pale, I hastened to his assistance, (al8) id) i t?n erblcid^ert falj, eilte id; ifym jur §ilfe ^erbei. Recovering himself, the orator continued, ^nbctlt er ficfy fammelte, fufyr ber Stebner fort. Remarks. — 1. The English Perfect Participle is replaced by a clause with nadjbeut (or a( 3 ), with the Pluperfect, as : Having examined his papers, they let him go, 9 larf j* bem man feine ^a^iere unterfudffi fyatte, Iiej$ man iljn gefyen. 2. The clause with inbeitt, indicating simultaneous action, may be replaced by a participial clause in the case specified in § 280, b , above. ( b ) To express cause, the conjunctions bd, iltbem, ‘ as/ ‘since/ or luetf, ‘because/ must be used, as : Being an honest man, he may be trusted, SBeil er ein efyrlicfyer 9Jtann ift, fo tann man ifym trauen. Hoping to see you soon, I remain ever yours, ^ttbent id; fyoffe, ©ie balb ju fef>en, Oerbleibe id) ftet 3 ber g^rige. Not having found him at home, I went away, $d id) ifm nicfyt ju §aufe gcfuttben Jjdtte, ging id) fort. 2. The Present Participle qualifying a preceding sub- stantive or pronoun is changed : (a) Into a regular relative elause with finite verb, as : A loaf was found at Herculaneum, still retaining its form, ©in 23 rot ftmrbe ju £>erculamun gefunben, toelcfjeS nod? bie §orm betkljielt. §284] ENGLISH PARTICIPIAL CONSTRUCTIONS. 33 1 The ship, having come straight towards us, showed the black flag, 2)a§ ©cfnff, tt)cltf)C§ gerabe auf un§ jttgcfotnmcn loar, jeigte bie fditoarje glagge. Note. The tense of the verb in the adverbial clause will correspond with that of the principal verb, as shown above, the Pluperfect, however, generally replacing the English Perfect Participles. (£) Into an attributive participial clause, in which the Participle will immediately precede the substantive (see § 283, 4, above), as : A man passing on the street, ©in auf ber Strafte bor* fceigcfjcnbcv -Karan. 3. A Participle preceded by an adverbial conjunction is replaced by a finite clause with the corresponding conjunc- tion, as : While travelling in Europe, we met a great many Americans, fair in ©uropa reiften, trafen fair mit bielen 2lmertfanern jufatnmen. For the Infinitive in -ing, or Gerund, and its German equi- valents, see § 276, above. EXERCISE XLVII. A . 1. Haben Sie Ihr Billet schon gelost? 2. Nein, noch nicht. 3. Dann miissen wir uns beeilen ; wir sollten erst etwas geniessen, ehe wir abreisen. 4. Hier ist der Schalter ; soil ich auch ein Billet fur Sie nehmen ? 5. Danke, ich habe meins schon gelost. 6. Jetzt bin ich fertig, aber wir haben kaum drei Viertelstunden Zeit, bis der Zug abfahrt. 7. Dann miissen wir nachder ersten besten Restauration gehen. 8. Dort driiben ist eine. 9. Das trifft sich gut ; gehen wir gleich hinein. 10. Kellner, wir haben es sehr eilig. 11. Nehmen Sie Platz, meine Herren ; ich werde Sie sofort bedienen ; hier ist die Speise- karte. 12. Geben Sie mir gefalligst einen Teller Suppe. 13. Und Sie, mein Herr? 14. Bringen Sie mir zuerst eine Serviette. 15. Entschuidigen Sie, hier ist sie. 16. Ich nehme 332 LESSON XLVII. [§284 eine Forelle. 17. Bedaure, es ist keine mehr da. 18. Nun, dann bringen Sie mir ein Stuck Lachs. 19. Hier ist die Wein- karte ; trinken die Herren Wein ? 20. Bringen Sie eine Flasche Rotwein und Glaser. 21. Wie schmeckt Ilmen der Fisch? 22. Ausgezeichnet. 23. Diese Suppe schmeckt mir gar nicht. 24. Lassen Sie sich doch Fisch kommen. 25. Ich mache mir nichts aus Fisch ; — Kellner ! 26. Zu Befehl. 27. Eine Portion Entenbraten mit griinen Erbsen. 28. Wiinschen Sie keine Kartoffeln? 29. Jawohl, gebratene Kartoffeln. Brin- gen Sie auch Brot. 30. Noch etwas ? 31. Nein. Was wiinschen Sie, Herr B. ? 32. Bitte, reichen Sie mir die Speisekarte. Ich bestelle mir Kalbskoteletten mit Kartoffeln und gelben Ruben. 33. Sonst noch Gemiise ? 34. Etwas Blumenkohl. 35. Erinnern Sie sich schon frtiher hier gespeist zu haben, Herr B. ? 36. Nicht dass ich wiisste ; die Restauration scheint neu zu sein. 37. Des- halb wird man vielleicht so gut bedient. 38. Ist den Herren etwas gefallig ? 39. Bringen Sie mir eine Portion Eis und eine Tasse Kaffee. 40. Und mir eine Tasse Chocolade und eine Portion Erdbeeren mit Sahne, und schreiben Sie alles auf meine Rech- nung. 41. Hier ist die Rechnung, mein Herr. 42. Wie viel betragt sie ? 43. Sieben Mark funfzig Pfennig. 44. Hier sind acht Mark ; das Ubrige ist Ihr Trinkgeld. 45. Jetzt miissen wir fort ; es hat soeben auf dem Bahnhofe zum ersten Male gelautet. B . 1. A sleeping fox catches no chicken. 2. Sleeping dogs do not bite. 3. The past cannot be helped (changed) ; let us rather think of what is to come. 4. It is much better to think without speaking than to speak without thinking. 5. Man is a speaking animal, a fire-using animal, a laughing animal : these are some of the definitions which have been proposed by philosophers. 6. We learn to speak German in speaking German. 7. Well hit (treffert) ! I call that well played ! 8. I wanted to show you an article in yesterday’s § 284] ENGLISH PARTICIPIAL CONSTRUCTIONS. 333 paper, but it is nowhere to be found. 9. Let me know when you think of coming to town. 10. The skill of ants in the building of their nests is astonishing. 11. Smiling, he began to read the letter, but before having read the half of it, he threw it furiously on the floor. 12. A hussar came galloping down the street and said the battle was beginning. 13. The Paradise Lost of Milton is one of the most important works of English literature ; it was written in the seventeenth cen- tury, but this does not prevent its being still much read. 14. After having been so well received by us, I wonder that he is not ashamed to speak evil of us. 15. The morning was cool and charming, but towards noon the heat became oppressive, and we saw great clouds rising in the west. 16. He says the matter is perfectly clear, but his saying so does not make any difference. 17. He went away complain- ing that there was no use talking to people who did not want to understand. 18. That was because he was angry, and because he had not succeeded in making himself understood (fcerftanblici)). 19. Make no mistakes in copying your exercise, or else a second copying will be your punishment. 20. Besides making mistakes the last time, you wrote very badly. 21. “ The danger to be avoided,” said he, “is not yet past.” 22. Going (bingefyen) to visit our friends in Schiller-street this afternoon, we met them coming to visit us. 23. His being rich is no excuse for his being lazy ; we do not need to be idle merely because we are not forced to earn our bread. 24. A certain man, just before dying, called his sons to him, and told them there was a treasure lying hidden somewhere in his field. 25. Believing they would find it, they began digging everywhere, but without finding the wished-for (ertoimftfrt) treasure. 26. One of them, wiser than the others, finally guessed what his father had meant by having told them this. 27. This son said that since digging the ground the crop had been much better, and that this was the treasure the father meant. 334 LESSON XLVIII. [§285 LESSON XLVIII. CONCORD AND APPOSITION. 285. Concord of Subject and Verb. 1 . The predicate verb (the finite part, or that containing the copula) agrees with its subject in number and person. 2 . Two or more subjects require the verb in the plural, as : 9Jtetn 33ater unb meine Gutter fittb f)ier getoefen, My father and mother have been here. Remarks. — 1 . If the subject nearest to the verb be singu- lar, the verb is sometimes in the singular, especially if the subjects follow the verb, as : ©etne §a£>fucfyt, fetne SebenSart, fetn f)od;fafyrenbe§ SBefen firadjte bte Crbitterung gegen tfm aufS fyod)[te. His avarice, his luxurious mode of living, his arro- gant behaviour, excited the animosity against him to the highest point. (Schiller, Egmonfs Leben und Tod.) Dben bet bem SC£>rorte lag ber $onig unb bte Hontgtn, Above near the throne lay the King and Queen. (Grimm, Dornroschenl) Note. — This is especially the case when the subjects, indicating things or abstract ideas, are regarded as forming together one idea, or are more less synonymous, e. g. : §ttU$ lint) §0f iff Derfauft, House and home are sold. ©eU) uttb ©tit macfjt rtid)t gliid (id), Money and property (=wealth) do not make [one] happy ; or when particular attention is called to the last (as forming a climax), e. g. : SUtein SBermogen, mein 9tuf, mein i*eben fiel)t nicfjt attf bem ©piele, My property, my reputation, my life (the most important of all), are not at stake. S285] CONCORD OF SUBJECT AND VERB. 335 2. If the subjects be of different persons , the verb agrees in person with the first rather than the second or third, and with the second rather than the third, the plural pronoun of the proper person being usually (always with the second per- son) expressed before the verb, as : SDu unb id) (mein 93 ruber unb id)), totr gingen cm 3 . You and I (my brother and I) went out. SDu unb beine ©cfytoefter, iljr frib au*gegangert, You and your sister went out. 3. With titles of rank and compliment the verb is usually in the plural (see also § 49), as : Seine SJJajeftat Ijabcn gerufyt u. f. to., His Majesty has been pleased, etc. 4. Collectives, if singular, take a verb in the singular, unless followed by a plural substantive in apposition or in the geni- tive, as : Sine grofce 5 Ken^enmenge ttmr jugegen ; — but : Sine grof$e 9 Jtenge -Stenfcfjen tomren jugegen, A great number of people were present. Notes. — 1. The singular may also be used in such cases as that given in the second example above, unless the collective is considered with reference to its component parts individually . 2. With nouns of Number in the sing, (see § 185, 1) the verb is used in the plur. only when an indefiitite quantity is meant, as : Gntt jmar (= cittige) Sage ttmrett Dergangett, A few days had passed ; — but : @iit $aar @tiefef foflct fteben Sfyafer, A pair of shoes costs seven dollars. 5. When the real (logical) subject is represented by e§, or some other neut. sing, pron., before the verb (see §§ 39 ; 82, Rem. 2 ; 141), the verb agrees with the logical, not with the grammatical subject, as : @3 fiitb metne SBriiber, It is my brothers. 336 LESSON XLVIII. l§§28 5 - Note. — With a personal pronoun as subject, this follows the verb (see § 39 , 2 ). 6. If the subjects be separated by a disjunctive conjunc- tion or conjunctions, the verb regularly agrees with the last only, but this rule is by no means so strictly observed as in English, even by the best writers, e. g. : £8cbev bie Union nod) bie Stgue tnifcfjtcn fid) in biefen ©treit. Neither the Union nor the league took part in this dispute. ©ottmljl bie Sage aU bie 23efeftigung biefer ©tabt fd)icnen jebem SCngriffe Strotj ju bieten, The situation, as well as the fortification, of this city seemed to defy every attack. (Schiller, 30 jdhriger Krieg.) Notes. — 1. Constructions like the following: (Snttoeber bu ober id) bin taub, Either you or I am deaf, are in German, as in English, felt to be awkward, and are therefore avoided by substituting some other construction, e. g. : (Snttoeber id) bin taub, ober bu bift e$, Either I am deaf, or you are. 2 . The sing, is used after expressions of the time of day, and in the multiplication-table, as : (S3 ifl ;$ef)n 111)1% It is ten o’clock. 3ef)n mat elf iff (mactjt) buubert unb gcf)tt, Ten times eleven is one hundred and ten. 286 . Repetition of Subject. When several connected sentences have a common subject, the subject must be repeated (as pronoun) when the order of the words is changed, as : £er 3^9 fommt um neun Uf)r an, unb fabrt urn fyalb jeljn toieber ab, The train arrives at nine o’clock, and leaves again at half-past nine ; — but : SDer $ug fommt um neun Ufyr an, unb um fyalb jefyn fafjrt er hneber ab. The train arrives at nine o’clock, and at half-past nine it leaves again. a8g] THE APP0S1TIVE SUBSTANTIVE. 33 7 287. Omission of Predicative Verb; §aben and fein, as auxiliaries of tense, may be omitted in a subordinate sentence, as : $Ra$bem fie ben 33rief gelcfctt, Vueinte fie. After she had read the letter, she wept. 288. Other Concords. 1. The Attributive (or Determinative) Adjective agrees with the substantives it qualifies in gender, number and case (for inflections see Less. XX, XXII, XXIV) ; the Predica- tive Adjective has no inflection (see § 14). 2. For the concord of Pronouns and Pronominal Adjectives with their antecedent (in gender, number and person) see §§ 38, Rem. 4; 39 ; 43, Rem. 3, 4; 82, Rem. 1, 2; 83, Rem. 1 ; 86; 95, 1 (£); 162, 2. Note. — A Relative Pronoun referring to an antecedent of the first or second person takes the verb in the third person, unless the relative is followed by the personal pronoun, as stated in § 95, 1 (b), e. g. : 23ift bu eg, ber fo gtttcrt V — or: iBift bu e§, ber bn fo gitterft ? Is it you that tremble ? 289. The Appositive Substantive. 1. A substantive or pronoun may have another substantive attached to it attributively, giving a further description or definition of the person or thing spoken of. This latter sub- stantive is said to be in apposition to the former, as : 2Uein $reunb, her Cefjrer, trug fetne eingige SSaffe, ctticu bitfen ©foef, in* ber §anb, My friend, the teacher, carried his only weapon, a thick stick, in his hand. 2. A substantive or pronoun may also be placed in appo- sition to a sentence or clause, as : @r fagte, ba{$ er toteber ganj gefunb fet, etnc Seljaaptung, toelcfyeid) bejtoeifclte, or: idb bejtoeifelte, He said he was quite well again, a statement which I doubted. 338 LESSON XLVIII. [§§289 3 . The appositive substantive is in the same case as the substantive which it defines, thus : $arl (Nom.), mein jungfter ©ruber, ift Iran!, Charles, my youngest brother, is ill. ©ie $ranfl)eit $arl§ (Gen.), meineS jiingften ©ruberg, The illness of Charles, my youngest brother. Cine gefd^rlid^e £rcmfl)eit brofjte (intr.) $arl (Dat.), met* ncm jungften ©ruber ; or : bebrofyte (trans.) ., The illness of the Crown-Prince, the eldest son, etc. 4 . The appositive substantive generally agrees also in number with the word it defines, except in the case of abstract substantives and collectives, as : CornelienS $inber, if)r Stofj unb ifyre $reube, Cornelia's children, her pride and joy. SDa lebten bie §irten, ein I)armlo3 ®efd)(ccf)t, There lived the shepherds, a harmless race. (Schiller.) 5 . The appositive substantive agrees in gender when there is a special form for the feminine, as : SDie ©rabitation ift bie Senferiit ber ©afyneit alter §im* melSforber, Gravitation is the director of the courses of all heavenly bodies. 6 . These rules are also applicable to an apposition intro* duced by al3, ‘ as,' e. g. : § 289 ] THE APPOSITIVE SUBSTANTIVE. 339 2$ fannte tfyn aU $rtabe (Norn.), I knew him as (when) a boy (i. e., when I was a boy) ; — but : 2d; Jannte iljrt aU $nabeit, I knew him when {he was) a boy. EXERCISE X LV III. A . 1. Konnen Sie mir eine gute Buchhandlung empfehlen? 2 . Was fur Bucher wollen Sie kaufen ? 3. Ich mochte mir die Werke einiger von den besten deutschen Schriftstellern an- schaffen. 4. Sie sollten zu Herrn Braun gehen ; er hat einen sehr groszen Vorrat, besonders von den deutschen Klassikern. 5. Wo ist das Geschaft? 6. Nur einige Schritt(e) von hie r, Nummer fiinf, um die Ecke ; ich werde Sie begleiten. 7. Das ware mir sehr angenehm. 8. Sie scheinen ein groszer Biicher- freund zu sein. 9. Ja, das ist eine Schwache, die mich viel Geld kostet, aber mir auch viel Vergniigen macht. 10. Hier ist der Laden; ich erwarte Sie auf meinem Bureau, wenn Sie fertig sind. 11. Ich danke vielmals fur Ihre Aufmerksamkeit. Also, auf Wiedersehen. 12. Zeigen Sie mir gefalligst einige Exem- plare von Schillers Werken. 13. Gebunden oder ungebunden ? 14. Zeigen Sie mir beides. 15. Aus wie vielen Banden besteht dieses Exemplar? 16. Aus zwolf, und ich mochte Sie auf den ausgezeichneten Druck aufmerksam machen. 17. Der Druck ist sehr klar ; haben Sie noch sonstige (andere) Ausgaben ? 18. Wir haben Ausgaben in groszerem Format', aber nur gebunden. Hier sind sie. 19. Das Format gefallt mir besser, aber ich mag den Einband nicht. 20. Dem ist leicht abzuhelfen. Ich bestelle Ihnen ein Exemplar und lasse es nach Ihrem Ge- schmack einbinden. 21. Gut, ich mochte es in braunem Leder mit Titel gebunden haben ; aber wie viol soli ich Ihnen dafiir bezahlen? 22. Die Ausgabe kostet zehn Thaler, der Ein- band fiinf. 23. Bekomme ich Rabatt'? 24. Ja, zehn Prozent gegen bare Bezahlung. 25. Ich bezahle bar; das macht zwei und vierzig Mark. 26. Wiinschen Sie noch etwas ? 27. Ich 340 LESSON XLVIII. [§§ 289- mochte auch Goethes sammtliche Werke in demselben Format und Einband haben. 28. Es thut mir leid, dass wir keine mehr haben, aber ich kann sie bestellen und gleich mit der anderen Ausgabe einbinden lassen. 29. Zum selben Preise? 30. Nein, es wird mit Einband achtzehn Thaler netto betragen. 31. Dann besorgen Sie es gefalligst, und schicken Sie mir die Werke nebst Rechnung an diese Adresse ; hier ist meine Karte. 32. Ich besorge alles aufs Sorgfaltigste ; binnen acht Tagen sollen Sie die Bucher haben. B. 1. “Books,” said Alfonso the Wise of Spain, “are my most honest councillors : neither fear nor hope prevents them telling me what my duty is.” 2. “It is not my courtiers,” said this king, “ who tell me most honestly what my duty is , it is my books.” 3. “No courtier dares to say to a king: ‘ Your Majesty is wrong,’ but my books tell me so every day.” 4. I asked a gentleman standing near me, if he knew what time it was, and he answered me that it was exactly twelve o’clock. 5. More than two hours have passed since then, so it must now be between two and three o’clock. 6. Was it you that came to see me yesterday, when I was away from home ? 7. Yes, my brother and I wanted to visit you, and we were sorry not to find you at home. 8. Margaret, the eldest daughter of Henry VII. of England, married James IV. of Scotland. 9. These were the grand-parents of Mary Stuart, Queen of Scotland. 10. To do what_is w right, and to be happy, is one and the same, for virtue is its own reward. 11. Dear father and mother, do you remain sitting here until I go for a carriage to drive you home, for I know you are too tired to walk. 12. Twelve and twelve make twenty-four, and twelve times twelve is one hundred and forty-four. 13. After having seen London and Paris, we had not much desire to see other cities. 14. I wrote to K., inviting him to pass his holidays with us, and by return of post received a letter, 290 ] THE APPOSITIVE ADJECTIVE. 341 saying we might expect him in a fortnight. 15. I asked you first as my oldest friend to assist me in this embarrassment. 16. I know we should avoid asking our friends for help until we have done our utmost to help ourselves. 17. The hunts- man whistled, and his dogs came running from the wood. 18. Our teacher was^in^the w habit w of telling us we should do what was right, let it cost what it would. 19. Is your teacher still living? Yes, he is still living, but he is getting very old now. 20. Goethe and Schiller are the two greatest poets of Germany : it is difficult to say which of the two is most beloved by the German people. 21. If you think we are right, give us some sign of approval : a word, a smile, a glance will suffice. 22. All the rest of our party arrived at the top of the mountain before sunset, but my friend and I arrived only at nine in the evening. 23. Expect us on Thurs- day next, health and weather permitting. 24. The gentleman coming out of that shop is Dr. B., and the lady accompanying him is his niece, Miss L. 25. Did you ever see the Emperor William ? I have never seen him as Emperor of Germany, but I saw him many years ago as King of Prussia. LESSON X L I X. APPOSITION (continued):- APPOSITIVE ADJECTIVES. - ? SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION. 290. The Appositive Adjective. i. Attributive Adjectives and participles are said to be used appositively when they are separated from their substan- tive, as : ®er $age, jmtrj, IjuSfdj unb geiftreidj, Wax bev Stebling be3 §aufe3, The page, young, handsome and clever, was the favourite of the house. 342 LESSON XLIX. [§290 Ign ber ©$lad;t fcurig unb furdjffog, Wax -Konmoutfy fonft uberatt VDeid;Iic£> unb unfcfduffig, Ardent and intrepid in battle, Monmouth was everywhere else effeminate and irresolute. 2. This appositive adjective or participle is, like the pre- dicate adjective, uninflected, and is placed at the end of its clause. It is used much more sparingly in German than in English, and is almost wholly confined to apposition with the subject of the sentence (sometimes also with the direct object ). In English the attributive adjective or participle is generally used appositively when it has more than one modifier, and always when it has a complement (as in the second example above). In German on the contrary the attributive adjective is freely used in all such cases before a substantive. Ail such appositive adjectives or participles, unless referring to the subject (or direct object) of the sentence, must be rendered in German either by an attributive or by a relative clause. The following examples will serve to illustrate to what extent the appositive adjective can be used in German, and to show how it is to be replaced in German in various connections. (a) English Appositive = German Appositive (see also the examples under 1, above) : (Engl.) Beleaguered with present distresses and the most horrible forebodings on every side, roused to the highest pitch of indignation, yet forced to keep silence and wear the face of patience, Schiller could endure this constraint no < longer. (Carlyle, Life of Schiller.) (Germ.) SSon gegentoartigen Stfbten unb ben fcfyrecflicf)ften Slfjnungen bon affen ©eiten bis auf ben l;od)ften ©rab entriiftet, gejitmttgctt jebocb, ftittjus fd^oeigen unb bie 9Jia3fe ber ©ebulb ju iragen, fonnte ©emitter biefen nid&t Ifinger erbulben. § 290 ] THE APPOSITIVE ADJECTIVE. 343 Note. — In this example, as in those under I. above, the adjectives (participles) beleaguered , etc., are in apposition to the subject * Schiller/ (b) English Appositive Adjective = German Attributive Adjective or Relative Clause : OH (Engl.) To judge from the quantity of light emitted from the brightest stars, there is (one has) reason to suppose that some of them are much greater than the sun. (Germ.) $Kae fcerurfarfjte gmfterniS fo ttef, ftie man , nie etfta§ 2tf)nlicf)e^ toafyrgenommen tyatte. Note. — Although the participle ‘occasioned’ is here in apposition to the subject ‘darkness,’ yet the position of the subject after the verb for- bids the use of the appositive construction in German, as also in the following sentence : ..... ( {Engl.) It was a place advantageous for defence. ^ 1 ' ( {Germ.) mar eine jur SSerteibigurtg giittfiige ©telle. {d) English Appositive Adjective = German Relative Clause : {Engll) This plant has changed into two distinct vegetables, as unlike each other as is each of . them to the parent-plant. {Germ.) ©iefe ^flanje fyat fid? in §tx>ei fcerfcfytebene ©e* miifearten bertoanbelt, mcfrije einanber fo uttiiljnUcfj finb, hue jebe berjelben ber SWutter^flanje ift. Note. — Here the attributive construction is inadmissible on account of the subsequent clause tnte jebe U. \. It). 291. Syntax of the Prepositions. The cases governed by the various Prepositions are fully treated of in Lessons IX, XIII, A, and XXXVIII, and their idiomatic use is further defined in Less. XXXIX. The object of many verbs, as well as that of substantives and adjectives corresponding with them in signification, is ex- pressed by prepositions. The proper use of prepositions after verbs, etc., must be learnt from practice and from the dictionary ; but below is given, for convenient reference, the regimen of particular classes of verbs, etc., which differ most widely from their English equivalents. SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 345 *9i] i. at, of = lifter -f” Acc., of sorrow , joy, wonder , etc., as: Verbs . fid) argent, be vexed erroten, blush erftaunen, be astonished fid) freuen, rejoice fi$ grdmett, grieve flagen, complain lacfyen, laugh ftd^ fd;amen, be ashamed fyotten, mock fid; (t)er)ft)imbern, wonder Substantives . 2 trger, vexation ©rrotung, blush ©rftaunen, astonishment $reube, joy (also an 4 " Dat.) ©ram, grief $lage, complaint ©elad;ter, laughter ©d)am, 93efcf)dmung, shame ©!pott, mockery 23erft>unberung, surprise Also the Adjectives cirgerlid;, vexed ; bofe, angry (at things ); * etrtpfinblicfy, sensitive ; frof), tuftig, merry. Note. — 23ofe takes auf + Acc. when referring to persons. 2 . for = auf + Acc., of expectation, etc., as : gefaftt, pre- pared ; fyoffen, §offnung, hope ; toarten, wait. 3 . for = nadj, of longing, inquiring, etc., as : Verbs . Substantives . biirften, thirst forfcfyen, inquire fyungern, hunger jagen, hunt fucfyen, search fid; fefynen, long berlangen, desire ©urft, thirst gorfcfyung, inquiry hunger, hunger gagb, chase SlnjoJ desire Also the Adjectives burftig, thirsty ; efyrgeijig, ambitious ; gie* rig, greedy ; fyungrtg, hungry. 4. for = um, of entreaty, etc., as : bitten, ask ; bublen, court ; flefyen, beg ; ficfy fiimmern, concern one’s self. 23 346 LESSON XLIX. [§ 291 5. from = bur -f- Dat., of protection, etc., as : betoal)ren, preserve ; fyiitert, protect ; retten, save. 6. in = ait + Dat., of plenty , want , etc., as: arm, poor; frud)tbar, fruitful; reid), rich; fdfhuadE), weak; ftarf, strong. 7. in or on = auf + Acc., of confidence , etc., as : Verbs . Substantives . fid) briiften, boast fid) berlaffert, rely bertrauert, trust ©tolj, pride 33erlaf$, reliance SBertrauen, confidence 8 . of = ait + Dat., of plenty , want , doubt , etc., as : Verbs. Substantives. fetylen (impers.), ) , want - Mangel, want mangeln “ \ ® Steicfytum, wealth jtoeifeltt, doubt Uberflufs, superfluity berjtoeifeln, despair gtoeifel, doubt Also the Adjectives Iran!, sick ; leer, empty. 9. of = att + Acc., of remembrance , etc., as : Verbs. Substantives . benfen, think ©ebanfe, thought erinrterrt, remind ©rinnerung, recollection fidf) erinnern, recollect Note. — These verbs also govern the Genitive. See § 245. 10. of = attf + Acc. of suspicion, envy, pride, etc., as* S ubstantives. Adjectives. StdEit ( gebeit), (pay) attention acf)tfam, ) atten tive 2trgft>ofyn, suspicion aufmerffam, J ©ferfudjt, jealousy argfttoljnifcl), suspicious iJteib, envy eif erfucf)tig, jealous eitel, vain tteibtfcfy, envious ftolj, proud 291] SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 347 ii. of = Dor + Dat., of fear , etc., as : ficfy fiird^tert, be afraid „ erfcfjrecfen, be terrified n grauen, dread Verbs. Substantives . gurcfff, fear ©cfyrecf, terror ©rauert, dread Also the adjectives Bcmge, afraid ; fielder, certain, sure. 12 . to = att + Acc., of address , etc., as: abreffieren, ad- dress; fdjreiben, write; ft$ ricf)ten, turn; ft d) toenben, apply. 13. to = gcgen, after Adjectives signifying an affection of the mind , as : barmfyerjtg, merciful ; femblid), hostile ; freunbs lid), friendly; gerecfyt, just; gleicfygiltig, indifferent; gndbig, gracious; graufam, cruel; rtadf)fid^ttg, indulgent. 1. My sister is vexed at not receiving an invitation to the party. 2. I am tired of waiting for Charles; let us go without him. 3. Oh no, do not let us go yet ; he will be angry at us, if we do not wait for him. 4. Charles has many good qualities, but you cannot rely upon him. 5. The boy is proud of the watch given to him by his father. 6. If you lose your way in a city, it is always safest to apply to a policeman. 7. I have no doubt that this is good advice. 8. Mary is angry at Sarah, because Sarah has made sport of her. 9. Our neighbour has been ill for some days ; he complains of rheuma- tism, and says he has caught cold. 10. I am less vexed at his not coming than at his not sending us word. 11. The war had already lasted more than four years, and people were long- ing for peace. 12. Diogenes is said to have gone once in day- light through the streets of the city, carrying at the same time a lantern. 13. People began to laugh at him and mock him, asking him what he was looking for. 14. He replied that he was looking for an honest man. 15. The general postponed attacking the enemy, because his army was weak in artillery. EXERCISE XL IX. 348 LESSON L. [§§ 292 ' 16. Mr. Kalk, the architect, promised that my house should be finished before the 1st July, but I doubt it. 17. The Province of Ontario is rich in iron, but is wanting in coal to smelt it. 18. We have been thinking for some time of selling our house, but we cannot find anyone who is willing to buy it. 19. Be good enough to remind me to buy some postage-stamps, when we go past the post-office. 20. We may learn as much by pay- ing attention to what we see and hear as we can learn from books. 21. The horses, frightened by a passing train, shied, and were on the point of running away. 22. The first settlers in this country had much to endure : they lived for the most part in houses built of [the] trunks w of w trees and covered in many cases with bark. 23. (Just) as many people lost their lives (the life) by the famine occasioned by the earth- quake, as by the earthquake itself. 24. The bad news re- ceived yesterday has prevented our going to town to-day. 25. There are men who grow richer by giving than others [do] by receiving. LESSON L. WORD-ORDER. 292 . The Essential Parts of a Sentence. i. Every sentence contains three essential parts, viz : the Subject, or that of which something is asserted, the Predi- cate, or that which is said of the Subject, and, thirdly, the Verb or Copula, the word which makes the assertion, and which may include the Predicate (as in the simple tenses of a verb), but does not necessarily do so. Thus, in the sen- tence : 4 He sings/ 4 he ’ is the Subject , while 4 sings 9 contains both the Verb or Copula and the Predicate , i. e., it not only asserts something of the Subject, but also says what that something is, being equivalent to 4 is singing. 1 In the sen- 2 93 J POSITION OF THE VERB. 349 tence : ‘ He has sun g,’ on the other hand, 4 has * is the Verb (or Copula) , ‘ sung ’ is what is asserted, or the Predicate . 2. The Verb (or Copula) is in German the member of the sentence, the position of which is most absolutely fixed ; it is the cardvial point or hinge on which the sentence turns. 293 . Normal Position of the Verb. In German, there are three normal positions for the Verb, according to the nature of the sentence. (a) The Verb stands first : 1. In Interrogative Sentences expecting the answer ‘yes 9 or ‘ no 9 (i. e., when the verb is the question-word, see § 23, 2), as: 3 ft Sfyr 23ruber toofyl? Is your brother well? 8®:rb er fommen? Will he come? ©te $arl? Is your name Charles? 2. In sentences expressing a command or wish, as : ©efudjett ©ie micfy morgen, Come^and w see me to- morrow. 2£are icfy ju §aufe! Were I (would that I were) at home ! Note. — The verb may either follow or precede the subject in the 3. Sing. Subj. used as Imperative (see § 268, 1), as: ©ott bel)iite bid) ! or: SBefyiite bid) ©ott! God preserve thee! 3. In Conditional clauses, when the conjunction toenn is omitted (compare § 59), as : SCiirc ba§ 2 Setter fd) 5 n, fo toiirbe id) au 3 geben, If the weather were fine, I should go out. ( b ) The Verb comes second (is the second idea) in all principal assertive sentences (compare § 20), as: ®er 2Jlenf$ ift fterblid), Man is mortal. 350 LESSON L. [§ 293 $)er jungere 33ruber metneS 33ater§, toelcfyer fo franf toav, ifi tot. My father's younger brother, who was so ill, is dead. ©eftern Slbenb ffarfi ber 23ruber meine§ 23ater3, Yesterday evening my father’s brother died. (Softool (rttc^t nur) mein 23ater, toie (fonbern aucf)) mein 23ruber taar jugegert, Both (not only) my father, and (but also) my brother were (was) present. Remarks. — 1 . As in the last three examples above, the first member of the sentence may be complex, with several attributes, complements, etc. ; the verb is still the second idea. 2 . The coordinating conjunctions proper (§ 236 ) do not count as members of the sentence (see the last example above), but adverbial conjunctions throw the subject after the verb. Note. — Certain adverbial phrases, of a more or less inter jectional nature, such as: freilid), true; ja, yes; ja tt)ol)I, to be sure; neilt, no; furjh in short ; mit einent 28ort, in a word; gilt, well, are not regarded as part of the sentence, and do not throw the subject after the verb, thus : SfreUtdj, id) Ijabe e8 nid)t fetbft gefeljen, True, I did not see it myself. fiutj (mit cittern Sort), id) glau&e e§ nidjt, In short (in a word), I do not believe it. ®ut, id) toerfce fomnten, Well, I shall come. 3 . In assertive sentences of an emphatic or exclamatory character, the verb sometimes comes first, especially when the particle bod) is present, as : 3ft ba§ eirt ^Better! (— 2Ba§ fiir ein 2Better ift ba§!) What weather ! g>abc id/3 bir bad) gefagt ! I told you so ! 4 . If a dependent clause or a quotation precede the prin- cipal sentence (compare § 294 , b , Rem. 2 , below), such clause or quotation is regarded as a single member of the sentence, and requires the verb immediately after it, as: § a 93l POSITION OF THE VERB. 35 * ®a id) fclbft nicfjt fommen fonnte, fc^icfie id) metnen ©ofyn, As I could not come myself, I sent my son. 2113 id) anfarn, tear e3 fd;on nad) 10 Uljr, When I arrived, it was after io o’clock. SBenn er fommen follte, teerbc id) ju §aufe fetn, If he should come, I shall be at home. ,,%d) toill tnetne 2fufgabe nicfyt lernen/' ferric ber unarfige $nabe, “ I will not learn my lesson,” cried the naughty boy. Notes. — i. After dependent conditional and adverbial clauses (except those of time) the particle fo usually introduces the principal sentence, as : id) nid)t felbft fommen fonnte, fo fdjidte id) meinett ©obit. SSenit er fommen follte, fo merbe id) §aitfc fein. 2 . This particle (0 should always be inserted after a conditional clause with toenn omitted ; in colloquial usage, however, the principal sentence sometimes has the subject before the verb, fo being omitted, as: 2Bare er fniljer gcfommeit, fo fy*tte er mid) gefeben ; or (colloquially) : SBdre er friiber gefommen, er pife mid) gefeben. This latter construction, however, should not be imitated. 3. In proportional clauses introduced by je, tlcjlo, or uutfo, the depen- dent clause comes first, and the verb is preceded by the word expres- sing the comparison, as well as by the particle je, etc., as : 3 e longer bie 9 ?adjte ftnb, fceflo f firmer ftnb bie £age, The longer the nights are, the shorter are the days. ( c ) The Verb is last in dependent sentences and ques- tions (compare §§ 32 ; 88), as : %d) toeijs, ber SDlenfd) fterblief) iff, I know that man is mortal. Gin SOlcmn, tecldjcr geftern fyier tear, A man, who was here yesterday. %dtj g efye, uiciC e3 fd)on fpdt iff, I go because it is late. 3$ toeij$ nicf)t, teer fyter getoefen iff, I do not know who has been here (dep. question ). 352 LESSON L. [§§293' Remarks. — i. Indirect statements with baft omitted have the construction of principal sentences (verb second ; see §§ 20; 87, 3), as: @r fagte, er ftabc e§ bergeffert, He said he had forgotten it. 2. Conditional clauses with ftenn omitted follow the question-order (verb first ; compare § 59), as : 2®5re ba§ -Setter fcfydn, fo ftriirbe tcfy au^geben, If the weather were tine, I should go out. 3. The Verb precedes two infinitives (or infinitive and part.; see § 199, 3), as in the compound tenses of Modal Auxiliaries, thus : @r fagte, baft er nicf jt Ijalic footmen tootten, He said that he had not intended to come. 4. Clauses with bcmt (—‘unless/ § 241, 18), having negative force, follow the construction of a principal sentence (verb second ), as : 3d) laffe nid)t, ®u fcgttcfi mid) bcmt, I will not let Thee go, unless Thou bless me. 3$ toerbe nid)t fommen, c£ fci bctttt, baft ba3 2Better fd)on toerbe, I shall not come, unless (it be that) the weather should become fine. 5. §aben and fein, as auxiliaries of tense, are frequently omitted at the end of a dependent clause, as : @r leugnete, baft er ba3 $ertfter gerhrod^ert (Ijabe under- stood), He denied that he had broken the window. 3d) fragte tf>rt, ob er jur red)ten 3eit angefommen (jet understood), I asked him if he had arrived in good time. 29 4. Position of the Subject. The Subject is placed : (a) In Direct Questions, if it be the question-word, at the beginning ; otherwise immediately after the Verb, as: 294 ] POSITION OF THE SUBJECT. 353 8$cr ift fyier getoefen? Who has been here? 3 ft cr Ijter getoefen? Has he been here ? SBann fommt %f)Xt ©cfjtticftcr? When does your sister come ? ( b ) In Principal Assertive Sentences, the normal po- sition of the Subject is first ; but if any other word precede the Verb, the Subject immediately follows the Verb , as : 3cf) toerbe morgen ni$t auSgetyen.; or : 2Jlorgen toerbe id) nicfyt au^gefyen, I shall not go out to- morrow. Remarks. — i. In point of fact it may be said that, in a principal sentence, the Subject follows the Verb quite as often as it precedes it. 2. A preceding dependent clause, or a quotation, always throws the subject after the verb, except when, after a con- ditional clause with ttiCttn omitted, the principal sentence is not introduced by the particle fo (compare § 293, 4, Note 2, above). 3. When the real ( logical ) subject is represented by before the verb as grammatical subject, the logical subject immediately follows the verb, as : @3 ift tncittc ©cfjtncficr getoefen, It was my sister. ( V ) In Dependent Sentences, the Subject, if a relative pronoun, begins the sentence, otherwise the Subject imme- diately follows the connecting word, as : 2 ) er -Kami, tt)dd)er gefterrt fyier toar, The man who was here yesterday. 3 ) er 9 Jtarm, ben id) geftern falj, The man, whom I saw yesterday. 3$ fagte iljr, bafj idj fornmen toerbe, I told her that I should come. 354 LESSON L. [§§ 294 - Note. — Personal Pronouns, and especially the reflective ft d), some- times precede the Subject, both in principal sentences with the Subject after the Verb, and in dependent clauses, as : 2)fc>rgen trill ftd) mein SBruber rerfyciraten, My brother is going to get married to-morrow. ($r fagte, bag ifjn biefer Sftenfd} beleibigt fyabe, He said that this fellow had insulted him. 295. Position of the Predicate. 1. The Predicate, if not included in the Verb (see § 292, 1, above), may consist of a participle or infinitive (as in the compound tenses of the verb) ; or it may be a substantive, an . adjective, or the separable prefix of a compound verb. 2. The Predicate is placed last in Principal Sentences and in Direct Questions ; in Dependent Sentences it immediately precedes the Verb. 3. If the Predicate is compound, consisting of two or more of the elements under 1, above, they will occur in the follow- ing order: 1. Predicative adjective (or substantive) ; 2. Sep- arable prefix; 3. Participle; 4. Infinitive; thus: Pred. Adj. 6r foil ftets gegen fctnert armen Sruber feljr frctgciiig Part. Inf. gctoejClt feht, He is said to have always been very liberal to his poor brother. Pref. Part. Inf. ©te ftiirbe fcfjort geftern ah 5 gereift fciit, She would have departed yesterday. Remark. — Any one of these elements of the Predicate may, for emphasis, occupy the normal position of the subject in the first place ( before the Verb), as : ©djiht iff ba3 ^Setter fyeute m d)t, The weather is not (at all) fine to-day (i. e., it is far from fine). 29 &] POSITION OF THE PREDICATE. 355 (golim t ift mein ©ruber, nicfyt 9Jtatrofe, My brother is a soldier, not a sailor. (Singcn toiH id) tootyl, aber nid)t fyielen, I will sing, but not play. Note. — The Separable Prefix and the Participle are, however, rarely placed in this position, except in elevated or poetic diction, or for con- trast, as: Uhefccr fieig’ id) sum ©efedjte, I descend (down I go) to the fight. (Schiller.) gmitifc btcibt ber $tta|)pett £rof$, The retinue of squires remains behind {ibid.). (£ntid)!cffcn ift cr alfobalb, He is resolved at once {ibid.). ©egebcn ()abe id) il)m ba§ $8ud) rtid)t, fonbern nur gelieljen, I did not give him the book, I only lent it to him. 296. Position of Objects and Cases. 1. Objects (not governed by a preposition) precede adjects (objects governed by a preposition), as : babe einen ©rief an iljn (an meinen ©ater) gefcfyrieben, I have written a letter to him (to my father). 2 . Pronouns (unless governed by prepositions) precede substantives, as : 2 >d) Ijabe tfjm etnen ©rief gefcfyrieben, I have written him a letter. 3 . Of Pronouns, Personal before other Pronouns, as : 3 a£>e 3 ljm (Sdjtocjkr ba£ 33 ud) gelieljen, I have lent your sister the book. Gr £;at bicfcit SRattn be 3 ©iebftatyfe befd^ulbigt. He has accused this man of theft. 6. The personal (or subjective) Genitive (compare § 243, 2) may either precede or follow the substantive which governs it, as : ®Jehte§ ©ater£ My father's house ; or : 3 )a 3 nteineS 83 ater£. 7. The limiting Genitive (see § 243, 3) follows, except in elevated or poetic diction, as : 35 a 3 Gnbe $ricgc§, The end of the war. 8. Cases governed by adjectives precede the adjective, but a substantive with a preposition may follow the predicative ad- jective, as : 3d) bin iljm banfbar fur feme SBetmiljunijen, I am grate- ful to him for his exertion. 297. Position of Adverbs and Adverbial Expressions. 1. In general, adverbs precede the word they modify, as : 3d) bin feljr miibe getoorben, I have become very tired. Gr I)at ba£ 33 ud) nidjt gelefen, He has not read the book. 2. Adverbs of Time precede objects (except pronouns) and all other Adverbs or Adverbial expressions, as : Time. Object. Place. Manner. Gr I)at geftern ba 3 33 u$ 311 §aufe fef>r fleifcig ftubiert, He studied the book very diligently at home yesterday. 2g8] POSITION OF ADVERBS, ETC. 357 3. Adverbs of place precede those of manner, and both follow objects, as in the above example. 4. Of several Adverbs of like kind, the more general precede the special, as : SJJorgcn um jel?n W?r, At ten o’clock to-morrow. Remarks. — 1. Any object, adject, adverb or adverbial phrase may occupy the normal position of the subject at the head of a principal sentence (before the verb, compare § 295, Rem., above), as : SBeinen SSater I?abe id? nicfyt gefefyen, I did not see my father. ©eftcw fam id? ju fpat, I came too late yesterday. 2. The relative position of objects, abverbs, etc., is the same in principal and subordinate sentences. 298 . Position of other Members of the Sentence. 1. Attributive Adjectives and Participles immediately precede the substantive they modify, as : ©in jur 23 erteibigung fef?r gimftiger Drt, A place very favourable for defence. auf bcm §ligel fteljenbe§au 3 , The house standing on the hill. 2. Prepositions precede their case, with the exceptions given in the lists (see §§ 46 ; 51 ; 223). 3. Conjunctions come between the words or clauses they connect, as : 9 Jtein 33 ruber urb feine $amitie finb I?ier, My brother and his family are here. %&) toeifc, baft Sie nicfyt fommen toerben, I know that you will not come. 358 LESSON L. [§§ 298 - Note. — In dependent clauses that precede the sentence on which they depend the conjunction is first, as: SBcil id) franf Wav, fonnte id) nid)t fommett, Because I was ill, I could not come. 299 . Construction of Incomplete Clauses. The Word-order of Incomplete or Elliptical Clauses is the same as that of Complete Clauses, there being no Verb in the former. In Infinitive Clauses the Infinitive comes last ; and in Appositive Clauses, the Adjective or Participle comes last, thus : ©ute greunbe (jtt) {jafien ift etn grofceS ©liicf, To have good friends is a great blessing. £)ie $unft in D 1 jit tnalett, The art of painting in oil. Scf) toerbe micfy freuen, ©ie morgen ju fcljeit, I shall be glad to see you to-morrow. ®te§ bet mtr benfcnb, fcfjlief i$ etn. Thinking all this to myself, I fell asleep. SSon bem £arm ttufgefdjrecft, fprartg er au§ bem Sette, Aroused by the noise, he jumped out of bed. 300 . Interrogative Sentences. 1. Direct Questions always begin with the question-word, the other members of the sentence occupying the same relative position as in principal sentences. For the position of the Verb and Subject, see §§ 293, 294, above. 2. Questions in German very frequently have the form of a principal assertive sentence, the question being marked only by the rising inflexion of the voice, as : 3 )u m betne Seftion nicfyt gelernt? You have not learnt your lesson ? Notes. — 1. This construction often occurs with a food) in the sen* tence, as : INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 359 3 01 1 2 )u ttrirfl food) fornmen? You will be sure to come (will you not?). (Sr ift fcod) nicf)t Iran? ? He is not ill (is he ? I hope not). 2. Exclamatory sentences frequently have the construction of depen- dent questions, but may also have that of direct questions, as : 2 Ber tnitgeljen fciirfte ! (Happy he) who might go with you! SBie if! ba8 ^Better fcfjoil.! How beautiful is the weather! RECAPITULATION. 301 . General Remarks on German Construction. The following are the principal points in which German differs from English Construction : 1. The Verb (containing the Copula) is the hinge on which the sentence turns, and has its position most absolutely fixed. 2. The Subject does not, as in English, necessarily precede the Verb in Principal Sentences ; but if any other member of the sentence precede the Verb, an inversion of the subject takes place, and it is thrown after the verb. Notes. — i. The terms inversion , inverted sentence , often used by grammarians, refer to the Subject only, not to the Verb. 2. This inversion of the Subject is also found in Interrogative and Imperative Sentences (see §§ 293; 294; 300, above). 3. The relative rank of sentences is marked by the varying position of the Verb, which is last in Dependent Sentences. 4. All the other parts of the sentence, except what precedes the Verb, are included or bracketed between the Verb and the Predicate. 5. Dependent Sentences (including Infinitive and Appositive Clauses; see § 299, above) are marked off from the sentences on which they depend by commas. 360 SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON G. [§§ 302 - SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON G. COMPLEX SENTENCES.— CLAUSE-ORDER. 302. Compound and Complex Sentences. 1. A sentence is compound when it contains more than one coordinate clause; complex when it contains a subordinate clause, thus : Compound : 3d) giitg ait if)tn ttorbei, fanute iljn aber nid)t, I went past him, but did not know him. Complex : (Er f agte mir, bag er fommen merbe, He told me that he would come. 2. Any subordinate clause may itself be complex, having another clause dependent upon it, as : 3d) erroartete ifjit geftern, toctl er mir gefdjriebeit Ijatte, hag feme ©efdjafte balb bcenbigt feitt miirben, I expected him yesterday, because he had written me, that his business would soon be finished. Note. — In the above example, the clause roeil er, etc., depends on the principal clause preceding it; whereas the clause baft feine ©efdjafte, etc., depends on the clause tueit er, etc., which is itself subordinate. Remark. — In the following observations as to the relative position or order of clauses, the term “ principal sentence ” includes all sentences, though themselves subordinate, which occupy the relation of a principal or governing sentence to the clauses dependent upon them. 303. 1. In Complex Sentences, the position of the various depen- dent clauses is regulated by the following general principle ; Finish the principal sentence before introducing the sub- ordinate clause. 2. Thus, in the example in § 302, 2, above, it would be wrong to insert the last clause (bag . . . lufirbeit) within the preceding clause on which it depends, thus : SBeil er mir, bag feine ©efdjdfte beenbigt fein mfirben, ge(d)rieben Ijatte. 3. Similarly the following construction would make the complex sen- tence quite unintelligible ; 2)ie ©cmofynfyeit mug bie gertigfeit eine ©ad)e oljne fiber bie 9?egel gu benfett ju ttjun DerleUjett. The observance of the above rule will require the clauses of this sen- tence to be arranged as follows : 3°sl COMPOUND AND COMPLEX SENTENCES. 36 1 ®ie ®erocf)nl)eit ntufj bic gertigfeit bcrltiljcn, ehie @acf)e ju tljun, oBne iibcr bie fReget nadpubenfen, Habit (practice) must bestow the readiness of doing a thing without reflecting upon the rule. 4 . In the following sentence, again, the isolation of the separable prefix is very objectionable : Reiter ging bie ©onne an jenem Sftorgen, an bent tnir abreiften, auf, The sun rose cheerfully on that morning on which we set out. The prefix auf should be inserted after Sftorgen. 304:. Appositive Clauses, must, however, stand immediately after the particular part of the sentence to which they refer, as: 2>ie ^riefterin, tton iljvcr (Bfittin felbfl gcto&Blet uni) gefjeiligt, fprtd)t ^n bir, The priestess, chosen and consecrated by the goddess herself, speaks to thee. 2Ba3 fonnen huv, etn fd)U3adr~3 $olr bev §irten, gegen 9ttbred)t3 §ecre ? What can we, a weak people of herdsmen, [do] against Albert’s hosts ? 3 d) f)abc itjm biefen ^eBter, imfe cr j etsc §anblung nufj-mtfe, fdjon oft bovgeittorfen, I have often reproached him with this mis- take of misinterpreting every action. 3d) fomtte bie grage, oh Ixstr famen, nic^t beantiuorten, I could not answer the question, whether we were coming. 305. Relative Clauses must immediately follow the antecedent : (a) When the latter (whether subject or not) precedes the verb of a principal sentence, as : 3)er Sftann, toeldjer geflcrn tsar, ift B^ute ttnebergefontmen, The man who was here yesterday came again to-day. 2)en 9ftann, lucld-er geflern Bier tear, Babe id) nid)t gefannt, I did not know the man, who was here yesterday. Note. — If the antecedent does not precede the verb, the relative is introduced after the conclusion of the principal sentence, except as under (3), below, thus : £eute ift ber 9Jtann tmebergefommen, tncldjer u. f. m. 3d) f> abe ben 'JJiann nid)t gefannt, roeld^er u. f. tn. (&) When their separation from the antecedent would cause ambi- guity, as: ©eftern Babe id) trteinen gh’eunb, ben id) tange nirf)t gefeBen, bei meinetn Gruber getroffen, Yesterday I met at my brother’s my friend, whom I had not seen for^a^long^time. Note. If the relative clause were placed after the conclusion of the principal sentence, the relative ben might refer to 93ruber. 24 3<32 SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON G. [§305 306 . A Subordinate or Dependent Clause (with the exceptions specified in Remarks 3, 4, below) may also, whether subjective, objective or adverbial, precede the principal clause, in which case it throws the Subject after the Verb, as: Oft iff) fommen faun [subjective clause ), iff gmeifelfyaft, It is doubtful whether I can come. SRkv gar 3 it lief fcethnft [subjective clause ), nnrb toentg fetften, He who considers too much, will accomplish little. $af) cr mir md)i gefdjrickit [subjective clause), mad) t ntir@orgen, [The fact] that he has not written to me, causes me anxiety. 06 id) toer&c fommen fimnen [objective clause), meij* icf) itidjt, I do not know, whether I shall be able to come. ei* franf if! [objective clause ), Ijabe id) geftevn gefjort, I heard yesterday, that he was ill. Sa id) franf toar [adverbial clause ), foitnte id) nidjt fommen, As I was sick, I could not come. Remarks. — 1. Such a clause takes the place of a subject, object or predicate, as the case may be, before the verb (compare §§ 293, b , Rem. 4; 294, Rem. 2; 295, Rem.). 2. Adverbial clauses in this way bring expressions of time, place, etc., but more especially those of cause , nearer to the verb, which is the part of the sentence they modify. 3. Qw\y subjective relative clauses with the compound relative toer, can stand at the head of a sentence, as in the second example above. Note. — T he relative ber is sometimes used instead of toer as compound relative (including both relative and antecedent), especially in the plural, as : $>:c fid) &u fjart oergattgen fatten, flofyen cm3 betn Sanbe. (Schiller) ; i. e., &tcientgen, toelcbe tt. f. to. ; or: 333cv fid) ju t)art oergangert batte (sing.), flof) u. f. to., Those who had committed too great offences, fled from the country. 4. Clauses which modify not the whole sentence but a particular member, cannot stand at the head of the sentence, but stand either immediately after the word to which they refer, or after the conclusion of the sentence (compare § 297, above). This remark applies especially to relative clauses (but see Rem. 3, above, and Note), and to comparative clauses with af§, as : 0eiu Ungliicf mar grower, aU er ertragen fomtte (or : 311 grof?, ttl3 Daft er eS U. to.), His misfortune was greater than he could bear. §306] COMPOUND AND COMPLEX SENTENCES. 363 Note. — Comparative clauses with rote may precede, as: 2Bie im Saub ber SSogel fingt, Eftag fic^> jeber giitlicf) tfyun, As the bird sings amid the boughs, let every one enjoy himself. (Schiller), EXERCISE G. 1. It seems impossible, says a great botanist, to give, in the present state of our knowledge, a complete definition of what (= that which) is to be considered as an animal, in contradistinction to what one must regard as a plant. 2. The good king Robert Bruce, who was always watchful and prudent, had received information ($unbe) of (boil) the intention of these men to attack him suddenly. 3. Bruce caused his men to lie down to take some sleep at a place about half a mile distant from the river (see § 290, c, i), while he himself, with two attendants, went down to watch the ford through which the enemy must pass, before they came to the place where king Robert’s men were lying. 4. “If I go back,” thought the king, “to call my men to (the) arms, these men will get (fommen) through the ford unhindered ; and that would be [a] pity, since it is a place so advantageous for defence.” 5. In the confusion, five or six of the enemy were slain, or, having been borne down by the stream, [were] drowned. 6. With the natural feeling of a young author (@d)riftftefier), he had ventured (it) to go (fid) cntfiltadjen) secretly and witness (beitt>ol)nert + dat.) the first representation of his tragedy at Mannheim. 7. He resolved to be free, at whatever risk (auf jebe ©efafyr l)in) ; to abandon (= give up) advantages which he could not buy (ei'faufeil) at such a price ; to quit his stepdame (ftiefmiitterUd), adj.) home, andgoforth (fortlbanbcrn), though friendless and alone, to seek his fortune in the great market (3al)umcirft) of life. 8. Having well examined the place (Ort), the soldier reported his discovery to Marius, and urgently (bringeub) advised (cmvatert + dat.) him, to make an attack upon the fort from that side where he had climbed up, offering (fid) erbicten) to lead (=show) the way. 9. He ordered his men to advance against the wall with their shields held together in the manner which the Romans named ‘ testudo * or tortoise (Sdjilbfrote). 10. His mother was present on (bei) this joyous occasion, and she produced (= showed) a paper of (= with) poison, which, as she said, she meant to have given her son in his liquor (©etrdnf, acc.) rather than that he should submit (himself) to personal disgrace. PART THIRD. WORD-FORMATION. - HISTORICAL SKETCH. LESSON LI. DERIVATION AND COMPOSITION. 307. i. New words are formed in a language by two more or les9 distinct processes : Derivation and Composition. 2. Derivation is of four kinds, viz.: i. without change; 2. by inter- nal change ; 3. by Suffixes; 4. by Prefixes. Note. — All grammatical terminations (inflexions) are really suffixes, but these are not considered under the present head. 308. A. WITHOUT CHANGE. Verbs are derived from substantives, adjectives, adverbs, etc., by the simple addition of the endings of conjugation, as: s 2lrbeit, labour; ar=* beit*en, to labour — @ra§, grass ; graven, to graze — troefen, dry; trocfn=en, to dry — ndf)er, near (compar.) ; ttdljent, to approach — gegen, against; begegn^en, to meet. Note. — In many of these derivatives, and in most of those from adjectives, the vowel has Umlaut, as: Spflug ; p flagmen, plough — jammer; Ijammer?n, hammer — ftctrf, strong ; ftiirfser., strengthen — tot, dead; ttitsen, kill — offett, open; nffn=en, open — empor, up; cmpor?en, excite. 300. B. BY INTERNAL CHANGE. Derivative Verbs. — Verbs are derived from other Verbs : (a) By change (generally Umlaut) of the root or Stem Vowel , forming causative verbs , which are always transitive and weak, as : fallen, fall ; fallen, fell ( cause to fall) — trinfen, drink; trdnfen, make to drink (drench) — fifcen, sit; fe($en, set — liegen, lie ; legen, lay — faljren, fare, proceed ; f iifyren, lead, cause to proceed. §312] DERIVATION BY SUFFIXES. 365 (b) By change of consonant , with or without vowel-change, as : ffefjett, stand ; fteften, cause to stand, set or place upright — biegen, bend ; biitfen, bow — Iteigen, incline; tltcfett, nod (incline the head ) — luiufjen, awake ; tnetfctt, arouse ( cause to awake). Note. — Many weak verbs and nearly all strong verbs are primitive ; but derivative verbs are generally weak. 310 . Derivative Substantives. — These are derived from Verbs by internal vowel-change without suffix, and are mostly masculine, as : fcinbeit, bind; 33(inb, bond, volume; 33unb, union — fiijen, sit; 0a£, stake (thing set or laid down), etc. — gieljen, draw; 3ug, trait, etc. — tretert, tread; Sritt, step. Note. — Observe that in both the Verbs and Substantives above occasional conso- nant changes also occur. C, BY SUFFIXES. 311. Verb Suffixes. 1 . tell! forms derivatives from other verbs, as well as from substan- tives and adjectives, usually with Umlaut, implying diminution or con- tempt, as: ladpen, laugh; lad) eln, smile — $unft, art; ffitlfbelit, affect (artfully) — fromm, pious; frommcln, affect piety. 2 . sent from verbs, substantives and adjectives (sometimes with Um- laut), as: folgeit, follow; folg-CVU, infer — 0d)lcif, sleep; feel sleepy — arg, Bad ; arg=evn, vex. 3. 4 eren, mostly from foreign stems, without Umlaut, as: mctrfdj* iercit, march — vcgderett, reign — fritb= even, Study. Also from German roots, by analogy, as: Imdjftaffiierett, spell. 312 . Substantive Suffixes. 1 . 4 (-ft, -ft), 4), 4)C (usually feminine) from verbs, usually with vowel- change, as: beag=eit, bend; 334 (f) 4, bay (bight) — fallen, drive; gal)r4, drive — trag=en, wear; £rad) t, costume — fomnuen, come; $muf4, coming (illiifunft, arrival; 3 ufuuft, future) — fonuett, can; $un=ff, art — brcmien, burn; 33 ran=b, conflagration — feniteit, know; $Ult4)e, in- formation. 2., 3. Mfjen and dcilt form diminutives, usually with Umlaut, as: §ait§, house; §au8=(f)en, little house, cot — man; SDiduu-Ictll, manikin. Notes. — 1 . (Engl. -kin), originally Low (North) German only, is now more common than skill, which however is preferred after gutturals, as: SRingskilt, 93iicf)ski it. 2 . Sometimes a double diminutive suffix, el 4* djett, is used after gutturals, as : 9Ung* ebi^en, SbiAfystUtyn. 366 LESSON LI. [§§312- 4. *e forms a very large number of feminine derivatives from verbs, often with vowel-change ; also, 'usually with Umlaut , from adjectives, as: fttegett, fly; gUeg*c, fly (insect) — gcben, give; @abe, gift — fpved)en, speak ; ©prad)=e, speech, language — gut, good ; ©iibc, goodness — trcu, faithful ; Xxeiue, fidelity. 5. *ei (from Fr. -ie) forms feminine derivatives, with accent on the suffix: (a) From verbs in as : fd)meid)eln, flatter ; ©d)meid)el=ci, flattery — gaubern, enchant ; 3mtber*et. (&) From substantives, indicating state, occupation, etc., most fre- quently from those in =er, as: 3tiger, hunter; 3ager*Ct, hunting — 2)rucfev, printer; 2)rucfer*et, printing (-trade or -office). Notes. — 1 . It sometimes implies contempt, as: JUttbersCi, childish nonsense. 2 . By analogy with the formations from stems in scr, there has arisen the double suffix *cret, added to other stems, as : ©flatJserci, slavery (from ©flaue). 6. *1, from verbs [sometimes with vowel-change ), generally indicating the instrument , as: beden, cover; 2)ec!=el, lid — flicgen, fly; g(ug*cl, wing — fdjficgen, lock; ©d)Iuff*el, key — jic^en, pull; Biigel, rein, bridle. 7. sCfl, from verbs, including all infinitives, as well as others, e. g.: graben, dig; @rab-cit (masc.), ditch — fdjaben, hurt; Scbab-en (masc.), injury. 8. *er, often with Umlaut, indicating the actor , chiefly from verbs, but also from substantives, as : batfcn, bake ; iBacf'er, bak-er — malen, paint; 9ftaber, paint-er — tauten, dance; £fin$=cr, danc-er — ©arteit, garden; ©&rtn*cr, garden-er — ©d)af, sheep; ©d)iif=cr, shepherd. Note. — Some derivatives from substantives insert It, as: 33ilb?n*er, sculptor (from S3ilb) — ©locfsttser, bell-ringer (from ©lode) — SRebsttser, orator (from 9tebe). 9. l§t\i (Fngl. -head, -hood) forms feminine abstracts from substan- tives and adjectives, as : if, God-head — $inb=(jeit, child-hood — SBlillb^eit, blindness — grei^Cit, freedom. 10. A eit replaces djeit after adjectives in =el, dg, did), dittf, as : (Sitebfett, vanity — SBUterdcit, bitterness — 35iUigdeit, cheapness — — §eimUdpfeit, secrecy — 23raud)bar>feit, usefulness — ©parfamdeit, economy. Note. — Some derivatives from adjectives insert stg* before sfeit, especially from those in shaft and sIoS, as: ©iifesiflsfeit, sweetness — ©tanbhaftsifpfeit, steadfastness — %Xt\X* Iofsiflsfeit, unfaithfulness. 313] DERIVATION BY SUFFIXES. 367 11. 4 lt (compare § 89, 2, Note) forms feminine appellatives from mas- culine substantives, usually with Umlaut (always so from monosylla- bles), as: ©vaf, count; @rafin, countess — greitnb, friend; greunMit, (female) friend — ©cirtner, gardener ; ®dl*tner4lt, gardener’s wife. 12. 4 tltg forms masculine diminutives (sometimes with Umlaut) from verbs, substantives and adjectives, as: Iel)l*en, teach; £el)r4ing, appren- tice — gfud)t, flight; g(ucf)t4ing, fugitive — fremb, strange; gremMing, stranger — juttg, young; 3ung4tlig, youth. 13. ^Iti 3 (Engl, -ness) forms abstracts from verbs ; also from a few adjectives, usually with Umlaut, as: bcgrabeit, bury; $Begrab=niS, funeral — Ijinbern, hinder; §inber=itt0, obstacle — gefangeit, captive; ©efdng* nt0, prison — ftnfter, dark ; ginfter*iu0, darkness. 14. form abstracts, (generally neuter) from verbs, and also frotr a few substantives and adjective, as: fd)icfen, send; ©djicf^fal, ^ ate — raten, guess ; riddle — trouble ; fatigue — triibc, sad; £riib4al, tribulation. 15. (Engl. -ship, -scape) forms feminine abstracts from verbs and adjectives, as: SBcutber^fdjaft, wandering — greunb^djaff, friend- ship — 2anb4(f)aft, land-scape — ©etneuufdiaff, community — ©tgen* peculiarity ; also some collectives, as: ^Priefter^djuft, priesthood; ©ejetC^fc^aft/ society. 16. 4 um (Engl, -dom) forms (generally neuter) abstracts from verbs, substantives and adjectives, as: 2Bad)§4lU1t, growth — ©igendum, pro- perty — 9ieid)4utn (masc.), wealth — $puig4ttm, royalty (king-dom). 17. *utig (= Engl, -ing in verbal nouns) forms a large number of feminine abstracts, chiefly from verbs, as : 23 efel)r=ung, instruction — QebsUltg, forgiveness. 18. The suffixes =CItt), 4 g, 4 (f)t, 4 ttg are only found after stems which no longer have an independent existence, as: $lb=CJltl, S)lt(Hnlb (£ff4g, $df4g, $ab 4 d)t (hawk). 313 . Adjective Suffixes. 1. 4 iar (connected with bdrcrt, ‘bear 1 ) from verbs (= Engl. -able) and substantives, also (rarely) from adjectives, as : cfpbat*, eat-able — frud)t* Bar, fruitful — furd)t 4 ?ar, frightful — offeiubar, evident. 2. *=C!t, =ftit form adjectives denoting material or kind from substantives, as : golb^Ctt, golden — bleberit, leaden — ftlbeiMI, silver — wooden. Note. — ©tfern, ‘iron,’ from ©ifett, is anomalous. 368 LESSON LL [§§ 313 - 3- (connected with ’EjaBert, ‘have’) forms adjectives, denoting the quality of the primitive, chiefly from substantives (also from a few verbs and adjectives), as: fiinb=f)a4, sinful — tugenb4}ttft, virtuous — UJofyn* resident — bo$ 4 jaft, malicious — tt)al)r 4 )aft, true. Note. — The suffix *fg is often added to adjectives in as : roaljrljaftsifl (compare also § 312, 10, Note, above). 4. id)t sometimes replaces 4$ (see below) after names of materials, as bonuidjt, thorny — ftcin4d)t, stony; also m tor4d)f, foolish. 5. (= Engl, -y, as in might-y, etc.) forms a very numerous class of adjectives, usually with Umlaut, from verbs, substantives and particles, and from other adjectives (including the possessive pronouns, see §119, c), as: nad)gieb 4 g, yielding — giittfMg, favourable — ntiid)t4g, might-y — fd)u(b 4 g, guilt-y — giitdfl, kind — biStUig, complete — I)eut 4 g r of to-day — t>or4g, former. Note. — For ?ig before sfeit, see § 312, 10, Note ; for sig after stjflf t, see 3, above. 6. 4 fd) (= Engl, -ish) forms adjectives : (a) From proper names, denoting origin, as: lutfyerMfd), Lutheran — t>reu8*ifd), Prussian. (£) From substantives, as: bieb 4 fd), thiev-ish — l)imnt( 4 fd), heav- enly ; sometimes also with depreciatory sense, as in English, e. g. : tinb4*d), child-ish — tuetb4id), woman-ish (compare filib* lid), child-like — rocib4id), woman ly). From foreign words (= Lat. -icus ; Engl, -ic, -ical), as : fyifitQV* histor-ical — Iog4fdj, log-ical. 7* 4 et forms variative numerals; see § 182, {c), 8. did) (Engl, -like, -ly) forms numerous adjectives from verbs (with active or passive sense), substantives (usually with Umlaut) and other adjectives (generally with diminutive meaning, like Eng. -ish), as: erfveu* m, delightful — fd)cib4td), injurious — begrcif 4 td), intelligible — gfaub* lid), credible — fcevad)t 4 idj, contemptible — jftt)l' 4 itf), year-ly — ntiimtdidj, man-ly — ttcitur 4 id), natural — ri)t 4 id), redd-ish — ltilig 4 td), long-ish. 9- (Engl, -some) from verbs and substantives (also from a few adjectives), as : aitfllierLfam, attentive — fyeil-fiun, whole-some — fltrdjt* fant, timid — ein*(am f lone-some. D. BY PREFIXES. 314. Verb Prefixes. The Verb Prefixes coming under the head of derivation are those which are always inseparable, viz : fee*, ettL or eu tt? f gC*, JUifK M'i Their various meanings are given below. DERIVATION BY PREFIXES. 3 314 ] 1. fie* (connected with the prep, bei) is intensive^ and (a) forms transitive verbs from intransitive (its most frequent use), as: fallen, fall; befallen, be-fall — gefyett, go; fi:=gef)en, commit (a crime, etc.) — Hagen, mourn; fcedlageu, mourn for; (b) it forms verbs from substantives and adjectives, with the mean- ing ‘ provide with,’ ‘make,* as : fic=freunbcil, be-friend — fen, make strong, strengthen. 2. Cttt s (cmfi 5 before an f, akin to Gttt=, as in nitthJOrten) corresponds frequently to the (Latin) prefixes dis-, de- in English words and denotes (a) ‘ in return,’ as : cm^fangcn, receive ; cm}hfcl)Icn, recommend ; (b) ‘contrary,’ ‘against,’ ‘ away from,’ having privative force, from verbs, substantives and adjectives, as: cntdmiben, relieve — cnt=bedcn, dis-cover — cnt=gel)cn, cnMaufen, get away, escape; (c) transition , origin , as : cnt=fd)(afett, fall asleep — eitt=ftefyeit, arise, originate. 3. et=* (Engl, a-, as in a-rouse, a-rise, etc.) denotes : (a) ‘out from,’ ‘upwards,’ as: crdjeben, raise — erdueden, a-waken; (b) transition (compare Clt above), as: ei‘=beben, begin to tremble — Cr=bUiI)en, come out in blossom — cr- fatten, grow cold; (c) acquisition or attainment by the action of the verb (a very common use), as : CV'bettelll, get by begging — erdiften, get by cunning; (d) accomplishment^ as: cr=fd)icf 3 CIt, shoot (kill by shooting) — ei* 4 rinfcn, be drowned. 4. gc- often has no perceptible force, as in : gc-nefeit, recover (from ill- ness) — ge^ttiejjcn, enjoy; but commonly it is frequentative and intensive, as : ge=bieten, command — gc=bertfcn, remember, mention — gedoben, vow. 5. mifi* (Engl, mis-) has negative force, sometimes with the notion of falsehood or failure, as: mi§=ad)ten, despise — mijHattcn, displease — mifpgUicfcn, fail — mi^Dcrftcl)cn, mis-understand. 6. tJCr 3 ' (Engl, for- in for-get, for-give) has the general meaning of ‘away’ and often, like ent ; , answers to a dis- or de- in English. (a) It is intensive , and expresses excess , etc., as : iJCt=bliil)Clt, fade away — fccrdomnten, go to ruin — fcer^agen, despair. (b) It denotes a mistake , etc., as : berdufyven, lead astray — Her* laufen (refl.), lose one’s way — tJCrdcgctt, mis-lay. ( c ) It is privative (its most frequent use), and denotes loss, parting, waste, dissolution, as: &ei>gel)en, pass away — fietdrinfeu, waste in drink — UCt=ff>ieIen, gamble away. 370 LESSON LX. [§§ 314 - (d) It forms verbs from substantives and adjectives denoting a change or transition into the state of the primitive, as : tut* ctrmett, grow poor — her=goIbcn, gild. 7. jer* denotes separation, destruction, ‘to pieces,* as: jet*br edjen, break to pieces — jer*gtiebeni f dis-member. 315 . Substantive Prefixes. 1. @t$* (= Engl, arch-), as: @t’$*bifd)Of, arch-bishop — @rj=feiltb, arch-enemy. • @e* forms usually neuter derivatives : (a) Collectives, from substantives, as: ©e*btvge, mountain-range — ©cfieber, feathers — @c=ftrdnd), bushes. (d) Associatives (of persons), from verbs and substantives, as: ®e*fpiele, playmate — ©e*(d)ft>ifter, brothers and sisters (of a family) — fellow. ( c ) Frequentative or intensive abstracts, also from verbs, as ©eipvdd), conversation — ©C*flufter, (continued) whispering — ©C s tofe, uproar. Note. — The substantives GMitc!, ©slctube contain this prefix. 3. SJHfK with the same force as in verbs, e.g.: misdeed — SRifcgunft, envy. 4. tin* is negative prefix, as in English, e. g. : Uiugtticf, bad luck — Utt=rccf)t, wrong — Un-finn, nonsense. It also expresses something monstrous or unnatural, as : Ulhtpat, unnatural or monstrous deed — Un *Uienfd), inhuman monster. 5* Ur* (akin to c t*, see above) denotes (a) origin , as in Ut=teU (et*teiten), sentence, judgment — Utdcillb (crdauben), furlough, leave of absence ; ( b ) primitiveness, as: Ut=fcid)e (original thing), cause — Ur-'menid), primitive man — Ut=tt)alb, primeval forest. Remark. — Substantives with Verb Prefixes (see §314, above) are derived from verb-stems having these prefixes (e. g. : 51 b= 3 lig, SBe^itg, from ab$iel)en, bejtefjen), except those with ge= (see 2, above). 316 . Adjective Prefixes. The Prefixes of Adjectives are the same as those of substantives, and with the same force, except ge*, which forms : 3 * 8 ] COMPOSITION. 371 (а) Past Participles, some without corresponding verbs, as : gC=ftttet, well-behaved — g^ftiefelt, booted ; ( б ) adjectives from verb-stems, as; : ge=nef)m, agreeable, acceptable — gC-ttJiB (from iviffett, 4 know *), certain ; (c) from other Adjectives, as: gc=red)t, just — gMreit, faithful. Note. — flsleitf) also contains this prefix. 317 . Other Parts of Speech. Pronouns, Numerals, Prepositions, Conjunctions and Interjections are for the most part either primitive or compound; for Derivative Num- erals and Numeral Adverbs, see §§ 182, 183; for the derivation of other Adverbs, § 189. II. COMPOSITION. 318 . 1. A compound word is one made up of two or more words, each of which maintains its separate form and meaning. 2. In genuine compounds, the last component only is inflected ; but there are also spurious compounds, in which one or more of the pre- ceding components takes an inflectional ending (see § 319, 1, Notes 2, 3, below), without liability to further variation. Note. — In a few words arbitrarily written as compounds, both elements are inflected ; tee § 319, 2, Note, below. 3. Compounds are made with much greater freedom in German than in English. Words that in English are written separately, are often written as one word in German, forming compounds of a length and com- plexity unknown in the English language, as : geucrt)erftd)erung$gefettld)aft, fire insurance company — £uftrof)renjd)ttunbfild)t, bronchial consump- tion. Note. — These long compounds are generally broken up by one or more hyphens as: j^eueroerficf)eruttg§?©efeUfd)aft, a capital letter usually following the hyphen. 4. When the last component is common to several successive com- pounds, it is expressed with the last component word only, the omission being indicated in the other cases by a hyphen, as: 2fpfeL, $irjd)= Itnb $ 3 irnbaume, apple, cherry and pear-trees — eine freubeit* unb lut^Iofe 5fufgcibe, a joyless and profitless task. 5. The Composition of Verbs is fully treated of in Less. XXXVI, and Supp. Less. E. ; that of Numerals in Less. XXVIII, and also in §§ 1S2, 183. The compound Prepositions will be found in Less. XXXVIII, and Conjunctions in Less. XL, and require no special ex- planation. 372 LESSON LI. [§§319- 319. Composition of Substantives. The last element is (with exceptions noted under 5, below) a Substan- tive, which determines the gender, and is alone inflected; the first ele- ment generally having the principal accent. The varieties of Compound Substantives are: 1. Substantive -f- Substantive, the first element being in apposition or in some case or other relation (usually genitive) to the other, as below, as: §tmmebreid), kingdom of heaven ( apposition ) — s #ng=apfel, eye-ball — £anbe$4)err, sovereign — g;renben=feft, joyous festival — $iuber=ftube, nursery ( genitive elation) — £intert=faj3, inkstand (stand for ink) — Xaxifr ftunbc, dancinglesson (dative relation) — Sftattetufdttger, rat-catcher — 2Beg=tt)eUer, guide, finger-post (accusative relation) — Dfbttnrtb, East wind — ^reuben^tljraue, tear of joy (origin) — $Uft4ritt, kick (instrument) — 2>ad)=fenfter, window in the roof (place) — 2age*tt)erf, day's work. Notes. — 1. Primary Compounds are those composed of stem -j- substantives, either with the stem-suffix as : Xagewerf ; or without suffix, as: ^anbstnerf, trade — $agb* IjOftt, hunting-horn. 2. Secondary Compounds are made up with a Genitive case , Singular or Plural ; if sin- gular, the first component takes ?§ after strong masculines and neuters, and sClt after weak substantives, whether sing, or plur. ; thus: ©ortntagsSsfleib, sunday-dress — §reubsett« gefdjrei, cry of joy — SBortersbucf), dictionary. 3. The suffix is also added to feminines in st, sljeit, shit, sfdjaf t, ?ung, and the foreign endings sioit, tat, as : ©eburtsgstag, birthday — ^reiijeitsMie&e, love of liberty — SKafjigfeitsSsoerein, temperance society — ^eltgiottsSsfrieg, religious war — Unioer* fxtdt^gebciube, University building. 2. Qualifying Adjective -f- Substantive, as : (Sbebfteitt, precious stone, jewel — 3itngfrau, virgin — $odHeit, wedding (high time) — ^otbmoub, full-moon. Note. — In a few spurious compounds of this kind, the adjective is declined, as: etn $of)crspricfter, high-priest; ber ^obepriefter — bie £artge*n)eile, tedium, ennui; Gen. ber Sangeutneile. 3. Adverb or Preposition -j- Substantive, usually from compound verbs, but not always, as : §cr4mtft, origin — 2Bol)btf)at, benefit — gal)I, number — 33ei=fpiel, example — §iuter4ift, cunning — iibetymacfit, superiority. 4. Verb-stem + Substantive, sometimes with connecting suffix as: £ef=e4md), ©d)reiiH'eber, ©iitg bogel. 5. Other Compound Substantives. There is a special class of substantive compounds of a character different from those enumerated above, and of various composition, consisting of : 321] COMPOSITION OF SUBSTANTIVES. 373 (a) A limiting word (not asubst.) + Substantive, as : 33ftnbe=fuf), blind-man’s-buff — $cd)b*opf, bald-head — ©rojplttaul, boaster — £ang*bein, long-legged person — 0d)rei=l)al$, bawler — $Bicr=* ecf, square. ( b ) Limiting word + Adjective, as : ber ^immer^Cltt, the glutton — ba§ 3ntmer=griin, the evergreen. Note. — T hese compounds are masculine when referring to persons, otherwise neuter. The same rule holds good for the compounds under ( c ), below. (c) Verb + Object, limiting word or phrase, as: her Scutge* the good-for-nothing — her ©pritig4tt§'fetb, the romp — fcer ©toreiufrieb, the kill-joy — ©telkbidpein, the rendez- vous. 320 . Composition of Adjectives. Compound Adjectives consist of an Adjective preceded by a limiting word, viz. : 1. Adjective -f- Adjective, as : tauf)=ftlUttm, deaf-mute — bunfebblcui, dark-blue — VOt=badig, red-cheeked. 2. Substantive -j- Adjective : (a) with connecting inflexional suffix (compare § 319, 1, Note 2, above), as: ttebe$>fvanf, love-sick — gebcmfett s t>oU, pensive — I)offtutng(Mo§, hopeless; (b) without suffix, as : IiebeA)oU, affectionate — Ijulb-reidj, gracious — freube4eer, joyless. Notes. — 1. The Adjectives reilfj, boW are of such constant occurrence as to have almost acquired the character of suffixes. 2. In some of these compounds, the substantive expresses comparison , or has intensive force, as : freibetneift, white as chalk — febevleidjt, light as a feather — felfenfeft, firm as a rock. 3. Verb -f Adjective, as : ttnfpbegierig, eager for knowledge — merf* toitrbig, remarkable (noteworthy). Note. — In Compound Adjectives like bcmfenSsttjert, * welcome * (* thankworthy ’), the first element is the infinitive used as a Substantive. 4. Adverb or Preposition -f- Adjective, as: f)od)=geboren, high-born — cheap — uttter=tban, subject — iiber^flug, overwise. 321 . Composition of Adverbs. Adverbs are compounded of various parts of speech : 1. With Nouns ( mostly in the Genitive ) affixed to other parts of speech, as: gall: gleidpfaUS, likewise; jebetufaES, in any case—* 374 LESSON LII. t§§ 321- 9ftag(e) : etttiger=mafien, in some degree — 0eite : ettter4eif$ . . . anbrer* feitS, on the one hand ... on the other hand — £eil : meiften4dl3, chiefly; meine84eil8, on my part — 2Beg: gerabe§=ttieg$, straightway; feiueS* to*0$>bynomeans — £BeiIe: einfTtucUeit, mittter^lucile, meanwhile, mean- time — 2Bcije: glucftid)ev*tticife, fortunately; freu3=tucifc, crosswise; tl)orid)ter=!t)eife, foolishly. Note. — The masc. and neuter genitive-inflection s§, from its frequent use in adverbial genitives, has become an adverbial suffix, and is sometimes attached to fem. substs. , as : bie iftadjt, adv. nadjtS, by night. So also has the suffix ?toiart§, as: ffl.nmelsUiartS, heavenward — norbsfcmrtS, northward. 2. With Prepositions (or original Adverbs) prefixed or suffixed to other parts of speech, as: gu-gteid), at the same time — gerabe^U, straight on — auf=tt)firt§, upward; berg^auf, uphill — iutter4i>eg3, on the way; bergmnter, downhill — §eut$U=tage, nowadays — jafjredaitg, for years. 3. With Pronouns (or Stems originally Pronominal) compounded with each other, as: h)of)in? whither? bciljin, bortt)in, thither — luofjer? whence? baljer, bortfyilt, thence, etc. For Numeral Adverbs, see § 182. LESSON LII. HISTORICAL SKETCH. - GRIMM’S LAV/. - UMLAUT, etc. 322 . Relation between German and English. 1. A comparison of German words and forms with their English equi- valents will serve to show that a very large number )£ both words and grammatical forms are common to both languages. Though rarely ab- solutely identical in form, the resemblances are both so close and so numerous that they cannot be the result of mere borrowing on the part of either language from the other, but must imply relationship , or, in other words, a descent from a common source , a common origin . English and German are therefore Modern Dialects of one and the same original language. 2. This original language is no longer extant, either as a spoken or as a written language. There are, however, other languages — some still 6poken, some known to us only as written — which were once also 323] RELATION BETWEEN ENGLISH AND GERMAN. 375 dialects of this common ancestor, or ©runbfpracfje, as German philolo gists call it. This group or sub-family of languages is called the Ger- manic or Teutonic, the common source or ©ruubfprcicfje of which was itself a dialect of a larger family , all of whose members were dialects of, and derived from, one common primitive source (Ul*fpV(ltf)e). This family is called the Indo-Germanic, Indo-European or Aryan family, and includes most European and several Asiatic languages. 3. The divisions of this great family, with the chief representatives, ancient (written) and modern (spoken), of each, are as follows, beginning from the East : (a) Indic — ancient : Sanskrit, etc. ; modern: Hindustani, etc. (b) Persic — “ Zend, etc.; “ Persian, etc. ( c ) Greek — ancient and modern . (d) Italic — ancient: Latin, etc.; modern: the Romance lan- guages (Italian, French, Spanish, etc.). (e) Lithuanic. if) Slavonic — Russian, Polish, Bohemian, etc. (£•) Germanic — see below. (k) Celtic — Irish, Gaelic, Welsh, etc. 323 . The Germanic Languages. The Germanic or Teutonic group of languages may be classified as follows : 1. Gothic or East Germanic, once spoken by the Goths of Mcesia, on the Danube, represented only by a translation of portions of the Bible, made by Ulfilas, Bishop of the Goths, in the 4th century, a. d. 2. Scandinavian or North Germanic — ancient: Old Norse; modern: Icelandic, Danish (Norwegian), Swedish. 3. Low German or West Germanic — ancient: Frisian, Low Saxon, Low Frankish, Old English (Anglo-Saxon), Middle English; modern: Dutch, English. Note. — The modern representatives of the other Low German languages are mere dialects — known as Plattdeutsch (i. e., Flat German), the present (High) German literary language having displaced them. 4. High German or South Germanic, including the (no longer spoken) Old and Middle High German, and the GERMAN, as spoken and written at the present day. The following diagram will serve further to illustrate the relationships of the German language ; 376 LESSON LIL *3*3 . « 1 b 2 g s 0030 c bfl ^ ^ f n B 2 *3 .2? ^ ffi S C M CtJ HH C* < -g S r * £ W s O 2 o H & w h u > ►H © "O' £ 44 a c« - u - £ O Ml o Q 5 ? -'5b G TJ rH N h-3 O T3 1 Q O O W a a Z w & rt o -I*' 5 -a . S hi CO 0> N w • H £ m >> 5 CO >-, C d E C /3 t 3 £ 0 ft C < •G a U Ph u ►r* ~ fcfl S *3 £ j? O S e 2 o rt * 2 324] HISTORY OF HIGH GERMAN. 377 324 . History of High German. The High German (including the Middle German) branch of the Germanic sub-family has passed through three stages, as follows : 1. Old High German, to the 12th century. Its literature is chiefly ecclesiastical — its principal authors being monks, such as Otfrid, the Frank, author of a rhyming harmony of the Gospels, and Notker, of St. Gallen in Switzerland. Each author wrote in his own dialect. Note. — The chief characteristic of this Old High German, which distinguishes it from the subsequent stages, is the comparative fulness and distinctiveness of its grammatical forms. Thus £ageit, ©ofjrtctt, ©aben (dat. pi.) = O. H. G. tag-um, sun-um, geb-om re- spectively; and the pres, indie, of neman (nefjmen) is as follows: nim-u, nim-is, nim-it, nemam-(es), nem-at, nem-ant. It also has a fifth case (the Instrumental). 2. Middle High German (a. d. iioo — 1500). Literature during this period passed from the hands of the clergy into those of the nobles; hence its courtly character. The branches of poetic composition therein represented were Epic and Lyric Poetry, the former comprising not only the great National Epics of the * Nibelungenlied’ and ‘Gudrun,’ but also the Courtly or Art Epics of Chivalry, such as Wolfram von Eschenbach’s ‘Parcival’ and Gottfried von Straszburg’s ‘Tristan und Isolde’; the latter comprising the productions of the ‘ Minnesanger,’ of whom the greatest was Walther von der Vogelweide. The Dialect of Suabia (which included Baden, Wiirtemberg and parts of Bavaria) became the leading literary language. Note. — Middle is distinguished from Old High German chiefly by the loss of the full vowels of inflectional syllables, which were for the most part changed into C. Thus the O. H. G. datives pi. tag-um, geb-om are in Mid. H. G. tag-en, geb-en; and the pres, indie, of nemen is: nim-e, nim-est, nim-et, nem-en, nem-et, nem-ent. It is further distinguished from O. H. G. by the spread of the Umlaut (see § 326, below), which in the former is confined to the vowel a, to the vowels o and u also ; and from both 0. H. G. and Modem German by the large number of its diphthongal sounds (ai, ei, oi, 01, au, ou, ou, eu, ia, ie, io, iu ; ua, ue, lie, uo), the greater number of which are unknown in both the preceding and the later stage of the language. 3. New or Modern High German, from 1500 to the present day, forming, since before the beginning of the 16th century, the standard literary language of all German-speaking people. Its basis is Doctor Martin Luther’s translation of the Bible (1522 — 34), in which he adopted the ,,$an^eiiprad)e" or official court language particularly of the Duchy of Saxony, as being, in his own words, „llie grmetne fcCUffdje 8£rad)e, toeldjer nadjfolgen alle gurfan unb $onige in gang 2)eutfdp lanb." LESSON LII. [§§ 324 ' 378 Noth. — The chief characteristic which distinguishes Modern (New) High German from Middle High German is the lengthening of all stem-vowels before a single consonant. Thus fagen, fprad), loben, all have the stem-vowel long in Modern German, but short in Middle High German. To this may be added the use of the letter \) to mark a preced- ing long vowel, as in neljmett, M. H. G. nemen (with short e); the change of f into frfj be- fore 1, it, as : ©djlaf, Srijttee, M. H. G- slaf, sne; and that of the long vowels i, u, into the diphthongs ei, nil respectively, as: mein, bein, brei, Sffieib, 2Jtau3, ^aut, Iaut, M. H. G. min, din, dri, wib, mus, hus, hut, lut. 325. Grimm’s Law of fiauiberjdjtcliuttg. 1. The law of the progression or shifting of mutes, Germ, UCrfcfjT'buug, also called Grimm’s Law after its chief discoverer, Jakob Grimm, the illustrious grammarian, is one of the most striking features of the Germanic languages. 2. The Mutes are divided into three classes, according to the organ with which they are uttered, viz.: Linguals (or Dentals): t, th, d; Labials: p, ph (f), b; and Palatals (or Gutturals): k (c), ch (h), g. Each of these classes contains a tenuis (or surd), an aspirate or spirant , and a media (or sonant ), thus : Tenues. Aspirates or Spirants. Mediae. Linguals : t th d Labials: P ph, f b Palatals : k, c kh, ch (h) g 3. In the majority of the Germanic languages — Gothic, Scandinavian, Low German (including therefore English) — as compared with the other members of the Indo- Germanic family (Greek, Latin, etc. ; see § 322, 3, above), each of these mutes has undergone one “shifting,” or been pushed forward one stage in its own class, the tenues having been changed into aspirates (or more strictly spirants), the aspirates into mediae, and the mediae into tenues. In High German alone they have undergone a second “shifting” in the same direction. Note. — The accompanying diagram will serve further to this process, showing how the mutes observe the followin; from primitive Indo-Germanic through general Germanic ( English) to High German, viz. : Tenuis, Asp.irate, Media ; Media, Tenuis; Media, Tenuis, Aspirate. 3. Taking Latin or Greek as representing the primitive Indo-Germanic stage, and English as senting the second, or general Germanic stage (the first shifting), the following scheme will show the theoretical working of this law: Aspirate grimm’s law of SautberfcfiieBung. 379 325] Linguals. Labials. Palatals. Latin, Greek, etc.: t, th, d p, ph, b k, kh, g = English, etc. : th, d, t ph, b, p kh, g, k = (High) German: d, t, th b, p, ph g, k, kh 5. The operation of the law is, however, subject to the following general exceptions : (a) p and k were changed in the second shifting, not into aspirates proper, but into the spirants f and h (= d)) respectively, and these spirants were not subjected to any further change. (b) The lingual aspirate is represented in High German by 3, §, ff, or jj, (c) The second shifting of media to tenuis took place in High Ger- man in the lingual series only, except in one dialect (the Ale- mannian). (d) The aspirate (or spirant) d) is never found in Modern German at the beginning of a word. 6. Hence the modified scheme below will represent approximately the actual working of the law : Linguals. Labials. Palatals. Latin, Greek, etc. : t, th, d p, ph (f), b k, kh (h), g = English, etc. : th, d, t f, b, p h, g, k = (High) German: d, t, z, s, ss, sz f, b, f h(d)) g, k (d)) Note. — Latin has c, f, and h for k, ph and kh respectively; and the dj at the bottom of the last column does not occur at the beginning of words ; see 5, ( d ), above. EXAMPLES OF fiautoerfd)tcbung. (Note. — Examples from Lat. unless otherwise specified.) 1 . Linguals : (a ) t — th — d ; as : tectum — thatch — $adf) ; tenuis — thin — buntt; tu— thou — fcu; ties— three — fcret; frater — brother — 23ntfoer ; ( b ) th — d — t, as : tliygater (Gr.) — daughter — £od)ter; thyra(Gr.) — door — £iire; ther (Gr.) — deer — £ier; ( c ) d — t — z, s, ss, sz, as: domus — timber — giminer; dakr-y (Gr.) — tear — gd^re; sedere — sit — fifccn; edere — eat — effen. 2 . Labials: (a) p— f — f, as: pugno — fight — fed)tcn; pedem — foot — $$? u 6» piscis — f ish — gifd); {b) ph (Lat. f) — p — b, as: frater — brother — JBniber; fagus — beech — *8ud)e; (c) b — p — f, as : can- nabis — hemp — £auf. 3. Palatals: ( a ) k (Lat. c) — h — dj (h if initial), as : canis — hound - — §itnb; octo — eight - - ad)t; noc-tem — night — 9?ad)t; ( b ) kh (Lat.h) — g — g, as : hostis — guest — ©aft; hortus — garden — ©arten; {c) 380 LESSON LII. [§326 g — k (c) — (f) (k if initial) as; gelidus — Cold — fait; genu — knee $rtie; jugum — yoke — Sod); frango — break — bredjeu. Note. — A further class of exceptions is caused by the fact that the mutes are some- times protected from change by an adjacent consonant, as: wander — tnattiiern; stone — ©tein ; haste — §afi ; night — 5Radf)t ; craft — Kraft. There are also other deviations from the strict rule too numerous to be mentioned here. 326. Umlaut. 1. Umlaut is the modification of an accented a, 0, U, ttU into d (e), 8, it, du respectively, and is caused by the influence of an i or j in the following syllable. Remarks. — 1. The vowels a, 0, tl, with the diphthong au, are guttural or “back” vowels, and approach the sound of the following i, which is a palatal or “ front ” vowel. 2. This i or j appears in Old High German, but has disappeared — • with some exceptions, as under (d), (rucf, pressure, print SDtonb, moon ©uttb, strait, sound ©rab, degree SJtorb, murder Saft, taffeta ©urt, girth Drt, place Sag, day Jgag, hedge $art, park Soft, tact, bar (in music) £aH, sound Slfab, path Saif, talc $alnt, blade (of grass), etc. SPfau, peacock Sfyratt, train-oil £au, breath $ol, pole S^rou, throne £orft, eyry $ul§, pulse Sorf, peat 4 ?ort, refuge SSuitft, point Sufd), flourish of trumpets $uf, hoof $unb, dog SPunfd!), punfii 3 oll, inch 382 APPENDICES. C. Feminines of ©oljtt Model. (All with Umlaut; Less. VII, § 22, 3.) SIngft, anguish 2 lu£flud)t, evasion 2l£t, axe 83 anf, bench 33raut, bride S3ruft, breast f$rauft, fist $rud&t, fruit ©art§, goose ©ruft, grave #cmb, hand £aut, skin Jllitft, cleft itvaft, strength 5 lu(), cow Jlunft, art £au§, louse Shift, air Shift, desire 9 Jlacf)t, power s Jttagb, maid-servant 2Jlau§, mouse Also those ending in -ni§ and Sftadjt, night 9 fal)t, seam 9 iot, need Sftufc, nut ©au, sow ©djltur, string ©tabt, town SGBanb, wall SBurft, sausage gunft, guild .gufammeufunft, meeting D. Irregular Foreign Substantives. (Less. VII, § 22, 6.) 1 . ©er ftaplatt, chaplain, pi. £aplane. 2 . The following foreign substs. with accent on last syll. follow the ^uttb Model: bet ^Dlonolog', soliloquy; ber dialog', dialogue; also those in -or accented, as: ber ^juntor', humour; ber 9ftctjor / , major. 3 . The following are mixed (DIjr Model) : ber SlQiga'tor, alligator; ber ©amott, demon; ber ilon'ful, consul ; ba§ ©tereoff op', stereoscope ; ba§ ©eleffop', telescope ; also those from the Lat. in -or unaccented, as : ber ©oftor, ber s 4!rofeffor. 4 . The following are weak or mixed (Dfyr Model): ber SlbamanF, adamant; ber ©ia* want' (or ©ernant), diamond; ber -Dragnet', magnet. £. Neuter Monosyllables of guitt) Model. (Less. VII, § 22, 5.) S 5 eet, flower-bed ©ift, poison 9 J?oo§, moss ©d()ilf, rush S 3 etl, hatchet ©Iei§, rut net ©d^rot, shot 53 ein, leg £eft, handle Dl, oil ©cbtnetn, pig S 3 ier, beer £ont, 2 horn $ferb, horse ©eil, rope S 3 led(), tin-plate 3odj, yoke $funb, pound ©ieb, sieve ©let, lead Jtnie, knee ' $ult, desk ©piel, game ©oot, 1 boat ilreuj, cross 9 teiff, ship 3eug, stuff 3iel, goal APPENDICES, 3»3 Also eight in -f t 4?aar, hair £eer, army year ipaar, pair 2ier, animal 2JI eer, sea Sftofjr, reed 2$ or, gate 1 Also with Umlaut, 2 See also App. G.* F. Weak Masculines not ending in -e. (Less. XIV, § 57, 2.) S3ar, bear' 83aier, Bavarian S3ulgar', Bulgarian Surfdfj, lad thrift, Christian f$fin!, finch giirfi, prince (See!, fop ©efeU, fellow ©raf, count 4?ageftoIj, old bachelor §elb, hero $err, master 4jirt, herdsman Laffer, Caffir IjBrinj, prince 2ftenfcf), man 2ftoljr, Moor 2iarr, fool 2ierD, nerve Dc§3, ox ©pa§, sparrow ©teinmefc, stone- 21) or, fool [mason Un gar, Hungarian S3orfa§r, ancestor Sommer, Pomeranian G . Substantives of Mixed Declension. (Less. XV, §§ 61-63.) (a) 91am e Model (Masc.). ffialfe(tt), beam fi3ueu, ivy ba§ ©eranium, geranium ber £afer, oats ber ,£anf, hemp ber $lee, clover ber $of)l, cabbage ber $oE)(rabi, Brussels-spouts ba§ I?orn, grain ber £aud), leek ber Sorbeer, laurel ber 9 Rai§, maize ba§ 2 Roo§, moss ber SRoggen, rye ber ©pargel, asparagus ber ©pinat, spinach ber Saba!, tobacco ber SSeijen, wheat \ Also Compounds, as: ber ©djroar^borrt, blackthorn; ba§ ©eiftblatt, honey-suckle; ba§ SBergifjmemnidjt, forget-me-not; ba§ Saufenbfdjon, daisy; and diminutives, as: ba§ S3eilcf)en, violet. 3. (a) Metals — Masc. : ber Cobalt, cobalt; ber ©taljl, steel; ber Sombadt, pinch- beck; ber 2 £* 3 mut, bismuth; herein!, zinc. Fem.: bie Spiatina, platina. ( b ) Countries, etc. — Masc. : ber SpeloportneS, Peloponnesus; ber £aag, the Hague; also those in -gau, as: 2largau. Fem.: bie $rim, Crimea; bie Seoante, the Levant ; bie Ufraiite, the Ukraine ; and those in -ei, -flU, - 3 . 89. 1. ( a ) Neut. : ba§ SReffirtg, brass. {b) Feminines in -el t 2ld)fel, shoulder 2lntpel, lamp Slmjel, black-bird 2lngel, fish-hook SSibel, bible 23 ucfel, boss (of a shield) Gtymbel, cymbal Mattel, date $eid>fel, carriage- pole Siftel, thistle SDroffel, thrush Gidjel, acorn $abel, fable ^acfel, torch $effel, fetter §ibel, spelling-book ^ormel, formula ©abel, fork ©eifcel, scourge ©onbel, gondola ©urge!, throat pummel, humble- bee ^nfel, island Aansel, pulpit $artoffel, potato $oppel, leash ; brace (of dogs) £ugel, ball $uppel, cupola SRartbel, almond SRattgel, mangle SRiftel, mistletoe SRufdjel, shell Slabel, needle Sleffel, nettle Drgel, organ Rappel, poplar ^arabcl, parable Sjkimel, primrose SHafpel, rasp Siegel, rule 386 APPENDICES. Shmjel, wrinkle ©d)acf)tel, band-box ©djaufel, shovel ©djaufel, swing ©djinbel, shingle ©djiiffel, dish In -cr : Slber, vein Sifter, aster Slufter, oyster SBlatter, blister SGutter, butter ©eber, cedar 2)auer, duration (Sifter, magpie ^•afer, fibre $eber, feather, pen ft-eier, celebration ©emtttel, roll of bread ©icf) el, sickle ©pinbel, spindle ©taffel, step of a ladder ©toppel, stubble £afel, table £robbel, tassel trommel, drum $£riiffel, truffle 2Bad;tel, quail goiter, rack $alfter, halter hammer, chamber belter, wine-press liefer, pine Klammer, cramp-iron iHapper, rattle Sauer, lurking-place Seber, liver Seier, lyre Seiter, ladder Smarter, torture SJlauer, wall Shutter, mother Scatter, adder Shimmer, number Dper, opera Dtter, otter Shifter, elm ©d)euer, barn ©effleuber, sling ©coulter, shoulder SBaffel, waffle SBinbel, swaddling- cloth SBurjel, root 3roiebel, onion ©teuer, tax £od)ter, daughter Xrauer, mourning S3e§per, even -tide, vespers SBimper, eyelash 3iffcr, cipher 3it§er, guitar Note. — The names of rivers ending in -er or -el are also feminine, e.g. : bie Dber, bie Kefer, bie SJlofel. Neuters in -cl : S3iinbel, bundle SJunEet, darkness ©gempel, example In -cn : 2Umofen, alms SBecfen, basin ©ifert, iron In -er : 2lbenteuer, adven- ture 2Uter, age 83auer, bird-cage ©iter, pus ©uter, udder f^enfter, window $euer, fire t^ieber, fever $uber, load gutter, fodder Slubel, herd, flock ©iegel, seal 6d)armu§el, skirmish libel, evil ©egel, sail SBiefel, weasel $apitet, chapter 2JlitteI, means Drafel, oracle $iillen, colt Jtiffen, cushion Safen, sheet (bed- clothes) Seljert, fief SBappen, coat-ot- arms 3eicf>en, token And all infinitives when used as substantives. ©after, grate, rail- ing ©itter, trellis Softer, cloister $upfer, copper Sager, couch Softer, vice Seber, leather Suber, carrion Walter, a grain m sure SJleffer, knife SDheber, bodice SJhifter, pattern Dpfer, sacrifice ^3 flafter, plaster ^olftcr, cushion ^ulper, powder 9tegifter, register, index Sftuber, oar ©djauer, shower ©cepter or 3epter, sceptre ©ilber, silver ©teuer, helm Sweater, theatre lifer, shore SBaffer, water SEetter, weather SEuitber, wonder 3imnter, apartment Note. — 2Kiinfter, c minster,’ occurs both as masculine — from its present form — and as neutei — from its derivation from the Latin monasterium. (c) Feminines : 2lcf)t, proscription 2lrt, manner, kind $Baf)n, path 23artl, bench 93ai, bay S3raut, bride Sruttft, conflagration 93urg, castle S3rut, brood expedition 83ud)t, bay $lud}t, flight APPENDICES. 387 fthtr, field JTraft, strength ©ol$, wood aftud, pap, jam SBamrnS, jacket. ©id, ice §uf)lt, fowl eft, nest vest gad), compartment flalb, calf Dbft, fruit SB el), woe gafj, cask $inb, child D^r, ear SB eib, woman gelb, field tfirtit, chin Sped), pitch SBerg, tow gleifd), flesh $leib, garment SPfaitb, pledge SBilb, game ©arrt, yarn ilont, corn Slab, wheel SB obi, wellbeing ©elb, money $raut, herb IReid, twig SBort, word ©lad, glass Samrn, lamb Sttiejj, ream SBracf, wreck ©leid, groove, rut Saub, land Sttinb, head of cattle 3elt, tent ©lieb, limb Saub, foliage ©d)eit, log of wood 3inn, tin Also those in App. E. t. («) ©cr forming, February; fca3 ipetfd)aft, seal ( b ) ©cr 2lbenb, evening ; bad ©ufcenb, dozen. APPENDICES, 3^3 (c) Masculines : SucfjftaBe, letter of the alphabet f^riebe, peace ffunfe, spark ©ebante, thought ©laube, faitb £aufe, heap Svante, name ©ante, seed ©cfjabe, injury SBiGe, will 2Iffe, monkey ©radje, dragon $al!e, falcon £afe, hare SBroe, lion GtaBe, raven Jtafe, cheese And names of males, as: ber Sote, messenger; ber Jfcnabe, boy, etc. Neuters: Sluge, eye; ©nbe, end; ©r&e, inheritance. (e) 2)cr ^atijoIU', Catho 3. (b) Masculines: ^rrtum, (c) Feminines in — nt3 : ♦Sebriingnig, distress # Sefugnig, authority Setiimmernig, sorrow Seforguig, apprehension SetriiEmig, affliction Seroaubtuig, conjuncture ©mpfanguig, conception ©rfenntuig, cognition error ; Rectum, wealth. ©rlau&nig, permission ©rfparnig, savings ^auhtig, putrefaction ^Jorberuig, furtherance §inftemig, darkness $enntnig, knowledge # ©djrcc!tnig, terror £roiite), hat ber liefer, jaw ber ftunbe, customer ber Setter, guide ber ^Rangel, want bag 9Rarf, marrow ber DReffer, measurer, surveyor ber Reig, rice bag Sanb (pi. Sanber), ribbon bag Snub (pi. Siinbe), bundle bag Sauer, cage bag ©E;or (pi. ©f>ore), choir bag @rbe, inheritance bag ©rEemttnig, verdict bie ©eifjel, scourge bag ©ift, poison bag §arfi, resin bie #eibe, heath bie ^jut, heed, guard bie liefer (pi. iliefern), pine-tree bie $unbe, knowledge, tidings bie Seiter, ladder bie fJRangel, mangle bie 2Jiarf (pi. 'JRarfen), border-land ba§ SReffer, knife ba§ ReiS (pi. Reifer), twig APPENDICES. 3^9 ber S<$ilb (pi Sd&itbe), shield ba§ Sdjilb (pi. Sdjilber), sign-board ber See (pi Seen), lake bie See, sea, ocean ber Sproffe, offspring bie Sproffe, step (in a ladder) bie Steuer, tax, duty ba§ Steuer, helm ber Stiff, pencil, tack ba§ Stift, pious foundation ber £eif, part ba§ 5£eil, share, portion ber$ljor (pi SCfjoren), fool ba<3 2 f)or (pi. gate ber S3erbienft, gain ba3 SBerbienft, merit K. Monosyllabic Adjectives without Umlaut. (Less. XXV, § 125 .) barfd), harsh fyofyl, hollow platt, flat fcbroff, rugged brao, good ^olb, favourable plump, clumsy ftarr, stiff bunt, variegated fdf)I, bald rafd;, quick ftolg, proud bumpf, dull (said f.arg, stingy rof), raw ftraff, tight, stretched of sound) fnapp, tight ruub, round ftumpf, blunt falb, fallow lame fad;t, gentle, low toll, mad falfd), false Iajj, tired fanft, soft oofl, full flad), fiat matt, wearied fatt, satiated mal;r, true fro§, joyful morfcf), rotten fd;Iaff, slack ja^m, tame glatt, smooth nacft, naked fdjfctnf, slender The practice varies with bang or bange, afraid ; blafj, pale ; fromm, pious ; gefunb. sound; flar, clear; nafc, wet; 5 avt, tender. L. Strong Verbs not GIVEN IN THE LISTS. (Less. XXXII, § 192 .— Rare forms in [ ].) 1. bingen (W.), hire — gebunger 2. ga(b)ren (W.), ferment gor gegoren 3. gebdren , 1 bear, bring forth gebar geboren 4. feifen (W.), chide, scold Jiff gefiffen 5. flieben (W.), split, cleave Hob geflobett 6 . fnetpen 2 (W.), pinch fnipp gefnippen 7. pflegen , 3 practise ( Pflog ) ( Ipflcxg] ) gepflogert 8 . jaugen 4 (W.), suck fog gefogcn 9. fc§inben (W.), flay J [fc^anb] > ( [fd;unb] ) gcfd;unbett lO. fdjleifjen (W.), fray gefdjliffen 11. fdjnaitben (W.), snort fd;nob gefcbnoben 12. fdjrauben (W.), screw fdirob ge[a;robett 13. j d;w dr en , 5 fester ( id; mor ) ( [fdjnmr] ) gefdjrooren 14. fpleifcen (W.), split f m gefpliffen 15. ftecfen 8 (W. N.), stick, be stuck ftaf [geftoden] 16. ftieben ( W. N.), scatter ftob geftoben 17. ftinfen, stink ftanf geftunfen 1 gebierft, etc. 2 Rarely strong. 3 Weak in other meanings, . 4 fdugft, fdugt, cr faugft, faugt. 6 fdjroiert. 8 ftictft, etc.; generally weak. EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION, Explanations. — i. References are to the §. 2. Words in Italics are not to be translated. 3. Words connected by w , if followed by a note, are included in that note; otherwise Buch connected words are to be rendered by a single word in German. 4. The gender is not given, where it is according to rule. I. One may 1 say of the metaphysicians 2 what Scaliger said of the natives 3 of the Basque 4 Provinces 6 : “lam told 6 that they understand each w other, but I do not believe it.” 1 ‘ can/ 2 2ftetapf)t)fifer. Her (Singcborene. 4 ba§fijd). 5 s #roirin^ /*. 6 ii3>2. II. “A friend of mine,” 1 says Lord Erskine, “suffered from 2 continual 3 sleeplessness. 4 Various 5 means 6 were tried 7 to w send_him w to^sleep 8 — but in^vain. 9 Atjast his physicians resorted 10 to an experiment 11 which succeeded perfectly. 12 They dressed 13 him in a watchman’s^coat, 11 put 15 a lantern into his 16 hand, placed 17 him in a sentry-box, 18 and — he was asleep 19 in ten minutes.” 1 119, 3 (c). 2 nn + dat. 3 fortrodfjrenb. 4 @ri)(aflcftgfeit. 5 t>evfcf)teben. 6 Sftittel, n. Hevfittfjen. 8 Ujn einguf d) lcif crn. 9 m*geben8. xo uerfatten auf + acc. 11 $$erfucf), m. 12 UoHftdnbig. 13 atqiefjen + dat. of pers. and acc. of thing. 14 9 Iad)ttt)dd)terfittef, m. 15 ftecfen. 16 44, 6 (b). 17 fteEeiu 18 SE 3 ad)tf)dn$d)en. 19 eingefd)fafetu III. The great Goethe was not particularly 1 fond 2 of music. When a pianist 3 once, at a Court^concert in Weimar, was in w the w middle 6 of a very long sonata, 6 the poet suddenly 7 rose 8 up and, to the horror 9 of the assembled 10 ladies and gentle- men, exclaimed 11 : “ If it lasts 12 three minutes longer, I shall confess 13 everything.” x bejonbrr, adj. 2 greitnb. 3 $(atrierfpiefer. 4 §of, m. ; use compound word. 5 mitten in. 6 donate, /. 7 plo^ficf). 8 ftet)eu. 9 0d)recfeit, m. 10 mlauuneln. xx ritfeu. X2 baueru. 13 gefte^en. EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. 391 IV. In the first piece 1 Theodore Hook wrote for the stage, 2 a traveller 3 comes up w to 4 the door of an inn, 5 and says: “ Excuse me, my friend, are you the master of this house ? ” — “ Yes, sir,” is 6 the reply ; “ my wife has-been 7 dead these 8 three weeks.” 1 ©tiicf, n. 2 SBiifjne. 3 ber Stofenbe. 4 auf . . 224, 4. 5 ©afifyauS. 6 lautet. 7 257, 4, Note. 8 4 for the last three weeks ’ ; 46. V. “Ven you’re a married man , Samivel,” said old 1 Wel- ler, “ you’ll understand a— good— many— things 2 as 3 you don’t understand now ; but vether it’s worth-while 4 going^through 6 so much to learn so little, as the charity— boy 6 said ven he got— to— the— end-of 7 the alphabet, is a matter— o’— taste. 8 I rayther think it isn’t. 9 ” 1 a proper name preceded by an adj. takes the art. 2 $tele§. 3 4 that,’ 96,5* 4 ber 9ftiif)e rnert. 5 burdj'madjeit. 6 SfvmenfdjiUev. 7 fertig fein mit. 8 ©e{d)ntacfsfad)e. 9 ‘ I scarcely think (glcutben) it.* VI. George Selwyn’s morbid 1 passion 2 for public executions * and similar 4 horrors 6 was notorious. 6 He paid— a^visit— to Lord Holland while the latter lay on his 7 deathbed. 8 When his— lordship 9 was told 10 that Mr. Selwyn had called, 11 he said : “ Should he come again, please bring him up. 12 If I am still alive 13 1 shall be— happy 14 to see him. If I am dead he will be happy to see me.” 1 franf^aft. 2 geibenfdjaft. 3 §inridjtung. 4 afynlidj. 5 ©rduet, 6 allgemetn befannt. 7 44, 6 (a). 8 ©terbebett. 9 ©e. ©ttabeit. I0 benad)* ridjtigen. 11 4 been there/ 12 210, 3, (< b ). 13 am Eebett. X4 fid) freuen. VII. At 1 the time when Napoleon the Third lived as an exile 2 in London, he was always a welcome guest at 3 Lady Blessington’s, at 4 Gore House. Very soon after his return* 39 2 EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. to Paris, while his political 6 prospects 7 were still rather* doubtful , 9 her— ladyship 10 paid— a-visit-to 11 that capital, and met 12 the Prince driving 13 in the Bois de Boulogne. It was an embarrassing 14 encounter , 15 for the future 16 Emperor of the French had shown 17 himself anything— but 18 grateful for her ladyship’s 10 courtesy . 19 He saluted 20 her, however , 21 with forced politeness , 22 and asked : “ Countess , 23 shall you stay long in Paris?” — “I really 24 cannot say,” answered Lady Blessington, with a bewitching 25 smile ; “ and you ? ” 1 227, (< b ), 2. 2 ber SBerbcmnte. 3 bet. 4 in. 5 Sftiidfefjr,/. 6 politifd). 7 2lit§fid)t,/. 8 3iemUcf). 10 4 the lady.* 11 befurfjen. 12 tref* feit {trans.). 13 auf ciner ©pagierfal)rt. 14 uedegeit. 15 3itfantmcntrcffen. 16 gufiinftig. 17 erroeifcrt. I8 nid)t8roenigerate. 19 ftreunbUdjfcit. 2 °griigen. “iubcffcn* 22 §oflid)feit. 23 gitdbige ©raftiu 24 nrirnid). 25 be$aubentb. VIII. Talleyrand was bored 1 for 2 his 3 autograph 4 by a dull 6 English nobleman . 6 At— last 7 he sent him the following invitation 8 : “ Dear Lord, — Will you honour 9 me with your company 10 next Wednesday evening, at eight o’clock. I have invited a number 11 of exceedingly clever 12 people, and I do not like 13 to be the only fool 14 among them.” 1 $um Ubevbrug beftiirmen. 2 urn. 3 ‘ an.’ 4 ^Cutograpf)/ *• 5 einfciltig. 6 (5belmaiut. 7 enbUd). 8 ©intabung. 9 beel)ren, imper. IO @egemnavt (presence). 11 ^abt,/. 12 geiftreid). 13 gerne mbgen. I4 2)ummfopf. XI. At a dinner-party 1 in Paris, a dull 2 and ugly 8 ba- ron 4 sat between Madame de Stael and Madame Re'camier (the acknowleged belle 6 of the day), and whispered 6 to the former: “Am I not fortunate to be 7 sitting between beauty and genius 8 ?” — “Not so very fortunate,” replied the of- fended authoress , 9 “for you possess 10 neither the one nor the other ! ” 1 fitter (Fr.), n. 2 bumm. 3 f)a6Ud). 4 5 Baron'. 5 @d)’ont)eit. 6 in 3 Otjr ffilftern. 7 fid) befinben. 8 ©erne, n. 9 @$riftffcUerin. 10 beft^eru EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. 393 X. When the dramatist Gilbert was one day descending 1 in the greatest hurry 2 the steps 3 fronting 4 the Savage Club, 5 a stranger, in a state 6 of excitement 7 which defied 8 regular 9 construction, 10 addressed him thus : “ Excuse me, have you seen a gentleman with one eye of^the^name^of 11 X. — ? ” Gilbert answered 12 this question with another : “ Stop 13 a moment. What’s the name of his other eye ? ” 1 beruntevfieigen. 2 (Site, /. 3 £reppe, sing. 4 t>or. 5 use the Engl, words. 6 ,3nftanb, m. 7 Stufregmig. 8 fpotten 4- gen. 9 regelrecfjt. xo 2Bort» folge. “ 91 a mens. 12 beantmorten. 13 erfaubcn. XI. When Charles Lamb was still a cierk 1 in the India- House, 2 he was one day rebuked 3 asjollows 4 by a superior 5 : “ I have remarked, Mr. Lamb, that you always come to 6 the office 7 very late.” — “ That’s true, to w be w sure, 8 ” answered Elia ; “ but you must not forget that I always go away very early.” Of^course 9 such an explanation 10 was more than enough. 11 1 ©djreiber ; 44 , 5. 2 use the Engl, words. 3 gur Sftebe ftelten. 4 fob genbeumafeen. 5 ber 5 Borgeic£te. 6 auf. 7 ^Bureau, n. 8 roofjl (after the verb ‘ is ’). 9 natiirlid). 10 (Srflcintng. 11 fjinreicfjenb. XII. I never in my life committed 1 more than one act of folly, 9 ” said Rulhiere one day in the presence of Talleyrand. “ But when will it end 3 ?” inquired the latter. l begef)en, trans. 2 £ovl)eit. 3 enben. XIII. While Sheridan was staying 1 at the country w house 2 of a friend, he was one morning asked 3 by a lady to accompany her on a walk. The lady was neither witty nor beautiful, and the author of the 4 School for Scandal ’ 4 was at w a_loss® for an excuse, until he luckily 6 discovered and announced 7 to her that it was raining. His disappointed 8 persecutress 9 26 394 EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. retired , 10 but shortly 11 came back to^announce 12 that the weather had cleared^up . 13 “ So w it_has , 14 madam, 15 ” said Sheridan, driven 16 to despair 17 ; “but it has only 18 cleared up enough for one — not yet for two.” 1 ciitf 23 efutf) fein. 2 £anbfyau 3 . 3 bitten. 4 i&ijterfcfjule. 5 nerlegen urn. 6 gtiicf (idbermeife. 7 mitteilen + dat. 8 in ifjren (Srmartnngen (expecta- tions) getcinjd)t; 283,4. 9 $erfo(gerin. 10 fid) gurucf^en. 11 balb* I2 mit ber ^ad)rid)t. 13 fxcf) anfflaren. “allerbingS. xs gndbige gran. 16 299, X7 $Beran)eifhtng; use def. art. I8 !)od)ften$. XIV. Foote, being annoyed 1 one day by an itinerant 2 fiddler , 3 who produced 4 harsh 6 discords 6 under his window, threw him down a coin 7 and bade him be^gone , 8 as one scraper 9 at 10 a door was quite sufficient . 11 x belaftigen ; 284, 1, (a). 2 Ijerumgiefjenb. 3 ©eigenftietcr. 4 pernor- bringen. 5 fd)rtU. 6 9ftif3ton, m. 7 ©eXbftitdf^ n . 8 fid) au$ bem @taube madden. 9 $ra£er. 10 an. XI genng. XV. A certain nobleman was detected 1 trying 2 to cheat 8 at 4 cards , 6 and turned 6 out of the house with the threat 7 that he should be thrown out_of the window if he came again. He related his misfortune 8 to Talleyrand, protested 9 his inno- cence , 19 and asked 11 him at the same time 12 for 13 advice . 14 “ Well, my dear friend, I advise you to play in^future 15 only on w the w ground w floor . 16 ” x entbeden. 2 “in the attempt.” 3 betnigen. 4 itn. 5 $artenfpiet, n. *lt)eifen. 7 3)robung. 8 2Jb6gefcf)icf, n. 9 beteuern. 10 Unfdjulb,/. 11 bit* ten. X2 jngleid). 13 um. X4 9tat, m. IS !iinftig. 16 ju ebener (Srbe. XVI. A barrister 1 entered 2 the court 8 one morning with his wig 4 stuck quite on one side. Not being w aware B how ridic- ulous 6 he looked , 7 he was^surprised 8 at 9 the observations 10 made 11 upon^it , 12 and atjength 13 he asked Curran: “Do EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. 395 you see anything ridiculous 14 in this wig, Mr. Curran?” — “ Nothing except the head,” was the consolatory 15 answer. 1 ^boofat'. 2 treteu in + acc. 3 ©eridjtSfaaf, m. 4 S £erriicfe,/. s nuffen, 284,1 (b). 6 (dcf)er(icf). 7 au3fd)en. 8 ftrf) hntnbern. 9 iiber 4- acc. 10 $8 e* merfung. " 290,2 (b). 12 bariiber. I 3 enblid). 14 122, 11. 15 troftlid). XVII. After a duel 1 with young O’Connell, Lord Alvanley gave a guinea 2 to the coachman 3 who had driven him to and from the scene of the encounter . 4 Surprised at 5 the largeness of the sum , 6 the man said : “ My lord , 7 I w only w /^ w you w to 8 ” Alvanley interrupted him with the words : “ My friend, the guinea is for bringing 9 me back, not for tak- ing 10 me.” n. 2 @uinee / , f 3 $ut|'d)er ; 45, Rule 2. 4 “to the scene of the encounter (@tellbid)ein, n.) and from there back.” 5 burd). 6 “large sum (©itmme).” 7 gncibiger §en\ 8 id) fjabe ©ie j a nur f)irt — . 9 277. 10 fjinnefymen, use the perf. XVIII. A gentleman, who had been w worsted 1 in a dispute 1 with Porson, lost his w temper . 3 “ Professor , 4 ” said he, “ my opinion 5 of you is most 6 contemptible. 7 ” — “ Sir,” returned the great Grecian , 8 “ I never yet met 9 with any 10 of your opinions that was 11 not contemptible.” 1 ben $iir$ern jiefyen. 2 disputation. 3 bie ©ebulb. 4 $err ^rofeffor. 5 9fteinung. 6 127, 2. 7 oeradjtfidj. 8 ©riedje. 9 oorfommen (impers. + dat. of pers.). 10 ein (nom.). 11 plupf. subj.; 268, 4. XIX. The English , 1 says Sydney Smith, are a calm,* reflecting 3 people ; they are ready to give time and money as soon as they are convinced 4 of a thing ; but they love dates , 5 names, and certificates . 6 In w the w midst of the most heartrending 7 narratives , 8 John Bull requires 9 the day 10 of the month, the year 11 of our Lord, the name of the parish , 13 396 EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. and the countersign 13 of three or four respectable 14 house- holders. 15 As soon as these affecting 16 circumstances 17 have been stated, 18 he can no longer hold w out, 19 but 20 gives way 21 to his natural kindness — puffs, 22 blubbers, 23 and sub- scribes. 1 Chtgfanber. 2 ruljig. 3 iiberfe'genb. 4 itberseu'gen. 5 3af)f, /. 6 23 egfanbigmtg$fd)ein, m. 7 Ijerggerreijjenb. 8 ( 5 r$df)lung. 9 oetlangciu 10 Saturn. 11 3al)re^af)f. 12 $ird)}piel, n. 13 Uuteridjrift,/. 14 angefcljen. 15 §au$l)err. 16 riif)renb. 17 Uuiftanb, m. 18 angeben. 19 c8 ansfyalten. 20 236, 1, Rem. 1. 21 freien 2 auf laffcn. 22 fdjttauben. 23 ftf) hidden. XX. A young poet once came to Piron to read 1 him a couple of new sonnets 2 written 3 by him, and ask him which he preferred. 4 The w moment 5 he had finished the first, Piron said hastily 6 : “I prefer the other/’ and positively 7 refused 8 to listen even 9 to a line 10 of w it. 1 Do rlc fen. 2 ©onnett', n . 3 uerfaffen ; 290, 2 (b). 4 t>orgteI)ert. 5 ©0* balb . . . nur. 6 Zaftig. 7 burd)au§. 8 fief) meigern. 9 aud) uur. 10 gate* XXI. Wewitzer, the well-known actor 1 and wag, 2 was joking 3 and laughing at 4 rehearsal 5 one day, instead of minding 6 his part. 7 Raymond, the stage-manager, 8 took 9 him to w task, 10 saying : “ Mr. Wewitzer, I wish 11 you would pay 12 a little attention. 13 ” — “ Well, 14 sir, 15 ” answered Wewitzer, “ so I am 16 ; I’m paying as little attention as possible.” 1 ©dbaufpieler* 2 2Bi£bofb, m. 3 fdjer^en* 4 auf. 5 $robe, use def. art. 6 pciffen + entf, with acc. ; 224, 2, (, b ). 7 9totte. 8 Sftegiffeur. 9 ftetten. 10 gur 9 iebe. 11 mottle. 12 geben. 13 ld)t. 14 9 ?un. 15 §>err SKegiffeur. I6 ba§ tfjue id) fa aud). XXII. The younger Dumas once perpetrated 1 a cruel 2 joke 3 at^the^expense 4 of the Manzanares, 5 the rivulet 6 that EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. 397 runs^through 7 Madrid and is called a river by the grandilo- quent 8 inhabitants of this city. When the famous dramatist 9 was 10 one day present 10 at a bullfight , 11 either the heat, or some 12 revolting 13 incident 14 in the show , 15 overcame 16 him to w such w an w extent 17 that he fainted . 18 On 19 somebody bring- ing him a glass of water, as he was recovering , 20 Dumas declined 21 it, saying 22 in 23 a faint 24 voice: “Go and pour it into the Manzanares ; the river needs 26 it much more than I!” 1 madjen. 2 bitter. 3 2Bi£. 4 auf Soften. s masc. 6 SBadj. 7 burdj* Iatt'fen. 8 gro(3fprcd)erifd). 9 2 )rama'tifer. IO behuofyneii + dat. 11 ©tier* gefedjt. 12 157. 13 emporenb. 14 forfait, m. 15 ©d)aujpicl, n. 16 iiber* nml'tigeit. 17 bermofgen. 18 ol)nmdd)tig inerben. 19 277, Rem. 6. 20 fid) erfjolcn. 2X abIeI)nen. 22 284, 1 (a). 23 mit. 24 fd)road). 25 notig fyaben + acc. XXIII. Frank Talfourd, who rejoiced^in 1 a stature 2 of six feet and several inches, was playfully 3 challenged 4 at the Savage Club one evening to raise his foot as_high w as 5 the chandelier 6 that hung in the middle of the room. Lifting 7 his foot with w rather w too w much w vigour , 8 he knocked down one of the glass w globes , 9 which fell to the ground and was w smashed 10 to atoms . 11 Frank rang the bell instantly, and asked the responding 12 waiter for 13 the amount 14 of his bill . 15 “ Pray, sir, what have you had?” — “Oh!” said Talfourd, pointing 16 up to 17 the chandelier, “only a glass of that.” 1 fid) erfreuen + gen. 2 §>ol)e. 3 im ©djerge. 4 auffoibern. 5 bi§ git. 6 $ronteud)ter. 7 in bie Jpolje roerfeu, 284, 1 (b). 8 etiuaS gu fraftig. 9 @laS- fuppel, /. 10 gerfdjetleit, neut. 11 “into a thousand pieces.” 12 erfdjeiitett. 13 nadj. 14 23 etrag, m . 15 SKedjmtng. 16 fyirgeigen, 284, 1 (a). 17 auf. XXIV. Douglas Jerrold once said to a young gentleman who burned with 1 an ardent^desire 2 to see himself in w print 3 : 39 $ EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. " Be advised 4 by me, young man ; don’t take down 5 the shutters until you have something in the window worth w look- ing^at. 6 ” 1 t>or + dat. 2 SBegterbe. 3 gebrucf t* 4 use taffen, with reft, form, xi4, ( 3 ). s ab. 6 feljenStnert, 122. 11. XXV. Alexandre Dumas had a well-won 1 reputation in Paris 2 society as a teller— of— anecdotes. At a large even- ing-party, he was 3 rather 4 annoyed 3 at the persistent 5 efforts of his hostess to— induce— him 6 to exhibit 7 his power 8 in this accomplishment. 9 At last, tired of refusing, 10 he said : 44 Every one has his trade, 11 madam. 12 The gentleman who entered 13 the room just before me is a distinguished 14 artillery^officer. Let him bring a cannon here and fire 15 it ; then I will tell one of my little stories.” x ftoljf&erbient. 2 ^arifer, 122, 9. 3 ftd) argent + iiber with acc. 4 nicf)t toeing. 5 unablaffig. 6 if)it bal)tn brtngeit. 7 geigen* 8 gertigfeit. 9 gad), n. 10 subst. inf. XI £anbtoerf. 12 gnabige grau. 13 eintreten in. 14 anSgegeidjnet. 15 abfeuern. XXVI. Some brainless 1 acquaintance 2 of Rivarol’s was boasting 3 of 4 his having 6 mastered 6 four languages. 44 1 con- gratulate 7 you,” said Rivarol; 44 you’ll have in w future 8 four words for one idea. 9 ” x gebanfenarm. 2 ber 23 efannte, 122, 1, 2. 3 brafjten. * 277, Rem. 1. 5 bag clause. 6 fid) &olIig aneigtten. 7 gratulieren + dat. 8 fiinftig. 9 ©ebanfe. XXVII. On the day after the first representation 1 of 4 L’Ami des Femmes, 2 ’ a comedy 3 by Alexandre Dumas (the second), the author’s father sent him a letter, congratu- lating 4 him on 6 the success 6 of his piece, 7 and volunteering 8 his own collaboration 9 on 10 some future 11 one. 13 The letter EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. 399 closed with a somewhat grandiloquent phrase 13 : “If a gua- rantee 14 is desired 15 for my ability , 16 I beg to refer 17 you to 17 4 Monte Christo 1 and 4 The Three Musketeers .’ 18 ” The son replied : 44 Even if I did not know the great works you 19 mention , 20 I should gladly 21 accept your offer , 22 on w account of the high opinion 23 my father evidently 24 entertains 25 of you.” 1 $uffitf)ntng. 2 ber grctuenfreunb. 3 n. 4 “in which he con- gratulated.” 5 jit. 6 (Srfofg, m. 7 ©tiicf, n. 8 ftd) erbieteit. 9 “to colla- borate (mitarbeiten).” 10 an. ,x fpciter. 12 122, 4, Note. X3 *pijrafe. X4 93 iivg* Is ttcrlangctt. 16 gci!)tgfeit. 17 fyimueifen nuf + acc. 18 SJhtsfctier. 19 96, 7. Obs. ^ennciljnen. 21 mit greuben. 22 Sluerbieten, n. 23 SDWmtng, 24 augenfdjeinlid). 25 “has.” XXVIII. Curran happened w to w tell 1 Sir 2 Thomas Turton that he could never speak in^public 8 a quarter w of w an w hour without moistening 4 his lips . 6 Sir Thomas declared that he had spoken for five hours in the House w of w Commons 6 on 7 the Nabob of Oude without feeling 8 the least 9 thirst. 44 That is very remarkable indeed , 10 ” observed 11 Curran, 44 for every- body 12 agrees 13 that it 14 was the driest 15 speech of the session . 16 ” 1 eqdljfte gelegenttidj. 2 bent ©ir. 3 bffentttd). 4 anfeitcfjten; 224, 2, ( 3 ). 5 Etybe, /• 6 UuterljaitS. 7 iiber + acc.. 8 Derfpiiven. 9 gerittg. 10 ja (immediately after the verb). 11 bemerlen. 12 2 lUe (pi. ). 13 barttt iiber- cinftimmen. X4 ba§. 15 tvotfen. 16 ©effion. XXIX. A gentleman praising 1 the personal 2 charms 3 of a very w plain 4 lady in Foote’s presence, the latter 6 said : 44 Why don’t you lay 6 claim 7 to 8 such a beauty ? ” — 44 What right have I to 9 do so?” was 10 the counter- question . 11 44 Every right,” replied Foote, 44 by 12 the universal 13 law w of w nations 14 — as the first discoverer . 16 ” 1 284, 1 (a). 2 perfonUd). 3 Sietg, m. 4 “anything but (241, 19, Note) 400 EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. beautiful” *134. 6 ntad)ett. 7 8 aitf + acc. 9 bap. xo fau* tete. 11 ©egettfrage. 12 nad). 13 allgemeitt. 14 SSolferredjt. 15 ©ntbecfer. XXX. One day the poet and banker 1 Rogers took 2 Thomas Moore and Sydney Smith home in his carriage from a breakfast, and insisted 3 on showing them by w the w way 4 Dryden’s house in some obscure 5 street. It was very wet weather; the house looked 6 very much like 6 other old houses, and, having 7 thin shoes on, they both strongly 8 remonstrated 9 ; but in w vain. Rogers got w out 10 himself , 11 expecting 12 them 13 to do likewise 14 ; but Sydney Smith leaned 15 laughing out of the window, and exclaimed : “ Oh , 16 now you see why Rogers doesn’t mind 17 getting 18 out: he has goloshes 19 on. But, my dear Rogers, lend each of us a golosh ; we will then each stand upon one leg and admire the house as long as you please . 20 ” 1 >Bampticr (pron. as in French). 2 bringett. 3 befleljen auf 4 -acc., 277. 4 uittcnrcgS. 5 obfcur. 6 ausfefyett hue. 7 284, 1 (£>). 8 ettergifd). 9 pro* teftieren. 10 au$fteigen. “ 42, 3, Rem. 12 “ and expected.” 13 275. I4 ba§ ©leidje. IS Icfjnte. 16 01)0. 17 fid) fdjeuett Dor + dat. 18 277, Rem. 3. 19 ©afofdje, /. 20 gefattett, impers., + dat. XXXI. “ When I was going from my house at Enfield to the India House one morning,” says Charles Lamb, “ I met Coleridge on his way to pay me a visit. He was brimful 1 of some 2 new idea, and — in w spite w of 3 my telling him that my time was precious 4 — he drew me into the door of an unoccupied 5 garden by the roadside , 6 and 7 there — shel- tered 8 by 9 an evergreen 13 hedge 11 from observation 12 — he rook 13 me by 14 the button^of w my w coat , 16 closed 16 his 17 eyes, and commenced an enthusiastic 18 discourse , 19 waving 20 at_the_same w time 21 his right hand gently , 22 as 23 the musical 24 words flowed in an unbroken 25 stream 26 from his 27 lips. I lis- tened 28 entranced 2J ; but the striking 30 of a church^clock re- EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. 401 called 31 me to a sense of my duty . 32 I saw it was of no use to attempt to break away 53 ; so 34 I took w advantage_of 35 his ab- sorption 36 in his subject , 37 quietly 38 cut off the button from my coat with my pen-knife 39 and decamped . 40 As I was passing 41 the same garden five hours afterwards on my way w home , 42 I heard Coleridge’s voice, looked^in , 43 and — there he stood, with closed eyes, the button 44 in his fingers, gracefully waving his right hand, just as when I had left 45 him. He had never 46 missed 47 me.” 1 iiberbotl' Don. 2 irgenb ein. 3 tro^bem bag. 4 foftbar. 8 linbenn^t. 6 £anbftrage. 7 Insert verb and object here. 8 fcf)itf3en, 291, 5; 299. 9 burdb 10 immergriin. 11 §ecfe. 12 SBeobadjtung. 13 faffett. 14 228 (b). 15 9 iocffnobf. 16 fdjliegcn, 123. 17 44, 6 {a). 18 begeiftcrt. 19 Stebe. 20 l)in unb Ijev betnegen, 131,^., Rem. 21 loobei. 22 anmutig (‘gracefully’). 23 tmifjrenb. 24 rooljltonenb. 25 miaufljaU'fam. 26 ©from. 27 44, 6 (b). 28 gubbren. 29 entgiicf t* 30 @d)fagen, inf. subst. 31 erinncrn ait + acc. 32 /. 33 “ I saw (erfemten) the uselessness (9frtf3fofigfcit) of an attempt to breakaway (fief) lo^reigeit) 34 be$f)alb. 35 benuf$ctl (trans.). 36 “it that he was absorbed (Dottig Derfunfen in + acc.).” 37 ( 55 egenftanb, m. 38 ruf)ig. 39 gebenneffer, n. 40 9teigau§ liefymeit. 41 oorbeifommeit an + dat. ^einiroeg. 43 fjineingitcfen. ^255, 2. 45 oerfaffen. 46 garnish 47 toermifjem Sir Thomas More. XXXII. Erasmus describes 1 this great man thus 3 : — “More seems to be made 3 and born for Friendship 4 ; of this virtue he is a sincere 5 follower 6 and very strict observer . 7 He is not afraid 8 to be accused 9 of 10 having many friends, which , 11 according^to Hesiod, is said 12 to be no great praise . 13 Every _one may 14 become More’s friend ; he is not slow 15 in choosing , 16 he is kind 17 in cherishing , 13 and con- stant 19 in keeping 20 them . 21 If by^accident 22 he becomes the friend of one 23 whose vices 24 he cannot correct , 25 he slackens 26 the reins 27 of friendship towards 28 him, divert- ing 29 it rather 30 by w little^and w little , 31 than entirely 32 dissol- 402 EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. ving 38 it Those 34 persons whom he finds 35 to be sincere 3i and consonant 37 to his own 38 virtuous 39 disposition , 40 he is so charmed 41 with , 42 that he appears to place 43 his chief 44 worldly 46 pleasure in their conversation 46 and company. And although More is negligent 47 in 48 his own temporal 49 concerns , 60 yet 61 no w one is more assiduous 62 in assisting 63 the suits 54 of his friends than he. What shall I say more ? If any^person is w desirous 65 to have a perfect 66 model^ofjriend- ship, no one can afford 68 him a better than More. In his conversation 69 he shows so much affability 60 and sweet- ness w of w manner , 61 that no w mancanbe of^so^austere^a^dis- position , 62 but w that 63 More’s conversation must 64 make 66 him cheerful 65 ; and no matter 66 so unpleasing , 67 but that with his wit 68 he can take w away 69 from it all w disgust. 70 ” 1 befcftreiben. 2 folgenbermagen. s fcf)affen, 186; 299. 4 44, 1 (£). 5 auf* ridjtig ( adv .). 6 “ to be a follower of” = nad)folgeit + dat. 7 “ and very strictly observes (beobadlten) it.” 8 277; 291, 11. 9 “of the reproach (SBorttiurf) of having.” 10 277, Rem, 1. ”96, 5. 12 200, 5 (c). I3 9 iut)m, m . 14 “can.” 15 langfatn. 16 S£3al)ten, 270; use def. art. 17 freunMicf). 18 pffegerr. 19 unerf^iitterlid). 20 feftfjatten. 21 “of his friends.” 22 fdUig, 239, Rem. 2. 23 “a man (Siftenfd)).” 24 £after, n. 25 oerbeffcnt. 26 locfcvn. 27 23 anb; 64. 28 mit. 29 ablenfen; 284, 1 (a). 30 liebcr. 31 atlmatig. 32 gan^. 33 tofeit. 34 3S erfinben. 36 aufridjtig. 37 ent^ jpredjenb + dat. 38 eigen. 39 tugenbtjaft. 40 @imte§art. 4I begaubern. 42 Use as prep, before “those persons.” 43 (Men in + acc. ““greatest.” 45 toettlid). 46 Untedjaltnng. 47 gleicf)gi(tig. 48 gegen. 49 toeltlid). 50 2ln* getegenfyeit. 51 bod). 52 ftrebfam. 53 “in the support (Unterftii^nng) of.” 54 $ngelegenl)eit. 55 tt>iinfd)en. 56 ooUfommen. 57 3beal', n.; use compound word. 58 liefcrn. 59 Umgang, m. 60 £eut]eligteit. 61 SHebenSroiirbigfeit. 62 fo fjerbe geftnnt, 63 bag nid)t. 64 fottte. 6S anffyeitern. 66 ©egenftanb, m. 67 rotbrig. 68 m . 69 entfernen non. 70 2lEe$ SBibertoartige* VOCABULARY. ABBREVIATIONS, I. German: 9lnm. = Slnnterfung, note. 21. 2.= SllteS 2eftament, Old Testament, o. a. D. = am angefiibrten Drte, in the place referred to. bgl., bergl. = bergleicben, the like, b. = any case of the definite article, b. b- = ba3 fjeijjt, ; b. i. =b ba3 ift, > ' b. $.= biefe§ ^atjreS, of this year, b. 9tt. = biefeg 2Jtonat§, of this month. 2r. = SDoftor, Doctor. ©to., ©tor. = ©uer, ©ure, ©urer (in titles), fl. = ©ulben, florin. that is. $r. = ^rau, Mrs. ^r.= ^reiljerr, Baron. $rl. = ^rciulein, Miss. geb.= geboren, born, geft. = gefiorben, died. ©r.= ©Jrofcben (a coin), b., ^etl. = ^eilig, holy, saint. £r., £rn. = £err, $errn, Mr. i. S* = itn Sabre, in the year, flap. = Jtapitel, chapter. Jtr. = Jtveujer (a coin). I.= lie§, read. 9J1., M. = 9)larf (money). SKffr. = -Dtanuflript, manuscript. 2ftaj. = SOiajeftat, Majesty. 91./ 91. 91. = 9tame, name. rt. ©br. = nacb ©brifto, after Christ. 91. ©. = 9tafcbrift, postscript. 91. 2. =. 9leue§ 2eftament, New Testa- ment. $Pf., ipfb. = ipfurtb, pound. = pfennig, penny, pp. = imb fo toeiter, and so forth. ©e. ©r. = ©eine, ©einer, his (in titles). ©. = ©eite, page. ©t., ©ft.== ©emit/ Saint. f„ =• fiebe, see. f. o. = flebe oben, see above, f . u. = fiebe unten, ) f. to. u. = ftebe toeiter unten, ) see e ow ‘ 2., 2b-/ 2bl.= 2eil, 2beil, part. 2b lr. = 2baler (money), u. a. m.= unb anbere tnebr, u. bgl. m.= unb bergleicben mebr, u. f. f. = unb fo fort, u. f. to. = unb fo toeiter, S3. = S3er§, verse. o. ©br. = nor ©brifto, before Christ, nergl., ngl. = oergleu$e, compare. n. o.= non oben, from the top. o. u. = non unten, from the bottom, j. S3. = junt S3eifpiel, for example. et cas- ter a. II. Latin (in addition to others which are used in English also) : A. C A nno Christi , in the year of Our Lord (Christ), a. c. = anni currentis , of the current year. S. T. = Salvo Tituio, without prejudice to the title (used in addresses where the proper title of die person addressed is uncertain). VOCABULARY; GERMAN — ENGLISH. Explanations. — i. The numerals refer to the §. 2. All verbs are weak and regular, unless referred to a § ; the conjugation of others will be found under the § indicated. 3. A — indicates that the word in question is to be supplied; under masc. and neuter substantives, the terminations of the gen. sing, and nom. plur. are given ; thus: 2Bagen (-§; — ) means that the gen. sing, of 2Bagen is SBagenS, and the nom. plur. the same as the nom. sing. The sign indicates Umlaut in the pi., e. g. : ©arten, (-§ ; u ) means that the gen. sing, of this word is ©artend, and the nom. pi. ©drten ; < 3 of)n (-e§ ; -“e) means: gen. sing. < 5 ot;ne 3 , nom. pi. 66§ne ; under fern, substs. the pi. only is given. 4. With adjectives, ^er indicates Umlaut in the compar. and superl. 5. Proper names are not given when they are the same in German as in English. *. 91 b, off. 21'benb, nt. (-e§ ; -e), even- ing ; §eute — , this evening. abenb§, in the evening, abcr, but ; however, abfaljren (186; fein), to set off, depart, go ; set sail, abbalten (188), to hinder, deter. ab^elfen (159), to help, re- medy; bem ift leidjt abs juljelfen, that is easily re- medied. abljoten, to call for. abfiifjlen (ftd>), to (get) cool, abreifen (fein), to set out, start, depart. abfd;neiben (118), to cut off. adjt, eight ; — Stage, a week. 2td)t, f, attention, care ; fid; in — netymen, to be care- ful, take care, abbieren, to add. Slbreffe, / (-n), address. 211'gebva, f. , algebra. ClUein', adj ., alone, only; cottj but, only. att(er, e, e§), all, (the) whole ; a tie £age, every day ; $ltte§, n. sing-., all, every- thing. atterbingS', adv ., certainly, of course. aI 3 , than, as ; as a ; when ; al 3 ob, as if. atfo, thus, so; so then, ac- cordingly. alt ("er), old, ancient, 2tlter, n. (-§), age, old age. Slmerifaner, m. (- 3 , — •) American. an ( dat . or acc ., 65), oh, at (227), to, towards, in, by, near, of; er ftarb am fyieber, he died of fever (231, c). anbieten (131), to offer. anber, other ; bie 2tnbern, the others. anbern, to alter, change ; e 3 lafct fid^ nidjt — , it cannot be helped. anberttjatb, one and a half. 2Infang, m. (-e§ ; u e), com- mencement, beginning, anfangen (188), to begin, commence. anfang 3 , in the beginning, at first. angeneljm {dat.), pleasant, agreeable. dngftlid), frightened, timid, anxious. anbatten (188), to continue. 2InI;b(>e,/. (-n), hill, anfaufen (ficb), to settle, buy up property, anfteiben (fid;), to dress, anfommen (167; fein), to ar- rive ; in 33 . {dat.) — , to arrive at B. anridjten, to cause, anfdjaffen, to provide, pro* cure. 4 o6 VOCABULARY. antreffen (167), to meet with, find. Slntroort, f. (-en), answer, reply. antmorten ( dat.) } to answer, reply. anjieljen (131), to draw on; put on (clothes). Slpfel, m. (-§ ; 2L ), apple. Slpfelbaum, m. (-§ ; -“c), apple-tree. Sipril', m . (-§), April. Slr'beit,/: (-en), work; la- bour; task. arbeiten, to work. SKrbeiter, m. (-3; — •), work- man. 2lrd)iteft', m. (— en ; -en). architect. Slrie (; trisyll .), f (-n), air, song arm (^er), poor 21rm, m. (-e§ ; -e), arm. artig, well behaved; — fein, to behave one’s self pro- perly (of children). 2frjt, m. (-e§ ; -“e), physician, doctor. [rella. Slfc^enputtel, n. (-§), Cinde- 2lft, m. (-e<5; -“e), bough, branch. Slftrolog', m. (-en; -en), astrologer. aucf), also, too, even; roer — , whoever ; mir finb e§ — , so are we. ftuf, (dat. or acc.) on, upon (65); for, in (230); at (227, 3) ; to ; open ; — brei 2Bos dben, for three weeks ( fut ., 229, 3, 2) ; — bafj, in order that ; — bent Sanbe, in the country. aufbleiben (120), to stay up, sit up, remain up. 2lufentbalt, m. (-e§ ; -e), so- journ, stay; delay. &ufgabe,y. (-n), task, lesson, exercise. aufgeben (181), to give up. aufbangen, to hang up. aufbeben (13 1), to raise up, lift up, pick up; abolish, annul, cancel, aufboren, to cease, stop, aufmadben, to open, aufm erf [am, attentive; einen auf etmaS — madjen, to call the attention of any- one to anything. 2 Tufmerffamfeit,y (-en), at- tention ; kindness, auffdfieben (13 1), to put off, postpone, delay, auffe^en, to put up; put on (of a hat). aufftefjen (186; fein), to rise, get up. auffteigen (120 ; fein), to rise, ascend, mount, auftreten (181 ; fein), to ap- pear. auf^ieljen (131), to wind up (of a time-piece). 2luge, n. (-3 ; -n), eye. Slugenblicf, m. (-e§ ; -e), mo- ment, instant. au§ (dat., 46), out of ; from, of; out. 2ltt§brue, at table ; — nteis ttent Dnfel, at my uncle’s; — mir, with me, at my house, about me; — fd) 5 a nem Setter, in fine wea- ther. beibe, both, two. beibe§, n. sing •., both. Seifall, m. (-e 3 ), applause. beinaf)e, almost, nearly. betfjen(n8), to bite, beifteljen (186; dat.), to as- sist, aid. Sefanntfd&aft, f. (-en), ac- quaintance. befennett (99), to acknow- ledge ; confess, befommen (167), to obtain, get, receive, have, bemerlen, to perceive, ob- serve. bemuben(ficb), to take pains, try. bequem 7 , convenient, com- fortable, commodious. 93 erg, tn. (-e$; -e), moun- tain, hill. bergen (159), to hide, berften (159), to burst. berufjmt, famous, celebrated. befcpuTttgen, to occupy, em- ploy ; befcf)dftigt, busy, em- ployed. befinnen (fid); 158), to deli- berate, reflect. befonber§, particularly, es- pecially. beforgen, to attend to. befprcdjen (167), to discuss, beffer ( see gut), better, beft, ( superl . of gut, which see), best; jum 93 eften, for the benefit of ; am befien, best (of all). befteben (186), to undergo, pass (an examination); — (au§), to consist (of) ; — (auf 4* acc -)t to insist (upon). befteigen (120), to ascend, beftellen, to order, beftrafen, to punish, beftreiten (118), to defray. Sefud), m. (-e§; -e), visit, visitors ; — §aben, to have visitors; — e tnadjen, make calls; bei ^emanb auf — fein, to be on a visit at any one’s. befudjen, to visit; bie IXnts nerfitat — , to study at the university. beten, to pray, say prayers, betragen (r86), to amount to. 93 etragen, n. (-§), behaviour, conduct. betreffen (167), to concern; roaS micb betrifft, as for me. betriig cn (13 1), to cheat, de- ceive. Settler, m. (-§; ), beggar, betoegen (131), to induce; to move. beroeifen (120), to prove, de- monstrate. betounbern, to admire. I bejaljlett, to pay (acc. qf thing ; dat. of person and acc. of thing when both are Present, otherwise acc . of person). SejaIjlung,_/.(-en), payment Stoliotfjef 7 , f (-en), library, biegen (131), to bend. 93 ier, n. (-e§ ; -e), beer, ale. bieten (131), to offer. 93 ilb, n. (-e 3 ; -er), picture, portrait. Silbung, f (-en), education. Sillet 7 ( pron . bill-yett), n. (-te§ ; -te), ticket. biHig, cheap. binben (144), to bind, tie, fasten. binnen (dat.), within. bi§ (34), till, until, up to, as far as; jroei — brei, two or three ; — ju (dat.), — nacf) (dat.), as far as. Sifdjof, m. (-e§, -e), bishop, bitten (181 ; for, um), to ask, beg; (id)) bitte, if you please, please (tit., I beg, pray); roenn i$ — barf, if you please (lit., if I may ask). blafeit (188), to blow. Slatt, n. (-e§; *er), leaf, blau, blue. bleibeu (120; fein), to re- main. Sleiftift, n. (-e§ ; -e), lead- pencil, blinb, blind. Slit}, m. (-e§ ; -e), light- ning. blifjen, (impers.), to lighten. Slume,y. (-en), flower. Sluntenfobl, m. (-§), cauli- flower. bombarbieren, to bombard. Soot, n. (-e§; Sote, or-t), boat. bofe, bad, evil; cross, angry. Soferoid&t, tn. (— eS ; -er), villain. 408 VOCABULARY. 83 ote, m. (-n ; -It), mes- senger. firaten (188), to roast. braud)en {gen. or acc.) t to require, want, need, use, make use of. ftrautt, brown. brecf>ert (167), to break, breit, broad, wide, bremtett (99), to burn, be burning. 93rief, 7n. (-eg; -e), letter, epistle. bringeit (99, 2), to bring, take. S 3 rot, n. (-eg ; -e), bread; loaf. 93 rude, f. (-n), bridge. 93 ruber, (-g ; 1L ), brother. 93ud>, n. (-eg ; -^er), book. 93udjerfreunb, m. (-eg; -e), lover of books. 93ud)l;aitblcr, 7tt. (-g; —), book-seller. 93uc^janbIung,/(-en), book- shop. 93urecm ( pron . bii-ro'), n. (-§; -g), (business) office. 93urgermeifter, m. (-g ; — ), mayor. 93utter, f, butter. ( 5 . ©I)ofolabe, f } chocolate. Gljrift, m. (— ert ; -en), Chris- tian. Coufine,y! (-n), cousin. ©. ba, there, in that place; here; conj.> as, when, be- cause, since. ©ad;, n. (-eg; -“er), roof, bafiir, for that, for it, for them (of things), bafycr', thence, hence, there- fore. bamit, therewith, with it, with that. ©ampferrinie,/. (-n), steam- ship-line. ©ampfjdjiff, n. (-eg; -e), steam-boat, steamer, baufbai*, thankful, grateful, ©anfbarfeit, f, thankful- ness. banfen (< dat.) y to thank; id; banfe ($f)nen), ( no ) thank you. bann, then, baran, thereon, barauf, thereon, on it, on them (of things ), etc. barirt, therein, in that, in it. barii&er, over that, over it ; about it, at it. barum, therefore, bag, n. of ber, which see. bafelbft, there, in that place, bafj, that ; (auf) — , in order that. bacon, thereof, of it. bein, beine, bein, thy. benfen (99 ; gen. or general- ly a dj* and pr., the same ; he, she, it, etc. beg'ljalb, for this or that rea- son, therefore, on that ac- count. befto, (all) the, so much the; — befjer, so much the bet- ter; je ntebr — bcffer, the more, the better, begtoegen, on that account, beutlid), clear, distinct ; clearly, distinctly. beutfd), German; auf ©eutfd), int ©eutfdjen, in German, ©eutfdj'lanb, n. (-g), Ger- many. ©iarnant', m. (-§ or -en; -en), diamond, bie, f of ber, which see. ©ieb, m. (-eg ; -e), thief, ©iener, rn. (-g; — ), ser- vant. ©icngtag, tn. (-eg; -e), Tues- day. biefer, biefe, biefeg (bieg), (6; 134, 140, 143), this, that ; the latter, bieg'feitg, adv., on this side, bingen (App. L.), to hire, bicibieren, to divide. , bod;, yet, however, but, after all, pray, well, just. ©of'tor, m. (-g ; ©of to'ren), doctor. ©onner, m. (-g; — ), thun- der. bonnern, to thunder, ©onncrgtag, m. (-eg ; -e), Thursday. ©orf, (-eg ; ^er), village, bort, there, yonder, in that place, brei, three. breifad), three-fold, triple, treble. breimal, three times, thrice, brei&ia, thirty, brefdjen (159), to thresh, thrash. bring en ( 144 ), to press, britte^alb, two and a half, briibcn, over there, over the way. ©rud, m. (-eg), printing, print. bu, thou, you. biinn, thin. burd; (34), through ; by. bitrdjaug', absolutely, entire- ly; — nid)t, by no meansi not at all. kurdjfudj'en, to search through. biirfen (196-202 ; permis- sion), to dare; be permit- ted, allowed ; barf id)? may I? £>urft, m. (-e§), thirst; — Robert, to be thirsty. 2 )u§'enb, «. (-eS; -e), dozen. a§, something, any- thing. ener, eure, euer, your, ©uropa, n. (-§), Europe, ©ja'men, w.(-S; — ), exami- nation. (Exemplar', «. (-§ ; -e), copy (of a work, etc.). gabrif', f. (-en), factory. $aben, nt. (-§; L ), thread, faljren (186 ; fein), to go, drive, ride (in a convey- ance); travel; sail. (-en), journey, voy- age ; ride, drive, fyall, m. (-e§; M e), fall ; case, event; in bent ^alle, in that case. fallen (188 ; fein), to fall, falls, in case, ftami'lie, f (-n), family, fangen (188), to catch, faft, almost, nearly ; — me, hardly ever. §februar, nt. (-§), February, fed&ten (124), to fight, fence, ^eber, f. (-tt), feather ; pen ; spring. feiern, to celebrate, geiertag, nt. (-eS ; -e), holi- day. $einb, nt . (-eS ; -e), enemy. $elb, n. (-eS ; -er), field. ^elf(en), m.{-t nS; -en), rock, ftenfier, n . (-§ ; — ), window, gerien, pi. {no sing-.), vaca- tion, holidays. VOCABULARY. $erne, f. (-n), distance ; in ber — , at a distance, fertig, ready, done; — fein (mit), to have finished (with). $eftlid)feit,/. (-en), festivity, fteuer, n. (-S ; — ), fire, f^ieber, n. (-S ; — ), fever, finben (144)* to find *> meet with ; think, be of opinion ; man finbet fid) nid;t leidjt, people do not find each other easily. $ifd), m. (-eS ; -e), fish. $lafd;e, f. (-n), bottle. fled;ten (124), to weave. $leifd), n. (-eS), meat, fleijjig, diligent ; industrious; diligently, etc. fliegen(i3i; fein), to fly. firemen (131), flee, fliefjen (123), flow, f^lote, f. (-tt), flute. §IfigeI, in. (-S ; — ), wing. $Iufb (-eS; - e), river, folgen (fein ; dat.), to follow, ^orelle, f. (-n), trout, format', n. (-eS; -e), size (of a book). fort, forth; away, gone; roir miiffen — , we must be off. fortgefyen (188; fein), to go away. fortmdfirenb, perpetual, con- tinual, incessant, frageit (186), to ask ques- tions ; $ragen, n. (-S), questioning, asking ques- tions (action of). $ran!reidj, n. (-S), France, franjbfifd), French. $rau, f. (-en), woman, wife, lady, madam, mistress, Mrs. f^rciulein, tt. (-§; — ), young lady, Miss ; mein — , Miss, freigebig, liberal, generous, freilaffcn (188), to set free, liberate. freilid), to be sure, indeed, of course. fjrreitag, nt. (-e§;-e), Friday, fremb, strange ; foreign. $rembe, {adj. subst.) m. or /., stranger, foreigner, trembling, nt. (-e§; -e), stranger. freffen (181), to eat (said of beasts). ^reube, f. (-it), joy, delight, freuen (fid) ; at, fiber-}- acc.\ to rejoice, be glad ; e§ freut mid), I am glad. $reunb, nt. (-e§; -e), friend; id; bin ein — non, I like, ^reunbin, f. (-nen), friend (female). freunblid), friendly, kind, ^reunbjdjaft,./'. (-en), friend- ship. ^riebe(n), nt . (-n§), peace. ^riebridE), m.(-Z), Frederick; fj-riebridjftrafje, Frederick- street. frierett (131), to freeze; feel cold; e§ friert mid;, I feel cold ; mic§ friert, I am cold. frifd), fresh. $ri$, nt. (-en§), Fred, Fred- dy. frof), joyful, glad ; frozen IDluteS, cheerfully, frbfjlid), joyous, merry. £ru (“e), fruit, frfil), early; frfifjer, earlier; formerly. $rfil)ling, nt. (-e§ ; -e), spring. frfilj'ftficfen, to breakfast. $udl)§, in. (-e§; -“e), fox. ffil;ren, to lead ; go, lie. ffillen, to fill, ffinf, five. ffinftef)aH», four and a half, ffinfsig, funfjig, fifty. $unfe(n), nt. (-nS ; -n), spark. VOCABULARY. fflr ( 34 ), for. Surest {vox),/, fear (of), filrc&ten, to fear; fid) — nor (H- dot.), to fear, be afraid of. Ouijj, nu (-e5 ; ^e), foot. ©. gfi(b)ren (App. L.), ferment, ganj, adj.y whole, entire ; the whole of ; adv. , quite, wholly, altogether, entirely, gar, even; — nidjt, not at all; — ni<$t3, nothing at all. ©arten, m. (-3 ; a ), garden, ©drtner, m. (-3; — ■), garde- ner. ©aft, m. (— c5 ; a e), guest. ©aftfjauS, n. (-e3; ^er), inn, hotel. gcbdren (167), to bear, bring forth. geben (181), to give; v. im- pers., e3 giebt, there is, there are. ©ebot', n. (-e5 ; -e), com- mandment. ©eburtS'tag, tn. (-e§; -e), birthday ; junt — , as a birthday-present. ©ebaitfe, m. (-n3; -n), thought. gebeif)en (120), to thrive, gebenfen (99), to intend. ©ebic§t, n. (-e3 ; -e), poem, gebrangt, packed, com- pressed, crowded, ©ebulb,./!, patience, gefciljrlid), dangerous; dan- gerously. gefaHen (188), to please, suit; roie gefaHt e3 3$iten in Softon? how do you like Boston ? gefaHig, pleasing, complai- sant, kind; iff bem ^errn etn>a3 — ? will the gentle- man be helped to anything? gefdSigfl, if you please, ©efiiljl, ft. (-e3; -e), feeling; emotion. gegeit (34), towards, against, about ; for. gefjeu (1S8; fein), to go; walk; nrie gel)t e§2>l)nen? how do you do? how are you? geljoren (<£*/.), to belong(to). ©etge, f. (-n), violin; ©ei* genfpiel, n. (-3), violin- playing, gelb, yellow. ©elb, n. (-e3 ; -cr), money, ©elbbeutel, m. (-5; — ), purse. gelegen, convenient; oppor- tune; uid)t5fonntemirgcs tegener fein, nothing could suit me better. gelingen (144; fein), to suc- ceed; eS gelingt mir, I succeed. gelten (159), to be worth, ©erndlbe, n. (-3 ; — ), paint- ing, picture. ©emiife, n. (-3; — ), vege- tables. genau, precise, exact ; pre- cisely, exactly, carefully, minutely. ©eneral', m. (-e§ ; -e), gene- ral. genefen (181; fein), to get well, recover (from an ill- ness). geniefjen (123; fein), to en- joy ; eat or drink, genug, enough. ©eometrie', /., geometry, ©epdcf, n. (-e3), luggage, baggage. gerabe, adj. , straight; adv. t exactly, just. ©eraufd), n. (-e§ ; -e), noise, gering, small, trilling, mean; ni<$t im — ften, not in the least. 411 gem (Iieber. am Kebften), with pleasure, willingly, gladly ; etma3 — Ijaben, to like a thing; — lernen, to like to learn, study ; ba3 ift — mogli<$, that is very probable. ©erfte,y! barley, gefaljen, faljen, salt. ©efaitg, ttt. (-e3), singing, ©efdjaft, ft. (-e3 ; -e), busi- ness ; mercantile establish- ment ; shop, store. ©ef$dft3angelegen§eit, /. (-en), business matter, bu- siness engagement. gef$et)en (181; fein), to hap- pen. ©efdjenf, ft. (-e5 ; -e), gift, present. ©efd)ic§te, f. (-n), history, story. ©efdjtnacf, fn. (-e§), taste. gef<$uIt,/./.,f<$ulen, trained, cultivated. ©efdjroifter, //., brothers and sisters. ©efeUf<$aft, / (-en), com- pany, party. ©ejtdjt, ft. (-e3; -er and -e), face, countenance ; ©efidj* ter, faces ; ©efic^te, vi- sions. ©efpiele, m. (-n; -n), play- mate. geftern, yesterday, ©efunbfjeit, f. health, geroinnen (158), to win, gain, gets if} {gen.), certain (of); certainly, surely, geroiffenf) a jt, conscientious, ©emitter, n. (-3; — ), thun- der-storm, storm, ©erooljnljeit, / (-en), cu*. tom, habit ; bie — $abcn, to be accustomed to. geroofynlid), usual, custom- ary; generally, usually giefcen (123), to pour. 412 VOCABULARY. glcingen, to shine, glitter, glcingenb, brilliant. ©la§, n. (-c 3 ; ^er), glass, glatt, smooth, slippery, glauben (dat. of pers.), to believe ; think, gleicb, at once, at the same time, immediately, directly; fo — , immediately, etc. fileicfyeit (118), to be like, re- semble. gleitcn (118), to glide, slip, glimmen (123), to glimmer, ©liid, n. (-e£), (good) for- tune, good luck ; success ; — nmnfdjen, to congratu- late, wish success to. gliidlid), happy, fortunate; successfully. ©orb, n. (-es), gold, golben, of gold, golden, ©ouoerneur', m. (-e 3 ; -e), governor. graben (186), to dig. ©rab, m. (-c§ ; -e), degree, ©raf, m . (-en ; -en), count, earl. ©rdftn, f. (-nen), countess, ©ramma'tif, f. (-en), gram- mar. ©ra§, n. (-e§; ^er), grass, gvatulieren (dat.), to con- gratulate. grcifen (118), to grasp, ©riecbenlanb, n. (-§), Greece. grofj (^er, sup. grbfct), great, large, big, tali, griht, green, griiublid), thoroughly, griifjen, to greet, salute, bow to? $reunb Icifet ©ie — , your friend wishes to be remembered to you. ©uitarre, f. (-n), guitar, gut, good; kind; adv., well ; fo — fein unb, to be so kind as to. ©Uie 3 , rt., good (thing). §aar, n. (-e 3 ; -e), hair. bafeu, tn. (-§ ; r ), port, har- bour, haven. ,§afer, in. (-s), oats, ftagelforn, n. (-e£ ; *er), hail-stone, pagein, to hail, balb, half; — brei, half past two. £alfte, f. (-n), half. IjaltCtt (188), to hold, think ; — fur, consider; id) fjalte t)iel non ibm, I think high- ly of him (esteem, value him highly). £cmb,y. (“e), hand. §anbler, m. (-§; — ), dealer, shop-keeper. £anbfd)ub, m. (-e§; -e), glove. bangcn (188), to hang, be suspended; ba£ 23 ilb bciugt, the picture is hanging, f) (ingen, to hang, suspend. §arfe, f. (-it), harp; £ars fens 23 egleituug, accompa- niment on the harp. f)art (~er), hard. §afe, m. (-it; -n), hare, baffen, to hate, baueu (188), to hew. $auptftabt, /. (-e), capital. £au§, n. (-c§; ir er), house; gu £aufe, at home; nad) £aufe, home, bebcn (131), to raise, lift. £ecr, n. (-e§; -e), army, beftig, violent, heavy; hea- vily (of rain). §eibe, m. (— rt ; -tt), heathen. £et»rid), tn. (-§), Henry. heifer, hoarse, fjcifj, hot. beijjen (188), to be called, be named ; mean, signify ; mis beijjt ba§ auf £)eutfd)? how' do you say that in German? nne fjeijjt? what is the name of? icf) £>eif;e 21 ., my name is A. §ett>, m. (-en; -en), hero. l)elfen (159 ; dat.), to help. f)ell, bright; brightly, bernbfteigen (120; fein), to descend. berctuSfontmcn (167 ; fein), to come out. £erbft, m. (-e§ ; -c), autumn. $erbe, f. (-11), flock, herd. Ijereinfommen (167 ; fein), to come in. $err, m. (-n; -en), master; gentleman ; Lord ; Mr. ; $f)r — 23 ater, your fa- ther. £erg, n. (-enG; -en), heart, berglid;, heartily, exceed- ingly. §eu, n. (— e§), hay. beuie, tc-day ; — 2lbettb, this evening; — Morgen, this morning; — iibev riergebn Xage, this day fortnight ; beutgutage, now-a-days. bier, here; — *u £aube, in this country. biermit, herewith, with this, .fjimmel, tn. (-£ ; — ), heaven, sky. biitnufgeben (188; fein), to go up. binctuGfebcn (181), to look out (at the window, gum ftenfter). biucingeben (18S ; fein), to go in. bingcben (188; fein), to go (hence) ; go anywhere, binter (65), behind. $i§e, f. heat. VOCABULARY. 413 §od) {loses C in inflection ; compar . fyofyer, sup. Ijocljft), high. Ijoffen, to hope, fjof'fentlicf), adv ., (it is) to be hoped, I hope. £offnung, f. (-en), hope. Ijoljer, compar. of fjodj, which see. tyolen, (to go and) bring, fetch; get; — laffert, to send for. $olj, n. (-e§), wood. ^joren, to hear; listen; fagen — , to hear say, hear. 5 ttef< 9 , pretty. n. (-e§; “er), fowl; chicken. $unb, m. (-e§ ; -e), dog. ^unbert, hundred. £unbert, n. (-3 ; -e), hun- dred. hunger, ;«.(-§), hunger; id) Ijabe — , I am hungry, ljungrig, hungry. $ut, vt. (-e§; “e), hat. Ijiiten, to guard, keep. 3 . t$, I- i^r, pens. pron., to her, her {dat. sing .) ; you (nom. pi). S^retmillen, for your sake, itn, contr.for irt bent, intnter, always ; at all times ; nod) — , still. in (65 ; dat. or acc .), in, at; into, to. inbem', while, whilst, innertydlb (gen.), on the in- side, within. Snftrument', n. (— eS ; -e), (musical) instrument, intereffant', interesting, irgenb einer, — jemanb, any one. Srlattb, n. (-§), Ireland. Stalien, n. (-§), Italy. 3 . Sa, yes, indeed, certainiy,you know; did I (etc.) not; jets tool)!, yes indeed, yes to be sure, yes certainly, jagett, to hunt, chase, pursue. Sagen, n. (-5), hunting (act of). Sager, m. (-§; -hunter, huntsman. Saljr, n. (-e§ ; -t% year. Sa'tob, m. (-§), /fames, iatoofyl, see\a. je, ever (at any time) ; the (be- fore comparative degree , 126 , 4 ); — jtoei, two at a iljr, i§re, if»r, poss. adj., her ; its; their. Sf)r, %f)V, poss. adj., your. tfjrer, i§re, tE)re§, iljre (ber, bie, ba§), iEjrige (ber, bie, ba§), S^rer, S^re, 3§re§, Sfjre (ber, bie, baS), Sbvhc (ber, bic, bao), time. jebenfat(§, certainly, at all ev^its. jeKr, jebe, jebe§, every, each, every one, any. jebermann, everyone, every- body. j etna 15, ever, at any time. jemanb, somebody, some one, any body, any one. jener, jene, jeneS, that, that one, that person ; yonder ; the former. jenfeitS, on the other side, beyond. jel}t, now, at present. Sofjann', m. (-5), John. Su'genb, f, youth. Su'Ii, m. (-§), July, juitg (“er), young. Simge, m . (-n ; -n), boy, lad. Singling, m. (-e§; -e), young man, youth. Su'ni, m. (-5), June. £affee, tn. (-§), coffee. Jtaij'er, m. (-§ ; — ), emperor. 31alb5foteIette, f. (-n), veal- cutlet. fait (“er), cold. Namin', n. (-e§; -e), fire- place. tfarbinal', m. (-§; -e), car- dinal. $arl, m. (-§), Charles. Slavte,f. (-n), card, ilartoffel,./: (-tt), potato. $dfc, m. (-§; — ), cheese, faufen, to buy. faunt, hardly, scarcely, feifeit (App. L.), to chide, fein, feine, fein, no, not a, not any. feitter, feine, fein(e)§, pron., nobody, not anybody, no one, none. Jtellner, *«:(-§; — ■), waiter, fennen ( 99 ), to know, be ac- quainted with. JfenntniS, f. (-e), know- ledge ; pi. acquirements, attainments. ftinb, n. (-e5 ; -er), child. Jlirdje, f (-n), church, flat*, clear. Piaffe, f. (-n), class, fllaf'fifer, m. (-5 ; — •), classic writer, classic. iUaoier', n. (-5 ; -e), piano, illeib, n. (-e3 ; -er), dress; pi. clothes, f Tein, small, little, flieben (App. L.), to cleave. 414 VOCABULARY. flimmen (123), to climb, fling eln, to ring (said of small bells); e 3 flingelt, there is a ring (at the door, etc.). fling en (144), to sound. £nabe, m. (-n ; -n), boy. > JlnaK, nt. (-e< 3 ; -e), loud quick sound ; clap, thun- der-clap. Hned)t, nt. (-eS; -e), (farm) servant, man-of-all-work. fneifeit (118), to pinch, fneipcn (App. L.), to pinch. £nod)en, nt. (-§; — ), bone, flod), m. (-e§; “e), cook, hornet', m. (-en; -en), comet. fomtnen (167; fein), to come; arrive; — laffen, to send for ; ttrie f ommt ba§ ? how is that? $tonig, m. (-(e)§; -e), king. flonigin,y: (-nen), queen. Jtonigftrafje, f. King-street, fonnen (196-202; ability, etc.), to be able, can; know, be versed in, know how. Jtonsert', n. (— e§ ; -e), con- cert. Jtopf, nt. (-e§ ; “e), head. Jtorb, m. (-e§ ; “e), basket. Jtoften, pi., expenses, fefien (acc. of pers. and of thing), to cost, franf (“er), ill ; sick ; Jtranfe, {adj. subst.), sick person, patient. $ranff)eit, f (-en), disease, illness. Jlrieg, nt. (-e 5 ; -e), war. fried) en (123), to creep, flri'tif er, m. (-§ ; — ), critic. S(\\S)l,f (-n), kitchen. Stvfy,f (“e), cow. Jtunft, f (“e), art. tfiinftler, nt. (-§ ; — ), artist, furj (“er), short. furs lid), n ot long ago, lately, recently. £utfd)er, m. (- 3 ; — ), coach- man, driver. «. Iad;en {gen. or fiber -J -acc.), $0 laugh (at). Sad)<^ m. (— c§ ; -e), salmon lab en ^(486), to load; invite. Saben, (-3 ; — and “), window -Ihutter {pi. — ); shop, store\^. “). Sanb, n. (-eSjXu; and -e), land, countrji^^untry (op- posed to town); auf bem — e, in the country; auf 5 — gefyen, to go into the country; 511 — e, by land; f)ier SU — e, in this country. Sanbfd;aft, f (-en), land- scape. lang (“er), long, lange, adv. long, a long time or while, for a long time ; fo — , so long as ; er iff — fyier getnefen, he has not been here for a long time; er ift nic^t — I)ier gemefen, he has not been here long. langfam, slow; slowly, laitgft, long ago, long since. Sarm, m. (-eo), noise, laffeu (188; 200, 7), to let, allow; leave; have (a thing done); fagen — , to send word ; f omnten — , to send for; ic§ laffe ba 3 53 ucf> einbinben, I am having the book bound; e 3 lafft fid) uidjt lengnen, it can- not be denied. Softer, n. (- 3 ; — ), vice. Satein, n. (-§), Latin. Sauf, nt. (-e 3 ; “e), course, laufen (188; fein), to run. lauten, to ring (of large bells), toll. lebett, to live ; be alive. Seben, n. (- 3 ; — ), life. Sebcmobl, n . (- 3 ), farewell, adieu. Seber, n. (- 3 ; — ), leather, legen, to lay, put, place, set. Seljrer, m. (- 3 ; — ), teacher, master. Ieid)t, light, easy ; easily, readily. leib {only used as pred. with fein and tbun), sorry, grieved ; e 3 ift, e 3 tf>ut mir — , I am sorry, leiben (118), to suffer; an etiua 3 — , to suffer from anything. leiber, alas! unfortunately! Ieif)CJt (120), to lend. Seiftcn, m. (- 3 ; — ), (shoe- maker’s) last, leiften, to accomplish. Settion', f (-en), lesson. Iernen, to learn, study. Iefeit (181), to read. Sefett, n. (- 3 ), (act of) read- ing. letjt, last, final. Sente, pi. {no sing ), people, persons. Sid)t, n. (-e§ ; -er and -e), light, lieb, dear. Siebe, f love, affection; — ju, love of. Iiebeit, to love, liebcr {comp, of gern); conj ., rather ; id) ge^e — , I prefer to walk. Sieb, n. (-e 3 ; -er), song, liegeit (181 ; fein, §aben), to lie ; be ; be situated, tinf, left. linf?*, to (or on) the left, loben, to praise. Sod), «. (-e 3 ; “er), hole. Soffel, m. (- 3 ; — ), spoon. SoI)engrin, nt. (- 3 ), name o! an opera by Wagner. Io5, loose, slack; roa§ ift — ? what is the matter ? lofen, to free, redeem; cin S3illet — , buy a ticket. Iosfpringen (144; fexrt ; auf + acc.), to spring upon, leap upon. £ouife, f (~n§), Louisa. Some, m. (-« ; -n), lion. £ubwig, m. (-§), Louis. Suft /w /I ("e), air, atmosphere, liigen (13 1), to lie, utter a falsehood. fiugner, m. (-§ ; — ), liar, luftig, merry; merrily; fid) iiber einen — madden, to make sport of one. m. Utac^ett, to make ; arrange ; cause, give ; be (in arithm. calculations) ; id) mad) emir nid)t<3 barauS, I care no- thing for it; etne Seereife — , to take a voyage; einen ©pastergang — , to take a walk. 3Jldbd)en, n. (-§ ; — ), girl. SWogb,yi (-“e), maid, maid- servant. SD^ai, m . (-e§ or -en), May. 3flat, n. (-e§; -e), time (oc- casion) ; $um lenten — , for the last time, ntaleit, to paint. Sflaler, in. (-§; — ), painter. SAalerei',,/! (art of) painting, tnatt, Pron. } one, we, you, they, people; — fagt, they say, people say, it is said, tnandjer, maucfje, mandjeS, adj . and pron., many a. Sflangel, m. (-3), want. Sflann, m. (-e§; -“er), man. Sflantel, nu (-§; 3 ^), cloak, mantle. flflargarete, f. (-n§), Marga- ret. Sflarie,^ (-n3), Mary. VOCABULARY. aflarf, f. { — ■), mark (a coin = 100 Pfennig or about 25 cents). aflarft, m. (-e§; -^e), market, marfdiir.ren (fein or fyaben), to march. aflarj, m. (-e§), March. y aflnfent, //., measles. / 2 JiatI)ematif,./!, mathemjmcs. aflatrofe, m. (-it; -ti^psailor. Wlau 5 ,f (^c), moj^e.. aflefyl, n. (-e§), flour. mei)r, more;^pid)t — , no longer, nj»now. meljrcre, jBOTU ; mefirereS, several thing^a good deal. tnef)rmal 3 , several times, metbett (120), to avoid, afletle, f (-n), mile (Ger- man), league, mein, meine, mein, my. tneine(ber, bie, ba$), mine, mcilteit, to think, be of opi- nion, suppose, mean; ba§ follte td) — , I should think so {emphatic ) . meinetmegen, (nm) meinets roiHeit, for my sake; for all I care. meiitige (ber, bie, ba§), mine. tDleinuitg, f. (-en), opinion, meift {superl. of mel), most ; am — en, most, most of all. afleifter, m. (-3 ; — ), master, melfeit (124), to milk, aflelobie', f. (-tt), melody, tune; air. aflenge,/i (-n), great quantity or number. 9ttenfd), m. (-en; -en), a human being, man; per- son ; //., mankind, people, meffen (181), to measure, defter, n. (-3; — ), knife. afletalF, n. (-e3; -e), metal, mieten, to rent. Sflild), / milk. 31lillion / , f (-en), million. SUnute, f. (-n), minute. 415 ajlinutenseiger, m. (-5 ; —), minute-hand, mir {dat. of id)), (to) me. mit (46), with ; by (in multi- plication). ajmtag, m. (-e3; -e), mid- ^ day, noon ; ju — effen, to dine. 3flittag3effen, n. (-3; — ), dinner. mitten, in the middle or midst of ; — im SBinter, in the middle of winter, aflittrcod), in. (-e3), Wed- nesday. mogen (196-202; preference, liking), to be able ; may ; like; id) mag ba3 nid)t, I do not like that; id) mocf)te, I should like, rnoglid), possible ; ba3 ift gern — , that is very pro- bable. aflonard)', m. (-en ; -en), monarch. aflo'nat, m. (-e3;-e), month. Hflontag, vt. (-3; -e), Mon- day. aflorgen, in. (-5; — ), mor- ning ; guten — , good mor- ning; be3 — 3 {or mor* gett§), in the morning, morgen, to-morrow ; — friif), to-morrow morning, miibe, tired, weary. 3flttfye, f trouble; uicf)t ber — Uiert, not worth while, asti^le, f (-n), mill, multiplijieren, to multiply. SRnfif', f music, mufifalifd), musical. muf[en (196-202; necessity), to be obliged or forced, must. 2flut, m. (-e3), mood, cou- rage, spirit ; mir ift fd)led)t ju — e, I feel ill ; frozen — e3, cheerfully. 2 Jhittcr, f. if), mother. 416 VOCABULARY. SR. nct<$ 6), after; according to ; by (of time-piece) ; past (of hour of day) ; to (before proper names of places); — ^jaufe, home. Iftadjbar, m. (-3 and-n; -it), neighbour. nad^em', conj ., after, itadjgeljen (188; fein), to go after ; go or be too slow (of a time-piece). 9iad;mittag, m. (-e3 ; -e), af- ternoon ; be3 —3, in the af- ternoon. 9iad)ri$t,/ (-en), news. ttad)ft (superl. of nafy), next. 91ad)fte, m. ( adj . subst.), fel- low-creature, neighbour. ItcidOftenS, shortly, soon, very soon. 91ctd;t, f. (-“e), night, nal), (nether, it 3d) ft), near. Sftatye, f , nearness ; neigh- bourhood ; in trtetner — , near me ; in my neighbour- hood. Svante, m. (-n 3 ; -n), name, title. ttatur'Iid), naturally, of course, I suppose, tteben (65), beside, besides; near, alongside of, by. ttebft (51), together with, in- cluding. S^effe, m. (-tt ; -n), nephew, tte^mett (167), to take ; fid) in 2fc§t — / to take care, be- ware, ttein, no. ttennen (99), to call, name, netto, net {commercial ter m). neu, new. Iteulidf, lately, the other day, not long ago. ttcuntef)alf>, eight and a half. nid)t, not ; — mefjr, no lon- ger; — roat)r? is (it, etc.) not (so)? nid^t‘3 ( indecl .), nothing, nie, never. Sftieberlanbe (bie), pi, The Netherlands. nte'tttattb, nobody, no one, no person, not anybody, etc. nod), still, yet, even ; — ein, one more, another ; — et? roa§, something (anything) more ; — einmol, over again ; — §eute, before the end of the day, before the day is over; — immer, up to the present time, still; — pop oieraefm SEagen, only a fortnight ago. Sftorb'etfenbafnt, f (-cn), N orthern-Rail way. notig, necessary. 91ot)ember, m. (-3), Novem- ber. ■Jiti'mero, n. (-3), number, ttur, only. just. S&ufj, f (*c), nut. niifclid), useful. O. ob, whether, if. oben, above, up-stairs ; nad) — , upward, obgleidf)', although, obcr, or. Dfen, m. (-3; **-), stove, offen, open Dffijier', m. (-e3 ; -e), officer. , offnen (fid)), to open, oft ( a er), often, frequently. D^eirn, m . (-e3 ; -e), uncle. of)ne (34), without; but for. Dnf el, m. (-3 ; — ), uncle. V. $alaft, m. (-e3 ; -^e), palace, ^antoffel, m. (-3 ; -n), slip- per. papier', n. (-e3; -e), paper. ^Papft, m. (-e3 ; -“e), pope. Paris', n. (non — ), Par paffenb, fit, suitable. pfeifen (1x8), io whistle, pfennig, m. (-e3; -e), (the one hundredth part of a mark), penny. ^Pferb, n. (-e3; -e), horse, ^ferbebafjn, f (-en), tram- way, tram; street -cars, horse-cars. ^flaunte,/ (-n), plum, pflegen (weak), to attend to; to be accustomed, wont ; — (strong, App. L.), to prac- tise, exercise. ^Pfunb, n. (-e3 ; -e), pound, ^ilofopljie',/ (-n), philo- sophy. $Ian, m. (-3 ; -e or “e), plan, design. planet', m. (-en; -en), planet. m. (-e3; *e), place; — nefjmen, to sit down, be seated. ^ra^regen, m. (-5; — ), shower, down-pour, praubern, to chat, talk, portion' f (-eit), portion, plate (of meat, etc.). Mt, /' (— eit), post, post- office. ^oftbote, m. (-n ; -tt), post- man. prad)tig, magnificent. iprei3, (-e3; -e), price; prize. preifen (120), to praise, ^rocent', n. (-e3 ; -e), per cent. $)3rofeffor, m. (-3;-en), pro- fessor. promonieren, to take a de- gree, graduate, ipublifum, n. (-3), public; audience. SPunft, m. (-e§ ; -e), point ; — ae(w U()r, at ten o’clock precisely. $Pitnftlid)feit, punctuality. VOCABULARY. 417 a. Ctua'berftein, m. (-e§ ; -e), cut-stone, freestone. lueUen ( 124 ; fein), to gush. 9L 9tabatt, m. (-e§; -e), dis- count, abatement. Slanb, in. (-e3; -“er), edge, rim, brim. SRat, in. (-e<3), counsel, ad- vice. ratert (188), to counsel, ad- vise. 9taud), m. (-e§), smoke. Sftaupe, _/! (-n), caterpillar. 9ted)nen, n. (-3), arithmetic. 9led)nung, f. (-eit), account, bill, reckoning ; calcula- tion; ein ©trid) burd) bie — , disappointment ; ferrets ben ©ie ba§ auf meine — , charge that to me. red)t, right. 9te$t, n. ( indecl .), right ; — Ijaben, to be right, be in the right. red)t3, to (on) the right, recljt'jeitig, at the right time, punctually. SReb 1, f (-n), speech; ora- tion. reben, to speak, talk, ^reformation',/. (-en), refor- mation. Slegen, in. (-3), rain. SJte'gentropfen, in. (-3 ; — ), drop of rain. regieren, to reign, rule, go- vern. 9tegierung,/ (-en), govern- ment, reign ; unter ber — , in the reign (of). 9tegiment', n. (-e3 ; -er), re- giment. regnen, to rain, reiben (120), to rub. reid), rich, wealthy, reid&eit, to reach, hand. reif, ripe. 9 ieife, f. (-n), journey, voy- age; eiite — madden, to take a journey. 9teifef often, pi., travelling- expenses. reifen (fein and fyaben), to travel, journey, go. 9teifenbe {adj. subst.), tra- veller. reiben (118), to tear, pull, reiten (n8; fein), to ride, rennen (99; fein), to run, race. 9icftaurattott', f. (-cn), eat- ing-house, restaurant, retten, to save, rescue; id) rettete ifym ba3 Seben, I saved his life. reuen (infers.), to repent ; e3 reut mid) {gen.\ I repent (of). 9tt)eumati3mu3, m. {gen. — ), rheumatism. rid)tig, right, correct ; cor- rectly ; — geljen, to be cor- rect (of a time-piece) ; auf bie — e SBeije, in the right way. 9tid;tung, f. (-en), direction, riedjen (123), to smell. 9liefe, m. (-tt ; -n), giant. Stinbfleifdf), n. (-e3), beef. Sling, in. (-e3 ; -e), ring, ringen (144), to wring, rinneit (158), to run, flow. 9tocf, m. (-e3 ; -“e), coat. 91 Oman', m. (-3; -e), ro- mance, novel. 9iomer, m. (-3 ; — ), Roman (subst.). rot, adj. (— er), red. 9tot'fdppd)en, n. (-3 ; — ), Little Red (Riding) Hood. 9tot'mein, m. (-e3), red- wine. 9tiibe, f. (-n), turnip; gelbe — , carrot. 9lubiit', in. (-e§; -e), ruby. rubern, to row. rufen (188), to call, rufjig, quiet. 9tubm, m. (-e3), praise, ruub, round. 9tuffe, m. (~n ; -tt), Russian, 0 . ©aar, **.(-e 8; ©die), hall. ©ad)e,/. (-n), thing, matter, affair, business ; bift bu beiner — geraiji, are you certain of your information, etc. fagen, to say, tell ; — fyoren, to hear say, hear. ©af)tte,/, cream, fdmmtlid^, complete (of lite- rary works). ©anft Sorens, m., St. Law- rence. ©angerin,/ (-nen), (female) singer. ©ara,/ (-3), Sarah. ©a§, in. (-e3; -e), sentence, faufeu (123), to drink (of beasts). faugen (App. L), to suck. Sd)abc(n), in. (-it3 ; -^n), damage, injury, harm, mis- chief; e3 ift fd)abe, it is a pity. ©chafer, m. (-3; — ), shep- herd. fdjaffen (186), to create. fd;alleu (123), to sound, re- sound. ©cfjalter, m. (-3; — ), wick- et, ticket-office, fdfiimen (fid; ; gen. or fiber + acc.), to be ashamed, fdjarf (-er), sharp, fdjeibeu (120), to separate. fd;einen(i2o; dat.), to shine; appear, seem, fdjeltcn (159), to scold. fd)enfen (dat. of person and acc. of thing), to give, make a present of, present. 4i8 fcfjeren (131, B.), to shear. fdfiicFen, to send, f cffieben ( 13 1), to shove, push, fdjiefjen (123), to shoot. Ubfrote,y; (-it), tortoise. fcf)inbett (App. L.), to flay. ©[acf)t, f (-en), battle. fcf;lafen (188), to sleep; ftd^ — legcn, to retire to rest, go to bed. ©cfylafrodE, m. (-e§; “e), dressing-gown, ©cfjlaf'jimmer, n. (-§; — ), bedroom. fdtjlagen (186), to beat, strike. fcf)lecf)t, bad; badly. fdE)leicf)en (118 ; fein), to slink, sneak. fd&leifen (118), to sharpen, grind. fd)leiften (App. L.), to slit, fdfjliefjen (123), to lock, shut, close ; conclude, finish, fdjlimm, bad. fdjlmgen (144), to sling. ©cf)litten, tn . (-§; — ), sleigh. ©d&litt'fd&u^Iaufen, *. (-§), (act of) skating. ©d&lofj, n. (-e3 ; “er), castle, palace. fcfjmeden, to taste, relish; rote fd;medt 3§nen biefe§? how do you like (the taste of) this? ©djmeicfyefei',/, flattery, fcfjmeidjeln (dai.), to flatter, fc^meifjen (118), to throw, fling. fcbmeIjen(i24),to melt, smelt, ©camera, »*. (-c§ or -en§; -eit), pain. d^uauben (App. L.), to snort. ©d)nee, m. (-§), snow, fd&neiben (118), to cut ; reap ; I VOCABULARY. ft# in bie £anb — , to cut one’s hand. ©#neiber, m. (-§ ; —), tai- lor. fcfjneien, to snow, fdjnell, quick ; quickly. ©cfjnelTjug, m . (-e§; “e), express-train. f#0tt, already, as early as, readily, easily, indeed; — Icinge, for a long time (past). fdjon, fine, beautiful, hand- some. ©#on§eit, f (-en), beauty, ©d^otte, m. (-n; -n), Scotch- man. fdjrauben (App.L.), to screw, fd&reden (167), to be startled, fcfjreiben (120), to write (to, dat. or an -f- acc. of per s.). fcfjreien (120), to cry, scream, shout. fcf)reiten(n8 ; fein), to stride, step, stalk. ©djriftfteUer, tn. (-§; — ), writer, author. ©cfyritt, m. (-e§; -e), stride, step, pace. ©cfyu'bert, m. (-§), Schubert (German musician). ©d)uf), m. (-e§ ; -e), shoe. ©d;ulb,/, guilt ; (— en), debt; fcf>ulb an etroaS fein, to be to blame for anything, ©dmle, f. (-n). school. ©dEffiler, m . (-§ ; — ), pupil, scholar, school-boy. ©cf)ufter, m. (-§; — ), shoe- maker, cobbler, fdjiitteln, to shake, fdjiuad) (-er), weak, infirm. ©d)it>ad)e, f (-n), weakness, infirmity. ©cfjmager, tn. (-§; “), bro- ther-in-law. ©dfnoalbe, f (-tt), swallow, fcfjnffiren (App. L.), to fester, fc^roars (“er), black. fcfjroeigen (120), to be silent, keep silence. ©djroeigen, n. (-§), keeping silence, (act of) silence, ©djroeij (bie, gen. ber ©djtneij), Switzerland, fd&raellen (124; fein), to swell, fdfjroer, heavy, hard, difficult, fdjtuerlicl), hardly, scarcely, ©cfjroefter, f (-n), sister. f$wimmen (158), to swim. ©#nriirtmen, n. (-3), swim- ming (act of), fcfjnnnben (144), to vanish. f#tt)ingen (144), to swing ; fi# — , to leap, bound, fcfjtooren (13 1), to swear, fdfnuul, sultry, close. ©ee, m. (-§; -en), lake, ©eereife, f (-n), voyage. ©egelfcf)iff, «.(-e§; -e), sail- ing-vessel, ship, fefjen (181), to see, perceive; look, behold. fetyr, very, very much, ex- ceedingly. fein, fetite, feiit, his, its, one’s, fein (52; fein), to be; (as aux.) t to be, have, feit (46), since; — nmnn, since when, how long; — acfyt Shagen, for a week past. feitbem', conj ., since, felbft, self ; even, fenben (99), to send, ©ermette, f (-n), table- napkin. feijen, to set, put, place; ft# — , to seat one’s self, sit down. fief), fron. refi. acc. and dat. y one’s self, himself, herself, itself, themselves ; to him- self, themselves, etc. ; re - cij>r ., one another, fie, she, it; her, it; they; them. ©ie (for bu and i^r), you. VOCABULARY. 419 ftc&en, seven. ©ieb'entel, n. (- 3 ; — ), se- venth part, ftebert (123), to boil. ©ilber, n. (- 3 ), silver, firtgert (144), to sing, finfen (144 ; fein), to sink, finnett (158), to reflect, fitjen (181), to sit. ©flaoe, vt. (-n; -n), slave, ©maragb, vt. (-e 3 ; -e), eme- rald. fo, so, thus, in such a man- ner, indeed ( not translated in the apodosis to a condi- tional clattse ) ; — ebeit, just, just now; — ein, eine, eitt, such a. fobalb, as soon as. fofort, immediately, directly, fogar, even. ©ofyn, m. (-e 3 ; /x e), son. folcb(er), adj. and pron ., such. ©olbat', vt. (-en ; — eit) , sol- dier. follen (196-202 ; duty or obli- gation), to be in duty bound, be to; shall; be said. ©ommer, vt. (- 3 ; — ), sum- mer. fonbern (after negatives on- ly), but. ©ounabenb, vt. (-e 3 ; -e), Saturday. ©onn t, f. (-n), sun. ©omttag, vt. (-e 3 ; -e), Sun- day. fonft, else, otherwise ; — nocfy, any more, any other, any besides, fonftig, other, different. ©opf)ic ,f. (-n 3 ), Sophia, forg'fdltig, careful ; care- fully, fpdt, late. lpQjtereit(a/^ — geljen, 188), to take a walk, go for a walk, go walking; — fdE)s ren (x86), to go for a drive, ©pajier'gaitg, m. (-e 3 ; -“*), walk; eitten — madden, to take a walk. ©pedE, m. (-e 3 ), bacon, fpeiert (120), to spit, ©peifefarte, f (— rt) , bill of fare. fpetfen, to eat, dine, ©perling, vt. (-e 3 ; -e), sparrow, fpielen, to play, fpinnen (158), to spin, fpleijjen (App. L.), to split. ©prad)e, f (-n), language, ©prcdjtalent', n. (— e 3 ; — e) , talent for (learning) lan- guages. ©prad/ftubium, «.(- 3 ; -ten), linguistic study, fprecfjeu (167), to speak, say, tell ; to speak or talk to or with. ©predjen, n. (- 3 ), speaking (act of), speech, ©pric^roort, n. (-c 3 ; *er), proverb. fpriefjen (123), to sprout, fpringen (144; fein), to spring, leap, jump. ©t. So'rettj, m., St. Law- rence. ©taat, m. (~e 3 ; -en), state, ©tabt, f. (ft), town, city, ©tabt'tljor, n. (-e 3 ; -e), town-gate, city-gate, ©tabt'ubr, f (-eit), town- clock. ©taf)l, vt. (-e 3 ), steel, ©taitb, m. (-e 3 ; u t), stand; condition ; ju — e fomntcn, to be completed, be done ; im — e fein, to be able, be in a position to. ftarf Uer), strong, powerful; severe. ftatt'finben (144), to take place, happen. ftedfjen (167), to sting, ftecfen (App. L.), to stick, fteljen (186; fein or fjaben), to stand, be ; be situated, ftefylen (167), to steal, fteigen (120; fein; auf acc.), to climb, mount, ascend , descend, get down or off, alight. ©telle, f. (-n), place, spot, ftellen, to put, place, set (up- right). fterben (159; fein), to die. ftieben (App. L.), to scatter. ftiU, still ; quiet. ©tirnme, f (-n), voice, ftinfen (App. L.), to stink. ©tocE, m. (-e 3 ; -“e), stick, cane. ftoren, to interrupt, disturb, trouble. ftofjen (188), to push, kick, strike, bump, knock, ©trafje, f (-n), street, road, ftreidjeit (118), to stroke, ftreiten (118), to quarrel, ftreng, severe; severely, ©trid), vt. (-e 3 ; -e), stroke, dash; eitt — burcf) bie SJledjnung, disappointment, ©front, m. (-e 3 ; -“e), stream, current. ©trumpf, m. (-e 3 ; *e), stocking. ©tiicf, m. (-e 3 ; -e), piece, ©tiidd^en, n. (- 3 ; — ), little piece, morsel, bit. ©tubent', vt. (-en ; -en), student. ©tubium, «. (- 3 ; ©tubien), study. ftubieren, to study, ©tubierett, n. (- 3 ), studying (act of). ©tuljl, m. (-e 3 ; a e), chair, ©tunbe, f. (-n), hour, les- son. ©tunbenjeiger, m. (- 3 ; — ), hour-hand. 420 VOCABULARY. ©turnt, m. (-c§ ; n e), storm, tempest. fubtrafyieren, to subtract, jitdjen, to seek, search, look for. ©uppe, f. (-It), soup, broth. ta'beln, to blame, find fault with. &ag, m. (-e 5 ; -e), day; ac§t — e, a week; feitadjt — en, for a week past; ein — um ben anbern, every other (alternate) day ; alle brei — C, every third day. SEa'ge^au'brud), m . (-e§), day-break. Saute, /. (-n), aunt, tapfer, brave, valiant ; brave- ly, valiantly. Sapferleit, courage, va- lour. S£ajd)e, f. (-n), pocket. Saffe, /. (-n), cup. Saucer, m. (-§; — ), diver, taueu, to thaw. Seil, m. (-eS; -e), part, por- tion. teilen, to divide, share, teilil, partly, in part; teil§ . . . teit 3 , partly . . . partly. Selegrapl/, m. (-en; -en), telegraph. Seleptyon', n. (-§; -e), tele- phone. Seller, m. (-§ ; — ), plate. Seppid;, m . (-e§; -e), car- pet. Seftament', n. (-e§; -e), testament, (last) will, teuer, dear, costly. S&al, n. (-e§ ; ^er), valley. Staler, m. (- 3 ; — ), dollar. SI) at, f (-en), deed; ex- ploit, achievement, tfjauen, to thaw. S^ee, tn. (-§), tea. Stjemfe, f. t Thames. SI) or, n. (-e§; -e), gate, gateway. S^or, in. (-en;'-en), fool. S^ron, tn. (-e§ ; -e), throne, tfyu.n (196), to do. Sf)Ur(e),yi (-n), door. Sier, n. (-e§; -e), beast, animal. Sifd), m. (-e 3 ; -e), table. Site!, m . (-§; — ), title; tntt — , with title (printed on the back). Softer, f. if), daughter. Sod)terd)en, n. (-3 ; — ), lit- tle daughter. Soroutoer, adj. % (of) To- ronto, tot, dead, toten, to kill, trdge, idle, lazy, indolent, tragen (186), to carry, traurig, sad, sorrowful, me- lancholy. Srauung, f. (-en), marriage (-ceremony). treffen (167), to hit, happen upon, meet with; hit upon, fall in with, treiben (120), to drive. Sreppe, f. (-n), stairs, stair- case. treten (181), to tread, step, treu, faithful, true, triefen (123), to drop, drip, trinfen (144), to drink. Srinfeit, n. (-§), (act or ha- bit of) drinking. Srinf'gelb, n. (-e§; -er), drinking-money, gratuity, tip. trot) (223), in spite of. trotjbem' 10 a< 3 , in spite of what. Srun / fenbolb, m. (-e 3 ; -e), drunkard. Sud), n. (-e§ ; ■“er and -e), cloth. Su'genb,./ (-en), virtue. tt. ixber, ft. (-§ ; — ), evil, fiber (65), over, above, at, through, by way of; fyeute — brei 2Sod)en, this day three weeks. fiberfyaupt', in general, gene- rally ; as a matter of fact, at any rate. fi'berntorgen/the day after to- morrow. fiberrc'bcu, to persuade, fiberfeij'ai, to translate; in 3 £>eutfd)e — , to translate in- to German. iYberaiefyer, m. (-§; — ), overcoat. fibrig, remaining, left over; ba 3 ilbrigc, the remainder, what is left; — bleibeu, to be remaining or left, ilbung, f. (-en), exercise; practice. Ufer, n. (-§; — ), bank, shore. UI)r, f* (-en), clock, watch ; unx oier — , at four o’clock ; tote oiel — tft e 3 ? what o’clock is it ? unntbg'lid), impossible ; id) famt — , I cannot possibly, ttn'redjt, n. (-e§), wrong; — Ijaben, to be (in the) wrong, unfer, unfere, unfer, our. unten, below, down-stairs, unter (65), under, beneath, below ; among; — ber 9 ie* gierung (Slifabet^, in the reign of Elizabeth, unterne^'men (167), to un- dertake. Unterne^'men, n. (-§), enterprise, undertaking. Un'terfc^ieb, m. (-e 3 ; -e), difference. Un'toafjrfieit, f. (-en), un. truth, falsehood, un'toa^rfd^einli^, improba. ble. VOCABULARY. 421 un'roeit (gen.), not far from, un'gufrieben, discontented, dissatisfied, ur'teilen, to judge. U. f. 1©., abbrev. for tmb fo ineiter, and so forth, etc. 8 . Safer, nt. (-§; tL ), father, ©erbergen (159), to conceal, hide. ©erbremten (99), to burn, con- sume with fire. ©erberben (159), to spoil (intr .) ; — (weak), to spoil (tr.), injure. ©erbriefjen (123), to vex. Sereiitigten ©tauten (bie), pi., The United States. ©ergeben§, in vain. ©ergelteu (159), to requite, reward. ©ergeffen (181), to forget. Sergniigeit, n. (-6), pleasure, delight, amusement. S 3 erfjaltni§, «.(-fe 3 ; -fc), cir- cumstance. ©erfyei'raten (fi$ ©tit), to marry. ©erfaufen, to sell ; biefe§ £au 3 ift ju — , this house is for sale. ©erlaffen (188), to leave, de- sert, quit; fid) — auf (-f- acc.), to rely upon, depend upon. ©erleiben, to render disagree- able, spoil. ©erlefjen, to hurt, wound ©erlieren (13 1), to lose. JBerluft, nt. (~e§ ; -e), loss, ©erinieten, to let, rent, ©ermittelft (gen.), by means of. ©erveifen, to go on a jour- ney. ©erreift, absent on a journey, ©erfammeln, to collect, as- semble. ©erfcfireiben (120), to pre- scribe. ©erfdjtuenben, to squander, waste. ©crfd)iDinben (144; fein), to disappear, vanish. ©erfpvecf)en (167), to promise. ©erftel)en (186), to under- stand ; fic§ — auf (-|- acc .), to be a judge (of), ©erfiorbcn, deceased, ©erfudjen, to try. S3ert©anbtc, in. and f. (adj . subst.), relative. ©erjeil)en (120 ; dat.), to par- don, excuse. S 3 erjeif)ung, f. (-en), pardon, forgiveness; urn — bitten, to beg pardon. ©er$tneifelu, to despair. 33 ettcr, in. (- 3 ; -n), cousin, ©tel (me!)r, meift), much, many, a great deal of; t©ie — Uf;r, what o’clock. ©ieHeicfjt', perhaps, possibly, ©ielmal, ©ielntal 3 , many times, frequently, often, ©ter, four. Siertcl, n. (-§; — ), fourth part, quarter. SSicrtelftun'be, f. (-n), quar- ter of an hour. ©icrjetyn, fourteen; — £age, a fortnight. Sioloncell', n. (— ; -e), vio- loncello. 33 ogcl, m. (-§; tL ), bird. ©oil (gen. or ©on), full, ©olfen'bcn^o finish, complete, ©on (46), of, from, by, about, concerning. ©or (65), before, of, in front of, ago; — acf)t £agen, a week ago. ©orbei, over, past. ©oibeige!)en (188), to go by, pass by. ©orberciten (ftcf)), to prepare (for, auf -|" acc.). ©ovfa^ren (186 ; fein), drive up to the door, etc. ©orgefjen (188; fein), to go (or be) fast (of a time- piece). ©or'geftern, the day before yesterday. ©orfjaben, to contemplate, in- tend. SSorfiaug, nt. (-e§ ; H), cur- tain. ©orig, preceding, last, ©orldufig (adv.), temporarily, for the present. ©orlefen (181 ; -f- dat. 0/ per- son), to read to. SSormunb, nt. (-e§ ; -“er), guardian. SBorrat, nt. (-e§; -“e), stock, provision. ©orficbtig, cautious, prudent. S 3 orftabt, f. (~e), suburb, ©orftelleu, to present, intro- duce. ©ortcilljaft, advantageous, ©oriiber, past. ©oriiberfliefjen (131; fein), to flow past. ©oriibergeljen (188; fein), to go past, pass by ; ant £aufe — , to go by, go past, the house. ©orjiefjen (13 1), to prefer. S 3 . roadjfen (1S6), to grow. 2 Bagcn, in. (-3 ; —), waggon, carriage. TOtigen (131, B.), to weigh. t©dl)len, to choose, select. ioa§v, true, real ; nid)t — ? am (I, etc.) not? is it not so? tocifjren, to last, continue, rodljrenb (gen. ; 223), during; while. 2Baf)r))ut, /. (-en), truth. i©af)rfd>einlid) (adv.), pro. bably. 422 VOCABULARY. ®aifenfjau 5 , *. (-e§; *er), orphan-asylum. SSalb, m. (-e§ ; "er), forest, wood. SBanb, f. ("e), wall. 2 Banb(e)rer, m. (- 5 ; — tra- veller. mann? when? warm ("er), warm, warten (auf -J- acc.), to wait for. marum, why, wherefore. wa§, what, that which, which, that ; — fur ein, eine, ein, what kind of a, what, waf ten (186), to wash. 2Bct|]er, n. (-§ ; — •), water; ju — > by water, webeu (13 1), to weave. wed&felSaft, changeable, mecfen, to wake, awake, waken. SBed'u^r, /. (-en), alarm- clock. meber, neither; — . , . nodj, neither . . . nor. SBeg, m. (-eS; -e), way, road ; fi<# ouf ben — nta<$en, to set out, be off. wegen {gen. ; 223), on account of, because of, for the sake of, for. SBeif), n. (-e§; -er), woman; wife. meidjen (118), to yield. 2 Beibe, f. (-n), pasturage, pasture. 2 Bei§na$ten, pi., Christmas, meil, because. SBcin, m. (-e§; -e), wine, meinen, to weep, cry. SBeinfarte, f. (-n), wine- card. JtfCife, adj ., wise. SBeife,/! (-n), manner, mode, way; auf biefe — , in this way. meifen (120), to point out, show. meifj, white, meit, far. metier, farther, further. SBetjen, m. (-3; — ), wheat, merger, meldje, mel$e3, rel. pron., who, which, that; interrogative adj., which? what ? ; — , adj. (in excla- mations), what a ! what ! SBelt, f (-ett), world; auf ber — , in the world, mem, dat. 0/ mer, to whom? menben (99), to turn; fid) — , to apply (to, an -f acc.). menig, little, few. menn, when, whenever, as soon as ; if ; — and), even if. mer, who; he who, who- ever; who? mer&eit (159), to sue. mer ben (159), to become, grow; (as aux. of the pass- ive voice, 112-114), to be; — au 3 , to become of. merfen (159), to throw. 2 Ber!, n. (-e 3 ; -e), work, raeffen, whose ; whose ? roe 3 f)alf>, wherefore? why? 2 Better, n. (- 3 ), weather; 6ei btefem — , in this weather, tuibcr (acc. ; 34), against, contrary to. nrie, how; how?; — fefyr aucfj, however much, mieber, again, once more, nue'berfeljen (181), to see again, meet again. SBte'berfeficn, «.(-§), meeting again ; auf — , good-bye till we meet again, miegen (13 1), to weigh. 2BiU)eInt, m. (-§), William. SBille, m. (-rt3), will ; wish ; um . . . miUen (gen.), for the sake of. 2 Binb, m. (-e 3 ; -e), wind, roiitben (144), to wind, mittbig, windy. Winter, m. (- 3 ; — ), winter. mir, we. mirflid), adv ., really, truly. SBirtin, f. (-nen), hostess; landlady. miffen (196), to know (said of knowledge) ; nid;t bafj td; mufjte, not that I know of. 2 Biffenfc$aft, f. (-en), sci- ence. miffentlid), knowingly. U 30 ? where ; where ? 2 Bocl)e, (-n), week, mol; I, pred. adj., well (of health)', mir ift nid;t — gu 3 Hut, I do not feel well; — , adv.> well, then, indeed, I suppose ; ja — , yes, to be sure. mofynen, to dwell, live, reside. 2Bo^nung,/ (-en), dwelling, house, residence, motten (196-202), to will, de- sire, wish, want, intend, mean, like; — ©ie ein ©Ia 3 SBaffcr? will you have a glass of water ? moran, whereon, on which, on what, of wdiat. morauf, whereon, on which, for which, on what. morau 3 , wherefrom, from what, of what. morin, wherein, in which, in what. 2Bort, n. (-e§; tf er and -e), word. moriiber? about what? at what ? over what ? munbern (fid&), to wonder, be astonished (at, ii&er -j- acc .) ; e 3 munbert mi<# (imjers.), I wonder. SBuufd;, (-e§ ; H), wish, mitnf d;en, to wish, desire, want ; ©liicf — , to congra- tulate, wish success. 2 Burnt, m. (-c§; ^er), worm. VOCABULARY. 423 SBurjel (-n), root. 2B ut,f, rage, fury, nrutenb, furious. 3. jaf)Ien, to pay. 3afj;t, m. (-e§; u e), tooth. 3abnroel), u. (-e§), tooth- ache, geljn, ten. 3eid)en, n. (-§ ; — ), sign, geigen, to show, geiljen (120), to convict. 3eit, f. (-cn), time ; ju alien — ett, in all ages. 3eititnfl,y! (-cn), newspaper, gevreifjen (118), to tear (to pieces). jerrinnen (158), to vanish, run away (of liquids). jiefjen (131), to draw; pull, take. 3immer, n. (-§ ; — ), room, ju (46), to, at ; — meinem Dnfel, to my uncle’s; — berfelben 3 e tt/ at the same time; adv., too; closed, shut. gubringeit (99), to pass, spend {said of time). 3ucfer, m. (-§), sugar. §ucrft , / first, first of all. gufolge {gen. or dat. ; 223), in consequence of, accord- ing to. [fied. jufrieben, contented, satis- 3ng, m. (-e§ ; -“e), train, guntadjen, to shut, close, juriidbringen (99), to bring back. guriidbleiben (120; fein), to remain behind; remain at home. juriieff ommen (167), to return, come back. guriidlcgcn, to put by, layup, jufammen, together, gufammeuftofjen (188), to col- lide. gufdjiden, to send to {dat.). jufebliefjen (123), to lock up, fasten, shut. 3med, m. (-e§ ; -e), aim, ob- ject. gwei, two. jroeiten§, secondly, jnrittgen (144), to force, jtnlfdjen (65), between, jtnolf, twelve. ENGLISH — GERMAN. Note. —The government < A. able, faf)ig, gefd)idt; to be — , fottnen, 196 ; im ©tarts be fein. about, prep, (around), um, 34, 226, {a) ; (the person), bet, 46, 226, {d) ; adv., (nearly), ungefciljt* ; etrna, 226, {b), {c)\ to be — to, im Segriffe fein. above, prep ., liber, 65. absent, abruefenb ; — -mind- edly, j erftr eut. abuse, v., mifjljan'belu. accept, annefymen, 167. accompany, begleiten (tr.). account; on — of, roegen, 223; Ijalb(en), briber, 223 ; of verbs is given only where it on that — , beSroegen, be§s Ijalb. accusation, 21nflage,_/! (-n). accuse (of), aitflageit {gen. of thing), befd;ulbigen {gen. of thing). accustomed, geroofynt ; to be — , bie©eu>of)nfyeit fjabert. acknowledge, atterfennen, (99)- acquaintance, 93e!anntfd;aft, f. (-en); to make the — of, fennett lernen. acquit (of), Io3fpred;en (167; gen. of thing). act; to — amiss, tnifj'Ijaubeln. add. abbieren. address, subst ., 2lbreffe, f- (-n). differs from English usage. address, v., aitreben. admire, beunutbem. advance, uorriiden {intr.). advantage, SSorteil, m. (-e<3 ; -e). advantageous, oor'teilljaft. advice, 9 iat, in. (-e§). advise, raten (188 ; dat.). affair, ©acfje, f. (-n). afraid; to be — (of); fic§ fiirdjten (oor -j- dat.). after, nad), 46. afternoon, !Kad)mittag, tn. (-e§ ; -e). afterwards, ttadjfjer, fjentad), barauf. again, roicber, normal*, against, ttriber, gegen, 34. ago, uov {Prep. -{* dat.), 65 ; 424 VOCABULARY. many years — , cor oielcn Safyren ; a week — to-day, §eute nor af trees, etc.), 23 aunt* rinbe,/ basket, £orb, m. (-ea ; ^e). battery, S 3 aiterie, f. (-n). battle, ©d;lad;t,y (-en). be, fein (52); iccrben (159; as aux. of passive , 112, R. 5); fteljcn (186); there is, there are, ea giebt, ea iff, etc., 220; (of health) fid^ beftnben (144); how are you? mie ge^t ea^^nenii I am to, idf) foil, bear, subst., S 3 dr, m. (-en; -en). bear (bring forth), v. t ge# baren (167). beat, v., fd()lagen (186). VOCABULARY. 425 beautiful, fd^iJtt; the — , b ct§ ©djone. beauty, ©c^on^ei t, f. (— en). because, roeit ; ba. become, toerben (159) ; fteben (186; dot.). bed, Sett, n. (-e3; -en); to go to — , ju Sette gefyen, fid) fcfdafen legett; in — , ju Sette. bee, ^ 8 iem,f. (-n). beef, Stinbfleifcb, n. (-e§). beer, Sier, n. (-e3; -e). before, prep., nor (65 ; dat. or acc.)] conj beoor; ebe (bafj). beg (ask), bitten (181 ; for, um); to — pardon, urn Ser^eibung bitten; — (for alms), betteln. beggar (-man), Settler, m. (-5; — •); — woman, Sett? Ux\w,f (-nen). begin, anfangen (18S); be? ginnen (158). behave, fid) betragen(i86). behind, Winter (65 ; dat. or acc.). believe, glaubett (dat. of per- SOfl). belong (to), geboren (dat.). beloved, geliebt, inert, below, prep., unter (dat. or acc. ; 65) ; unterbalb (gen.] 223) ; adv., unten. besides, adv., aufjerbem. between, jmifc^en (dat. or acc. ; 65). beverage, ©etrauf, n. (-e§; -e). bid, v. (order), fyeifjen (188). big, grofs. bill, 9lecbnung, /. (-en). bird, Sogel, in. (-3; u ). bird-cage, Sogelbauer, n. H; -) birth -day, ©eburtStag, m. (-c 3 ; -e) ; as a — -present, Sum ©eburtStag. 28 bishop, Sifdjof, m. (-e 3 ; ^e). bite, v., beifjen (118). bitter, bitter, black, adj., fcbtnarj ( u tr). black, v. (0/ boots), inidjfen. blame, v., tabeln. blindly, blinblingS. blow, v., blafen (188). blue, blau. board ; on — (of a ship), am Sorb. boat, Soot, n. (-eS; -e or Sote). bodily, forperlicb. bombard, bombarbieren. bone, £nod)en, m. (-3; — ). book, SudE), n. (-e3 ; *er). bookseller, Sudjfjanbler, m. Hi -)• born, part., geboren (167). borne; having been — down by the stream, com ©tro? me fortgeriffen. botanist, Sota'nifer, m. (-3; -). both, beibe; alle beibe, bei? be3. bough, 21 ft, m. (e 3 ; -“e). Boston, Softon, «.(-§); the — train, ber3ug non(nad)) Softon. boy, £nabe, m. (-n; -it), brave, tapfer. bread, Srot, n. (-e3 ; -e). break, bredEjeit (167); — through, einbred)eit. breakfast, v., friibftucfen; subst., ^rubftucf, n. (-e3). bridge, Snide, f. (-11). bring, bringen (99); bolen; to — with one, — along, mitbringen; to — in, ber? einbringett; to — up, ber? aufbringen. broad, breit. brother, Sruber, m (-3; a ). brother-in-law, ©d^mager, m. (-*; *). build, bauen. building, ©ebaube, n. (-3; — )i (act of), Sauen, n. (- 3 ). bullet, flugel, f (-n). burn, brennen (99; intr.)] oerbremten (99; tr. and intr.). business, ©efdEjaft, n. (-e§ ; -0. business -matter, ©efdfjaftS* angelegeubeit,/. (-en). but, aber; allein (241, 1); foitbern (only after a ne- gative, 236, R. 1). button, jlnopf, m. (-e§; -“e). buy, faufen. buying (action of), JTaufeu, n. (-*)■ by, 228 ; (near by), bei (dat .) ; (of agent with pass, voice ) non (dat.)’, (of means or instrument) buret) (acc.), mit (dat.) ; — rail(way), mit ber ©ifenbafjn. C. call (out), rufen 188; (name), neitnen, 99 ; be — ed, bei* fjeit, 188. call, subst. (visit), SefudEj, m. (-e3 ; -e). can, fbnnen, 196-202. cannon, Jtanone,/. (-n). capable, fat)ig (gen., or -f- ju). capital, subst., ^auptftabt,/! (*e). cardinal-point (see point), care, 21c$t, f. ; to take — , fidE) in 2ldC)t netjmen (167) ; do you — to? §aben ©iefiuft? for all I — , meinetmegen. carpet, £eppid), m. (-e3; -e). carriage, SBagen, m. (-3; -). carry, tragen, 186 ; to — up, binauftragen. case, [fall, m. (-e3; c e). castle, ©cblofc, n. (~e3; ^er) 426 cat, Jlafce, f. (-n). catch, fangen, 188; — cold, fief) erfalten. cause ; to — to, Ictffen (188 ; -f- in/in.). celebrate, feiern; — d, be* riifjmt. century, ^a^rbunbert, n. (-e3; -e). certain, — ly, gemijj, feben* falls. chair, (Stub!, (-e3 ; -“e>. chancellor, dangler, m. (-3; ->. change, v. tr., anbern ; v. intr. , fid^ (ittbevn. Charles, $arl, m. (-3) ; little — , ^arlcben, ». (-3). charming, adj., reijenb cheap, biUig. cheese, &afe, m. (-5 ; — cherry, -ftirfdjc, (-n). chicken, §u§tt, n. (-e3 ; *er). child, £inb, k. (-e3; -er). Christmas, 2Beif)nacf)ten, pi* church, £ird)e, f. (-it). Cinderella, Sffc^enputtel, »., (- 5 ). city, Stabt, f (“c). claim to be, mollen, 196. clear, Elar. clever, gefc^icft. climate, JMitttct, #. (- 3 ). climb up, f)inauf!Iettern. cloak, Sftantet, «t. (-3 ; *). clock, Ufyv, f. (-en). close, jumaefjen; fcblie&en, SufdjUe&en, 123. cloth, ^ud), *.(-e 3 ;-e or“er\ clothes, ilfeiber, n. pi- {see &U ib). cloud, %&oVte,f. (-n). coachman-, $utfd)er, m. (-3; coal, Rofylt, f. (-11). coat, 9tod, m. (-e3 ; H e). coffee, ilaffee, in. (-3). cold, fait ( :L er) ; to catch — , fid) erfcUtttt* VOCABULARY. colour f$farbe, f. (-n). combat, Jlampf, w. (~e3 ; -“e). come, f ommen (167; fein); — in, ^ereinfommeit; — here, bierberEommcn ; — down, beruntertommen ; — out, f>erau$f ommen ; — back, jitriteff ommen ; — again, roieberf ommen ; what is to — , ba3 23e»orftef)enbe. coming (act of), fommen, n. (-*)• command, v., befeljlen (167 ; dat .). commandment, ©ebot, n., (-CS ; -e). company, ©efellfdjaft, (-en). complain, flagen (ttber -4- acc .). complete, noHftanbig. concert, ^on^ert', n. (-e3 ; -e). condition, 35ebingung, f (-en). confusion, SSermirrung, f. (-en); 23efiiirjung,/. (-en). congratulate, ©liicf tounfdjen, grain lieren {dal.). conscious, beroufjt (4" gen.\ consequence ; in — of, $Us forge (223). consider, betrad)ten; fjalten fiir, 188. consist (of), befiefien (auo), * 86 . contented, jufrieben. contradistinction, ©egenfa§, m. (-e3 ; -“e). contrary j on the — , im ©e* genteif. convent, JUofter, n. (-3 ; •“). convince (of), iiberjei^gen {gen. of thing). cool, adj, , Eii£)[. copy, snbst.y exemplar*, ». (-e3; -e); v ., abfd)reiben, 120. corner, neiben. D. danger, ©ef a br, f (-en). dangerous, gefabrUcf). dare, ftdb unterfteben, 180; bitrfen, 196. daughter, £od)ter , f. (-). day, Sag, in. (-e3 ; -e) ; in broad — light, bei belUn* Sage, dead, tot. deal ; a great — of, mel. dealer, &iinbler, tn. (-3,* -). dear, lieb, teuer. dearly-bought, teuer. VOCABULARY. 427 decide, intr ., ftd) entfcbliefjen, 123 ; — d, adj ., entfcbieben. defence, S3erteibiguug, /. (-cn). definition, definition, /. (-en). deserve, oerbienen. desire, Serlangen, n. (-3; -); 2uft ,f(H). desperate, nersweifelt. devote, roibmen. diamond, diamant', m. (-3 udj, n. (-e3; -^er). die, fierben (159; fetn). difference, Unterfcbieb, nt. (-e§; -e). difficult, fcbwer. dig, graben, 186. diligence, $Ieifj, m. (-e3). diligently, fleifjig. dinner, 2)littag§effen, n. (-3 ; -)• disagreeable, unangenebm. disappoint, enttiiufc^en. discover, entbecfen. discoverer, ©ntbecfer, m. (-3; — ). discovery, ©ntbecfung, f. (-en). disgrace, ©djanbe, f. (-n). displeased, unjufrieben. dissatisfied, un a ufrieben. distant, entfernt. disturb, ftovett. diver, dauber, nt. (-3 ; — ). divide, teilen. divine, gottlid). do, ttjun (196); (make), nta* (ben ; (as aux. is not trans- lated by a separate form ; see 31, R. 3) ; how — you — ? wie g et)t e3 Sbnen? doctor, doctor, in. (-5 ; dofto'ren) ; (physician), Strjt, nt. f-e3 ; *c) ; that is Dr. B., ba3 ift ber doftor to. dog, £unb, nt. (-e3; -e). dollar, dealer, nt. (-3 ; — ). door, dE)iir(e), f. (— cit) ; at the — , an ber df)ur(c). doubt, subst. t gweifel, (-*; -)• doubt, v., jioeifeln (an -f j dat.)\ I have no — of it, id; l;abe feinengweifel bas ran. down, bentnter ; — -stairs, unten. dozen, du|enb, n. (-e5; -e). draw, jiebeit, 131; jeidbnen. dress, $leib, n. (-e3 ; -er). dress, v. tr., anfleiben; v. intr., fid) anfleibeit. drink, trinfen, 144 ; — (of beasts'), faufen, 123. drive, v. tr., treiben, 120; intr., (go in a conveyance), fabren (186; fein) ; go for a — , fpajierett fabren. driving (act of), fabren, «. (-§). drop, dropfen, nt. (-3 ; — ). drown, intr. ; be — ed, ers trinfen, 144. duke, £er a og, in. (-e3 ; -e or *e). during, toabrenb (gen. ; 223 ). duty, ^flidjt,/. (-en). dwelling-house, 2Bobltbau3, n. (-e3; *er). E. each, jeber, jebe, jebe3 ; — other, einanber. eagle, 2tbler, m. (-3 ; — •). ear, £f)V, n. (-e3 ; -en). early, friib. earn, oerbienen. earth, ©rbe, f. ; — -quake, ©rbbeben, n. (-3; — ). east, Oft(en), nt. easy, — ily, leicbt. eat, effen, 181; frcffett, i8r, (said of beasts). effort, Ulnfirengung,/ (-en), 93etniibung, f. (-en) ; 23er* fucb, m. (-3; -e). either, entroeber ; — ... or, entweber . . . ober. elect (as), ermablen (sum), elm, Ulutc, f. (-n). else, or — , fonft. embarrassment, 33erlegen# beit, f. (-en). emperor, &aifer, m. (-3; — ). endure, au3fteben, 186. enemy, §eiub, m. (-e3; -e). engaged, oerfagt; I have an- other engagement, I am — elsewhere, icb bin anber3* wo nerfagt. English, englifd); — (lan- guage), ©nglifcb (be3 ©ng* liftben); into — , in3 ©ng* fil'd) e. Englishman, ©nglcinber, nt. H; -). enjoy, geitieften (123 ; gen. or more generally acc.). enough, genug ; be — , suf- fice, geniigen. err, irren. escape, entflieben (13 1 ; dat.). esteem, acbten. etc., U. f. n). (abbreviation for : unb fo roeiter). Europe, ©uropa, n. (-3). even, adv. fogar, felbft; not — , nicbt einmaF; — if, tnenn aud). evening, 2lbenb, m. (— e§ ; — e). ever, je, female, every, jeber, jebe, jebe3 ; —body, —one, jebermann, jeber, jebroeber, jeglidjer ; — week, aHe acbt dage. everywhere, iibcralf. evil, subs t., 93ofe3, n. exactly, gerabe, eben. examination, ©jarnen, n. (-3 ; ~). examine, unterfudb'en, beob'« acbten. 428 VOCABULARY. exceeding, — ly, § 5 cf)ft, fe§r, (iufjerft. except, aufjer (dat. ; 46). excuse, v., entfdjulbigen (tr.), perjeiljen ( dat .) ; subst . , Gntfdjulbigung,./! (-en). exercise, subst., 2lufg abe, f. (-n). expect, enparten. expense, Soften, pi . ; at the — of, auf ftofien. eye, Sluge, n. (-3; -n). F. fail (in business), faHieren. fall, fallen (x88; fein). family, f^awilie, _/. (-n). famine, £un'ger 3 not, f far, roeit; as — as, bi 3 na<$ (dat.) ; not — from, unfern, unroeit (gen . ; 223, 23, 24). farewell, Scbetpoljl, n. (- 3 ). fast (quick), gefc^nunb, fcbneU. father, Slater, m. (-5; ^). favour, Gef alien, m. (-3 ; — ). fear, *yurd)t, f. ; for — , au 3 $urd)t. feather, 'J-eber,./*. (-n). February, ^ebruar, m. (-3). feel, ffifylen ; (perceive), etnps finben, 144; v. intr . (of health ), fi$ befinben ; gu Sttute fein; I — ill, ntir ift fd)lecl)t ju 2Jhtte. few, tnenig, tpenige; a — , einige, ein paar. field, $elb, n. (-e 3 ; -er). fight, fedjten, 124; ftreiten, 118. fill, fallen. find, finben, 144 ; — out, au5* finben; — again, tmebers finben. fine, fd&on. finger, finger, m. (- 3 ; — ). finish, pollen'ben ; to have — ed (with), fertig fein (mit) ; — ed, fertig. fire, fetter, «. (- 3 ; — ). first, adj ., ber, bie, ba 3 erfte; adv ., juerft, erften 3 ; — of all, juerft. fish, $ifcf), m. (-e3 ; -e). fishing, ^yifdjen, n. (-3). fit for, — to, gut ju. five, fiinf. flatter, fcfmteidjeln (dat.). flatterer, o$meic§ler, m. (-5; fleet, subst., $lotte, f (-n). floor, ^ufiboben, m. (-3 ; **). flour, 2ftel)l, n. (-e3). flow, v., fliejjen, 123, fein. flower, S 3 lunte, f. (-n). fly, fliegen 13 1, fein;— away, roegfliegen. follow, folgen (fein ; dat.). foot, f^ufj, m . (_ e § ; -^e). for, 229, prep, (in behalf of), far, acc., 34 ; (of purpose) 8U, dat., 46; — reading, jurn JSefen; (of past time) feit, dat., 46 ; — three days (past), feit brei Sagen; (of fit. time) auf, acc., 229, (b), 2; — three days (to come), auf brei Sage, forbid, »erbieten(i3i; dat.y. force, jroingen, 144 ; to be — d, obliged (to), miiffen, 196-202. ford, f$?urt, f. (-en). forest, 23 alb, m. (-e3 ; -“er). forgery, S 3 erfalfcfmng, f. (-en). forget, pergeffen, 181. forgive, pergeben (181; dat.). former, jener, jene, jene3. fort, %t\tt,f (-n). fortieth (part), Sierjigftel, n. Hi—)- fortnight, nierje^n Sage, fortunately, glficflid&enpeife ; glfidlid&er SBeife. fortune, good , Glfid, n. (-e 3). four, pier. fox, $uc§§, m. (-e3; *e). France, ^ranfreic^, n. (-3). Francis, ^ranj, m. (-en3). Fred(dy), grife, m. (-en3). Frederick, §riebricf), m. H) ; Frederick-street, bie $riebrid)ftrafje. free, frei. freeze, 13 1, frieren. French, frangofifd); — (lan- guage), ^ranjbfifdfj, n. (be 3 ^ranjofifdjen). fresh, frifd). Friday, ftreitag, m. (-e3; -e). friend, $reunb, m. (-e3 ; -e). friendless, freunblo3. friendly, freunblid). friendship, $reunbf(f)aft, f. (-en). frighten (terrify), erfdjrecfen ; to be— ed, erfdjrccfeit, 167. frog, $rofd;, w. (-e3; u t). from (direction), pon, au3 (dat. ; 46) ; (cause) au3 ; (time) fiber + acc., 65; a week — to-day, I)eute fiber ac§t Sage ; (disease) an, dat., 65; er ift an biefer ^ranf^eit geftor* ben, he died of that dis- ease. front; in — of; por (dat. or acc. ; 65). fully, gang. funeral, S 3 egrcibni 3 , n. (— fe3; -fe). furious, -ly, ipfitenb. future, $utunit,f. G. gallop, galoppieren. garden, Garten, m. (- 3 ; *). gardener, Gartner, m. (-3 ; -)• gather, fantmeln. general, General', m. (-e8; -e). VOCABULARY. 429 generally, gembplicp generous, freigebig. gentleman, £err tn. (-it ; -ett). George, ©corg, tn. (-§). German, adj., beutfd; ; — (language), £>eutfcp tt. (beS S)eutfd§en); in — , auf SDeutfd); into—, itt3 £>cutfcp. Germany, $)eutfcpanb, n. (-*). get (become), toerben, 159. girl, SDlabcpn, n. (-§; — ). give, geben, 181; — up, auf* geben. glad, frol) (gen.) ; be — , fid; fveuett ; lam—, eS freut mic§ ; I should be — to, should like to, id; ntbcpe gern. glass, ©ta§ n. (-e§; “er). glove, £anbfcpp tn. (-e§ ; -e). go, gepn (188; fein); reifen; — away, toeggepn, forts ge^en; — back, juriicf* gel;en; —out, (pn)au§s ge^ett; — down, I; in* untergepn; — up, pn* aufgepn; — past the place, an einern Sptafce nor* iibergepn; —for, fetch, plen. goal, 3iel, n. (-e§ ; -e). God, god, ©ott, tn. (-e§; “er). Goethe, ©oetp, tn. (-5). gold, subst . , ©olb, n. (-e§). gold, adj ., golden, golben. good, gut ; be — enough, pben ©ie bie ©iite ; — morning, guten SJlorgen. goodness, ©life,/! graceful, -ly, aitmutig. grand-parents, ©rofjeltern, //• grapes, £rauben, pi. grass, ©ra§, n. (-e§; “er). grateful, banfbar. great, groB (“er, groBt). green, griin; subst., ©riln, *. (-§). grind, fimmel, tn. (-§; — ). heavy, farcer; — ily, farcer; (of rain) ftarf ; heaviest of all, am allcrfd;ioerften. help, subst., §ilfe. help, V., plfen (159; dal.); it cannot be — ed, e§ Id^t fidf) nidp dnbern. Henry, §einricp tn. (-§). her, pers. pron., fte (acc.)\ ip (dat.). her, pass, adj., ip, ipe, ip. here, per. hide, v., oerbergen, 159. high, pep I;opr, pd;ft (loses C in inflexion); to think — ly of, oiel fatten non, 188. him, ip (ace.), if»m (dal.). himself (he), er felbft ; (to) — , fid) (acc. or dat.). his, pass, adj., fein, feine, fein. his, poss. pron., feiner, fei* ne, feine§; ber, bie, ba3 feine; ber, bie, ba8 fei* nige. hoarse, pifer. hold, plten, x88; — toge- ther, apammenplten. holiday, ft-eiertag, tn. (-e§ ; -e); — s, geri en,//. home, £eim at, f. ; adv ., nac§ £aufe; at — , ju ^aufe; to go— ,na$ §aufe gepn, 188. honest, eplicp reblicp auf* rid^tig. honey, £onig, tn. (-e§). hope, subst., Jooffnung, f (-en); t/., pffen. horse, ^Pferb, n. (-e§ ; -e). hospital, ^ofpital, ©pital, n. (-eS; “er). 43 ° VOCABULARY. hostess, ©irtin,./! (-nen). hot, §eife. hour, ©tunbe, f. (-it) ; — -hand, ©tunbenjeiger, tn. H; -). house, £au3, n. (-e3 ; -“er) ; at your — , bei lyljnen. how, tuie ; — do you do ? tote gebt e5 wie beftitben ©ie fid^ ? however, aber; jebod). howl, ^eulen. human, menf^Iid; ; — being, 2Jtenf$, tn. (-en ; -en). hundred, fjunbert ; subst 4?unbert, n. (-e3; -e). hunger, hunger, tn. (-3). hungry, §ungrig; be — > hunger tyaben. hunter, ^dger, m. (-3; — ■). hunting (act of), $agen, n. (-3); (chase) Sagb,/.; g° — , auf bie ^agb gefjen. huntsman, S^S er / (-8* -)• hurry, @ile, f. ; I am in a — , id) bin in ber @iie, id) fyabe e3 eilig. hurt, v. f oerlefcen. husband, 2Jlann, tn. (-e5; ■“er). hussar, §ufar, tn. (— cit or -5; -en). 2 . I, i<*. ice, Cri3, n. (-e5). idea, 3bee,y"., ©ebanfe, tn. (-n3; -n). idle, faul, trage. idleness, idling, 9)tufjiggang, tn. (-e3). if, tnenn ; (whether), ob. ignorant, unnriffenb. ill, EranE; health, fd)Ied)te ©efunb^eit, yi illness, flranEEjeit, f. (-en). imagine, fid) (< iat .) benfen (99, a)* immediately, (fo)gleid). importance, 2Bid;tigEeit. important, midjtig, bebeu* tenb. impossible, unmogltd). in, in, dat ., 65; auf, dat.y 65, 230, («) ; — the country, auf bem Sanbe. inch, goll, m. (-e 3). induce, beraegett, 131, B. industrious, — ly, fleifjig. industry, $Ieifj, tn. (-e3). inform, mitteilen. inhabitant, ©inniofyner, m. (-8 5 -)• ink, £inte or ®inte, f. innocence, Unfcf)ulb, _/! inquire, fid) erEunbigen, fra* gen, 186. inside of, innerfyalb {gen. ; 223 ). insist on, beftel)en (auf ~\~ acc.). instead of, ftatt, anftatt {gen . ; 223 ). intend, beabfidE)tigen, nor'* Ijabeit, gebenfen (99, 2). intention, 9lbfid)t, f. (-en). interrupt, unterbred&'en, 167. into, in {acc. ; 65). invent, erfinben, 144. invitation, ©inlabung, f. (-en). invite, einlaben, 186. iron, (Sifen, n. (-3); adj ., eifern. it (38; 39), e8; er ; fie ; ber, bie, ba3felbe ; in — , bavin ; for — , bafitr ; of — , ba* non ; with — , bamit ; to — , baju. its, joss. adj., fein, il)r. itself, e3 felbft. J. James, lyafob, m - (-5). January, ^anuar, m. (-3). John, lyobann' m. (-3). journey, Jieife,/. (-n). j oyou9, fvofdid). July, gu'li, w. H). jump, fpvingen, 144; down, (leruntevfpringen, Elinunterfpringen. June, ^u'ni, m. (-3). just, gevabe, eben ; — now, foeben, — as, ebenfo. justify, redjtfertigen. K, kick, ftofjen, 188. kind; what — of, nm3 fiir (ein, eine, ein) ; of many — s, melerlei; adj., gut, freunblid) ; to be so — as to, fo gut fein unb. kindness, ©ute, ©iitigEeit, tfVeunblidjEeit, f. king, $onig, tn. (-e3; -e); King-street, bie ftottig* ftrafje. kingdom, $5nigreid), «. (-e3; -c). knife, 3Jieffer, n. (-3; — ). knock down, l)erunterfd)la* gen, 186. know {of acquaintance ), fens nen, 99; {of knowledge acquired by mental effort) tuiffeit, 196; — how, foits nen, 196. knowledge, $enntni3, f. C-fe), 2Biffenf(^aft,/ (-en). known, beEannt. Li. lady, Same, f. (-n); young — (Miss), $rciulein, n. (-§;-). lake, ©ee, tn. (-3 ; -en). landscape, £aubfd)aft, f. (-en). language, ©prad)e, f. (-n). lantern, £aterne, f. (-n). large, grofj (^er, grofjt). last, Ie§t, norig ; at — , enb* fid>; v ., bauern. late, fpdt. VOCABULARY, 43 I lately, neulidj, litralid). Latin, subst., Satein', n. (-§)* latter, the — , jetter. laugh, la$en> — (at), lacfjett (gen* or fiber -J- acc .) ; he — s at (makes sport of) you, er madjt fi$ fiber olat', m. (-en ; -en). lay, legett. lazy, faul, trcige. lead, 23 lei, «• (-e§). lead, v., ffil)ren. lead-pencil, 23 leiftift, m. (-e*; -e). leaf, matt, ». (-e§ ; “er), learn, lenten, learned, adj ., geleljrt. learning (action of), Semen, *• (-§)• least ; at — , t»enigften§. leave, laffeit, 188 ; — behind, desert, abandon, oerlaffen ; — out, auSlaffen. left, Unf ; be — , fibrig blei* ben. leg, 23 eitt, it. (-e§; -e). lemonade, Simottabe,./! (-n). lend, leiljen, 120. lesson, Slufgabe,./. (-it) ; Sefs tion, f (-en). let, laffen, 188. letter {0/ alphabet') , 23 ud?* ftabe, m. (-n§; -n); (epis- tle), S 3 rief, m. (-e§; -e). liar, Siigner, m. (- 5 ; — ). library, Sibliot^et',/ (-en). lie (be recumbent), liegen 181; — down, fief) tfinlegen. life, Seben, n. (-3 ; —). lighten (flash), bliijcn. lightning, SQlifc, in. (-e§;-e). like, mogett, 196-202 ; gent Ijaben, 24 ; I should — , id? mod?te (gent) ; to — to learn, gent lenten; I — music, id) bin eiu 'fttcunb non 2)iufi! ; how do you — London ? tuie gefdHt 2 $ n en Sonboit? lily, Silie, / (-n). Limburg, adj., Simbttrger. lion, Some, (-it; -it), listen to, cm£)breit ( tr .). literature, Siteratur', /. little {of size), ileilt ; {of quantity ) luenig. live, leben ; (dwell), roo^nett. living, le'benb, leben'big. locality, ©egettb, f (-en). London, Sonboit, it. (-§) ; adj., Soitboner. long, adj.. Icing (“er); adv., laitge (“r); have you been here — ? fiitb 6ie fdjon laitge l?ier ? he has not been here for a — time, er ift laitge nid?t Ejiex* geroe* fen; three months — er, nod) brei SRonate ; no — er {lit., not more), itidjt rneljr. long for, v., fid) fefjtten nad). look for, fudjen, fudjen nad?; — like, au§fel?eit (toie or tiad?), 181 ; it — s (appears, seems) like rain, e 3 fiel?t nad) Siegen au 3 ; — up, Ijinauffefjeii, 181. lose, nerlierett, 13 1. lost, oerloren. loud, — ly, laut. Louisa, Souife f. (-n§). love, v., lieben. lower, unter, nieber ( adjs .). M. magnificent, prddjtig. majesty, 9 ftajeftat', f. (-en). make, maefyen. man, 3 Rann, in. (— eS ; u er); — (human being), -Dlenfd), m. (— eit ; -en); — kind, 2Jlenfd), m . ; men (soldiers), ©olbaten ; little — , Sttann* lein, n. (-§ ; — ). manikin, 9 ftannlein, n. (-§; -). manner, SSeife; in that — , auf bie 2Beife. many, oiele; — a, — a one, manner, manege, mandjeS. March, SJlarj, tn. (-e§). Margaret, Uftargarete, f. (-nS). market, SJiarlt, m. (-e§ ; *e). marriage (-ceremony), £rau* ung ,f. (-en). married, oerf)eiratet. marry, Ijeirateit, nerljeirateit (fid? mit). marsh, < 3 utttpf f m. (-e§ ; -“e). Mary, fUtaric,/ (-it 3 ). matter, ©ad>e,j^ (-it) ; what is the — ? roa$ gicbtS ? toaS ift loS ? what is the “with you? roaS fefjlt lyljnen? May (month of), 9 ttai, m . (-e 3 or -en). may, v., bfirfett ; fonnen ; mogett, 196-202. mayor, SBfirgermeifter, H; -). me, mid) {acc.), mir {dat.). mean ; in the — time, unter* beffen ; by — s of, permit* telft; uermbge, gen., 223. mean, v., meinen; to — to, intend to, molleit, 196-202. meat, ^leifd?, it. (-e§). meet, v ., begegnen {dat. ; fein); to go to — , entge* gen ge^en (188; dat.). meeting, S 3 erfamntlung, f. (-en). mental, geiftig. merchant, $aufntanit, in . (-e§; -leute). mere, — ly, blog, merry, merrily, luftig. messenger, 93 ote, m. (-n» -n). metal, SJletaU', n. (-e 3 ; -e). microscope, SRifroffop', «. (-e§ ; -e). middle, 2RU te, _/l ; in the — 432 VOCABULARY. of summer, mitten im ©ommer. mile, 93?eile,y. (-n). milk, 9J?ild), f mine, rneiner, meine, meineg ; ber, bie, bag meine; ber, bie, bag meinige, minute, 9)?inute, f. (-n); — -hand, 2JZinutenjeiger, m. (~®» — )• misfortune, Ungliicf, n. (-e§). Miss (young lady), ^raulein, m. (-g; — ). mistake, gebler, m . (-g; -). mock, fpotten {gen. or iiber 4 * acc . ) . moisten, beneijen. moment, 5lugenblicf, m. (-e§; -e). monarch, 99?onardb / , w*.(-e n; -en). Monday, 99?ontag, m. (-g; -e). money, ©elb, n. (-eg; -er). month, 9D?onat, m. (-eg ; -e) ; a — ago, nor einem 93?o? nat. more, rnefir; nod); one nod) einer. morning, 93?orgen, m. (-eg; — ); in the — , beg 9)1 or* geng ; good—, guten 931or? gen. mostly, meifteng. mother, Gutter, f ( a ). mountain, 93 erg, m. (-eg; -e). mourning, £ratter, f. Mr., £err, m. (-n; -en). much, ciel; very — , feljr; as — , eben fo niel. music, 93? it fit', f. musician, TOu'fifer, in. (-g ; -)• must, miiffen, 196-202. my ,poss. adj mein, meine, metn {also expressed by dat. of pers. pron. -f- def art.). myself (I), (id&) felbft. N. name, subst ., 9?ame, m. (-ng; -n); nennen, v ., 99; what is the — of? trie beifjt? what is your — ? trie beifjen nergefien ( 188 , 2 , feiit) ; oerfliefjeit ( 123 ; feir) ; — through, burc^fommen ( 167 ; fein). passing, adj.y ooriibergeljen. past, nergangen, t)oriiber, norbei ; to go — the house, am $aufe uoritbergeljen, norbeigefien. patient, jlranfe, adj. subst. y m. f. pay, bejafylen {acc. of thing , dat. of Pers. \ acc. of per s. when pers. only is men- tioned) ; — attention, 2 ld)t geben; — a visit, eineit 23efud; rnadjcn {dat. of pers.) ; bcfudjen {acc. of pers.). paying (action of), SBega^Un, n. (-3). peace, ^riebe(n), m. (-n3). pear, 93irne,yi (-n). peasant, S3auer, m. (-n or -3 ; -n)l pen, fteber ,f (-n). people {pl.) y Seute, pi. {no sing.) \ — {indef), man; — say, man fagt ; — , na. ti®n, S3oIf, (-e3 ; -“er). pepper, ^3f effer, m. (-3). perfect, — ly, ganj, tiolL tommen. perhaps, rrieHeidjt 7 . permission, (5rlaubni3,yi permit, erlauben {dat. of Pers.). person, ^Serfo n' ,f. (-en). personal, perfonlid;. philosopher, ^Ijilofopfj 7 , m. (-en; -en). physician, SIrjt, m. (— e3 ; ^e). pick up, aufl;ebeit, 13 1 . picture, 33ilb, n. (-c3 ; -er); ©emalbe, n. (-3 ; — ). piece, (Stud, (-e3; -e). pigeon, Saube, f. (-n). pinch, Ineifen, 118 . pity, v.y bebauern; it is a — , e3 ift fd;abe. place, subst. y ipia§, m. (~c3; ■“e) ; Drt, m. (-e3 ; -e or ■“er) ; to take — , ftattfina ben, 144 ; in that — , ba, bajelbft, bort(cit). place, v.y ftellen, feijen. plant, ^Pflanje,^ (-it), plate, Seller, in. (-3 ; — ). play, v.y fpieleit. pleasant, attgeneljm. please, gefallcn (x88; dat.); (if you) please., (id;) bitte, menu icf) bitten barf, ges falligft. pleasure, Sergnugen, n. (-3); trip, (short) ex- cursion, 2Iu3flug, m. (-e3; ■“c) ; to take a (short) — -trip, eiiten Slusflug ma< d)cn. plum, iflflaume, f. (-it), poem, ©ebid)t ( n. (-e3 ; -c). poet, Sifter, m. (-3 ; — ). point; cardinal — (of tha compass), ^immel3gegent), f. (— en) ; to be upon the — of, im SBegriffe fein. 434 VOCABULARY. poison, subst ., ©ift, n. (-e§; -e;; v., oergiften. policeman, ^olijeibiener, m. (-§; — ); ©d)u$mann, m. (-e§; -leute). poor, arm (-er). position, ©telle, f (-n); ©tettung,/: (-en). possess, befiljen, 181. possible, moglid). post, office, ^oft, f — -man, gSoftbote, m. (-n; -n); by return — , mit umgetyenber $oft. postage-stamp, SBriefmarfe, / (-«)• postpone, anffdjieben, 13 1. pound, Spfunb, n. (-e<5). power, £raft,yi (-^e). praise, v., loben; preifeit, 120. pray, v., beten; inter j. , bitte! precise, — ly, geitau. prefer, oorjiefycn, 13 1; I — to walk, id) cjetje lieber. prepare ; to — for, fid) nor s bereiten auf ( acc .). presence, ©egemoart,./! present, adj ., gegemoartig ; for the — , fur’s Csrfie. present, subst., ©eid)en!, 11. (-eS;-e). president, ifSrafibent', m. (-en ; -en). press, v ., bringert, 144. pretty, fyiibfcb, fd)btt; adv. (tolerably), giemlid). prevent, oerljinbertt. price, ^reiS, m. (-e<3 ; -e). prince, ^iirft, m. (-en ; -en) ; ^rinj, in. (— eit ; -en). prison, ©efdngni<3, n. (-feS ; -fe). probable, probably, toafir* fd)einlid); probably, roof)!, professor, ^3rofefjor, m. (-3; -en). promise, v oerfpred()ett, 167. propose, norfcblagen, 186. proud (of), ftolj (auf -{- acc.). proverb, ©pri^nnort, m. (-e§; -er). province, ^rooinj',/1 (-en). prudent, norfid^tig. Prussia, ^reufjen, n. (-5). Prussian, subst., iflreufje, m. (-«; -n). public, bffentlid). punish, beftrafen, ftrafen. punishment, ©trafe, f. (-n). pupil, ©cfyiiler, m. (-§; — ). pure, rein. put on (coat, etc.), anjie^en, 13 ! ; (hat), aufs fe^en. Q- quality, ©igenfc^aft, f. (-en). quarrel, v., ftreiten, n8;fid) ftreiten (mit). quarter, SSiertel, «. (-5; — ■); — of ar. hour, S3iertels ftunbe,/ (-n). queen, Jlbnigiit, /! (-nen). quick, — ly, fdptell; quickly, flug§. quit, v., oerlaffen, 188. quite, gan$. K. railway-station, 33aI)nI)of, in. (-e$; -^e). rain, subst., Regen, m. (-§) ; v., regnen. raise, Ijebeit, 131. rather, cl)er, lieber. raven, Rabe, m. (-n ; -n). read, lefcn, 181 ; to — to, oorlefeit ( dat .), reading (act of), Sefen, n. (-§). ready, fertig, bereit; readily, leic^t. reason, ©rur.b, in. (-e§ ; -^e). receive (get), erljalten, 188; befommen, 167 ; — (as a host), aufnel)men, 167 , by receiving, burd) Relpncn. recover (from illness), ge* nefen (181 ; fein). red, adj., rot(-er); subst.. Rot, n. Reformation, Reformation, / (-en). refuse, intr., fief) toeigern. regard, anfeljen (x8i; fur -j- acc .); betracfyten (al§). regret ; I regret, e§ tf)Ut mit leib. reign, Rcgierung,/. (-en). relate, ergatylen. related, nertoanbt (dat. or mit). rely upon, fid) oerlaffen (188; auf -|- acc.). remain, bleiben (120; fein); — at home, — behind, jit* ritcfbleibeit; — over, ilbrig bleiben ; — standing, fteljen (186) bleiben. remarkable, merftoiirbig. remember, fid^ er in item (gen.) ; I wish to be — ed to him, id) Iaffe ifpt grit* ten. remind of, erinnern an (-f* rent, v ., oermieten. [acc.). repeat, toieber^o'leit. reply, subst., Slnttoort, f. (-en). reply, v ., anttoorteu, ertoi* bern, oerfe^en. report, v., beridljten. representation, 23orftelIung, / (-en). resemble, dtjnlidE) f ein (dat.) ; gleic^en (118; dat.). reside, tool) nen. resist, toiberfte'l)en (186; dat.). resolve, v., fidl) entfcfjlieten, 123. rest ; all the — , ade an bern ; retire to — , fi$ fc^Iafen (188) legen. VOCABULARY. return, nergelten (159); — good for evil, oergelte 93 o* fe 3 mit ©utem ; by — of post, mit umgebenber $oft, umgeljenb. reward, subst., fioljn, tn. (-e 9 ). rheumatism, 9 il)eumati 3 mu 3 , tn. (be 3 — ). ribbon, 33 anb, n. (— c 3 ; “er). rich (in), reidb (an -f~ dat.). rid, lo 3 ; to get — of, lo 3 roerben (-j-gen. or acc.). ride, reiten(n8); ( in a con- veyance), faljren (186). riding (act of ; not in a con- veyance), Steitcn, n. (- 3 ). right {adj.), red)t, (correct), ricfjtig; in the — way, auf bie ridjtige ©eife; subst ., 9 ied)t, n. (-e 3 ; -c) ; to be (in the) — , 9led)t baben. righteous, geredjt ; the — (man), ber ©ered)te. ling, subst., 9 ling, tn. (— c§ ; -e); — , v., lauten (of a large bell), flingelu (of a small bell) ; there is a — at the door, e 3 flmgelt. ripe, re if. rise (get up), aufftcfjen, (186 ; fein); (ascend), auffteigen (120; fein). river, fttufj, tn. (-e 3 ; a e). road, ©eg, in. (-e 3 ; -e); ©trafje,/; (-n). Roman, Corner, tn. (- 5 ; — •). room (apartment), ©tube, f. (-n) ; 3 immer, ».(- 3 ; — ). rose, 9tofe, f. (-n). row, v., rubern. run, laufen (188; fein); — after, nadjtaufen (i* 63 ; fein; dat.); — away, b as non'laitfen. Russia, SHufetanb, n. (- 3 ). Russian, subst., 9 hlffe, tn. <-n; -n). S. sad, traurig. safe, fitter. sailing-ship, ©egelfdjiff, n. (-e 3 ; -e). sale; for — , ju uerfaufen. same, adj. and pron., ber, bie, ba 3 felbe; ber, bie, baSjelbige; ber, bie, ba 3 namlidje; at the — time, ju gleidjer 3 e ' t i the—, one and the — , eiiterlei. Sarah, 6ar a,/. (- 3 ). satisfied, jufrieben. Saturday, ©onnabenb, tn. (-e 3 ;-e); ©am 3 tag, tn. (-e 3 ; -e). save, rettcn ; I — d his life, id) rettete itym ba 3 Seben. say, fngen; to hear — , fa gen Ijoren; (assert, claim to be), rooUen (196-202); to be said, follett (196-202). scholar (pupil), ©djiiler, in. H; -)• school, ©d)ule,/!(-n); — boy, ©djuler, tn. (- 3 ; — ). scold, fdjelten, 159. Scotland, ©djottlanb, n. (- 3 ). scream, fdjreiett, 120. search (for), fudjen. seat one’s self, sit down, fid) fefcen. second, num. adj., jmeite. second (of time), subst , ©es cunbe, f. (-n). secret, — ly, gel)eim, ^eim? lid). see, fefjcn, 181. seek, fitd)en. seem, fdjeinen, 120. self, felbft. sell, nerfanfen. send, fdjidcn; — to, ju? fcbiden; — word to, be? uadjridjtigen (acc.of pers.)\ — for, boleit laffen (188), fd&icfen na$. 43 s September, September, in. (-§). servant, ©iener, tn. (- 3 ; — ); 3)ienftbote, tn. (-n; -n);aRagb,/.(*e). serve, bienen {dat.) ; — (of a meal), feruieren. set, tr. (of a time-piece), ftels len ; intr. (of the sun), un'» tergeljen (188; fein); — free, befreien. settler, Stnfiebler, tn. (- 3 ; seven, fieben. several, einige; etlidje; mcljrere. shake, fdjiitteln. shall, foUen (196-202). she, ftc. shield, ©d)ilb, tn. (-e 3 ; -e). ship, ©d)iff, n. (— e 3 ; -e). shoe, ©d)uf), tn. (-e 3 ; -e). shoemaker, ©djufter, tn. (- 3 ; — ); ©d;uljmacf)er, tn. (- 3 ; -)• shoot, fdjiefjen, 123. shop, Saben, tn. (- 3 ; “). shore, Ufer, n. (- 3 ; — ). short, fur j ; — ly, ndd)ften 3 . shout, fctyreien, 120. show, j eigen. shutter, Saben, tn. (- 3 ; — •). shy, intr. (of horses), fcfjeu roerben, 159. sick, frattf; the — (man), ber Jirnnfe. side, ©cite, f. (-n) ; on this — oi,prep., bie 3 feit (£■*«.; 223) ; on that — of, prej., jenfei t{gen. ; 223); on this — , adv. } bie 3 feit 3 ; on that — , adv., jenfeit 3 . sign, subst., 3 eid)en, n. (- 3 ; — ); v., unterjeid/nen. silence, ©d)ioeigen, n. (- 3 ). silent, fturnm. silly, einf ditig. silver, ©ilber, n. (- 3 ). since (241, 12), prep., feit. 43 ^ VOCABULARY. da/., 46; adv., feitbem; conj ., ba. sing, fingen, 144. singer, ©angering (-nen). single, einjig. sink, finfen, 144. sister, ©djioefter,./! (-n). sit, fitjen (181 ; feirt) ; — down, fid^ fe^en; — up, remain up, aufbleiben, 120. six, fecf)3. skate, v., ©eij). T. table, £ifcfj, m. (~e3; -e) tailor, ©djneiber, m. (-3; — ). take, nefjmen, 167; — a walk, VOCABULARY. 437 etnen ©pagiergang m as djen; fpagieren gel)en, 188; — a voyage, eine ©eereije madden; — up, (bin)aufs nel)men; — care, fid) in 2Id)t nebmen ; — place, ftattfinben, 144; — cold, fid) crfaltcn. talk, fpred)en (167; mil). tall, grofj (— er, superl. grbfjt). tea, Xfyet, m. (-3). teacher, Sefyrer, m. (-§ ; — ). tear (to pieces), gerreifjen, 1 18. telegram, subst., 3^epefd^e,_/I (-«). tell, fagen (dat. of Per s. or gu) ; crgaf)Icn {dot. of per si). teller, ©rgabler, m. (-§; — ). tempest, ©turm, m. (-e§ ; *e). ten, 3el)n. terrible, — ly, fiird^tcrlid^. than, a 15 ; al§ bafj. thank, banfen (dat.); no — you, id) banfe (^bnen). that, demonstr. adj., biefer, biefe, biefeS; fener, jene, jene§; rel. pron ., ber, bie, ba§; welder, meldbe, tueld)e5 ; demonstr. pron., ber, bie, ba§; conj., bafj. the, ber, bie, ba 5 ; adv., je, befto; um fo. their, i$r, il)re, ibr. them ( acc .), fie; (dat.) if)nett. then, bann; since — , feits bent. there, ba ; — is, — are, e§ ift, e 5 finb; e 3 giebt, 220. therefore, barunt. thereupon, barauf. they, fie, e 3 ; ( indef. ), man. thief, 2>ieb, m. (-e 3 ; -e). thin, biinn. think, benfen, 99, 2; — of, benfrn, gen. or an -f- acc . ; (believe), glaubeit; I should i — so, id; foUte e§ meinen; — highly of, esteem, etc., riel f)alten (188) non. third, britte. thirst, £)urft, m. (-e§). thirsty, burftig ; to be — , SDurft tyaben. thirty, breifjig. this, adj. and pron., biefer, biefe, biefe£. those, biefenigen; bie; jene. though, obgleid;. thousand, taufenb ; subst., £aufeub, «. (-e5; -e). three, brei. through, burd), acc. ; 34. throw, m erf en, 159; fd)mei* fjen, 1 18; — away, megs merfen. thunder-storm, ©emitter, n. (-« ; -)• Thursday, 2 )onner 3 tag, m. (-e§; -e). tie, binben, 144. till, bi§, 34. time, Beit, /• (~ en )» (occa- sion), 2JiaI, n. (-e§; -e); what — is it? mie riel Utjr ift e5? for the third — , gum britten 2JlaIe; at the right — , redjtgeitig ; at the same — , gu glei<$er £eit. tired, miibe. title, £itel, m. (-5 ; — ). to, 233, gu (dat. ; 46) ; (with names of places) nad) (dat.] 46); an, auf, in (acc. ; 65, 233, 2); — the concert, in§ £ongert; (before inf) gu, 272-274; (of purpose ) tint 8»/ 273. to-day, §eute. to-morrow, morgen; — mor- ning, morgen friil). too, gu; (also), aud). top, ©ipfel, m. (-5; — ). tortoise, © djilbfr cte, f (-n). towards, gegen (acc. ; 34). town, ©tabt,./! (-“e); — hall, fRatl)au§, n. (-e 5 ; ^er). tragedy, £rauerfpiel, n. (-e§; -e); £ragobie, f (-n). train (on a railway), 3 U 9/ (— eS ; -“e); Boston — , ber Bug non (nad)) 23 ofton. translate, iiberfe^'en. transparent, burcb'ficbtig. travel, reifeit (baben, fein). traveller, SReifenbe, adj . subst. treasure, ©d )a$, m. (-e§; -“e). treaty, SSertrag, m. (-e5 ; *e). tree, 23aunt, m. (-e5; -“e) ; little — , 35aumd;en, n. (-5; triumph, Eriumpb', m. (-e3; -e). true, mabr ; (faithful), treu (dat.). trunk (of a tree), 23 aunt* ftamm, m. (-e§; -^e). trust, v., trauen (dat.). truth, SBabr^eit, f (-en). try, uerfudien. Tuesday, $>ien§tag, m. (-e 3 ; -e). two, gmei; beibe; — at a time, je gmei ; — and a half, brittebalb. U. umbrella, fRegenfd)irm, m. (-e§; -e). uncle, Dbeirn, m. (-e§ ; -e); Dnfel, m. (-§; — ). under, unter (dat. or acc . ; 65). understand, begreifen, 118 ; nerftcben, 186; to make one’s self understood, fid) nerftiinblid) tnadjen. undertaking, Unterneb'men, «.(-§). unfortunate, Uttglttcflid) ; — ly, Iciber. unhindered, ungebinbert. 433 VOCABULARY. United States (The), bie SSer* einigten ©taaten. university, Itnioerfitat', f. (-C1T). until, conj ., bi§ (bab). untruth, Unraabrbeit,_/l(-en). upon, ctttf ( dat . or acc. ; 65); upper, ober. up -stairs, oben, nadb oben, binauf. use ; of no — , un'rtiiij. useful, niiijlid;; the — , ba§ Sftuijlicbe. utmost, moglid;ft. V. vainly, in vain, nergeblicb; oergeben§. valley, £b a */ »• (-e 3 ; *er). venture, v., raagen. verse, 33 er§, m. (-e§; -e). very, f eE)r ; recbt; — much, fef>r. vex, argent; be — ed (at), fid; argent (uber + acc.). victory, ie, bag beine, beittige ; eurer ; beiner ; $f>rer. youth (time of), ^ugenb, f . ; (young man), bungling, m» (-eg; -e). INDEX *#* The references are to the sections and subsections; N. = Note ; R. = Remark ; O. = Observation; p. = page. Abbreviations, p. 404. cbcr, conj., 236. Ablaut, 105, R., 110. ‘ About/ how rendered in Germ., 226. Absolute accusative, 255; ab- solute superlative, of adjs., 127,2; of advs., 190, 4-6. Abstract substs., take article, 44, 1 (b); plural of, 66, 3; App. H. Accentuation, p. 10 ; in com- pound verbs, 117, 3, 204, 205, 3, 208, 209, 212; of compound adv. prefixes, 206, 2, N. 1. Accusative, use of, 3, 252- 255; place of, 296, 4; af- ter preps., 34, 50, 65, 223, 19, R. 2 ; expresses time, 184,1 ; measure,185, 4 ; after reflexive verbs, 216; after impers. verbs, 217, 2, (a), 219, 220; after adjs., replacing gen., 244, R. 1, 2; double acc., 253; after intrans. verbs, 254; cognate acc., 254, 1; ad- verbial acc., 255; absolute acc., 255, 2; before advs. of direction, 224, 1. Address, modes of, 40, 43, 47. Adjects, place of, 296, 1, 297, R. 1. Adjectives, when spelt with a capital, pp. 11, 12; predi- cative, not declined, 14, 100 ; place of, 18, 20, O. 3, 295, 296, 8 ; attributive, decl. of, 101; strong, 102, weak, 115, mixed, 116, ta- ble, 121, general remarks, 122 ; place of, 290, (b), N. 2, 298, 1, 299; in- declinable in ser, 122, 9; as advs., 122, 8 ; of colour, 122, 3; in sel, sett, ser, 122, 6 ; a succession of, 122, 5 ; after pers. prons., 122, 10; after indef. prons. and numerals, 122,11, 32; after tnelcf)e, 122,13; used as substs., 122, 2; compa- rison of, 125-127 ; without Umlaut, App. L. ; incapa- ble of comparison, 161, N. ; adjs. used as attri- butes only, 160 ; as predi- cates only, 161; as pre- fixes to verbs, 206, 4, 212 ; governing gen. and acc., 244, dative, 251; preps., 281; possessive adjs., 43, 44, G, {a)\ interrogative, 84- 83 ; appositive adj., 280 ; concord, 288 ; derivation, by suffixes, 313; by pre- fixes, 316 ; composition, 320. Adverbial clauses, 306. Adverbial conjunctions, co- ordinating, 237 ; throw the subject after the verb, R. 1. unless otherwise specified; Adverbial expressions, place of, 45, 297. Adverbs, 187 ; place of, 45, 297 ; formation, 182, ( a ), 183, ( c ), 189 ; compari- son, 128, 180 ; numeral adverbs, 182, 183; idio- matic uses of certain ad- verbs, 195 ; advs. with an accusative, 224, 1; with preps., 224, 3, 4. sage, substs. in, gender, 89, 2 , (*). Agent, with passive, 112, R. 3. sal, foreign substs. in, de- clension, 22, 6. ‘all ’ expressed by ganj, 170, 1; ‘at all/ 157. affeirt, conj., 236, 241, 1. after, -e, -e§, 169; afters be- fore superlatives, 127, 1, N. ; allc$ of a number of persons or things, 162, 2; before adjs., 122, 12. Alphabet, German, pp. 1, 5 i3- al§, conj., 239, 3 (3); after a comparative, 126, 1 ; dis- tinguished from menn and rcann, 58, 241, G, 8 ; ‘but/ 241, 19; al§ clause replaces Engl. part, of time, 284, 1, (a) ; introducing an apposition, 289, 6 ; wdth comparative clauses, 303, R. 4. INDEX. 441 «I§ bafj, after adjs. with ju, 273, N. al§ ob, al£ roenn, 239, 3, (3), and R. 4. ant, before a super!., 127, 1, (3), 128, 190, 3. an, prep., 65 ; expresses date, 184, 2, (, a ); of loca- lity, 227, (a), 2, 232, (c), 2, 233, (c) t 2; of cause, with diseases, 231, (c ) ; with names of battles, 231, • ( d ), 2 ; after verbs and adjs., 244, 245, 1, 291, 6, 8, 9, 12. •an, foreign substs. in, de- clension, 22, 6. anber, ordinal numeral, 166, 1, N. ; anberfeitS, 238 ; anbertljalb, 183, (b), R. 2. angeft$t§, 223, 20. anftatt, 223, 14; governing an infin. or bafj clause, 276. ‘any,’ how rendered in Ger- man, 2, 2, 157, 180. Apposition, appositive sub- stantive, 289 ; participle, 280, (£), 281, R. 3; ad- jective or participle, 290; clauses, 304. •ar, foreign substs. in, de- clension, 22, 6. Article, not used before words in partitive sense, 2, 2 ; de- finite, declension, 4; agree- ment, 5, 1; repetition of, 5,2; use, 44 ; contraction with preps., 34, R., 46, R. 1, p. 83, O., 65, R. ; with proper names, 44, 2, 3, 73, 76, 2, 5, 78; for poss. adj., 44, 6. Article, indefinite, declen- sion, 9; use, 44, 4, 5. Aryan languages, 322, 2, 3. 1 as,’ how rendered in Germ., 162, 4, 241, 8-11. Associatives, how formed, 315, 2, (b). •aft, foreign substs. in, de- clension, 22, 6. sat, foreign substs. in, declen- sion, 22, 2, 6. * at/ of time of day, 184, 3, ( c ); how rendered in Germ. , 227; after verbs, etc., 291, 1. * at all *; see * all.* Attributive adj., see Adjec- tive. audj, adv., after rel. prons., 96, 6, idiomatic use of, 195, 9; conj., 236, 237, R. 2, 238. auf, prep., 65 ; with abs. superl. of advs., 190,6; of locality, 227, (a), 3, 230, (a), 232, (c), 233, (c), 2; of future time, 229, (b), 2 ; after adjs. and verbs, 245, 1, 291, 2, 7, 10 ; after reflexive verbs, 215, 1, (b). auf b at, 239, 3, (6), 268, 3. au§, prep., 46 ; of cause, 229, (c). aufjen, adv., 189, 3; com- parison, 130. aujjer, prep., 46. aufjerljalb, 223, 3. iiufjerft, with absolute superl., 127, 2, 190, 4. Auxiliary is verb in com- pound tenses, 26, 32. Auxiliary verbs of mood, see * Modal Auxiliaries.* Auxiliary verbs of tense, 25, 53; place of, with Modal Auxiliaries, 199, 3; omitted in dependent clauses, 287. balb, comparison of, 190; balb . . . balb, 238. •bar, suffix of adjs., 313, 1. ‘be,* with p. part., how ren- dered in Germ., 112, R. 5. bes, insep. prefix, 85, R. 6, 204 ; meaning of, S14, 1. bei, prep., 46; = ‘with,* 1 about,’ 226, (d ) ; of time, 227, ( b ), 3; idioms, 228, 0 b ), (c), 232, (d)\ of bat. ties, 231, ( d ), 1. beibe, beibe§, 165, 3. beifcen Model, 118. beoor, 241, 13, 14. btnnctt, 51, 1. bi§, prep., 34, 60,4; conj., 239, 3, (b). bleiben Model, 120. 93Iume Model, 66. ‘both . . . and,* 238. ‘but,* rendered by al§, 241, 19. ‘by,* with passive, 112, R. 3 ; how rendered in Germ., 228. Capitals, use of, p. 11 ; 122, 2, 9, N., 11, O. Calling, verbs of, 242, 3, 253; with p. part., 281, 6. Cardinal numerals, 163,165 ; gender as substs., 80, 2, (c), 165, 10. Cases, use of, 8 ; syntax of, 242-255; place of, 296. Cause, adverbial expressions of, 284, 1, 0 b ), 306, R. 2 ; their place in a sentence, 45, Rule 5. •djen, substs. in, declension, 16, 17 ; gender, 89, 3, {a) ; subst. suffix, 312, 2; pro- duces Umlaut, 326, R. 2, (c). Choosing, verbs of, 242, 3, N., 253. Clauses, conditional, 59, 267, 293, (a), 3; proportional, see ‘Comparative clauses/ below; dependent, preced- ing principal, 293, ( b ), R. 4, 294, (b), R. 2, 306; with bemt, 241, 18, 298, (c), R. \ ; incomplete or elliptical, 299 ; order of clauses, 302-306; apposi- 29 442 INDEX, tive, 304; relative, 305; subjective, objective, ad- verbial, 306. Cognate accusative, 254, 1. Collectives, declension of those with prefix ©es, 16, 17, 2 ; gender, 89, 3, ( d ) ; concord of with verb, 285, R. 4; formation, 315, 2, («). Colour, adjs. of, used as substs., 122, 3L Comma, before dependent sentences, 98, 3, N., 301, N. 5 ; before infin. clauses, 273, R. 2. Comparative degree, 125, 126; declension of, 126, 5. Comparative clauses, with befto, etc., 126, 4, 293, (3), R. 4, N. 3 ; 306, R. 4 and N. Comparison, of adjs,, 125- 130; of equality, 126, 3, 241, 8; irregular, 129; de- fective, 130 ; of aavs., 128, 190 ; adjs. incapable of, 161, N. Compass, points of, p. 104, top; gender, 80, 1, (c). Complex sentences, 302- 306. Composition of words, 318,- 321; of numerals, 165, 5-7, 182, 183; of Verbs, 203-213 ; of substs., 3X9 ; of adjs., 320 ; of advs., 321. Compounds, accentuation of, p. 11 how formed, 318r- 321 ; primary and secon- dary, 319, 1, N. 1, 2 ; spu- rious,. 319, 2, N. Compound substantives, of irregular declension, 68 ; of irregular gender, 90, 4, App. I., p. 388 ; how formed, 319. Compound tenses, formation. 25, 108 ; construction, 26, 33. Compound sentences, 302. Compound verbs, 203-213, separable, 109, 117, 205- 207 ; inseparable, 35, R. 6, 109, 204; compounded with substs., 206, 3; with adjs., 206, 4, 212; sepa- rable and inseparable, 208; with double prefixes, 207, 213 ; with lttifj*, 209 ; with fier* and f;ius, 210 ; from compound substs., 211. Concord, of Subject and Verb, 285; other concords, 288. Conditional clauses, 59, 239, R. 1, 2, 4, 267, 283, ( a) r 3, {]))> R. 4, N. 1, 2; ellip- tical, 268, 2, N., 293, (c) } , R. 2 ; use of fo in, 59, N. ; 293, (£), R. 4, N. 2. Conditional conjunctions, 59, 239, R. 1, 2, 4. Conditional mood, formation of tenses ©f, 25, 2, 3; shorter forms. 111, 112, R. 1 ; in Modal Auxilia- ries, 199, 4 ; use, 263, 267 * Conjugation of verbs ; see “ Verbs,” “Modal Auxili- aries. w Conjunctions, 235-241 ; co- ordinating, proper, 236 ; not counted, 293, (b) } R. 2; adverbial, 237, 293, (£), R.2 ; correlative, 238 *, place of, 298, 3. Conjunctive Mood, see “ Subjunctive.” Considering, verbs of, 242, 3, 253. Consonants, pronunciation,, p. 9, top; digraphs and trigraphs, pp. 5, 8, 14; doubling of, in verbs, 118, R. 1, 123, R. 1, 167, A., R.2, 181*0.6. Construction of Sentences, 292-306 ; principal, 20, 26, 293, (3), 294, (3), 285, 2, 297, R. 1, 2; de- pendent, 32, 33, 293, (c), 294, (^,295, 2,297, R. 2, 306; direct interrog., 23, 293,(^,1,294 ,(*), 285, 2, 300; indirect statements, 87, 283, (c), R. 1 ; indirect questions, 88 ; relative sentences, 98, 305 ; im- perative, 293, (a), 2 ; of clauses with berm, 293, ( 20; with preps., representing an in- fin. or bafj clause, 277 ; re- places Engl. part, of time and cause, 284. batmt,, conj., expresses pur« pose, 239, 3, ( b\ 268, 3. INDEX, 443 ba§ before the verb fein, 141; of a number of persons or things, 162, 2. baft, conj., omitted, 87, 3, 241,3, 13, 266, R. 2; use, 239, (3), 241, 3; express- ing purpose, 268, 3. baft clauses governed by preps , 224, 2, {a)] for in- fin., 272, R. 1, 275, 276, R. 2, 277. Date, how expressed, 184, 2 , (*). Dative, use of, 3, 248; place of, 296, 4 ; ethical dat., 249; dat. after verbs, 250 ; after adjs., 251 ; after preps., 46, 61, 65, 223 ; after reflexive verbs, 210, 2 ; after impersonal verbs, 217, 2, (3), 219, 1; after fein and tuerben, 217, 2, ( c ) ; after interjections, 240, 4, 0). baudjten, see beudjteu, bun* fen. *be, subst. suffix, 312, 1. Declension ; see “ Substan- tives,” “Adjectives,” “Pro- nouns,” “Numerals.” Definite Article; see “Arti- cle.” Degrees of comparison; see “Comparison.” bent after fein, 250, ( e ), 268, C. Demonstrative pronouns; see “ Pronouns.” benn, conj., 236; adv. conj., 237, 239, 241, 7, 18, 293, (c), R.4. bennod), adv. conj., 237, Dependent sentences ; see “ Construction,” “ Sen- tences.” Dependent questions ; see “ Construction,” “ Sen- tences,” “ Indirect ques- tions.” ber, bie, ba§; see “Article, definite”; demonst. pron., 132, 133, 135, 2 , 140, 1 , (*), (3), 142, 143, 1, 2; after trier, 162 \ relative pron., declension, 93 ; use, 95, 140, 2 ; replaced by mo before preps., 95, 2 ; used for roer, 306, R. 3, N. berglei<$en, rel. pron., 97 ; demonstr. pron., 132, 139, 2. berett, gen. pi. of demonstr. pron., when used, 133, 2, N. Derivation, 307-317 ; of nu- merals, 1S2, 183 ; of advs., 189; see also “Adjective,” etc. berjenige, 132, 135, 140, 1, (3). bero, 49. berfelfc(tg)e, 132, 136 ; re- places poss. adjs. and pers. prons., 143, 2-4. beSgleicfien, rel. pron., 97; demonst. pron., 139, 1; adv., 139, 1, N. beffen, used for gen. of met* d)er, 95, 1, (a); precedes its case, 95, 3; of neut. pers. pron., 143, 1; for poss. adj., 143, 2. beffemntgeadjtet, adv. conj., 237, 241,21. befto, 126, 4, 237, 241, 2, 293, (3), R. 4, N. 3 . beud;ten, 99, 2. biefer Model, 6. biefer, declension, 6; use, 132, 134, 140, 1, (a), 141 ; replaces pers. prons., 143, 3. oieSfeit^), 223, 12, R. Digraphs, consonantal, pp. 4, 8 , 14. Diminutives, gender, 89, 3, (a); formation, 812, 2; origin, 826, R. 2, (c). Diphthongs, pp. 4, 6, 14. I Direct objects, clause or neut. pron. as, 250, R. 2; infin. as, 272, R. 2; see also “Accusative,” “ Cases,” “ Object.” Direct questions; see also “ Questions,” “ Interroga- tive Sentences.” Direction, expressed by ftin* and fjers before verbs, 210; with an accusative, 224, 1. Distance, measure of, 185, 4. bod), adv., idiomatic use, 195, 8 ; adv. conj. , throws subj. after verb, 237, R. 3, 293, (3), R. 3 ; in questions, 300, 2, N. 1. 2)orf Model, 36, 37 ; origin of Umlaut in, 326, R. 2,(3). Double Accusative, 253. “ Gender, 91 ; App. J. " Plurals, 64 ; App. G.* “ Prefixes, 207, 210, 213. M Vowels, pp. 4, 6, 14; do not take Um- laut, p. 12. brei, declension, 165, 2. biinfen, 99, 2. burdj, prep., 34 ; prefix, 208. biirfen, conjugation of, 196- 199; use, 200, 1. e, in conjugation of verbs, 31, R. 1, 35, R. 2-4, 107, R. 1; in imperative, etc., 167, B., R. 3, 181, O. 4; in subjunctive, 31, R. 2, 107, O. 3 ; in dat. of substs., 21, (a), O. 4, 46, R. 2; in adjs., 102, R. 2, 122, 6, 125, R. 5, 0, 126, 5; in poss. adjs., 43, R. 2; in poss. prons., 119, (a) Obs., ( c\ N. 1; re- presents Umlaut of a, 326, R. 3. *1, adjs. in, declension, 102, 444 INDEX, R. 2 ; comparison, 125, R. 6. *e, substs. in, declension, 54, 57, 1, 61; gender, 89, 2, (c); subst. suffix, 312, 4. ebeit, 195, 2. ebenfo, 237, 241, 8. elje, con]., 241, 13, 14; com- parison, 130. *ei, substs. in, gender, 89, 2, {a)\ subst. suffix, 312, 5. tilt, see “Article, Indefi- nite.” tin, numeral, 163,165, 1; with def. art., 165, 1, (c), rinanber, 42, 2. [and N. einer, indef . pron. ,145, 150 ; cardinal numeral, 163, 165, 1, (b). einerlei, 182, (c), N. etnerfeitS, 238. eir.ige, einigeS, etlid&e, ttlu dje§, indef. pron., 145, 152; numeral, 168, 173, 180 ; before adjs., 122, 12. eimnal, 182, (a), N. 2, 3. CinS in counting, 165, 1, ( d ). einft, 182, (a), N. 2 ; 187, 1, w- •el, substs. in, declension, 16, 17 J ferns, in, 57, R. 2; gender, 89, 1, (a)> App. I.; adjs. in, declension, 122, 6; comparison, 125, R. 6 ; subst. suffix, 312, 6. *el, verb-stems in, drop e, 35, R. 4. #elcf;en, diminutive suffix, 812, 2, N. 2 . Elliptical constructions, 59, 239, R. 2, 4, 266, N. 4, 267, 6, N., 268, 2, N., 269, R. 6, 278, 293, (3), R. 4, N. 2 , 299. *eln, verbs in, conjugation, 85,'R.4; formation, 311,1. ftm, substs. in, declension, 16, 17, 69, 1 ; gender, 89, > <*)• - etnp«, insep. prefix, 35, R. 6, 204; meaning, 314, 2. ?en, substs. in, declension, 16, 17 ; gender, 89, 1, ( a ), App. I.; adjs. in, declen- sion, 122, 6 ; comparison, 125, R. 6 ; not used as predicates, 160; ad vs. in, 189, 3; subst. suffix, 312, 7; adj. suffix, 813, 2. sen for se§ in gen. sing, of adjs., 102, R. 1. senb, substs. in, gender, 89, 2, (3); subst. suffix, 312, 18. Endings of weak verbs in simple tenses, 35 ; of strong do., 107 ; of substs., 70; of adjs., 121. English, its relations to Ger- man, 322. Enlarged form of strong de- clension, 70, 4. sen§, termination of advs., 183, (c),189, 1, (d), 190, 7. ents, insep. prefix, 35, R. 6, 204 ; meaning, 314, 2. entgegen, 51, 2. entlang, 223, 19, R. 2. entroeber . . . ober, 238, 285, R. 6, N. 1 . senj, foreign substs. in, gen- der, 89, 2, (e). er*, insep. prefix, 35, R. 6, 204; meaning, 314, 3. *er, substs. in, declension; 16, 17 ; ferns, in, 67, R. 2, gender, 89, 1, (a), App. I. ; adjs. in, declension, 122, 6; comparison, 125, R. 6, 126, N. ; subst. suffix, 312, 8. ser, verb-stems in, drop C, 85, R. 4. *er, Plural ending, 36; ori- gin, 326, R. 2, (b). *erei, subst. suffix, 312, 5, N. 2 . •ent, Adjs. in, not used as predicates, 160; adj. suf- fix, 313, 2. ?ern, Verbs in, conjugation, 35, R. 4; formation, 311,2. erft, adv., idiomatic use, 195, 4. erftenS, adv., distinguished from juerft, 195, 5, N. ©rjs, subst. prefix, 315, 1. e3, neut. pron., uses of, 39; omission of, 118, 2, N. ; for a number of persons or things, 162, 2 ; as subject of impersonal verbs, 217, 220, 2, R. 2, N.; after adjs. governing gen., 244, R. 1; representing a fol- lowing infin., 272, R. 2. e§ giebt, e§ ift, etc., 220. effen Model, 181. Ethical dative, 249. ctlic^e ; -eS, see einigc. etnm, 187, III., 226, (c). etnmS, indef. pron., 145, 149 ; indef. numeral, 168, 177 ; before adjs., 122, 11. * even/ rendered by felbfi, 42, 3, R. * ever,’ after rel. prons., 96, 6. Exclamatory clauses, 269, R. 6, 293, (b), R. 3, 300, N.2. ssfacfj, sfcilttg, form multiple cative numerals, 182, ( b ). fallen Model, 188. faU§, subord. conj., 239, 3, (*)• *faltig; see *fa$. Factitive accusative, 253. Factitive predicate, 253, 254, 3. Family names, 74, 76,4, 6 . fecfyten Model, 124. ‘few,’ how rendered inGer., 145, 152, 168, 173, 175. ‘for/ how rendered in Ger., 229; after verbs, substs. and adjs., 291, 2-4. INDEX. 445 Foreign substs., accentua- tion, p. io, bottom ; de- clension, 22, 6, 37, 4, App. D., 57, 5, 63, 3, 77 ; gender, 89, 2, ( e ). Fractional numbers, 183, (a) t (4 freilidj, 187, IV. ; does not count as a member of a sentence, 293, (3), R. 2, N. Frequentatives, how formed, 315, 2, (c). frieren Model, 131. ‘from,’ after verbs, 291, 5. fur, prep., 34; not used of purpose, 229, (a ) ; after verbs of considering, 253. Future Tense, how formed, 25,2; use, 261; replaced by present, 257, 5. Future-perfect Tense, how formed, 25, 3; use, 262; replaced by perfect, 259, 4. ganj, indef. numeral, 168, 170. ges, prefix of p. part., 30 *, when omitted, 35, R. 6, 6, 109, 112, R. 2, 204 ; of verbs, 35, R. 6, 204, 314, 4 ; with sep. verbs, 117,2, 205,2; with mips, 209; of substs., 315, 2 ; of adjs., 316 ; declension of substs. beginning with ges, 16, 17, 2, 36, 37, 3; gender, 89, 3, (J). gegen, prep., 34. gegeniiber, 61, 4. geljen with infin., 271, (r). gemafc, 51, 5. gen, 50, 2. Gender of substs. , according to meaning, 80, and form, 89; of compound substs., 90, 4, App. I., p. 3 83 ; double gender, 91, App. J. ; general remarks on, 90 ; exceptional gender, App. I. Genitive, use of, 3, 243 ; af- ter adjs., 244 ; after verbs, 245 ; adverbial, of time and manner, 184, 2, (b), 189,2, 246; of place, 246; after reflexive verbs, 215, 216 ; after impers. verbs, 219, 2, (a)\ after interjec- tions, 240, 4, (a): after preps., 222, 223 ; ur.in- flected appositive genitive, 289, 3, N. 2 ; position of in a sentence, 296, 4-7. genug, indef. num. and adv., 168, 178 ; followed by inf., 273, 3. German language, its rela- tions to English, 322 ; his- torical sketch, 322-326. Germanic languages, 322, 323; diagram of, p. 376. gern, comparison of, 190, 1; idiomatic use of, 195, 3. Gerunds, or infin. in -ing, not to be confounded with pres, part., 277, R. 3, 4, 6. Gerundive, 282. glauben, infin. after, 275, gleid), prep., 51, 6. [R. 3. *glei<$en, 48, 97, 139. ©raf Model, 55. Grimm’s Law, 325. grofj, comparison, 125, 5. ©runbfpradje, 322. gut, comparison, 129; as adv., 195, 10, N., 293, (b), R. 2, N. mute before consonants, after vowels and after t, p. 9; when rejected after t, p. 12. Ijaben, conjugation, 24 ; use, 25; with infin., 271, ( b ), and R. 1, 272, R. 2 ; omis- sion of in dependent sen- tences, 287, 293, (4 R. 5. *ljaft, suffix of adjs., 313, 3. J)alb, numeral, 183, ( a ), N. 2 , ( 3 ). ^alb(en), father, prep., 222, 223, 1. * half,’ how rendered in Ger., 183, (*), N. 2 J (4 half-hours, 184, 3, {a). Ijeifjen with in fin., 271, (oI)l, 239, R. 3, 4. Object, direct, see “Accusa- tive”; indirect, see “Da- tive '* ; remote, with reflex- ive verbs, 216. Objects, place of, 45, 296, 297, R. 1, 2. Objective clause before the verb, 306. Objective genitive, 243, 3. ober, 236, 238. 1 ‘of,’ how rendered in Germ., I 8, 46, R. 3 ; 231 ; omitted before infin. clauses, 277, R. 1; after verbs, etc., 291, 8-11. of)ne, prep., 34; governing infin. or bajj clause, 224, 2, (*), 276. o^nebem, 50, 3. D$r Model, 62, 63. Old High German, 324, 1. son, foreign mascs. in, de- clension, 22, 6. ‘ on,’ how rendered in Germ., 232 ; after verbs, etc., 291, 7. ‘one,’ rendered by e§, 39, R. 3; indef. pron., 145, 146, 150; not expressed after adjs., 122, 4. sor, foreign substs. in," de- clension, 22, 6, 63, 3. Ordinal numerals, 164, 166. Origin, genitive of, 243, 1. Orthography, p. n ; recent changes in, p. 12. paar (cin), indef. numeral, 173, 3, N. Participial constructions, English, how rendered in Germ., 284; English pres, part, after ‘ come,’ 281, R. 5; not to be confounded with inf. in -ing, or ge- rund, 277, R. 3. Participle, past, how formed, in weak verbs, 30; in strong, 105 ; of Modal Auxiliaries, 199, 2. Participles, place of, 26, 33, 283, 4, 295, 1, 3, and N., 298, 299 ; endings, 30, 35; used as adjectives, 122, 1; as substs., 122,2; comparison of, 125, 4 ; iso- lated strong, 194, N. ; use of, 279-284; present part., 280 ; not used with ‘ to be,’ 31, R, 3; past, 281; with INDEX. 449 Imperative force, 269, R. 5; fut. pass, part., or gerund- ive, 282 ; general remarks, 283; no perfect part, in Germ., 284, R. 1; apposi- tive participles, 280, (3), 281, R. 3, 283, 3, 290. Partitive genitive, 243, 6. Partitive sense, words used in, take no art., 2, 2. Passive voice, 112-114; pa- radigm, 112 ; agent with, R. 3; limitations of, 113; substitutes for, 114; pass- ive of transitive verbs, 113, 1 ; of intransitive verbs, 113, 2. Past participle, see “ Parti- ciples.” . ‘people/ indef. pron., 145, 146. Periphrastic forms of conju- gation, English, 31, R. 3. Perfect participle, none in Germ., 284, R. 1. Perfect tense, formation, 25, 1 ; use, 259 ; replaced by present, 257, 4. Personal pronouns, declen- sion, 38 ; use, 39-42, 44, 6, (3) ; place of, 45, Rules 3, 4, 294,(0, N., 296,3, 4 ; replaced by demonstra- tives, 143 ; after gleid)en, 48; after I)alben, roegen, 223, 1, 2, R. 3 ; omitted with imperative, 269, R. 1. Persons, before things, 45, Rule 2, 296, 5; names of, how declined, 73, 74, 76, 2-7 ; article with names of, 73, 1, 2, 76, 2, 5, 78. Place, advs. of, 187, II.; position in a sentence, 11, 45, Rule 5, 297, 3, and R. 1. Places, proper names of, 72, 76, 1 ; article with, 44, 3. Pluperfect tense, formation, 25, 1; plupf. indicative, use, 260; plupf. subjunc- tive, used for conditional, 263, 267, 2, and R. 4; to express a wish, 268, 2. Plural, see ” Concord,” “ Number,” “ Substan- tives.” Possessive adjs., 43; agree- ment, 43, 5 ; replaced by def. art. , 44, 6. Possessive case, rendered in Germ, by the genitive, 3, 243, 4. Possessive dative, 44, 6, 249. “ pronouns, 119. Possibility, advs. of, 187, VI.; expressed by impf. subj., 268, 5. Predicate, definition of, 292, 1, 295; place of, 295 ; fac- titive pred., 253, 254, 3. Predicative nominative, 242. Predicative adj., not de- clined, 14, 100; place of, 18, 20, O. 3, 295, 3, 296, 8; factitive, 254, 3. Prefixes, of verbs, 203-213, 314; inseparable, 35, R. 6, 109, 204, 207, 208, 209, 212; meaning of, 314 ; separable, 117, 205- 208, 210, 295 ; separable and inseparable, 208; com- pound, 206, 2; double, 207 ; accent of, 204, 205, 3; place of, 117, 295, 3, and N. ; subst. prefixes, 315 ; adj. prefixes, 316. Prepositions, governing accu- sative only, 34, 50 ; dative only, 46, 51 ; dat. or acc., 65 ; genitive, 222, 223 ; contracted with def. art., 34, R., 46, R. 1, p. 83, 0., 65, R. ; general remarks on, 224; joined to advs., 224; governing the infin., 224, 2, (3), 276, 277 ; ; English preps, and their Germ, equivalents, 225- 234 ; place of, 46, 51, 223, 298, 2; after verbs, etc., 291. Present participle ; see “ Participial Construc- tions, English,” and “ Participles.” Present tense, endings, in weak verbs, 35, in strong, 107 ; pres, indicative, 257, 267, R. 5 ; pres, subj., re- places imperative, 268, 1, 269, and R. 2. Preterite, see “ Imperfect.” Primary Form of strong declension, 70, R. 2. Principal assertive sentences, construction, 20, 26, 59, N., 293, (3), 294, (3). 295, 2, 297, R. 1, 2, 301, 2, 302, R., 303. Principal parts of a verb, 28. Progression of mutes, 325. Pronouns, agreement of, 13; place of, 45, 296, 2-4; personal, declension, 38; use of e§, 39; use in ad- dress, 40, 47, 49 ; dative of, replaces poss. adj., 44, 6, (3); reflexive, 41, 42; reciprocal, 42 ; interroga- tive, 81-83 ; relative, 92- 97, place of, 98; posses- sive, 119 ; demonstrative, 132-143 ; indefinite, 145- 157; remarks on, 162. Pronunciation, Introduction, pp. 1-12. Probability, expressed by future, 261, 2 ; by future- perfect, 262. Proper names, declension of, 66, 1, 72-74, 76. Proportional Clauses ; see “ Comparative Clauses.” Purpose, conjs. of, 239, \ 450 INDEX. (b)\ expressed by gu, 229, (a) ; by subj. with bafj, etc., 268, 3 ; by infin. with gu or urn . . . ju, 273, R. 1, 276, 1. Quality, genitive of, 243, 5. Quantity of vowels, pp. 9, 10. Quantity, expressions of, 186. Quarters of the hour, 184, 3, («). Questions, direct, construc- tion of, 23, 293, (a), 1, 294, {a), 295, 2, 300; in- direct or dependent, 88, 293, (c). Question-word, begins sen- tence, 23, O. 2, 293, (a), 1, 294, (*). Reciprocal pronouns, 42. Reflexive pronouns, 41, 42, 44, 6, (3), N. ; used in re- ciprocal sense, 42 ; place of, 294, (c), N. Reflexive verbs, paradigm of, 41 ; for passive, 114, (b) ; use, 214 - 215 ; govern- ment, 216. Relative clauses, replace Engl, part., 284, 2, {a)\ place of, 305, 306, R. 3, and N., R. 4. Relative pronouns, 92-97 ; place of, 98, 294, (c), 305 ; introduce dependent clau- ses, 98 ; not omitted in Germ., 96, 7, O.; concord of, 95, 1, (b), 283, 2, N. Relative superlative, of adjs., 127 ; of advs., 190, 3. Roman numerals, how read in Germ., 166, 2, N. r§, plurals in, 77, 5. *3, suffix of advs., 189, 1, 2, 321, 1, N. ; suffix in subst. compounds, 319, 1, N. 2, 3. *f(tl, substs. in, declension, 22,4; gender, 89, 3, (c) ; subst. suffix, 312, 14. sfatrt, adj. in, superl. of, 190, 5; adj. suffix, 313, 9. famt, 51, 9. sfcfyaft, substs. in, gender, 89, 2, (a ) ; subst. suffix, 312, 15. fdflefjen Model, 123. fdjlagett Model, 186. fdjon, idiomatic use, 195, 6. Script, German, pp. 13-16. feljr, with absolute superl., 127, 2, 190, 4. fein, ‘to be,’ use as auxilia- ry, 25, 4 ; conjugation, 62 ; verbs conjugated with, 53; with past part., 112, R. 5, (b) ; as impersonal, 217, 220; with dat., 250, (e) ; with infin., 272, R. 2 ; omitted in dependent sen- tences, 287. feit, prep., 46, 241, 12, ( a ) ; conj., 239, 241, 12. feitbcm, adv. conj., 237 ; subord. conj., 239, 241, 12, (c). *fel, substs. in, gender, 89, 3, (c); subst. suffix, 312, 14. felber, felbft, 42, 3, and R. felbig, 136, N. felbft; see felber. Sentences, construction of, 292-806 ; essential parts of, 292 ; construction of assertive principal, 20, 26, 59, N., 293, (b) } 294, (b), 295,2, 297, R. 1, 301, 2, 306 ; of dependent, 32, 33, 98, 293, (c), 294, (c), 295, 2; relative, 98, 305, 306, R. 3 and N., R. 4 ; interrogative, 23, 88, 293, («), I, 293, (c), 294, (a), 295, 2,300 ; ex- clamatory, 293, ( b ), R. 3 ; expressing command or wish, 293, ( a ), 2 ; condi- tional, 69, 293, ( a ), 3 ; po- sition of verb in, 293 , ot subject, 294 ; of predicate, 225 ; of objects, etc., 296; of advs., etc., 297 ; of other members, 298; in- verted, 301, N. 1,2 ; com- pound and complex, 202- 306. Separable prefixes, when se- parated, 117 ; place of, 295, 3 and N., 303, 4. ‘ shall,’ how rendered in Germ., 201. Shifting of mutes, 325. ‘ since,’ how rendered in Germ., 241, 12. ftngeu Model, 144. Singular, see “ Concord, “ Substantives.” ‘ so,’ rendered by c5, 39, 3. fo, after conditional and ad- verbial clauses, 69, 239, R. 2, 267, R. 3, 293, (b\ R. 4, N. 1, 2, 294, (b), R. 2; replaces fold) before ein, 138, N. 2 ; adv. conj., 237. fo. . . fo, 241,9. fo ein, followed by tote, 162, 4. fogar, adv. conj., 237, R. 2. ©oljn Model, 21 ; origin of Umlaut in, 326, R. 2, (a). fold)(er), demonstr. pron., 132, 188 ; followed by toie, 162, 4 ; before adjs., 122 , 12 . follen, conjugation, 196-199; use, 200, 5, 201, 202. ‘some,’ how rendered in Germ., 2, 2, 150, 152, 155, 168, 173, 177, 180. fonber, 50, 1. fonbern, 236, R. 1. fott>ol)l . . . al§ (au$), 288; 285, R. 6. INDEX. 45 1 fptnn§n Model, 158. fpredjen Model, 1G7. HI/ 1b P- 5 » i n verbs, 118, R. 2, 123, R. 1, 181, O. 1, 188, R. 3. ftatt, see anjtatt. *ft, subst. suffix, 312, 1. ftefjen, withinfin., 272, R. 2. Stem of verbs, 27. Strong declension; see “ Sub- stantives, declension of.” Strong conjugation ; see “Verbs, conjugation of.” Subject, definition of, 292 ; place of, 294 ; in principal sentences, 20, 59, N. ; in direct questions, 23, O. 1; in dependent sen- tences, 33, N.; inver- sion of, 301, 2, N. i, 2; expressed by nom. case, 3, 242, 1 ; agreement with verb, 285; repetition of, 286. Subjective clause, 306; rela- tive, 306, R. 3. Subjective genitive, 243, 2. Subjunctive Mood, use, 264- 268, for conditional, 111, 263, N. ; in indirect state- ments, 87, 265, 266 ; in indirect questions, 88 ; in hypothetical periods, 239, R. 1, 267 ; for imperative, 31, R. 4, 268, 1, 269; expressing a wish, 268, 2 ; of purpose, 268, 3 ; after a negative, etc., 268, 4; of possibility, 268, 5; origin of Umlaut in impf. subj., 326, ( g ). Substantives, their declen- sion, SJlaler Model, 16, 17; ©obn do., 21, (#), 22, App. C. ; £unb do., 21, (£), 22, App. E. ; £>orf do., 86, 37; Jlnabe, ©raf, 23Iume do., 64-57, App. F. ; Ulame, Sftad&bar, do., 60-63, App. G. ; with double plurals, 64, App. G. # ; Summary and tables, 7 0 ; essential parts, 7 1 ; anomalous, 66-69 ; substs. without plural, 66 ; without sing. ,67 ; of measure, weight and number, 185 ; as verb prefixes, 206, 3, 212; ir- regular compound substs., 68; appositive subst., 289; derivation, by internal change, 310; by suffixes, 312 ; by prefixes, 315 *, composition, 319; see also under “ Accentuation,” “ Compound Substan- tives,” “ Foreign Substan- tives,” “Gender.” Suffixes, of verbs, 311; of substs., 312 ; of adjs., 313. Superlative degree, of adjs., relative, 127, 1; absolute, 127, 2; of advs., 190, 3-7. st, substs. in, gender, 89, 2, (( h ); subst. suffix, 312, 1. stat, foreign substs. in, gen- der, 89, 2, (e). taufenb, 165, 8, and 10, ( c ). teil§ . . . teilS, 238. Tense, in indirect state- ments, 87 ; in indirect questions, 88; auxiliaries of, use, 25, 53 ; place of with auxiliaries of mood, 199, 3. Tenses, simple, how formed in weak verbs, 30 ; in strong, 104-107, 110; endings of, in weak verbs, 35 ; in strong, 107 ; com- pound, how formed, 25, 108 ; construction, 26, 33 ; sequence of tenses in indirect statements and questions not observed in I Germ., 87, 2, 88, 2, 266, 4 ; of the indicative, how used, 257-262 (see also under the various tenses) ; of the conditional, 263, N.; the tense in indirect statements, 87, 2G6 ; in hypothetical periods, 267. Terminations ; see “ End- ings.” * than ’ after the compara- tive, 126, 1,241, 7. ‘that,’ how rendered in Germ., 140. ‘ the . . . the ’ before compa- ratives, 126, 4. * there/ rendered by e§, 39, 1, R. ; ‘ there is, there are/ 220 . ‘they/ indefinite, 145, 146. stl)um; see stum. Time, expressions of, 184; place of, 11, 45, 297, 2, 306, R. 2; advs. of, 187, I. ; English participial con- structions of, how rendered in Germ., 284, (<2); time of day, 184, 3, 285, R. 6, N. 2. Titles of rank, 49 ; 76, 5, 6. ‘ to/ how rendered in Germ., 46, R. 4; 233. Towns, names of, gender, 80, 3, ( c ) ; see also “Places, names of.” Transitive verbs, English, with object unexpressed, rendered by reflexive verbs in Germ., 215, 2; often intrans. in Germ., 250, R. 1, 252, R. Trigraphs, consonantal, pp. 4, 8, 14. tro£, 223, 16, and R. 2. stunt, substs. in, declension, 37 ; gender, 89, 3, (3) ; subst. suffix, 312, 16. fiber, prep., 65 ; after inter- jections, 240, 4, («); after 452 INDEX. verbs, etc., 291, 1; prefix, 208 ; after reflexive verbs, 215, 1. um, prep., 84, 184, 3, ( c ), 226, («), (6), 227, (3), i ; after verbs, 291, 4; go- verning an infin. of pur- pose, 224, 2, (b), 273, 276; prefix, 208. Urn fo, before comparatives, 126, 4, 241, 2, 293, (b), R. 4, N. 3 . [12. um... wittcn, 223, 22, R. 1, Umlaut, pp. 3, 6, 12, 14; in declension of substs., 17, (a), 21, (*), 22, 36, 70, R. 6, App. A., C. ; in subj. mood, 107, O 2; in com- parison of adjs., 125, R. 1, in strong verbs, 186, 188, 192, R. 1 ; in Modal Aux- iliaries, 196, R. 1 ; in deri- vation, 308, N., 309, 311, 1, 2, 312, 2-4, 8, 11-13, 313, 5 ; origin, 326. Ut\s, subst. prefix, 315, 4. unb, 236. unfern, 223, 23. «ung, substs. in, gender, 89, 2, ( a ) ; subst. suffix, 312, 17. ungeadjtet, prep., 223, 15; conj. 239, 3, (3), 241, 21. units, before tens, 165, 7. * unless,’ how rendered in Germ., 241, 18. unten, adv., 189, 3; com- parison, 130. unter, prep., 65; prefix, 208. unterbeffen, adv. conj., 237 ; subord. conj., 239, 3, (3), 241, 15. unterljalb, 223, 6. wmoeit, 223, 24. ur s, subst. prefix, 315, 5. ••ur, substs. in, gender, 89, 2 , (eb rfpra^e, 322. Variative numerals, 182, (^r) . net's, insep.yerb prefix, 35, R. 6, 204 ; meaning, 314, 6. Verb, place of, 20, 32, 33, 87, 2, 88, 2, 266, R. 2, 267, R. 2, 292,293,301; English periphrastic forms of, how rendered in Ger., 31, R. 3; tenses of, 256- 262, 263, 266 (see also under the various tenses) ; moods of, 256-278 (see also under the various moods); concord of, 285; when omitted, 269, R. 6, 287. Verbs, stem of, 27; principal parts of, 28; weak conjuga- tion of, 30, 31 ; endings of simple tenses, 35 ; verbs conjugated with fein, 53 ; neut., of motion, etc., 63 ; irregular weak, 99 ; strong, 103-108, App. L. ; beiften Model, 118; bleiben do., 120; fc^iefjen do., 123 ; feefyten do., 124; frieren do., 131 ; fingen do., 144 ; fpimteit do., 158 ; Ijelfen do., 159; fprecfjcndo., 167; effeu do., 181; fdjlagen do., 186 ; fallen do., 188; table of strong verbs, 192; passive voice, 112-114 ; reflexive verbs, paradigm of, 41 ; use, 214-216; im- personal verbs, 217-220 ; compound verbs, insep., 35, R. 6, 109, 204, 207- 209, 211-213 ; separable, 117, 205-208, 210; auxiliaries of tense, 25, 63 ; irregular strong, 194, 196; auxiliaries of mood, 196-202 ; verbs with two nominatives, 242,2, 3; with genitive, 245 ; with dative, 250; with accusative, 252, 253 ; verbs of choosing, 242, N. ; of calling, con- sidering, 253 ; verbs fol- lowed by the subjunctive, 265 ; by the infin. without JU, 271; with jit, 272; prepositions after, 291 ; derivation of, without change, 308 ; with in- ternal change, 309 ; by suffixes, 311; by prefixes, 314. cermittelft, 223, 9. cermoge, 223, 10. Diet, comparison of, 129 ; indef. pron., 145 ; ir.def. numeral, 168, 176; before adjs., 122, 11, 12. Vocative, 242, 1. coll, prefix, sep. and insep., 208; adj., 244. non, prep., 46, 228, (a), 231, (b), 234; used for genitive, 46, R. 3; with passive voice, 112, R. 3; with names of places, 72, 3, 4; with names of per- sons, 76, 6; replaces geni- tive of quality, 243, 5, N. ; after partitives, 243, 6, N.; after coll, 244 ; after verbs, 245, 2 cor, prep., 65, 184, 3, (b), 234 ; after verbs, etc., 291, 5, 11 ; after reflexive verbs, 215, 1, ( b ). corn, adv., 189, 3; compari- son, 130. Vowels, modified, pp. 3, 6, 12, 14; double, pp. 4, 6, 12, 14; importance of, p. 8, bottom ; long and short, pp. 9, 10; see also “ Um- laut.” toabrenb, prep., 75, 2, 223, 17; conj., 239, 3, (b), 241, 13; replaces Engl, participle of time, 284, 1, (a). watut, 68, 187, I., (d). tcarum, 83, R. 3, N.„ INDEX 453 ttm3, interrog. pron., declen- I sion and use, 83; some- times — * why,’ 83, 6, 162, 3; used for ettua§, 149, 1; relative pron., 92, 96; followed by ba§, 162, 1 ; of a number of persons or things, 162, 2 ; not gov- erned by preps., 83, 3, 96, 7 ; construction of sen- tences with, 98, 3. n>c3 ftir (ein), 86, *we,’ indef., 146. Weak conjugation, see “ Verbs ” ; declension, see “ Substantives,” “ Adjec- tives.” roeber . . . nod), 238. roegen, 75, 1, 223, 2, and R. 3. Weight, expressions of , 185. weil, 239, 3, (*), 241, 17. tueld)er, interrog. pron. and adj., 6, 81, 82, 84,85; in exclamations, 85, 1,2; relative pron., 92, 94, 95; indefinite pron. and num r eral, used for ‘ some,” 145, 155, 180; before adjs., 122, 13. toenig, comparison of, 129; indef. pron., 145; indef. numeral, 168, 176 ; before adjs., 122, 12. tuenn, 58, 239, 3, (£), R. 1- 4, 2G7 ; omission of, 239, R. 2-4, 267, R. 2, 3, 6, N., 293, (a), 3 , R. 4, N. 2, (r), R. 2, 294, (3), R. 2 . wertn au$, rocnn 0lei$,n)enn fdjon, 239, 3, (<$), and R. 3, N. raemt . . . me §t, 239, 3, (b), 241, 18. tuer, interrog. pron., 81, 83; relative pron., 92, 96,135, (b) y N. ; followed by ber, 162, 1; replaced by ber, 306, R. 3, N. ; construc- tion of sentences with, 98, 3. roerben, pres, and impf. of, 19 ; conjugated with feitt, 53, (a); use as auxiliary of tense, 25, 2; as auxili- ary of passive voice, 112, 113; conjugation, 112; as impersonal verb, 217, 2, ( c ); with dat., 250, ( e ). ‘when,’ how rendered in Germ., 58. ‘ whether,’ expressed by tttos gen, 200, 3, (c). ‘ while, whilst,’ how rendered in Germ., 241, 15, ‘ whole,’ how rendered in Germ., 168, 170. tniber, prep., 34 ; prefix, 204. tt)ie, in comparisons, 126, 3, 241, 6, 8; after fold) ein, fo eitt, 162, 4; subord. conj., 239, 3, ( b)\ in com- parative clauses, 306, R. 4, N. tmeber, prefix, 208, N. 2. tmeoielfte, ber, 164, 166, 3, N. 2. * will,’ how rendered in Germ., 201. Wish, expressed by the Sub- junctive, 268, 2; construc- tion of sentences express- ing, 293, {a), 2 . toiffen, 196, and N. 1 . too, 187, II., (c); before preps., replacing interrog. prons., 83, 3, and relative prons., 95, 2, 96, 7. toof)l, comparison of, 190; idiomatic use, 195, 10. tooilett, its conjugation, 196- 199 ; its use, 200, 6, 201, 202 . toorbett, for getoorben, in passive voice, 112, R. 2; when omitted, 112, R. 4. * you,’ how rendered in Ger., 40 ; indef. pron., 146. sjeljtt, in compound num- erals, 165, 5. jer^, insep. prefix, 35, R. 6, 204; meaning, 314, 7. sjig, in numerals, 165, 6. 3U, prep., 46, 227, (a), 4, (b), 2 , (c), 228, (c), 229, (a), 230, (c), 232, (b), 233, (3), ( [c ), 2 , (ii) ; with Infinitive, 272-277; place of, 109, 117, R. 2; with insep. verbs, 205, 2 ; followed by al§ bafj or urn ju, with verbs of choosing, 242, 3, N., 253; after adjs., 244. juerft, 195, 5. jufolge, 223, 11, R. junac^ft, 51, 7. junriber, 51, 3. jiuei, declension of, 165, 2. atoife^en, prep., 65. 1 i I I